M60 Motor Protection System: Grid Solutions

Title Page
GE
Grid Solutions
M60 Motor Protection

System
UR Series Instruction Manual
M60 Revision: 5.8x
Manual P/N: 1601-0108-V2 (GEK-113558A)

Copyright © 2017 GE Multilin Inc.
833711A2.CDR
E83849
S T ER
GI
ED
RE
GE Grid Solutions ISO 9001

G
E
IN
LISTED M U LT I L
650 Markland Street IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
Markham, Ontario
GE Multilin's Quality Management
Canada L6C 0M1 System is registered to
ISO9001:2008
Tel: +1 905 927 7070 Fax: +1 905 927 5098 QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
Internet: http://www.GEGridSolutions.com
*1601-0108-V2*
Addendum
ADDENDUM
This addendum contains information that relates to the M60 Motor Protection System, version 5.8x. This addendum
lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113558A (revision V2) but are not
included in the current M60 operations.
The following functions and items are not yet available with the current version of the M60 relay:
• Signal sources SRC 5 and SRC 6.
Version 4.0x and higher releases of the M60 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules).
• The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S.
• The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J 8L, 8M, 8N, 8R.
The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE OLD NEW DESCRIPTION

CPU 9A 9E RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)
9C 9G RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
9D 9H RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
--- 9J RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX
--- 9K RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
--- 9L RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX
--- 9M RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX
--- 9N RS485 and 10/100Base-T
--- 9P RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX
--- 9R RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX
--- 9S RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch
CT/VT 8A 8F Standard 4CT/4VT
8B 8G Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT
8C 8H Standard 8CT
8D 8J Sensitive ground 8CT
-- 8L Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
-- 8M Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
-- 8N Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
-- 8R Sensitive ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S), and
the old CT/VT modules can only be used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mis-
matches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating “Attn.: Ensure CPU and
DSP module label colors are the same!”. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module,
the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware.
With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT mod-
ules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-5
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-5
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-6
1.3.2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-6
1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE M60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS.................................... 1-8
1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE..................................................... 1-10
1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE M60 RELAY .............................................................. 1-16
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-17
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-17
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-17
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-18
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-18
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-18
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-18
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-19
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-20
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2.1.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.3 REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................................................. 2-7
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 2-10
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-13
2.2.3 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-14
2.2.4 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-14
2.2.5 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-15
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-16
2.2.7 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-16
2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-18
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-19
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-20
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-21
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-21
2.2.13 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-22
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-22
3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-6
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-8
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING............................................................................................ 3-10
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................................................... 3-11
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER ......................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES ............................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES ............................................................................ 3-14
3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ............................................................... 3-14
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS.................................................................3-26

3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ..............................................................................3-27
3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-27
3.2.10 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-31
3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-32
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-35
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-35
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-36
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-39
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-41
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-41
3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-42
3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-45
3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
3.4.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-48
3.4.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE..............................3-48
3.4.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS .........................................................3-49
3.4.4 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE .................3-49
3.4.5 UPLOADING M60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE.........................................3-52
3.4.6 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS...................................................3-54
4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-2
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS ................................4-8
4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-10
4.2.4 AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATOR.......................................................................4-12
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.3.1 FACEPLATE .....................................................................................................4-13
4.3.2 LED INDICATORS............................................................................................4-14
4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-17
4.3.4 DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-23
4.3.5 KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................4-23
4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL ......................................................................................4-23
4.3.7 MENUS .............................................................................................................4-24
4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-26
5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 SECURITY..........................................................................................................5-8
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ..................................................................................5-12
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-14
5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-15
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-38
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-39
5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT....................................................5-40
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-41
5.2.9 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-43
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-44
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-47
5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-48
vi M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-49

5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 5-54
5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ....................................................................... 5-55
5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ........................................................................... 5-57
5.2.17 TELEPROTECTION......................................................................................... 5-65
5.2.18 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-65
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES
5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-67
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4.1 AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-68
5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM............................................................................................ 5-69
5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 5-70
5.4.4 MOTOR............................................................................................................ 5-72
5.4.5 BREAKERS...................................................................................................... 5-75
5.4.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES ............................................................................. 5-79
5.4.7 FLEXCURVES™.............................................................................................. 5-82
5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™ ............................................................... 5-89
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES .................................................................................... 5-99
5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION.......................................................................... 5-99
5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE ............................................................................. 5-100
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................. 5-104
5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS................................................................................. 5-104
5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS™ ....................................................................................... 5-105
5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ........................................................................... 5-109
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-110
5.6.2 SETTING GROUP ......................................................................................... 5-110
5.6.3 MOTOR.......................................................................................................... 5-111
5.6.4 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL .............................................................................. 5-140
5.6.5 POWER.......................................................................................................... 5-143
5.6.6 PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-149
5.6.7 NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-155
5.6.8 GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-160
5.6.9 BREAKER FAILURE ...................................................................................... 5-168
5.6.10 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-177
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-185
5.7.2 TRIP BUS....................................................................................................... 5-185
5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-187
5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-188
5.7.5 UNDERFREQUENCY.................................................................................... 5-194
5.7.6 OVERFREQUENCY ...................................................................................... 5-195
5.7.7 MOTOR START SUPERVISION ................................................................... 5-196
5.7.8 REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING ................................................................ 5-199
5.7.9 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-201
5.7.10 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-205
5.7.11 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-207
5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-217
5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-219
5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-220
5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-222
5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-223
5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-224
5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS .............................................. 5-225
5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-225
5.8.9 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-226
5.8.10 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................. 5-227
5.8.11 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS.............................................. 5-230
5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS...................................................................... 5-232
5.8.13 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS..................................................................... 5-234
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-235
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.9.2 RTD INPUTS ..................................................................................................5-236

5.9.3 RRTD INPUTS................................................................................................5-238
5.9.4 DCMA OUTPUTS ...........................................................................................5-242
5.10 TESTING
5.10.1 TEST MODE ...................................................................................................5-246
5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS...........................................................................5-247
5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS.......................................................................5-248
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 MOTOR ..............................................................................................................6-3
6.2.2 CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................................6-3
6.2.3 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-4
6.2.4 REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-4
6.2.5 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...................................................6-4
6.2.6 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS .............................................................................6-5
6.2.7 CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................................6-5
6.2.8 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................6-6
6.2.9 REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................6-6
6.2.10 DIGITAL COUNTERS.........................................................................................6-7
6.2.11 SELECTOR SWITCHES ....................................................................................6-7
6.2.12 FLEX STATES ....................................................................................................6-8
6.2.13 ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-8
6.2.14 DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-8
6.2.15 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS ..............................................................................6-9
6.2.16 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .........................................................................6-9
6.2.17 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS................................................................................6-9
6.2.18 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS...........................................................6-10
6.2.19 ETHERNET SWITCH .......................................................................................6-11
6.3 METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-12
6.3.2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL.................................................................................6-15
6.3.3 MOTOR ............................................................................................................6-15
6.3.4 SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-16
6.3.5 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ...............................................................6-19
6.3.6 BROKEN ROTOR BAR ....................................................................................6-20
6.3.7 TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-21
6.3.8 FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................6-21
6.3.9 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-22
6.3.10 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................6-22
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS .................................................6-23
6.4.2 STARTING RECORDS.....................................................................................6-23
6.4.3 MOTOR LEARNED DATA ................................................................................6-24
6.4.4 EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-25
6.4.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-26
6.4.6 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-26
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-27
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-27
7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

TARGETS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-2
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-3
viii M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU............................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES ....................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS......................................................................................... 7-4
8. SECURITY 8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

8.1.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2 PASSWORD SECURITY MENU ....................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 LOCAL PASSWORDS ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 REMOTE PASSWORDS ................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.5 ACCESS SUPERVISION ................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.6 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS ....................................................... 8-4
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY
8.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES ................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS ............................. 8-10
8.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY .................................................................... 8-12
8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8.3.1 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.2 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................. 8-15
8.3.3 ADDING A NEW USER ................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.4 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES ................................................................... 8-16
9. THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1 SATURATION DETECTOR

9.1.1 CT SATURATION DETECTION ........................................................................ 9-1
10. COMMISSIONING 10.1 TESTING

10.1.1 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENTS....... 10-1
A. FLEXANALOG AND A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

FLEXINTEGER A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS .......................................................................................A-1
A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS ....................................................................................A-11
PARAMETERS
B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

COMMUNICATIONS B.1.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-2
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS ........................................................B-6
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ...............................................................B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP .................................................................................B-8
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS .............................................................................................B-67
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C. IEC 61850 C.1 OVERVIEW

COMMUNICATIONS C.1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... C-1
C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES ......................................................................... C-1
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
C.2.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-2
C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES ................................................................. C-2
C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES.............................................................. C-2
C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE
DATAC-2
C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES......................................... C-2
C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .......................................................... C-3
C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES............................................... C-3
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING........................................................ C-5
C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER ............................................................................................... C-5
C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING ....................................................................... C-5
C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME ................................................................................. C-5
C.3.5 LOCATION ........................................................................................................ C-5
C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES.................................................................. C-6
C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING ..................................................................................... C-6
C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA ...................................................................................... C-6
C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES..................................................... C-6
C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
C.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-7
C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. C-7
C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE .................................................................................................. C-7
C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE ................................................................................ C-7
C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE .......................................... C-9
C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................ C-10
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
C.5.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... C-11
C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS .......................................................... C-12
C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES .......................................................................................... C-13
C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP.............................. C-17
C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES ......................................................................................... C-17
C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP........................... C-20
C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE
C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ................................................ C-22
C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................ C-22
C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ......................................... C-23
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE ............................................................................... C-26
D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT................................................................... D-1
D.1.2 POINT LIST ....................................................................................................... D-9
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................................... E-1
E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .............................................................................. E-4
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS ................................................................................... E-8
E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT...................................................... E-9
E.2.3 COUNTERS..................................................................................................... E-10
E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................ E-11
x M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
F. MISCELLANEOUS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE M60 MANUAL ................................................................... F-2
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-6
F.3 WARRANTY
F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ............................................................................... F-8
INDEX
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS
xii M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay. 1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury, equipment
damage, or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
CAUTION injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
NOTICE
a) GENERAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
DANGER and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage termi-
nals.
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings, voltage,
current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage input match the ratings specified
on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety cau-
tions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to
such equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are iso-
lated, unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are
working on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
Personal safety can be affected if the product is physically modified by the end user. Modifications to the product
outside of recommended wiring configuration, hardware, or programming boundaries is not recommended end-
use practice. Product disassembly and repairs are not permitted. All service needs to be conducted by the factory.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System 1-1

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES 1 GETTING STARTED
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M.
1 CAUTION Class 1M devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
1. Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
2. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
Model: M60F00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
M60 Motor Management Relay RATINGS:

Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
000
833713A3
GEK-113277
MAZB98000029
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break Firmware: D
GE Multilin 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W Mfg. Date: 2005/01/05
Technical Support:
Made in
Tel: (905) 294-6222 http://www.GEmultilin.com ®
®
Canada
Fax: (905) 201-2098 - M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
833722A1.CDR
Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

3. Ensure that the following items are included:
• Instruction manual.
• GE EnerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format).
• Mounting screws.
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Grid Solutions
website.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, contact GE Multilin immedi-
ately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
TELEPHONE: Worldwide +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free 1 800 547 8629
FAX: +1 905 927 5098
E-MAIL: Worldwide multilin.tech@ge.com
Europe multilin.tech.euro@ge.com
HOME PAGE: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
1-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
1
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the single-
function approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxil-
iary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equip-
ment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and aux-
iliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using elec-
tronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and moni-
toring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3
milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control sys-
tems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
1 a) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
Input Elements CPU Module Output Elements

Contact Inputs Protective Elements Contact Outputs
Virtual Inputs Pickup Virtual Outputs
Dropout
Input Output
Analog Inputs Operate Analog Outputs
CT Inputs Status Status Remote Outputs
VT Inputs Table Logic Gates Table -DNA
-USER
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs Direct Outputs
LAN
Programming Operator
Device Interface
827822A2.CDR
Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as program-
mable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and ‘dry’
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize
the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic™ equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detec-
tors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series
devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic™
operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a
dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are con-
nected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilot-
aided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the
logic program (FlexLogic™ equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any
1
resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
PKP
Solve Logic DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 1–3: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as “a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data”. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instanta-
neous overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent
completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control,
hmi, communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the M60 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture:
modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection,
transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This
results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understand-
ing of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in
“elements”. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to elements section in chapter 5.
Examples of simple elements, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Control elements section of
chapter 5. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC sources section in chapter 5. A
description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section
in chapter 5.

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
1 The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC
monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.
• Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
• Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
• Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher
• 128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
• 200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive
• Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color)
• RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the M60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software.
• US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
• US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
• PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following
procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
1. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
5. In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the “M60 Motor Protection System”
from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release,
or select “CD” if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the M60. 1
6. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation program.
7. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed.
8. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.
9. Click Finish to end the installation. The UR-series device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.

1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE M60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS
1 a) OVERVIEW
The user can connect remotely to the M60 through the rear RS485 port or the rear Ethernet port with a PC running the
EnerVista UR Setup software. The M60 can also be accessed locally with a laptop computer through the front panel RS232
port or the rear Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.
• To configure the M60 for remote access via the rear RS485 port(s), refer to the Configuring Serial Communications
section.
• To configure the M60 for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, refer to the Configuring Ethernet Communications
section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering.
• To configure the M60 for local access with a laptop through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, refer to
the Using the Quick Connect Feature section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering for Ether-
net communications.
b) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device. The
faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is not described in this section; see the Using the Quick Connect Feature
section for details on configuring the RS232 port.
A GE Multilin F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is will be required. Refer to the F485 instruction
manual for additional details.
1. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or
online from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin). See the Software Installation section for installation details.
2. Select the “UR” device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4. Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Location 1” as the site name. Click
the OK button when complete.
5. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then
select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7. Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.

8. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper serial communications.
1
Figure 1–4: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

9. Enter the relay slave address, COM port, baud rate, and parity settings from the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COM-
MUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS menu in their respective fields.
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the M60 device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step corre-
spond to the relay setting values.
11. Click “OK” when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the M60 section to
begin communications.
c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
3. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4. Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Location 2” as the site name. Click
the OK button when complete.
5. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then
select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7. Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.

8. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
1 entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
Figure 1–5: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

9. Enter the relay IP address specified in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP
ADDRESS) in the “IP Address” field.
10. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the SETTINGS  PROD-
UCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the M60 device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay
setting values.
12. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the M60 section to
begin communications.
1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE
a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the laptop computer to the front panel RS232 port
with a straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable.

3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
4. Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect.
5. The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly
from the M60 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communica-
tions to the M60. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the M60 model number.
b) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS

To use the Quick Connect feature to access the M60 from a laptop through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the relay
from the front panel keyboard.
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed.
2. Navigate to the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting.
3. Enter an IP address of “1.1.1.1” and select the ENTER key to save the value.
4. In the same menu, select the SUBNET IP MASK setting.
5. Enter a subnet IP address of “255.0.0.0” and press the ENTER key to save the value.
Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the laptop to the rear Ethernet port. The pinout for an Ethernet cross-
over cable is shown below.
4 5 6
3 END 1 END 2
2 7 Pin Wire color Diagram Pin Wire color Diagram
1 8 1 White/orange 1 White/green
2 Orange 2 Green
3 White/green 3 White/orange
4 Blue 4 Blue
5 White/blue 5 White/blue
6 Green 6 Orange
7 White/brown 7 White/brown
8 Brown 8 Brown
842799A1.CDR
Figure 1–6: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT

Now, assign the laptop computer an IP address compatible with the relay’s IP address.

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con-
1 nections window.
2. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
3. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4. Click on the “Use the following IP address” box.

5. Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the M60 relay and the last number dif-
ferent (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6. Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the M60 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
1
7. Click OK to save the values.
Before continuing, it will be necessary to test the Ethernet connection.
1. Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing “cmd”.
2. Type the following command:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3. If the connection is successful, the system will return four replies as follows:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
4. Note that the values for time and TTL will vary depending on local network configuration.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Verify the physical connection between the M60 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Verify the physical connection between the M60 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure.

1 Destination
Destination
host
host
unreachable.
unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Verify the IP address is programmed in the local PC by entering the ipconfig command in the command window.
C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\WINNT>
It may be necessary to restart the laptop for the change in IP address to take effect (Windows 98 or NT).
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, it is necessary to disable any configured proxy settings
in Internet Explorer.
1. Start the Internet Explorer software.
2. Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click on Connections tab.
3. Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4. Ensure that the “Use a proxy server for your LAN” box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been discon-
nected from the M60 relay.
1. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE enerVista CD or
2. Start the Internet Explorer software.

4. Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box. 1
5. Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the M60, then click Connect.
6. The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly
from the M60 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communica-
tions to the M60. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the M60 model number.
When direct communications with the M60 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con-
nections window.
2. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4. Set the computer to “Obtain a relay address automatically” as shown below.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been discon-
nected from the M60 relay.
AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES
The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an Ether-
net network.
Using the Quick Connect feature, a single click of the mouse will trigger the software to automatically detect any UR-series
relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software will then proceed to configure all settings and order code
options in the Device Setup menu, for the purpose of communicating to multiple relays. This feature allows the user to
identify and interrogate, in seconds, all UR-series devices in a particular location.

1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE M60 RELAY
1 1. Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
Quick action hot links
Expand the site list by double-clicking

or selecting the +/– box.
Communications status indicators:

Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2. The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
3. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4. The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
See chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the EnerV-
ista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE
QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS

The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to several
functions that are often performed when using M60 relays. From the online window, users can select which relay to interro-
gate from a pull-down window, then click on the button for the action they wish to perform. The following quick action func-
tions are available:
• View the M60 event record.
• View the last recorded oscillography record.
• View the status of all M60 inputs and outputs.
• View all of the M60 metering values.
• View the M60 protection summary.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
1
carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ether-
net ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male
end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described
in the CPU communications ports section of chapter 3.
Figure 1–7: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate through the M60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the M60 rear communications port. The converter termi-
nals (+, –, GND) are connected to the M60 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU communica-
tions ports section in chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 Ω, 1 nF)
as described in the chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting condi-
tions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad
and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
1 Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alterna-
tively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may
be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading
pages:
• Actual values.
• Settings.
• Commands.
• Targets.
• User displays (when enabled).
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, contin-
ually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
 SETTINGS  PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL:

 PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY Restricted
 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is defaulted to the “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Ser-
vice LED off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the “Programmed” state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
To put the relay in the “Programmed” state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The faceplate
Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer
to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup 1
software interface.
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
• change state of virtual inputs
• clear event records
• clear oscillography records
• operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
See the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE 1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the Flex-
Logic™ section in Chapter 5 for additional details.

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
1 The M60 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. Since the M60 is a micropro-
cessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required.
Furthermore, the M60 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors
(see the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that M60 maintenance be scheduled
with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
In-service maintenance:
1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the cor-
responding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. LED test.
4. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance:
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated
test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay
settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:
1. View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for prompt service.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The M60 Motor Protection System is a microprocessor based relay designed for the protection and management of
medium and large sized motors.
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection, thermal overload, fault diagnostics, and RTU functions are provided. The M60
provides phase, neutral, ground and negative sequence, instantaneous and time overcurrent protection. The time overcur-
rent function provides multiple curve shapes or FlexCurve™ for optimum co-ordination.
The relay also features an enhanced thermal model with custom curves, current unbalance biasing, and running and
2
stopped exponential cooling curves. An optional RTD module allows for the thermal model RTD bias function. Motor start
and supervision functions include starts per hour, time between starts, restart time, acceleration time, emergency restart,
and start inhibit. Sensitive directional power, mechanical jam, and current unbalance elements are also included as stan-
dard functions. Additional functions that are not part of the standard M60 element set can be easily configured and imple-
mented using the FlexElement™ and FlexLogic™ functionality.
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total
waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of storing
up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and data logger acquisition of up to 16 channels,
with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-
B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be
determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography
data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal
computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a sys-
tem fault.
A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual val-
ues. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers
with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules
include a 10Base-F Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.
Another option provides two 10Base-F fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus®/
TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (M60 web pages). The IEC 60870-
5-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time.
The M60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single
line diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.
Table 2–1: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

DEVICE FUNCTION DEVICE FUNCTION
NUMBER NUMBER
27P Phase Undervoltage 51G Ground Time Overcurrent
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage 59N Neutral Overvoltage
32 Sensitive Directional Power 59P Phase Overvoltage
37 Undercurrent 59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
37P Underpower 59_2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
46 Current Unbalance 66 Starts Per Hour, Time Between Starts
47 Phase Sequence Voltage 67N Neutral Directional Overcurrent
49 Thermal Overload 67P Phase Directional Overcurrent
50BF Breaker Failure 81O Overfrequency
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 81U Underfrequency
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 87S Stator Differential
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent --- Mechanical Jam

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

7ULS &ORVH 1 3 3 B
2 * *
8 2
3 3 %) 3 1 1 1%)
0HWHULQJ
6
00RWRU3URWHFWLRQ6\VWHP
$'&'5
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION
Breaker Control FlexLogic™ Equations Setting Groups (6)
Broken Rotor Bar Detection IEC 61850 Communications (optional) Time Synchronization over SNTP
Contact Inputs (up to 96) Metering: Current, Voltage, Power, and Transducer Inputs/Outputs
Frequency
Contact Outputs (up to 96) Trip Bus
Control Pushbuttons Modbus Communications Two-Speed Motor
Current Unbalance Modbus User Map User Definable Displays
Digital Counters (8) Motor learned data User Programmable Fault Report
Digital Elements (48) Non-Volatile Latches User Programmable LEDs
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32) Non-Volatile Selector Switch User Programmable Pushbuttons
Disconnect Switches Oscillography User Programmable Self-Tests
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol Reduced Voltage Starting Virtual Inputs (64)
Ethernet Global Data Protocol (optional) Remote RTD Protection Virtual Outputs (96)
Event Recorder RTD Inputs VT Fuse Failure
FlexElements™ (16) RTD Protection

2.1.2 ORDERING
a) OVERVIEW
The M60 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit and consists of the following mod-
ules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay communications.
Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information
required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).
Order codes are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest ordering options. 2
NOTE
The order code structure is dependent on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules (regu-
lar CT/VT modules or the HardFiber modules). The order code options are described in the following sub-sections.

b) ORDER CODES WITH TRADITIONAL CTS AND VTS

The order codes for the horizontal mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
Table 2–3: M60 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)

M60 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P ** - U ** - W/X ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT M60 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU E | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and RS485
J | | | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
K | | | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
2
N | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and 10/100Base-T
S | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch (four 100Base-FX and two 100Base-T)
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | | No Software Options
01 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
03 | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
04 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
28 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection
29 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection and Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
30 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
31 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
MOUNT/COATING H | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
A | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY C | | | | | | | English display
D | | | | | | | French display
R | | | | | | | Russian display
A | | | | | | | Chinese display
P | | | | | | | English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
G | | | | | | | French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
S | | | | | | | Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
B | | | | | | | Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
K | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
(redundant supply must H | | | | | SH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
be same type as main supply) L | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
L | | | | | SL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
CT/VT MODULES 8F | 8F | | | Standard 4CT/4VT
8G | 8G | | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
8H | 8H | | | Standard 8CT
8J | 8J | | | Sensitive Ground 8CT
8L | 8L | | | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8M | 8M | | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8N | 8N | | | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
8R | 8R | | | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D 4D 4D 4D 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
4L 4L 4L 4L 4L 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 67 67 67 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 16 digital inputs
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6N 6N 6N 6N 6N 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6R 6R 6R 6R 6R 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6T 6T 6T 6T 6T 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6U 6U 6U 6U 6U 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6V 6V 6V 6V 6V 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching output, 8 digital inputs
TRANSDUCER 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD inputs
(select a maximum of 3 per unit) 5D 5D 5D 5D 5D 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E 5E 5E 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
5F 5F 5F 5F 5F 8 dcmA inputs
INTER-RELAY 2A 2A C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
COMMUNICATIONS 2B 2B C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit) 2E 2E Bi-phase, single channel
2F 2F Bi-phase, dual channel
2G 2G IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
2H 2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 2S Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
| 2T Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC)
72 72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
74 74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
76 76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7E 7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
7F 7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G 7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L 7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M 7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N 7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P 7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7Q 7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
7R 7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S 7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T 7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W 7W RS422, 2 Channels

The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below.
Table 2–4: M60 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)

M60 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P/R ** Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
BASE UNIT M60 | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU E | | | | | | | | RS485 and RS485
J | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
K | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
N | | | | | | | | RS485 and 10/100Base-T
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | No Software Options
01 | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
03 | | | | | | | IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
04
28
29
30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
Broken rotor bar detection
Broken rotor bar detection and Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
Broken rotor bar detection and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
2
31 | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
MOUNT/COATING V | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
B | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY F | | | | | English display
D | | | | | French display
R | | | | | Russian display
A | | | | | Chinese display
K | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
CT/VT MODULES 8F | 8F | Standard 4CT/4VT
8G | 8G | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
8H | 8H | Standard 8CT
8J | 8J | Sensitive Ground 8CT
8L | 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8M | 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8N | 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
8R | 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A 4A 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B 4B 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C 4C 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D 4D 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
4L 4L 4L 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 67 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 6A 6A 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6B 6B 6B 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D 6D 16 digital inputs
6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L 6L 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6M 6M 6M 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6N 6N 6N 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6P 6P 6P 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6R 6R 6R 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6S 6S 6S 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6T 6T 6T 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6U 6U 6U 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6V 6V 6V 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching output, 8 digital inputs
TRANSDUCER 5A 5A 5A 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD inputs
(select a maximum of 3 per unit) 5D 5D 5D 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs
5F 5F 5F 8 dcmA inputs
INTER-RELAY 2A C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
COMMUNICATIONS 2B C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit) 2E Bi-phase, single channel
For the last module, slot P is used for digital and transducer 2F Bi-phase, dual channel
2G IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay
2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
communications modules. 72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels

c) ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES

The order codes for the horizontal mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 2–5: M60 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
M60 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P ** - U ** - W/X ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT M60 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU E | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and RS485
J | | | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
K | | | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
2
N | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and 10/100Base-T
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | | No Software Options
01 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
03 | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
04 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
28 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection
29 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection and Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
30 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
31 | | | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
MOUNT/COATING H | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
A | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY C | | | | | | | English display
D | | | | | | | French display
R | | | | | | | Russian display
A | | | | | | | Chinese display
P | | | | | | | English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
G | | | | | | | French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
S | | | | | | | Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
B | | | | | | | Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
K | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
(redundant supply must H | | | | | SH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
be same type as main supply) L | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
L | | | | | SL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
PROCESS BUS MODULE | 81 | | | | Eight-port digital process bus module
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D | 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
4L 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6B 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6C 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D | 16 digital inputs
6E 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6F 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6H 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6K 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6M 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6N 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6P 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6R 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6S 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6T 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6U 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6V 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching output, 8 digital inputs
INTER-RELAY 2A 2A C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
COMMUNICATIONS 2B 2B C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit) 2E 2E Bi-phase, single channel
2F 2F Bi-phase, dual channel
2G 2G IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
2H 2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
74 74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
76 76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7E 7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
7F 7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G 7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L 7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M 7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N 7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P 7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7Q 7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
7R 7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S 7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T 7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W 7W RS422, 2 Channels

The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 2–6: M60 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
M60 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P/R ** Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
BASE UNIT M60 | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU E | | | | | | | | RS485 and RS485
J | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
K | | | | | | | | RS485, multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-T
N | | | | | | | | RS485 and 10/100Base-T
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | No Software Options
01 | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
03 | | | | | | | IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
04
28
29
30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
Broken rotor bar detection
Broken rotor bar detection and Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs
Broken rotor bar detection and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
2
31 | | | | | | | Broken rotor bar detection, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs
MOUNT/COATING V | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
B | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY F | | | | | English display
D | | | | | French display
R | | | | | Russian display
A | | | | | Chinese display
K | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
PROCESS BUS MODULE | 81 | | Eight-port digital process bus module
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX No Module
4A 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
4L 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6B 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6C 8 Form-C outputs
6D 16 digital inputs
6E 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6F 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6H 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6K 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6M 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6N 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6P 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6R 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
6S 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
6T 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
6U 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
6V 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching output, 8 digital inputs
INTER-RELAY 2A C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
COMMUNICATIONS 2B C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit) 2E Bi-phase, single channel
For the last module, slot P is used for digital 2F Bi-phase, dual channel
2G IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay
2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
communications modules. 72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
2.1.3 REPLACEMENT MODULES
Replacement modules can be ordered separately as shown below. When ordering a replacement CPU module or face-
plate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the M60 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are
available as replacement modules.
NOTE
Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest
ordering options.

The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below.
Table 2–7: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS

UR - ** - *
POWER SUPPLY | SH A 125 / 300 V AC/DC
redundant supply only available in horizontal units
and must be same type as main supply, for example
| SL H 24 to 48 V (DC only)
must swap both power supplies when switching from
RH to SH
CPU | 9E | RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
| 9J | RS485, multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0), and 10/100Base-T
2
| 9K | RS485, multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0), and 10/100Base-T
| 9N | RS485 and 10/100Base-T
| 9S | RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch (four 100Base-FX and two 100Base-T)
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY | 3C | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display
| 3D | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display
| 3R | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display
| 3A | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
| 3P | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
| 3G | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
| 3S | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
| 3B | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
| 3K | Enhanced front panel with English display
| 3M | Enhanced front panel with French display
| 3Q | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
| 3U | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
| 3L | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3N | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3T | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3V | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS | 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
| 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
| 4D | 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
| 6D | 16 digital inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
CT/VT
MODULES | 8F | Standard 4CT/4VT
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
| 8G | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
| 8H | Standard 8CT
| 8J | Sensitive Ground 8CT
| 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 2E | Bi-phase, single channel
| 2F | Bi-phase, dual channel
| 2G | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 2H | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 2S | Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC)
| 2T | Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC)
| 72 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7A | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7B | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER | 5A | 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 5C | 8 RTD inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
| 5F | 8 dcmA inputs

The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below.
Table 2–8: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS

UR - ** - *
POWER SUPPLY | SH B 125 / 300 V AC/DC
| SL | 24 to 48 V (DC only)
CPU | 9E | RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0)
| 9J | RS485, multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0), and 10/100Base-T
| 9K | RS485, multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0), and 10/100Base-T
| 9N | RS485 and 10/100Base-T
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY | 3F | Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display
| 3D | Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display
|
|
|
|
3R
3K
3K
3M
|
|
|
|
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display
Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
2
| 3Q | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
| 3U | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
| 3L | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3N | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3T | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3V | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
DIGITAL | 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
| 4D | 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
| 6D | 16 digital inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs
| 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs
CT/VT
MODULES | 8F | Standard 4CT/4VT
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
| 8G | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
| 8H | Standard 8CT
| 8J | Sensitive Ground 8CT
| 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 2E | Bi-phase, single channel
| 2F | Bi-phase, dual channel
| 2G | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 2H | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7A | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7B | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER | 5A | 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 5C | 8 RTD inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
| 5F | 8 dcmA inputs

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indi-
cated. FlexLogic™ operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
NOTE FlexLogic™ to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic™ equations, or
2 interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
THERMAL MODEL GROUND TOC
Thermal overload curves: standard curve (Motor), FlexCurve™, Current: Phasor or RMS
standard curve (Motor) with voltage Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
dependent function, IEC curve
Dropout level: 97% to 98% of pickup
Standard curve (motor) time multiplier: 0.00 to 16.00 in steps of
Level accuracy:
0.01
for 0.1 to 2.0 × CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
FlexCurve™ and IEC curve time multiplier: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps (whichever is greater)
of 0.01
for > 2.0 × CT: ±1.5% of reading > 2.0 × CT rating
Thermal overload pickup: pu = overload factor × FLA
Curve shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Overload factor (OF): 1.00 to 1.50 in steps of 0.01
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Motor full load current (FLA): 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Standard overload curve, cutoff effect: Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™
TD × 2.2116623 (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
t trip = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 base curve)
I I motor
0.02530337 ×  -------------- – 1 + 0.05054758 ×  -------------- – 1
motor
 FLA   FLA  Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Standard overload curve, shift effect:
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
TD × 2.2116623 Timing accuracy: Operate at > 1.03 × actual pickup
t trip = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
 I motor   I motor  ±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle
0.02530337 × ------------------------- – 1 + 0.05054758 × ------------------------- – 1
 OF × FLA   OF × FLA  (whichever is greater)
Motor rated voltage: 1 to 50000 V in steps of 1 PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Thermal model biasing: current unbalance, RTDs Current: Phasor only
Thermal model update rate: 2 power cycles Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Thermal capacity level accuracy: ±1% Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Stopped/running time cool constants: 1 to 65000 min. in steps of 1 Level accuracy:
Stopped/running time cool constants decay: exponential 0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
Hot/cold safe stall ratio: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01 (whichever is greater)
Current accuracy: per phase current inputs > 2.0 × CT rating ±1.5% of reading
Current source: true RMS Overreach: <2%
Timing accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2%, whichever is greater Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Timing accuracy for voltage dependent overload: Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
±100 ms or ±4%, whichever is greater Operate time: <16 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz
(Phase/Ground IOC)
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
<20 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz
Pickup: 0.050 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01
(Neutral IOC)
Slope 1 and 2: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
Timing accuracy: Operate at 1.5 × pickup
Break 1: 1.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01 ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
Break 2: 1.50 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
Operate time: <¾ cycle at Idiff > 5 × pickup

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT ACCELERATION TIME

Relay connection: 90° (quadrature) Acceleration current: 1.00 to 10.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
Quadrature voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase Acceleration time: 0.00 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
B (VCA), phase C (VAB); ACB phase Operating mode: Definite Time, Adaptive
seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC),
Timing accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total time (which-
phase C (VBA)
ever is greater)
Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu
Characteristic angle: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
(whichever is greater) at 0.1 to 2.0 × CT
rating; ±1.5% of reading at >2.0 × CT rat- 2
Angle accuracy: ±2° ing
Operation time (FlexLogic™ operands): UNDERPOWER
Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):< Operation: three-phase apparent power
12 ms, typically
Number of elements: 2, alarm and trip stages in each element
Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):<
Pickup level: 0.05 to 2.00 pu in steps of 0.01
8 ms, typically
Pickup level accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT Hysteresis: 3%
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Polarizing: Voltage, Current, Dual
Time accuracy: ±3% or ±10 ms, whichever is greater
Polarizing voltage: V_0 or VX
Operate time: <35 ms at 60 Hz
Polarizing current: IG
Operating current: I_0 UNDERCURRENT
Operation: per-phase current
Level sensing: 3 × (|I_0| – K × |I_1|), IG
Number of elements: one with 2 stages, alarm and trip
Restraint, K: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
Characteristic angle: –90 to 90° in steps of 1 Pickup level: 0.10 to 0.95 × FLA in steps of 0.01
Limit angle: 40 to 90° in steps of 1, independent for Pickup level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
(whichever is greater) at 0.1 to 2.0 × CT
forward and reverse
rating; ±1.5% of reading at >2.0 × CT rat-
Angle accuracy: ±2°
ing
Offset impedance: 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Dropout level: 102 to 103% of pickup
Dropout level: 97 to 98%
Operation time: < 16 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz
Pickup time: <55 ms at 60 Hz
AMP UNBALANCE SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
Average and full load amps: RMS
Measured power: 3-phase, true RMS
I_1 and I_2 amps: phasor
Number of stages: 2
Pickup level: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1
Characteristic angle: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
Calibration angle: 0.00 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05
Level accuracy: ±0.1
Minimum power: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Pickup level accuracy: ±1% or ±0.001 pu, whichever is greater
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Hysteresis: 2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater
Operate time: <20 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
MECHANICAL JAM Operate time: 50 ms
Operating condition: Phase overcurrent
Arming condition: Motor not starting
Pickup level: 1.00 to 10.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
Level accuracy: at 0.1 to 2.0 × CT: ±0.5% of reading
at > 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.5% of reading
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE

Voltage: Phasor only Pickup level: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Dropout level: 102 to 103% of pickup Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse; Reset delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Definite Time (0.1s base curve) Time accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
2 Curve multiplier: Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
Timing accuracy: Operate at < 0.90 × pickup

MOTOR START SUPERVISION
Maximum no. of starts: 1 to 16 in steps of 1
±3.5% of operate time or ±4 ms (which-
ever is greater) Monitored time interval: 1 to 300 minutes in steps of 1
Operate time: <30 ms at 0.9 pickup at 60 Hz for Defi- Time between starts: 0 to 300 minutes in steps of 1
nite Time mode Restart delay: 0 to 50000 seconds in steps of 1
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE UNDERFREQUENCY
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Minimum signal: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
Dropout level: 102 to 103% of pickup Pickup level: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Dropout level: pickup + 0.03 Hz
Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time Level accuracy: ±0.001 Hz
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Time delay: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms Timer accuracy: ±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
(whichever is greater) Operate time: typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
Operate time: <30 ms at 0.9 pickup at 60 Hz for Defi- typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change
nite Time mode typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE Typical times are average operate times including variables such
as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may vary by
Voltage: Phasor only
±0.5 cycles.
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup OVERFREQUENCY
Pickup level: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Dropout level: pickup – 0.03 Hz
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s
Level accuracy: ±0.001 Hz
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
Time delay: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
Timer accuracy: ±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE Operate time: typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Typical times are average operate times including variables such
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may vary by
time) or user-defined curve ±0.5 cycles.
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 BREAKER FAILURE
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms (whichever is greater) Mode: 1-pole, 3-pole
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz Current supervision: phase, neutral current
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE Current supv. pickup: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Current supv. dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup Current supv. accuracy:
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.75% of reading or ±2% of rated
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (whichever is greater)
Reset delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 above 2 × CT rating: ±2.5% of reading
Timing accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING
(whichever is greater) Mode: current only, current and timer, current or
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz timer
Transition level: 25 to 300% of FLA in steps of 1
Timer: 1.0 to 600.0 seconds in steps of 0.1
Timing accuracy: ±50 ms

RTD PROTECTION RRTD COMMUNICATION FAILURE

Pickup: 1 to 249°C in steps of 1 Pickup level: no communications
Dropout level: 2°C of pickup Time delay: ≈10 s
Timing accuracy: <1 s TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC™)
Elements: trip and alarm Number of elements: 6
REMOTE RTD PROTECTION Number of inputs: 16
Pickup level: 1 to 200°C Operate time: <2 ms at 60 Hz
Dropout level: 2°C of pickup Time accuracy: ±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater 2
Time delay: <10 s
Elements: trip and alarm
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC™ USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs

Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical Number: 48 plus trip and alarm
visualization (keypad programmable) Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or vir-
Lines of code: 512 tual input
Internal variables: 64 Reset mode: self-reset or latched
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 LED TEST
to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
Initiation: from any digital input or user-program-
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-domi-
mable condition
nant), edge detectors, timers
Number of tests: 3, interruptible at any time
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
Duration of full test: approximately 3 minutes
input
Test sequence 1: all LEDs on
Number of timers: 32
Test sequence 2: all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Test sequence 3: all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
FLEXCURVES™ USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays: 16
Number: 4 (A through D)
Lines of display: 2 × 20 alphanumeric characters
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Parameters: up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Invoking and scrolling: keypad, or any user-programmable con-
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
dition, including pushbuttons
FLEX STATES
Number: up to 256 logical variables grouped
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7
under 16 Modbus addresses
Operation: drive FlexLogic™ operands
Programmability: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
FLEXELEMENTS™ Number of pushbuttons: 12 on standard front panel
16 on enhanced horizontal front panel
Number of elements: 16
6 on enhanced vertical front panel
Operating signal: any analog actual value, or two values in
Mode: self-reset, latched
differential mode
Display message: 2 lines of 20 characters each
Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value
Drop-out timer: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
Operating mode: level, delta
Autoreset timer: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Comparator direction: over, under
Hold timer: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Pickup Level: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1 SELECTOR SWITCH
Delta dt: 20 ms to 60 days Number of elements: 2
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 Upper position limit: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
Selecting mode: time-out or acknowledge
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Time-out timer: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Type: set-dominant or reset-dominant
Control inputs: step-up and 3-bit
Number: 16 (individually programmed)
Power-up mode: restore from non-volatile memory or syn-
Output: stored in non-volatile memory
chronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/
Execution sequence: as input prior to protection, control, and
restore mode
FlexLogic™

DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Operating signal: any FlexLogic™ operand
Dropout delay: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
2 2.2.3 MONITORING
OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER

Maximum records: 64 Number of channels: 1 to 16
Sampling rate: 64 samples per power cycle Parameters: any available analog actual value
Triggers: any element pickup, dropout, or operate; Sampling rate: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
digital input change of state; digital out- Trigger: any FlexLogic™ operand
put change of state; FlexLogic™ equa-
Mode: continuous or triggered
tion
Storage capacity: (NN is dependent on memory)
Data: AC input channels; element state; digital
input state; digital output state 1-second rate:
01 channel for NN days
Data storage: in non-volatile memory
16 channels for NN days
EVENT RECORDER ↓
Capacity: 1024 events 60-minute rate:
Time-tag: to 1 microsecond 01 channel for NN days
Triggers: any element pickup, dropout, or operate; 16 channels for NN days
digital input change of state; digital out- MOTOR LEARNED DATA
put change of state; self-test events
Learned acceleration time accuracy: 1%
Data storage: in non-volatile memory
Learned starting current accuracy: 1%
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT Average motor load learned accuracy: 1%
Pre-fault trigger: any FlexLogic™ operand
Fault trigger: any FlexLogic™ operand
Recorder quantities: 32 (any FlexAnalog value)
2.2.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy at Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated Range: ±0 to 1 × 106 MWh
(whichever is greater) Parameters: three-phase only
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.0% of reading
Update rate: 50 ms
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
REAL POWER (WATTS) Range: ±0 to 1 × 106 Mvarh
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at
Parameters: three-phase only
–0.8 < PF ≤ –1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0
Update rate: 50 ms
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at –0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
APPARENT POWER (VA) V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: ±0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading for frequency measurement)
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: ±0.005 Hz
I > 0.25 pu: ±0.001 Hz (when current signal is used
for frequency measurement)

2.2.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT DCMA INPUTS

CT rated primary: 1 to 50000 A Current input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,
CT rated secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz Input impedance: 379 Ω ±10%
Relay burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary Conversion range: –1 to + 20 mA DC
Conversion range:
Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Accuracy:
Type:
±0.2% of full scale
Passive
2
Sensitive Ground CT module:
0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10
Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated
Ω Copper
1 sec. at 100 times rated
Sensing current: 5 mA
continuous at 3 times rated
Range: –50 to +250°C
Short circuit rating: 150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250
V maximum (primary current to external Accuracy: ±2°C
CT) Isolation: 36 V pk-pk
AC VOLTAGE REMOTE RTD INPUTS
VT rated secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V Wire type: three-wire
VT ratio: 1.00 to 24000.00 Sensor type: 100 Ω platinum (DIN 43760), 100 Ω
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz nickel, 120 Ω nickel, 10 Ω copper
Relay burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V RTD sensing current: 3 mA
Conversion range: 1 to 275 V Range: –40 to 200°C
Voltage withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral Accuracy: ±2°C
1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral Lead resistance: 25 Ω maximum for Pt and Ni type; 3 Ω
max. for Cu type
CONTACT INPUTS
Isolation: 36 Vpk
Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum IRIG-B INPUT
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
Tolerance: ±10% DC shift: TTL
Contacts per common return: 4 Input impedance: 22 kΩ
Recognition time: < 1 ms Isolation: 2 kV
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized) Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING Number of remote devices: 16
Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum Number of remote DPS inputs: 5
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V DIRECT INPUTS
Tolerance: ±10% Number of input points: 32
Contacts per common return: 2 No. of remote devices: 16
Recognition time: < 1 ms Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 Ring configuration: Yes, No
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized) Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA CRC: 32-bit
Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms CRC alarm:
Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Unreturned message alarm:
Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring
configuration
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

TELEPROTECTION
Number of input points: 16
No. of remote devices: 3
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Ring configuration: No
Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
CRC: 32-bit
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY

2
LOW RANGE ALL RANGES
Nominal DC voltage: 24 to 48 V Volt withstand: 2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Minimum DC voltage: 20 V Power consumption: typical = 15 to 20 W/VA
Maximum DC voltage: 60 V for RL power supply module (obso- maximum = 50 W/VA
lete), 75 V for SL power supply module contact factory for exact order code con-
Voltage loss hold-up: 20 ms duration at nominal sumption
NOTE: Low range is DC only. INTERNAL FUSE

RATINGS
HIGH RANGE
Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V
Nominal DC voltage: 125 to 250 V
High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V
Minimum DC voltage: 88 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
Maximum DC voltage: 300 V AC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
Nominal AC voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz DC: 10 000 A
Minimum AC voltage: 88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Maximum AC voltage: 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Voltage loss hold-up: 200 ms duration at nominal
2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 6A Carry continuous: 8A
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms): Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
VOLTAGE CURRENT
VOLTAGE CURRENT
24 V 1A
24 V 1A
48 V 0.5 A
48 V 0.5 A
125 V 0.3 A
125 V 0.3 A
250 V 0.2 A
250 V 0.2 A
Operate time: < 8 ms
Operate time: < 4 ms
Contact material: silver alloy
Contact material: silver alloy
LATCHING RELAY FAST FORM-C RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Carry continuous: 6A Minimum load impedance:
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. INPUT IMPEDANCE

VOLTAGE
Operate time: < 4 ms 2 W RESISTOR 1 W RESISTOR
Contact material: silver alloy 250 V DC 20 KΩ 50 KΩ
Control: separate operate and reset inputs 120 V DC 5 KΩ 2 KΩ
Control mode: operate-dominant or reset-dominant 48 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
24 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
Operate time: < 0.6 ms
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 Ω, 2 W
Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA

SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY DIRECT OUTPUTS

Operate and release time: <100 µs Output points: 32
Maximum voltage: 265 V DC DCMA OUTPUTS
Maximum leakage current in off state Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
(excluding voltage monitor circuit current): 100 µA Max. load resistance: 12 kΩ for –1 to 1 mA range
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C 12 kΩ for 0 to 1 mA range
Make and carry: 600 Ω for 4 to 20 mA range
for 0.2 s:
for 0.03 s
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
300 A
Accuracy: ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
2
Breaking capacity: ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
UL508 Utility Industrial 99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms
application application Isolation: 1.5 kV
(autoreclose
scheme) Driving signal: any FlexAnalog quantity
Operations/ 5000 ops / 5 ops / Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of
interval 1 s-On, 9 s-Off 0.2 s-On, 10000 ops / 0.001
0.2 s-Off 0.2 s-On,
1000 ops / within 1 30 s-Off ETHERNET SWITCH (HIGH VOLTAGE, TYPE 2S)
0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off minute Nominal DC voltage: 110 to 240 V DC
Break 3.2 A Minimum DC voltage: 88 V DC
capability L/R = 10 ms
(0 to 250 V Maximum DC voltage: 300 V DC
DC) 1.6 A 10 A 10 A
L/R = 20 ms L/R = 40 ms L/R = 40 ms Input Current: 0.9 A DC maximum
0.8 A Nominal AC voltage: 100 to 240 V AC, 0.26 to 0.16 A/26 to 39
L/R = 40 ms VA at 50/60 Hz
Minimum AC voltage: 85 V AC, 0.31 A/22 VA at 50/60 Hz
IRIG-B OUTPUT
Amplitude: 10 V peak-peak RS485 level Maximum AC voltage: 265 V AC, 0.16 A/42 VA at 50/60 Hz
Maximum load: 100 ohms Internal fuse: 3 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO
BLO;
Time delay: 1 ms for AM input
Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
40 μs for DC-shift input
SCD-A 003
Isolation: 2 kV
ETHERNET SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE, TYPE 2T)
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT Nominal voltage: 48 V DC, 0.31 A/15 W
(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT) Minimum voltage: 30 V DC, 0.43 A/16 W
Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Maximum voltage: 60 V DC
Isolation: ±300 Vpk
Internal fuse: 5 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO
REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE) BLO;
Standard output points: 32 Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number:
User output points: 32 SCD-A 005

RS232 ETHERNET SWITCH FIBER OPTIC PORTS

Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus® RTU Maximum fiber segment length calculation:
RS485 The maximum fiber segment length between two adjacent
® switches or between a switch and a device is calculated as fol-
1 or 2 rear ports: Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, isolated
together at 36 Vpk lows. First, calculate the optical power budget (OPB) of each
2 Typical distance: 1200 m

device using the manufacturer’s data sheets.
OPB = P T ( MIN ) – P R ( MIN )
Isolation: 2 kV
where OPB = optical power budget, PT = transmitter output power,
ETHERNET (FIBER) and PR = receiver sensitivity.
PARAMETER FIBER TYPE The worst case optical power budget (OPBWORST) is then calcu-
10MB MULTI- 100MB MULTI- 100MB SINGLE- lated by taking the lower of the two calculated power budgets, sub-
MODE MODE MODE tracting 1 dB for LED aging, and then subtracting the total insertion
Wavelength 820 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm loss. The total insertion loss is calculated by multiplying the num-
ber of connectors in each single fiber path by 0.5 dB. For example,
Connector ST ST SC
with a single fiber cable between the two devices, there will be a
Transmit power –20 dBm –20 dBm –15 dBm
minimum of two connections in either transmit or receive fiber
Receiver sensitivity –30 dBm –30 dBm –30 dBm paths for a total insertion loss of 1db for either direction:
Power budget 10 dB 10 dB 15 dB Total insertion loss = number of connectors × 0.5 dB
Maximum input –7.6 dBm –14 dBm –7 dBm = 2 × 0.5 dB = 1.0 dB
power
The worst-case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S
Typical distance 1.65 km 2 km 15 km
modules using a single fiber cable is:
Duplex full/half full/half full/half
OPB WORST = OPB – 1 dB (LED aging) – total insertion loss
Redundancy yes yes yes
10dB – 1dB – 1dB = 8dB
The UR-2S and UR-2T only support 100 Mb multimode To calculate the maximum fiber length, divide the worst-case opti-
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR) cal power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance speci-
Modes: 10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect) fied in the manufacturer data sheets. For example, typical
attenuation for 62.5/125 μm glass fiber optic cable is approxi-
Connector: RJ45
mately 2.8 dB per km. In our example, this would result in the fol-
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical) lowing maximum fiber length:
OPB WORST (in dB)
Maximum fiber length = -------------------------------------------------------
cable loss (in dB/km)
8 dB
= --------------------------- = 2.8km
2.8 dB/km
The customer must use the attenuation specified within the manu-
facturer data sheets for accurate calculation of the maximum fiber
length.
ETHERNET SWITCH 10/100BASE-T PORTS
Connector type: RJ45
MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS
Unshielded twisted pair: 100 m (328 ft.)
Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS
10Base-T (CAT 3, 4, 5 UTP): 100 m (328 ft.)
100Base-TX (CAT 5 UTP):100 m (328 ft.)
Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)

2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE
RS422 1200 m
G.703 100 m
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and 2

NOTE does not take into consideration the clock source
provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET AND MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER
The following specifications apply to C37.94 modules implemented since January 2012.
EMITTER, FIBER TRANSMIT RECEIVED POWER MAXIMUM NOTE
TYPE POWER SENSITIVITY BUDGET OPTICAL
INPUT
POWER
820 nm, Multimode -16 dBm -32 dBm 16 dBm -8 dBm Coupled into 62.5/125 μm multi-mode fiber
-20 dBm 12 dBm Coupled into 50/125 μm multi-mode fiber
1300 nm, -16 dBm -32 dBm 16 dBm -8 dBm Coupled into 62.5/125 μm multi-mode fiber
Multimode
-20 dBm 12 dBm Coupled into 50/125 μm multi-mode fiber
1300 nm, Single -15 dBm -32 dBm 17 dBm -8 dBm Coupled into 9/125 μm single-mode fiber
mode
1300 nm Laser, 0 dBm -34 dBm 34 dBm -8 dBm Coupled into 9/125 μm single-mode fiber
Single mode
1550 nm Laser, 5 dBm -34 dBm 39 dBm -10 dBm Coupled into 9/125 μm single-mode fiber
Single mode
The following specifications apply to C37.94 modules implemented before January 2012.
EMITTER, FIBER TRANSMIT RECEIVED POWER MAX. OPTICAL
TYPE POWER SENSITIVITY BUDGET INPUT POWER
820 nm LED, –20 dBm –30 dBm 10 dB –7.6 dBm
Multimode
1300 nm LED, –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB –11 dBm
Multimode
1300 nm ELED, –23 dBm –32 dBm 9 dB –14 dBm
Single mode
1300 nm Laser, –1 dBm –30 dBm 29 dB –14 dBm
Single mode
1550 nm Laser, +5 dBm –30 dBm 35 dB –14 dBm
Single mode
These power budgets are calculated from the manu- The power budgets for the 1300 nm ELED are calcu-
NOTE facturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst NOTE lated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and
case receiver sensitivity. receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At
extreme temperatures these values deviate based
on component tolerance. On average, the output
power decreases as the temperature is increased by
a factor 1dB / 5°C.

TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE CABLE CONNECTOR TYPICAL
TYPE TYPE DISTANCE
820 nm LED, 62.5/125 μm ST 1.65 km
multimode
1300 nm LED, 62.5/125 μm ST 3.8 km
multimode
2 1300 nm ELED,
single mode
9/125 μm ST 11.4 km
1300 nm Laser, 9/125 μm ST 64 km

single mode
1550 nm Laser, 9/125 μm ST 105 km
single-mode
Typical distances listed are based on the follow-

ing assumptions for system loss. As actual losses
NOTE will vary from one installation to another, the dis-
tance covered by your system may vary.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
ST connector 2 dB
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode 1 dB/km
1300 nm singlemode 0.35 dB/km
1550 nm singlemode 0.25 dB/km
Splice losses: One splice every 2 km,
at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel

asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES OTHER

Storage temperature: –40 to 85°C Altitude: 2000 m (maximum)
Operating temperature: –40 to 60°C; the LCD contrast may be Pollution degree: II
impaired at temperatures less than – Overvoltage category: II
20°C Ingress protection: IP20 front, IP10 back
HUMIDITY
Humidity: operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at
55°C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1,
6days).

2.2.11 TYPE TESTS
M60 TYPE TESTS

TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand EN60255-5 2.3 kV
Impulse voltage withstand EN60255-5 5 kV
Damped oscillatory
Electrostatic discharge
IEC61000-4-18 / IEC60255-22-1
EN61000-4-2 / IEC60255-22-2
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Level 3
2
RF immunity EN61000-4-3 / IEC60255-22-3 Level 3
Fast transient disturbance EN61000-4-4 / IEC60255-22-4 Class A and B
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 / IEC60255-22-5 Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity EN61000-4-6 / IEC60255-22-6 Level 3
Power frequency immunity EN61000-4-7 / IEC60255-22-7 Class A and B
Voltage interruption and ripple DC IEC60255-11 12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25 Class A
Sinusoidal vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock and bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
Power magnetic immunity IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity IEC61000-4-9 Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity IEC61000-4-10 Level 4
Voltage dip and interruption IEC61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Damped oscillatory IEC61000-4-12 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz IEC61000-4-16 Level 4
Voltage ripple IEC61000-4-17 15% ripple
Ingress protection IEC60529 IP20 front, IP10 back
Cold IEC60068-2-1 –40°C for 16 hours
Hot IEC60068-2-2 85°C for 16 hours
Humidity IEC60068-2-30 6 days, variant 1
Damped oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Safety UL508 e83849 NKCR
Safety UL C22.2-14 e83849 NKCR7
Safety UL1053 e83849 NKCR
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.

2.2.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE ACCORDING TO
COUNCIL DIRECTIVE
CE compliance Low voltage directive EN60255-5
EMC directive EN60255-26 / EN50263
2 EN61000-6-5
North America --- UL508
--- UL1053
--- C22.2 No. 14
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration
of electrolytic capacitors.
NOTE

3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
a) HORIZONTAL UNITS
The M60 Motor Protection System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The
faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains addi-
tional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access
the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.
3
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
11.016”
[279,81 mm]
9.687”
[246,05 mm]
17.56”
[446,02 mm]
7.460”
[189,48 mm]
6.995” 6.960”
[177,67 mm] [176,78 mm]
19.040”
[483,62 mm]
842807A1.CDR
Figure 3–1: M60 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
18.370”
[466,60 mm]
0.280”
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
CUT-OUT
7.13” 4.000”
[181.1 mm] [101,60 mm]
3
17.750”
[450,85 mm] 842808A2.CDR
Figure 3–2: M60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)
Figure 3–3: M60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)
b) VERTICAL UNITS
The M60 Motor Protection System is available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate. The
faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains addi-
tional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access
the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.

The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
7.482” 11.015”
1.329”
13.560”
3
15.000” 14.025”
4.000”
9.780”
843809A1.CDR
Figure 3–4: M60 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)

e UR SERIES
Figure 3–5: M60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

For details on side mounting M60 devices with the enhanced front panel, refer to the following documents available online
from the GE Grid Solutions website.
• GEK-113180: UR-series UR-V side-mounting front panel assembly instructions.
• GEK-113181: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertical UR-series device.
• GEK-113182: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertically-mounted horizontal UR-series
device.
For details on side mounting M60 devices with the standard front panel, refer to the figures below.

GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
STEP 1 - CREATE THE HOLES AND CUT-OUT INTO THE PANEL

AS PER DRAWING 843753. PLUG THE DISPLAY CABLE INTO
THE FRONT BEZEL
#8-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BEFORE MOUNTING THE
BLACK OXIDE SCREW
UNIT ON THE PANEL
P/N: 1408-0306
#8-3/8" 8 PLACES TO MOUNT THE UNIT
PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
#8 LOCKWASHER
SCREW
EXTERNAL TOOTH
UR 19" P/N: 1435-0002
MOUNTING #6x1/2" PAN PHILIPS 8 PLACES TO MOUNT
BRACKET HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
PLASTITE SCREW
DISPLAY CABLE
GROUND CABLE
ATTACH CABLE TO
FRONT BEZEL
BEFORE MOUNTING
FRONT BEZEL ON
THE
PANEL
M60 Motor Protection System

#10-32 NYLOCK
NUT
P/N: 1422-1032
4 PLACES SIDE MOUNT COVER
#10-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD P/N: 1004-0018
ZINC
P/N: 1410-0006 UR-V FRONT BEZEL
4 PLACES TO MOUNT THE ASSEMBLY UR-V UNIT
BRACKETS PANEL
STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

MOUNT BRACKETS TO MOUNT FRONT BEZEL TO ASSEMBLE UR-V UNIT
PANEL PANEL TO MOUNTING BRACKETS
843757A2.cdr
Figure 3–6: M60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION (STANDARD PANEL)

3.1 DESCRIPTION
3-5
3
6.66"
(169.2)
5.33"
(135.4)
INCHES
(MILLIMETERS) 2.83"
1.00"
(71.9)
(25.4)
PANEL SHOWN FOR
0.68" 0.04" 1.33" REFERENCE ONLY
(17.3) (1.0) (33.9) (VIEWED FROM FRONT)
'X' 'X'
1.00"
(25.4)
T
OU
T-
CU
5.27"
3
(133.8)
0.159" DIA. (6 PLACES)

(4.0)
10.05"
(255.3)
12.20"
(309.9)
'X' 'X'
0.213" DIA. (5.4) 843753A3.cdr

(4 PLACES)
SEE HOLES MARKED 'X'
Figure 3–7: M60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been
WARNING removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal
injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a static strap) must be used when
coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left, once the thumb screw has been removed, as shown below. This allows
for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens
completely and allows easy access to all modules in the M60.

842812A1.CDR
Figure 3–8: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

3
The standard faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown
below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 3–9: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

To properly remove a module, the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled
simultaneously. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original loca-
tion of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. While modules with cur-
rent input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits, for CT/VT modules it is recommended to short/isolate external
circuits accordingly for maximum safety.
To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/
inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is
smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously.
When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
All CPU modules except the 9E are equipped with 10/100Base-T or 100Base-F Ethernet connectors. These con-
nectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE

The 4.0x release of the M60 relay includes new hardware modules.The new CPU modules are specified with codes
9E and higher. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the codes 8F and higher.
NOTE
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be used with old
CPUs. To prevent hardware mismatches, the new modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating “Attn.:
Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!”. In the event that there is a mismatch between the
CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be dis-
played.
All other input and output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are
only compatible with the new hardware modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only com-
patible with the older hardware modules.
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
3
M60 Motor Management Relay RATINGS: Model: M60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
Mods: 000
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Wiring Diagram: ZZZZZZ
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Inst. Manual: D
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A Serial Number: MAZB98000029
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break Firmware: D
GE Multilin 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W Mfg. Date: 1998/01/05
Technical Support:
Made in
Tel: (905) 294-6222 http://www.GEIndustrial.com/Multilin ®
®
Canada
Fax: (905) 201-2098 - M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B
c b a c b a c b a c b a
b a b a
Tx1 1 1
1 1
2 2
Rx1 2 2
3 Tx1 3
3 3
Tx1
4 4
CH1
4 4
Rx1 5
Tx2 CH1 5
Tx 6
Rx 6
CH2
Rx2 IN 7
Tx2
7
8
CH2
Tx2 8
OUT
Rx2
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional CT/VT CPU module Power

Ethernet direct contact CT/VT or contact module (Ethernet not supply
switch input/output input/output contact input/output available when module
module module input/output module ordered with
module Ethernet switch)
833712A3.CDR
Figure 3–10: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.

Figure 3–11: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS

The torque used to connect the terminal blocks to the back of the relay chassis (screws a, b, c shown) is 9 inch-pounds. For
the connections to the terminal blocks (rows 1 to 8), use a minimum of 17 inch-pounds. During manufacturing, the power
supply and CPU modules are installed in slots B and D of the chassis with 13 inch-pounds of torque on the screws at the
top and bottom of the modules.

3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.2WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
POSITIVE WATTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER
A
B 52
M1a
M2a
M3a
M4a
M1b
M2b
M3b
M4b
M1c
M2c
M3c
M4c
F5a
F6a
F7a
F1a
F2a
F3a
F4a
F1b
F2b
F3b
F4b
F5c
F6c
F7c
F1c
F2c
F3c
F4c
VB
VC
VA
IG5
IG1
VB
VC
IG
IG5
IG1
VA
IG
IA5
IA1
IB
IC
IA
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
IA5
IA1
IB
IC
IA
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
CURRENT SUPERVISION
VOLTAGE AND
VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS
8F / 8G 8F / 8G
P5a CONTACT INPUT P5a DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS 6G I P1a TC 1
P5c CONTACT INPUT P5c P1 P1b
V
P6a CONTACT INPUT P6a P1c
P6c CONTACT INPUT P6c I P2a
P5b COMMON P5b P2 P2b
VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
V
P2c
P7a CONTACT INPUT P7a
I P3a
P7c CONTACT INPUT P7c
P3 P3b TC 2
P8a CONTACT INPUT P8a V
P3c
P8c CONTACT INPUT P8c
I P4a
P7b COMMON P7b
P4 P4b
V
P8b SURGE P4c
H1a Hot
5C
RTD H1
H1c Comp
DB-9
H1b Return for RTDs H1 and H2
RS-232
H2a Hot (front)
( DC ONLY )
RTD H2
H2c Comp
H3a Hot UR COMPUTER

RTD H3
H3c Comp 1 1 8
H3b Return for RTDs H3 and H4 TXD 2 2 3 RXD
H4a Hot RXD 3 3 2 TXD
RTD H4
H4c Comp 4 4 20
SGND 5 5 7 SGND
H5a Hot
RTD H5 6 6 6
H5c Comp
7 7 4
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

8 8 5
H6a Hot
RTD H6 9 9 22
H6c Comp
H7a Hot 9 PIN 25 PIN
M60 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY

RTD H7
H7c Comp CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
H8a Hot
RTD H8
H8c Comp 1
Power
H8b SURGE supply
B
B1b
1
CRITICAL
B1a FAILURE 9
B2b D CPU
B3a 48 V DC
DC OUTPUT
B3b
POWER SUPPLY
B5b HI F 8
CONTROL CT/VT
AC or DC B6b LO G
POWER
B6a
B8a SURGE H 5
B8b FILTER RTD
J
K
Shielded
twisted pairs L
CONTACTS SHOWN
D1b WITH NO M 8
9E
RS485
D2b CONTROL POWER CT/VT
Ground at COM 1 N
remote
D3b com
D1a P 6
device
RS485 Inputs/
D2a COM 2 R outputs
D3a com
D4b S
Co-axial *
D4a IRIG-B
(Rear view)
Input
Co-axial BNC VERTICAL
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
IRIG-B
CPU
Co-axial BNC Output
Co-axial * - For IRIG-B input 833713A5.CDR

only use one HORIZONTAL MODULE ARRANGEMENT
terminal as input X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B
6 8 5 8 9 1 This diagram is based on the following order code:
No. 10AWG M60-H00-HCH-F8F-H5C-M8F-P6G-UXX-WXX
minimum Input/ VT/CT RTD VT/CT CPU Power This diagram provides an example of how the device
MODULES MUST BE * * output Supply
GROUNDED IF is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please
GROUND
BUS
TERMINAL IS (Rear View) refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on
PROVIDED * Optional wiring based on various configurations.
Figure 3–12: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table.
Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE MODULE FUNCTION TERMINALS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
TYPE (AC)
FROM TO
1 Power supply High (+); Low (+); (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power supply 48 V DC (+) and (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power supply Relay terminals Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
2 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
3 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
4
5
Digital inputs/outputs
Analog inputs/outputs
All
All except 8b
Chassis
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
< 50 V DC
3
6 Digital inputs/outputs All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
G.703 All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
7
RS422 All except 6a, 7b, 8a Chassis < 50 V DC
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
9 CPU All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage
transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can
be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one min-
ute.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
Control power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the
NOTICE relay. If the voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage may occur.
The M60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to
be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering
NOTE
the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each
range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical specifica-
tions section of chapter 2 for additional details):
• Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal.
• High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that will be energized once control power is
applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks
detect a critical failure (see the Self-test errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
For high reliability systems, the M60 has a redundant option in which two M60 power supplies are placed in parallel on the
bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any
interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay
of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply.

An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION POWER SUPPLY
CONTINUOUS ON OK
ON / OFF CYCLING Failure
OFF Failure
NOTE:
AC or DC 14 gauge stranded AC or DC
wire with suitable
disconnect devices
is recommended.
Heavy copper conductor
3 or braided wire
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b
GND
+ +
+ —
– LOW HIGH
FILTER SURGE
CONTROL OPTIONAL
POWER ETHERNET SWITCH
Switchgear UR-series
ground bus protection system
827759AA.CDR
Figure 3–13: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION

When using an SH/SL power supply module or a M60 with the HardFiber system, before powering off the M60,
save data in the compact flash memory using Commands > Relay Maintenance > Save Non-Volatile Data. When
NOTE not saved or the relay loses power, up to the last two minutes of data is not saved to the compact flash memory.
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1
and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6 are intended
for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.
Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as
auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and
ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).
Verify that the connection made to the relay nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary
NOTICE rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate pro-
tection.
CT/VT modules may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC
current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is
withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to
50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the sensitive ground modules is
ten times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules. However, the phase CT inputs and phase
VT inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules.
The above modules are available with enhanced diagnostics. These modules can automatically detect CT/VT hardware
failure and take the relay out of service.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram.

The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown below. Twisted-pair
cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
UNSHIELDED CABLE SHIELDED CABLE

Ground connection to neutral
must be on the source side Stress cone
Source Source shields
A B C N G A B C
Ground
outside CT
To ground;
LOAD must be on
load side
LOAD 996630A5
Figure 3–14: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION

The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features.
Substitute the tilde “~” symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
NOTE
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8a
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
~ 8c
VC
VB
VA
VX
IG
IG1
IA
IC
IA1
IC1
IB
IB1
IG5
VC
VB
VA
VX
IA5
IC5
IB5
Current inputs Voltage inputs

8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 7a
~ 7b
~ 8a
~ 8b
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
~ 8c
IG
IG
IG1
IG1
IA
IC
IA
IC
IA1
IC1
IA1
IC1
IB
IB
IB1
IB1
IG5
IG5
IA5
IC5
IA5
IC5
IB5
IB5
Current inputs
8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)
842766A3.CDR
Figure 3–15: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES
The M60 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. This module is designed to interface with the GE Multilin
HardFiber system, allowing bi-directional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber merging units,
known as Bricks. The HardFiber system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR-series applica-
tions, including protection functions, FlexLogic™, metering, and communications.
The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits.
• Drastically reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using
the M60 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations.
• Integrates seamlessly with existing M60 applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the
traditional CT/VT modules.
3 • Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging.

For additional details on the HardFiber system, refer to GE publication GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight
rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs,
the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A
output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered.
The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The M60 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common
return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used.
The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs
sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D
module).
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open,
and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose out-
put is set to logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On =
1” when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current exceeds about
80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be
used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow.
Block diagrams are shown below for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current
monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact outputs.

,I,GFP$&RQW2S ´,2Qµ
aD aD RWKHUZLVH&RQW2S ´,2IIµ
, , ,I,GFP$&RQW2S ´92Qµ
RWKHUZLVH&RQW2S ´92IIµ
,I,GFP$&RQW2S ´92Qµ
aE aE /RDG
9 /RDG 9
aF aF
D 9ROWDJHZLWKRSWLRQDO
9ROWDJHPRQLWRULQJRQO\ %RWKYROWDJHDQGFXUUHQWPRQLWRULQJ
FXUUHQWPRQLWRULQJ
aD aD RWKHUZLVH&RQW2S ´,2IIµ
9 9 ,I,GFP$&RQW2S ´92Qµ
3
, aE , aE /RDG
RWKHUZLVH&RQW2S ´,2IIµ
/RDG
aF aF
E &XUUHQWZLWKRSWLRQDO
&XUUHQWPRQLWRULQJRQO\ %RWKYROWDJHDQGFXUUHQWPRQLWRULQJ
YROWDJHPRQLWRULQJ
H[WHUQDOMXPSHUDELVUHTXLUHG
aD
aE
/RDG
aF
F 1RPRQLWRULQJ $&'5
Figure 3–16: FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE CONTACT OUTPUTS WITH VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MONITORING
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (CONT OP # VON,
CONT OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) which can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command.
Refer to the Digital elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be
applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay
WARNING contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customer’s respon-
sibility to ensure proper insulation levels!
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the
contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input
impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may con-
tinue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as
an impedance.
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-
A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is
used as a source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A
contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number sign “#”
appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE

When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the Flex-
NOTICE Logic™ operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent dam-
age of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at
values in the region of the pickup value).
Table 3–2: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A MODULE ~6B MODULE ~6C MODULE ~6D MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs
3 ~4
~5a, ~5c
Form-C
2 Inputs
~4
~5
Form-C
Form-C
~4
~5
Form-C
Form-C
~4a, ~4c
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6E MODULE ~6F MODULE ~6G MODULE ~6H MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6K MODULE ~6L MODULE ~6M MODULE ~6N MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-C ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6P MODULE ~6R MODULE ~6S MODULE ~6T MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
3
~6U MODULE ~6V MODULE ~67 MODULE ~4A MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Not Used
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Solid-State
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A ~3 Not Used
~4 Form-A ~4 2 Outputs ~4 Form-A ~4 Solid-State
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A ~5 Not Used
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A ~6 Solid-State
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-A ~7 Not Used
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-A ~8 Solid-State
~4B MODULE ~4C MODULE ~4D MODULE ~4L MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs ~1 2 Outputs
~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs ~2 2 Outputs
~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Not Used

Figure 3–17: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)

~ 1a ~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6L V ~ 1a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6M V ~ 1a
6K
I I
~ 1b ~1 ~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 1c ~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c ~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 2a ~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c V ~ 2a ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c V ~ 2a
I I
~ 2b ~2 ~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c ~ 2c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 8b SURGE
~ 3a ~ 3a ~ 3a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 3b ~3 ~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a
~ 3c ~ 3c ~ 3c
~ 4a ~ 4a ~ 4a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~ 4b ~4 ~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 4c ~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 4c
~ 5a ~ 5a
~ 5b ~5 ~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c ~ 5c
~ 6a ~ 6a
~ 6b ~6 ~6 ~ 6b
~ 6c ~ 6c
~ 7a
DIGITAL I/O
~ 7b ~7
~ 7c
~ 8a
3
~ 8b ~8
~ 8c
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6N V ~ 1a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6P V ~ 1a

I I
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c ~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c V ~ 2a ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c V ~ 2a
I I
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 8b SURGE
V ~ 3a V ~ 3a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c I I
~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c ~ 3c
V ~ 4a V ~ 4a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b I I
~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 4c
V ~ 5a
I
~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c
V ~ 6a
I
~6 ~ 6b
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6R ~ 1a
~ 6c
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c ~ 2a
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6S ~ 1a
~ 3a ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~3 ~ 3b ~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 3c ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 2a
~ 4a ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~4 ~ 4b ~ 2c
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 8b SURGE
~ 3a
~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~4 ~ 4b
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6T ~ 1a ~ 4c
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b ~ 5a
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c ~5 ~ 5b
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c ~ 2a ~ 5c
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 6a
~ 2c ~6 ~ 6b
~ 3a
~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~4 ~ 4b
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6U ~ 1a
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 2a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 8b SURGE
~ 3a
~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 4a
~4 ~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 5a
~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~6 ~ 6b
~ 6c
842763A2.CDR
Figure 3–18: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)

Observe correct polarity for all contact input and solid state output connections for proper functional-
NOTICE ity.

CONTACT INPUTS:
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power sup-
ply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source
must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage
for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
3 (Dry) DIGITAL I/O

~ 7a + CONTACT IN
6B
~ 7a
(Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B
~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a
~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c 24-250V ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b ~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 8b SURGE
B 1b
1
B 1a CRITICAL
FAILURE
B 2b
B 3a -
POWER SUPPLY
48 VDC
B 3b + OUTPUT
B 5b HI+
CONTROL
B 6b LO+
POWER
B 6a -
B 8a SURGE
B 8b FILTER
827741A4.CDR
Figure 3–19: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as form-a or form-C. The form-A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervi-
sion. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current
monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized induc-
tive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recom-
mend using an external DC supply.
NOTE
GENERAL APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS:

Contacts outputs of protective relays, auxiliary contacts from breakers, disconnectors and other devices, are generally con-
nected to contacts inputs of protective relays. In some situations, the contact outputs of some protective relays can have
high impedance connected across it. When such a contact output is connected across a M60 contact input, it can spuri-
ously operate the M60 input even when the output is open, if there is a substantial distributed capacitance (represented by
C1) present in the wiring between the output and the M60 input and the debounce time setting in the M60 relay is low
enough. This false assertion of the contact input, when there is inadvertent ground present at the DC positive terminal, can
be prevented by inserting a resistor across the M60 input.

The following figure shows a typical DC circuit, with battery ground detection, of contact input. The contact output has par-
allel impedance across it (represented by R1).
Figure 3–20: TYPICAL CONTACT INPUT DC CIRCUIT

The presence of the impedance path (R1) across the contact output allows the stray (distributed) capacitance C1 to charge
as shown, thus developing a voltage across the contact input enough to momentarily operate the input while the capaci-
tance discharges in the presence of DC ground on the positive terminal of the battery.
The duration of the discharge depends on the value of the distributed capacitance, the initial voltage of the distributed
capacitance, and the input impedance of the contact input. If the duration is greater than the debounce time setting, then
the contact input operates.
The application example that follows describes how to mitigate this problem by connecting a resistor across the contact
input, as shown in the next figure, or by adjusting the debounce time setting to a value greater than the discharge time to
prevent spurious operation of the contact input only if the voltage (with output open) across the contact input due to trickle
current is less than the threshold voltage. This operation of contact inputs also can be prevented by using the Auto-Burnish
contact inputs or contact inputs with active impedance.
Figure 3–21: CONTACT INPUT CONNECTED TO A CONTACT OUTPUT WITH RESISTOR (R2) ACROSS THE INPUT

APPLICATION EXAMPLE:
This example is for illustrative purposes only and the calculations present the worst-case scenario. In practice, the value of
debounce time can be lower.
Contact input ON state impedance used in the calculation of the discharge period is based on the following table.
Table 3–3: DISCHARGE PERIOD
BATTERY VOLTAGE (V) INPUT IMPEDANCE (KΩ)
130 50
250 97
Debounce time setting = 2 ms

3 Assume a stray capacitance of 0.1 μF.
Assume an initial voltage across the stray capacitance "Vinitial" = 19 V (Vthreshold - 65 V), where Vthreshold = 84 V. The
initial voltage Vinitial depends on values of impedance of R1 and contact inputs when the contact input is OFF (non-acti-
vated state).
Therefore, discharge time constant (τ) =50 kΩ *0.1 μF = 5 ms.
Discharge period t is calculated from the following equation:
Vthreshold = (Vbatt - VInitial) *e^ (-t/τ)
84 = -149 *e^ (t/0.005) (EQ 3.1)
T = -0.005 * ln (84/149) = 0.0029 s
Therefore, in this example the contact inputs operate.
To prevent this operation, the debounce time must be increased to 4 ms (set debounce time as per the following table) or
insert a resistor less than or equal to "R" as calculated later.
Table 3–4: TYPICAL DEBOUNCE TIME SETTING
STRAY CAPACITANCE (μF) BATTERY VOLTAGE (V) DEBOUNCE TIME (MS)
0.05 130 2
0.1 130 4
0.2 130 6
0.05 250 3
0.1 250 6
0.2 250 11
The value of this resistor "R" is calculated as follows:

1. Determine the minimum voltage (V threshold) required to turn on the input. This is determined by direct measurement
or referenced in the input specifications.
2. Calculate the resistance necessary to limit the voltage to 1/3 V threshold (when the contact is OFF, the non-activated
state) as follows:
R = (Vthreshold / 3) / (2 mA) (EQ 3.2)
The 2 mA current is used in case the contact input is connected across the GE Form A contact output with voltage
monitoring. Otherwise use the amperage of the active circuit connected to the contact input when its contact output is
open and the voltage across the contact input is third trigger threshold to calculate the resistor value.
3. When the contact is ON (operate state), the battery voltage appears across the resistor. The wattage rating of the
resistor is then:
PR = 1.3 * (Vbatt) ^2 / R Watts (EQ 3.3)
4. Applying the following equation to our example:
R = 84 V / 3*(1 / 2 mA) = 14 kΩ
PR = 1.57 Watts (EQ 3.4)

5. Calculating the voltage across the contact input with the Burden Resistor, Voltage across the contact Input:
Vresistor = 2 mA * 14 Kohm = 28 V
Vresistor < contact input threshold (84 V) (EQ 3.5)
In conclusion, in this example, the contact input does NOT operate falsely with the Burden Resistor across its input AND
when a battery ground is present.
USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:
The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When exter-
nal devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to vari-
ous types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface
of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to
establish circuit continuity – an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation
layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The
3
impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current
50 to 70 mA
3 mA
time
25 to 50 ms 842749A1.CDR
Figure 3–22: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with auto-
burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to
50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con-
tacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts
when external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two con-
tact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Contact Input
and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Con-
sequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.

The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP
switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON

3 CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON

842751A1.CDR
Figure 3–23: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES

The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish
functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.
NOTE
USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH ACTIVE IMPEDANCE:

Contact inputs susceptible to parasitic capacitance caused by long cable runs affected by switching surges from external
circuits can result in inadvertent activation of contact inputs with the external contact open. In this case, GE recommends
using the digital I/O module with active impedance circuit.
Active impedance contact input can tolerate external cable capacitance of up to 0.2 µF, without entering the ON state for
more than 2 ms. The contact input debounce time can still be set above 2 ms for added security to prevent contact input
activations cause by external transient ON states.
An active impedance contact input is normally in Low impedance mode during OFF contact state (non-activated condition).
During Low impedance state contact input impedance is maintained at 10 K Ohms impedance to allow fast discharge of the
stray capacitance of the long cables.
When the contact input voltage exceeds the set threshold, active impedance maintains 10 K Ohms impedance value. If
voltage starts rapidly decreasing, this indicates that stray capacitance is being discharged through the contact input. If,
however, voltage stabilizes above the set threshold, the input impedance is switched to High impedance mode of 100 K
Ohms. This value reduces the input current to <3 mA, and contact input switched to the ON state (operated state).
The figure shows the active impedance contact input V-I characteristic. Different thresholds with their corresponding char-
acteristics are shown by color. The contact input is in the ON (operated) state if the input voltage is to the right of the col-
ored threshold band (+/-10% tolerance), and the contact input is in the OFF (non-activated) state when input voltage is to
the left of the band. A contact input is in LOW state during non-operated system condition, and actively switches to HIGH
state upon detection of input voltage above the settable threshold.

Figure 3–24: ACTIVE IMPEDANCE CONTACT INPUT V-I CHARACTERISTIC

3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance tem-
perature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and con-
vert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure
virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three ter-
minals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs
3 require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the trans-
ducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Figure 3–25: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING

3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the M60 faceplate for programming with a personal computer. All that is required
to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for
the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE
Figure 3–26: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION
3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OPTIONS
In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the M60 provides two additional communication ports or a managed six-port Ether-
net switch, depending on the installed CPU module.
The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE Modules 9G, 9H, 9L, and 9M are no longer available.
Table 3–5: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS

CPU TYPE COM1 COM2
9E RS485 RS485
9G 10Base-F or 10Base-T RS485
9H Redundant 10Base-F or 10Base-T RS485
9J 100Base-FX or 10/100Base-T RS485
9K Redundant 100Base-FX or 10/100Base-T RS485
9L 100Base-FX RS485
9M Redundant 100Base-FX RS485
9N 10/100Base-T RS485
9S Six-port managed Ethernet switch RS485
For the 9G/9H CPU, the 10Base-T port can only be used when the CH1 10Base-F fiber has been removed. The
10Base-T Ethernet cable and the CH1 10Base-F fiber cable cannot both be installed at the same time.
NOTE
For the 9J/9K CPU, the 10/100Base-T port has the lowest priority and is only active if both CH1 and CH2 fiber links
are down. Installation of the 10/100Base-T Ethernet cable at the same time as the CH1 and/or CH2 100Base-F
fiber cables does not affect the communication over the CH1 or CH2 fiber ports.

Shielded twisted-pairs
D1b +
9E
RS485 SM fiber
D2b —
9L
COM1 optic cable 100Base-FL NORMAL COM1
Ground at D3b COMMON
remote + D1a +
D1a RS485
device RS485 D2a —
D2a — COM2
COM2 Ground at D3a COMMON
D3a COMMON
remote
D4b D4b +
+ device
— D4a — IRIG-B
D4a IRIG-B
input input
BNC
BNC
Co-axial cable Co-axial cable
CPU
CPU
IRIG-B output BNC IRIG-B output
BNC
MM fiber
Tx1
9G
NORMAL
COM1
optic cable 10Base-FL SM fiber optic cable
9M
Rx1 NORMAL
COM1
100Base-FL
10Base-T 100Base-F ALTERNATE
3
Shielded twisted-pairs Shielded twisted-pairs
D1a + D1a +
RS485 RS485
D2a — D2a —
COM2 COM2
Ground at D3a COMMON Ground at D3a COMMON
remote D4b + remote
device
D4b +
D4a — IRIG-B device
D4a — IRIG-B
input input
BNC BNC
CPU
IRIG-B output
CPU
BNC BNC IRIG-B output
MM fiber
9H
Tx1 10Base-FL NORMAL

optic cable Rx1
COM1
Tx2 10Base-F ALTERNATE

Rx2
Shielded
9N
10/100Base-T NORMAL COM1
Shielded 10Base-T twisted-pairs
twisted-pairs D1a +
D1a + RS485
RS485 D2a —
D2a — COM2
COM2 Ground at D3a COMMON
Ground at D3a COMMON remote D4b +
remote D4b + device
device D4a — IRIG-B
D4a — IRIG-B input
input BNC
BNC Co-axial cable
CPU
Co-axial cable
IRIG-B output
CPU
BNC
BNC IRIG-B output Co-axial cable
Co-axial cable
MM fiber
Tx1 100Base-FL NORMAL COM1
9J
optic cable Rx1
10Base-T
D1a + Shielded twisted-pairs
RS485 +
D2a — D1a
9S
COM2 RS485
Ground at D3a COMMON D2a —
COM2
remote D4b + Ground at D3a COMMON
device remote
D4a — IRIG-B D4b +
device
input D4a — IRIG-B
BNC input
Co-axial cable BNC
CPU
BNC IRIG-B output Co-axial cable
CPU
Co-axial cable BNC IRIG-B output
Co-axial cable
842765A7b.CDR
MM fiber optic cable Tx1
9K
NORMAL
COM1
Rx1 100Base-FL
Tx2 100Base-F ALTERNATE
Rx2
10Base-T
Shielded twisted-pairs
D1a +
RS485
D2a —
COM2
Ground at D3a COMMON
remote D4b +
device
D4a — IRIG-B
input
BNC
Co-axial cable
CPU
BNC IRIG-B output

Co-axial cable
Figure 3–27: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternat-
ing over the same two wires. Through the use of these ports, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–”
terminals connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices require a shared

reference, or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common. Some systems allow the
shield (drain wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the M60 COM terminal (#3); others function cor-
rectly only if the common wire is connected to the M60 COM terminal, but insulated from the shield.
To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to
be grounded at more than one point, install resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each grounding
point. Each relay should also be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible
to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel. Star or stub connections should
be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An iso-
lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
3
Figure 3–28: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS

Ensure that the dust covers are installed when the fiber is not in use. Dirty or scratched connectors
NOTICE can lead to high losses on a fiber link.

The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode
and single-mode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9H, 9J, 9K,
9L, 9M, and 9N. The 9H, 9K, and 9M modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for
redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is
designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter, 62.5 µm for 100 Mbps.
For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers,
the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connec-
tor, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.

3.2.10 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or ampli-
tude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
3
RELAY
4B IRIG-B(+)
4A IRIG-B(-)
IRIG-B
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE RECEIVER
TIME CODE
GENERATOR + BNC (IN)
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
-
BNC (OUT) REPEATER
TO OTHER DEVICES
(DC-SHIFT ONLY)
827756A5.CDR
Figure 3–29: IRIG-B CONNECTION

The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connec-
tion, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal
even when a relay in the series is powered down.
Figure 3–30: IRIG-B REPEATER

Using an amplitude modulated receiver will cause errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3.3DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The M60 direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are
also used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The direct input and output feature uses the
communications channels provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is
available on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one mod-
ule is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver
of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four
UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx
to UR1-Rx. A maximum of 16 URs can be connected in a single ring
Tx
3 UR #1
Rx
Tx
UR #2
Rx
Tx
UR #3
Rx
Tx
UR #4
Rx
842006A1.CDR
Figure 3–31: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION

IRC modules with protocol C37.94 and G.703 are designed for back-to-back communication connections, so the ring con-
figuration shown in the previous figure does not apply. To establish inter-relay communication in more than two URs, you
need to have two channel IRC module and enable DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER function in all relays, as shown in
the next figure. This configuration can be expanded to 16 URs, and this configuration does not provide redundancy ring
since both channels are made into single ring by the channel crossover function. As per the figure Typical Pin Interconnec-
tion between Two G.703 Interfaces later in this chapter, the clock is supplied typically by multiplexer (MUX) and all URs are
in Loop Timing Mode. If there is no MUX, then UR1 and UR3 can be in Internal Timing Mode and UR2 and UR4 can be in
Loop Timing Mode. That is, connected channels must have opposite timing modes.
Figure 3–32: RING CONFIGURATION FOR C37.94 MODULE (CONCEPT ALSO APPLIES TO G.703)

3 HARDWARE 3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
The interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below. Two channel modules allow for a
redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required
connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first
ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second
ring.
Tx1
Rx1
UR #1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #2
Tx2
Rx2 3
Tx1
Rx1
UR #3
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #4
Tx2
Rx2
842007A1.CDR
Figure 3–33: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION

The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels.
UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication chan-
nels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to cross-
over from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be “Enabled” on UR2. This
forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
Tx
UR #1
Rx
Channel #1
Tx1
Rx1
UR #2
Tx2
Rx2
Channel #2
Tx
UR #3
Rx
842013A1.CDR
Figure 3–34: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION
The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of type 7 commu-
nications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors.
Not all the direct input and output communications modules may be applicable to the M60 relay. Only the modules
specified in the order codes are available as direct input and output communications modules.
NOTE

Table 3–6: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

MODULE SPECIFICATION
2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
2E Bi-phase, 1 channel
2F Bi-phase, 2 channel
2G IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
2S Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply
2T Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply
72 1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
3 73 1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 2 channels
74 Channel 1 - RS422; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
75 Channel 1 - G.703; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel
7E Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode
7F Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
7L Channel 1: RS422, channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
7Q Channel 1: G.703, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser
7R G.703, 1 channel
7S G.703, 2 channels
7T RS422, 1 channel
7V RS422, 2 channels, 2 clock inputs
7W RS422, 2 channels
Observing any fiber transmitter output can cause eye injury.

CAUTION

3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: 7A / 7B / 7C 7H / 7I / 7J
Connection Location: Slot X Slot X
RX1 RX1
TX1 TX1
RX2
3
TX2
1 Channel 2 Channels 831719A2.CDR
Figure 3–35: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: 72/ 7D 73/ 7K

Connection Location: Slot X Slot X
TX1 TX1
RX1 RX1
TX2
RX2
1 Channel 2 Channels 831720A3.CDR
Figure 3–36: LASER FIBER MODULES

When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed
CAUTION the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
NOTICE maximum optical input power to the receiver.

3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  DIRECT I/O DATA RATE
setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Con-
necting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a
or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
X 1a
3
Shield
7S
Tx – X 1b
G.703
channel 1 Rx – X 2a
Inter-relay communications Tx + X 2b
Rx + X 3a
Surge X 3b
Shield X 6a
Tx – X 6b
G.703
channel 2
Rx – X 7a
Tx + X 7b
Rx + X 8a
Surge X 8b
842773A2.CDR
Figure 3–37: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrange-
ment of these pins, see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Shld. X 1a X 1a Shld.
7S
7S
Tx - X 1b X 1b Tx -
G.703 G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx - X 2a X 2a Rx -
CHANNEL 1
Tx + X 2b X 2b Tx +
Rx + X 3a X 3a Rx +
SURGE X 3b X 3b SURGE
Shld. X 6a X 6a Shld.
Tx - X 6b X 6b Tx -
G.703 G.703
Rx - X 7a X 7a Rx -
COMM.
COMM.
CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 2
Tx + X 7b X 7b Tx +
Rx + X 8a X 8a Rx +
SURGE X 8b X 8b SURGE
831727A3.CDR
Figure 3–38: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES

Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts num-
bered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that “A” is equivalent to “+” and “B” is equivalent
NOTE
to “–”.
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S). The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module,
must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control
power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that
the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2. Remove the module cover screw.
3. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.

6. Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 3–39: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
Table 3–7: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS

SWITCHES FUNCTION
S1 OFF → octet timing disabled
ON → octet timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6 S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF → loop timing mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF → internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON → minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON → dual loopback mode
c) G.703 OCTET TIMING

If octet timing is enabled (on), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting
to higher order systems. When M60s are connected back to back, octet timing should be disabled (off).
d) G.703 TIMING MODES

There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
• Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in
the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing
(S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
• Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (UR-
to-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).

The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:
842752A1.CDR
e) G.703 TEST MODES
3 In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module
after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R
842774A1.CDR
Figure 3–40: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE

In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/
transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R
842775A1.CDR
Figure 3–41: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE

3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T) and dual-channel
RS422 (module 7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable is
recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
• Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both.
• Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Single-channel RS422 module Dual-channel RS422 module
~ 3b Tx – ~ 3b Tx – 3
7W
7T
~ 3a Rx – ~ 3a Rx –
RS422
~ 2a Tx + RS422 ~ 2a Tx +
channel 1
Inter-relay comms.
~ 4b Rx + ~ 4b Rx +
~ 6a Shield ~ 6a Shield
Inter-relay communications
~ 7a ~ 5b Tx –
Clock
~ 8b ~ 5a Rx –
RS422
~ 2b COM ~ 4a Tx +
channel 2
~ 8a Surge ~ 6b Rx +
~ 7b Shield
~ 7a
Clock
~ 8b
~ 2b COM
~ indicates the slot position ~ 8a Surge

842776A3.CDR
Figure 3–42: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Figure 3–43: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES
b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS

The RS422 interface may be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed sys-
tems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion
observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications,
certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function cor-
rectly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a
common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the
terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing out-
puts from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the clock inputs of the UR–RS422 interface in the usual fashion.
In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2.
By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both UR–RS422 channels will be derived from a single
clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the UR–RS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads
on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.

Data module 1
Signal name
Tx1(+) W 2a SD(A) - Send data
7W
Tx1(-) W 3b SD(B) - Send data
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+) W 4b RD(A) - Received data
Rx1(-) W 3a RD(B) - Received data
Shld. W 6a RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
+ W 7a RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CLOCK
– W 8b RT(A) - Receive timing
Tx2(+) W 4a RT(B) - Receive timing
Tx2(-) W 5b CS(A) - Clear To send
RS422
CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+) W 6b CS(B) - Clear To send
Rx2(-) W 5a Local loopback
Shld. W 7b Remote loopback
com W 2b Signal ground
SURGE W 8a ST(A) - Send timing
3
ST(B) - Send timing
Data module 2
Signal name
TT(A) - Terminal timing
TT(B) - Terminal timing
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
831022A3.CDR
Figure 3–44: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION

Data module 1 provides timing to the M60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides
timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSMIT TIMING
The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit
timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is impor-
tant to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the
positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 3–45: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS
d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.

To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a
data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74
modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed
via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at
one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maxi-
NOTICE mum optical input power to the receiver.
3
~ 1a Clock
7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 74

~ 1b (channel 1)
~ 2b COM
~ 2a Tx1 +
~ 3a Rx1 –
RS422
~ 3b Tx1 –
channel 1
Inter-relay comms.
~ 4b Rx1 +
~ 6a Shield
Fiber
Tx2 Rx2 channel 2
~ 8a Surge
842777A1.CDR
Figure 3–46: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units.
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 mod-
ules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and chan-
nel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to
pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sec-
tions for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
NOTICE maximum optical input power to the receiver.
~ 1a
7E, 7F, 7G,
7Q,75
Shield
~ 1b Tx –
G.703
~ 2a Rx –
channel 1
~ 2b Tx +
communications
~ 3a Rx +
~ 3b Surge
Inter-relay
Tx2 Fiber
Rx2 channel 2
842778A1.CDR
Figure 3–47: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 2G, 2H, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with
IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and
output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link
for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard
provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either
64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) or 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-
T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a
frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:.
• IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 × 128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 × 64 kbps opti-
3 •
cal fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules).
Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber.
• Fiber optic mode: multi-mode.
• Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km.
• Fiber optic connector: type ST.
• Wavelength: 830 ±40 nm.
• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as
shown below.
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 76 and 77 for C37.94 communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 76 and 77 shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on the module and is to be used on all ends of M60 commu-
nication for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms.
For customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.

The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions
of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. therefore, the timing switch selection should be inter-
nal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured. 3
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 76 or 77 module):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
4. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
6. Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged posi-
tion as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 3–48: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 com-
pliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode
fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for
synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard pro-
vides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only
with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from
the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit
rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
• Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps).
• Fiber optic cable type: 9/125 μm core diameter optical fiber. 3
• Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver.
• Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km.
• Fiber optic connector: type ST.
• Wavelength: 1300 ±40 nm.
• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that sup-
ports C37.94SM as shown below.
It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 2A and 2B for C37.94SM communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 2A and 2B shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on the module and is to be used on all ends of M60 commu-
nication for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms.
For customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.

The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The func-
tions of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
3 internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
4. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
6. Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged posi-
tion as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 3–49: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3 HARDWARE
3.4MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3.4.1 OVERVIEW
The type 2S and 2T embedded managed switch modules are supported by UR-series relays containing type 9S CPU mod-
ules with revisions 5.5x and higher. The modules communicate to the M60 through an internal Ethernet port (referred to as
the UR port or port 7) and provide an additional six external Ethernet ports: two 10/100Base-T ports and four multimode ST
100Base-FX ports.
The Ethernet switch module should be powered up before or at the same time as the M60. Otherwise, the switch
module will not be detected on power up and the EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: ORDERCODE XXX self-test warning will be
NOTE issued.
3.4.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE
3 The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10/100Base-T and four multimode ST 100Base-FX
external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module. In addition, a serial console port is accessible from the
front of the module (requires the front panel faceplate to be open).
The pin assignment for the console port signals is shown in the following table.
Table 3–8: CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 CD Carrier detect (not used)
2 RXD Receive data (input)
3 TXD Transmit data (output)
4 N/A Not used
5 GND Signal ground
6 to 9 N/A Not used
Two 10/100Base-T
ports
Four 100Base-FX
multimode ports
with ST connectors
RS232
console port
Independent power
supply. Options:
2S: high-voltage
2T: low-voltage
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW

842867A2.CDR
Figure 3–50: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES HARDWARE

3 HARDWARE 3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
The wiring for the managed Ethernet switch module is shown below.
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH 7[
67
5[ %DVH);
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH 7[ %DVH);
5[ )LEHU
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH 7[ %DVH); SRUWV
5[
00ILEHURSWLFFDEOH 7[
5[ %DVH);
%DVH7FDEOH %DVH7 &RSSHU

%DVH7
SRUWV
%DVH7FDEOH
WR9'& :D
WR9$& ² :E ³ 3RZHUVXSSO\
&38
:D *5281'
$&'5
Figure 3–51: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE WIRING

3
3.4.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS
The 10/100Base-T and 100Base-FX ports have LED indicators to indicate the port status.
The 10/100Base-T ports have three LEDs to indicate connection speed, duplex mode, and link activity. The 100Base-FX
ports have one LED to indicate linkup and activity.
Connection speed indicator (OFF = 10 Mbps; ON = 100 Mbps)

Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
Duplex mode indicator (OFF = half-duplex; ON = full-duplex)
Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
842868A2.CDR
Figure 3–52: ETHERNET SWITCH LED INDICATORS
3.4.4 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE
A suitable IP/gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation. The
Switch has been shipped with a default IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Consult your net-
work administrator to determine if the default IP address, subnet mask or default gateway needs to be modified.
Do not connect to network while configuring the switch module.
CAUTION

a) CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MODULE IP SETTINGS

In our example configuration of both the Switch’s IP address and subnet mask must be changed to 3.94.247.229 and
255.255.252.0 respectively. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway can be configured using either EnerVista
UR Setup software, the Switch’s Secure Web Management (SWM), or through the console port using CLI.
1. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item to open the
Ethernet switch configuration window.
2. Enter “3.94.247.229” in the IP Address field and “255.255.252.0” in the Subnet Mask field, then click OK.
The software will send the new settings to the M60 and prompt as follows when complete.
3. Cycle power to the M60 and switch module to activate the new settings.
b) SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE

The M60 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file. This file con-
tains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard M60 settings file.
This feature allows the switch module settings to be saved locally before performing firmware upgrades. Saving settings
files is also highly recommended before making any change to the module configuration or creating new setting files.
The following procedure describes how to save local settings files for the Ethernet switch module.
1. Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Retreive Settings File item from the device settings tree.

The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3. Enter an appropriate folder and file name and click Save.

All settings files will be saved as text files and the corresponding file extension automatically assigned.
c) UPLOADING ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS FILES TO THE MODULE

The following procedure describes how to upload local settings files to the Ethernet switch module. It is highly recom-
mended that the current settings are saved to a settings file before uploading a new settings file.
It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch. When transferring
settings files from one switch to another, the user must reconfigure the IP address.
NOTE
1. Select the desired device from site tree in the online window.
2. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File >
Transfer Settings File item from the device settings tree.
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3. Navigate to the folder containing the Ethernet switch settings file, select the file, then click Open.
The settings file will be transferred to the Ethernet switch and the settings uploaded to the device.

3.4.5 UPLOADING M60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE
a) DESCRIPTION
This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a UR-2S or UR-2T switch module.
There are several ways of updating firmware on a switch module:
• Using the EnerVista UR Setup software.
• Serially using the M60 switch module console port.
• Using FTP or TFTP through the M60 switch module console port.
It is highly recommended to use the EnerVista UR Setup software to upgrade firmware on a M60 switch module.
Firmware upgrades using the serial port, TFTP, and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual.
3 NOTE
b) SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION

The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site. Use the following procedure to
determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch
1. Log into the switch using the EnerVista web interface.
The default switch login ID is “manager” and the default password is “manager”.
NOTE
The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen.
Version: 2.1 beta 842869A1.CDR
2. Using the EnerVista UR Setup program, select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch
> Firmware Upload menu item.

The following popup screen will appear warning that the settings will be lost when the firmware is upgraded.
It is highly recommended that you save the switch settings before upgrading the firmware.
NOTE
3. After saving the settings file, proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning.
Another window will open, asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded. 3
4. Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch, and select the Open option.
The following window will pop up, indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress.
If the firmware load was successful, the following window will appear:
Note

The switch will automatically reboot after a successful firmware file transfer.
NOTE
5. Once the firmware has been successfully uploaded to the switch module, load the settings file using the procedure
described earlier.
3.4.6 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
The following table provides details about Ethernet module self-test errors.
Be sure to enable the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL setting in the PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS menu
and the relevant PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings under the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS 
ETHERNET SWITCH menu.
3 Table 3–9: ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS

ACTIVATION SETTING (SET EVENT NAME EVENT CAUSE POSSIBLE CAUSES
AS ENABLED)
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL ETHERNET MODULE No response has been • Loss of switch power.
OFFLINE received from the Ethernet • IP/gateway/subnet.
module after five successive • Incompatibility between the CPU and
polling attempts. the switch module.
• UR port (port 7) configured incorrectly
or blocked
• Switch IP address assigned to another
device in the same network.
PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6 ETHERNET PORT 1 An active Ethernet port has • Ethernet connection broken.
EVENTS OFFLINE to ETHERNET returned a FAILED status. • An inactive port’s events have been
PORT 6 OFFLINE enabled.
No setting required; the M60 EQUIPMENT The M60 has not detected the The M60 failed to see the switch module
will read the state of a general MISMATCH: Card XXX presence of the Ethernet on power-up, because switch won’t
purpose input/output port on Missing switch via the bus board. power up or is still powering up. To clear
the main CPU upon power-up the fault, cycle power to the M60.
and create the error if there is a
conflict between the input/
output state and the order
code.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (refer to the Faceplate inter-
face section in this chapter).
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation
of relay functions, connected over local or wide-area networks. It can be used while disconnected (off-line) or connected
(on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line
mode, communication with the device is real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every M60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Win-
dows® 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface
features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software
interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerV-
ista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the M60 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW

4
a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the M60
relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any
number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES

The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
• While connected to a relay to modify relay settings, and then save the settings to the relay.
• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Device definition
• Product setup
• System setup
• FlexLogic™
• Grouped elements
• Control elements
• Inputs/outputs
• Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the M60 with settings files.
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus IP Port Number
RS485 COM1 Baud Rate
RS485 COM1 Parity
COM1 Minimum Response Time

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate

RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number
Network Address NSAP
IEC61850 Config GOOSE ConfRev
c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC™

You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.
4 d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following:
• Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest.
• Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of
power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
• Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus
to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from
the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
• Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabet-
ically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a M60 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The correspond-
ing instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firm-
NOTE
ware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
1. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view.
2. Main window menu bar.
3. Main window tool bar.
4. Site list control bar window.
5. Settings list control bar window.
6. Device data view windows, with common tool bar.
7. Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar.
8. Workspace area with data view tabs.
9. Status bar.
10. Quick action hot links.
842786A3.CDR
Figure 4–1: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An exam-
ple of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example,
these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate
on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers install-
ing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings tem-
plates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The func-
tionality is identical for both purposes.
The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the M60 firmware are at ver-
sions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
4 a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem-
plate for UR-series settings files.
1. Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2. Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing
mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1. Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2. Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be
at least four characters in length.
3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic™ equation editor settings are locked.
1. With the template already enabled, locate the device or settings file in the Online or Offline Window area in the soft-
ware.
2. Right-click the device or file and select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template
editing mode. If prompted, enter the template password then click OK.
3. Open the relevant settings window that contains settings to be specified as viewable.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window also indicates that the EnerVista software is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 4–2: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

4. Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them. 4
The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 4–3: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

5. Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
6. Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
The next time that the device/settings are accessed, only those specified as viewable/editable display in the menu
hierarchy.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

GE recommends that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
To add password protection to a settings file template:

1. In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Password Protect Template
option.

The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.

The settings file template is now secured with password protection.
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
• Display only those settings available for editing.
4 • Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.
3. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode >
View In Template Mode option.
4. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The
effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Figure 4–4: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND

Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied. Typical settings tree view with template applied via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 4–5: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template. 4
View All Settings option.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings
will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied. Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 4–6: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND
e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once a settings template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before use.
3. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and select the Template Mode > Remove Template
option.
4. Enter the template password and click OK to continue.

5. Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.
4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic™ equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic™ applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
FlexLogic™ equations.
Secured FlexLogic™ equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION ENTRIES
4 To lock individual entries of a FlexLogic™ equation:

1. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the set-
tings template feature.
2. If prompted, enter the template password.
3. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic™ entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on
the upper right of the window also indicates that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
4. Specify the entries to lock by clicking on them.
The locked entries display against a grey background as shown in the example.
Figure 4–7: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE

5. Click the Save button to save and apply changes to the settings template.
6. Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
7. Optionally apply a password to the template by right-clicking the device and selecting the Template Mode > Pass-
word Protect Template option.

Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic™ entries not locked by the tem-
plate. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic™ entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied. Typical FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via
842861A1.CDR
Figure 4–8: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES 4

The FlexLogic™ entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
Figure 4–9: SECURED FLEXLOGIC™ IN GRAPHICAL VIEW
b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER

A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number. Once FlexLogic entries in a
settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number. A serial number is
viewable under Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information, the inside front panel, and the rear of the device.

1. Right-click the setting file in the Offline Window area and select the Edit Settings File Properties option. The window
opens.
Figure 4–10: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

4 2. Enter the serial number of the M60 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
3. Click the OK button to apply the change. The serial number is not validated.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic™ equations are now locked to the M60 device specified by the serial
number.
4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a M60 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a M60 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the M60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This infor-
mation can be compared with the M60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the M60
device or obtained from the M60 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
1 SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the settings file when settings files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the

SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE
2
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised. SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE. 842864A1.CDR
Figure 4–11: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
1. The transfer date of a setting file written to a M60 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or
the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2. Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes
have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an M60 device.
The M60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
842863A1.CDR
Figure 4–12: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data
in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 4–13: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The M60 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the
example below.
Traceability data in online

device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 4–14: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES
4 The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature

• If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file.
• If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
• If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file.
• If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file.
4.2.4 AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATOR
The EnerVista UR Setup software suite contains an automatic configurator for motor starting settings. The configurator
automatically populates settings and operands for input relays, output relays, trip bus, AC inputs, and signal sources based
on user requirements and the relay features.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.3.1 FACEPLATE
a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The
front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional user-
programmable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules.
Five column LED indicator panel
Display
Keypad
Control
pushbuttons (3) 4
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16 842810A2.CDR
Figure 4–15: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE
b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The
front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional user-
programmable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal
arrangement of the faceplate panels.
LED panel 1 LED panel 2 LED panel 3
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
Small user-programmable User-programmable

(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7 Keypad
pushbuttons 1 to 12
827801A7.CDR
Figure 4–16: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.
Figure 4–17: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS
4.3.2 LED INDICATORS
The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event
cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is
intended for connection to a portable PC.
The USER keys are not used in this unit.
842811A1.CDR
Figure 4–18: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The status indicators in the first column are described below.
• IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are
OK, and that the device has been programmed.

• TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode.
• TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic™ operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
• PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
The event cause indicators in the first column are described below.
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate oper-
ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
• VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved. 4
• CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is user-
defined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label pack-
age of every M60, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is
used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions
can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection
to a portable PC.
The USER keys are not used in this unit.
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TROUBLE CURRENT RESET
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1
ALARM PHASE A
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3
842781A1.CDR
Figure 4–19: LED PANEL 1

STATUS INDICATORS:
• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
relay has been programmed.
• TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
• TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
4 All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate oper-
ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs.
• VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS:
The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a
customized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
842782A1.CDR
Figure 4–20: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)

DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2:
The default labels are intended to represent:

• GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.

Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting
groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups.
NOTE
Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained
in the following section.
SETTINGS IN USE
842783A1.CDR
4
Figure 4–21: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)
4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
The following procedure requires the pre-requisites listed below.
• EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational.
• The M60 settings have been saved to a settings file.
• The M60 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/products/support/ur/URLEDenhanced.doc and printed.
• Small-bladed knife.
This procedure describes how to create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display.
1. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.

2. Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window
will be displayed.
4
Figure 4–22: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW
3. Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided.
4. Feed the M60 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
5. When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
6. Remove the M60 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These
tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part number
facing the user.
NOTE
The label package shipped with every M60 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet,
and the label removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match
them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool.
1. Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.

2. Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the M60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom
labels.
1. Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from
the relay.
4
2. Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the LED
label.

3. Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.
4. Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the M60 enhanced front
panel and insert the custom labels.
1. Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the
bent tab is pointing away from the relay.

2. Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will
attach the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3. Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.
4

4. Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons,
as shown below.
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/support/urfamily.htm
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin part number: 1501-0014).
F60 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY

R
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
842771A1.CDR
2. Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the
plastic covers.
( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )
F60
R
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
842722A1.CDR
3. Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4. Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.

The following items are required to customize the M60 display module:
• Black and white or color printer (color preferred).
• Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template.
• 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069),
and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).
The following procedure describes how to customize the M60 display module:
1. Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3. Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the
clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
4.3.4 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting condi-
4
tions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad
and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
4.3.5 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting
values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alterna-
tively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may
be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL
a) INTRODUCTION
The M60 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic™ operand. A setting is provided to assign names
to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for
two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING

Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1-
pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed posi-
tion. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in
agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.

c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS

For the following example setup, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The
USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key
is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
ENTER COMMAND This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
PASSWORD COMMAND PASSWORD is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no com-
mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
Press USER 1 This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This mes-
To Select Breaker sage will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
4 USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2)
and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
To Close BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
To Open BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to
that described above for two breakers.
4.3.7 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading
pages:
• Actual values.
• Settings.
• Commands.
• Targets.
• User displays (when enabled).

b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, contin-
ually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
 SETTINGS  PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL:

 PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY Restricted
 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION

4
 ACTUAL VALUES Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
 STATUS page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE
keys to display the other actual value headers.

 SETTINGS Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
 PRODUCT SETUP contains settings to configure the relay.

 SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page con-
 SYSTEM SETUP tains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN
keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page
header.

 PASSWORD From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT
 SECURITY key once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).

ACCESS LEVEL: Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Restricted Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the
 remaining setting messages for this sub-header.
 PASSWORD Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
 SECURITY

 DISPLAY Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key will display the second setting sub-header asso-
 PROPERTIES ciated with the Product Setup header.

FLASH MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
TIME: 1.0 s Display Properties.

DEFAULT MESSAGE To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
INTENSITY: 25% repeatedly press the MESSAGE DOWN key. The last message appears as shown.

4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  FLASH
TIME: 1.0 s MESSAGE TIME setting.

MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key
MAXIMUM: 10.0 again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
• 0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is
entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MES-
SAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
• VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed.
4 While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward
from the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the mini-
mum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again will allow the setting selection to con-
tinue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
TIME: 2.5 s numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
 being entered.
NEW SETTING Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
HAS BEEN STORED ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear
as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places
will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step
value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL: For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
Restricted "Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the
VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selec-
Setting tion is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing
HAS BEEN STORED ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as
confirmation of the storing process.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.

There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific appli-
cations. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”.
1. Press the decimal to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press ENTER to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for sev-
eral seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
RELAY SETTINGS: When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and
Not Programmed this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safe-
guarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have
not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Pro-
grammed" state.
4
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS

 SETTINGS  PASSWORD
 PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES
↓
 INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS:

 Not Programmed
5. After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6. Press the ENTER key.
RELAY SETTINGS: RELAY SETTINGS: NEW SETTING

Not Programmed Programmed HAS BEEN STORED
7. When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

The M60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.

Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry
and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear com-
munications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
enables this functionality.
To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
 PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL:
 SECURITY Restricted
 CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE COMMAND
 PASSWORDS PASSWORD: No
4 CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ---------
ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ---------
5. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the
selection to “Yes”.
6. Press the ENTER key and the display will prompt you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key.
8. When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING ENTER NEW VERIFY NEW

PASSWORD: Yes PASSWORD: ########## PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
9. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be
active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding encrypted password from the PASSWORD
SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.
g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY

When an incorrect command or setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a 3-minute
time span, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “On” and the M60 will not allow settings or com-
mand level access via the faceplate interface for the next five minutes, or in the event that an incorrect Command Or Set-

ting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a 3-minute time span, the
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “On” and the M60 will not allow settings or command access
via the any external communications interface for the next five minutes.
In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications inter-
face three times within a three-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “On” and
the M60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes.
The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic™ operand will be set to “Off” after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.


5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
 SETTINGS  SECURITY
See page 5-8.
 PRODUCT SETUP 
 DISPLAY
See page 5-12.
 PROPERTIES
 CLEAR RELAY
See page 5-14.
 RECORDS
 COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5-15.

 MODBUS USER MAP
See page 5-38.

 REAL TIME
See page 5-39.
 CLOCK
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-40.
 FAULT REPORT
 OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 5-41.

 DATA LOGGER
See page 5-43.

5
See page 5-44.
 LEDS
See page 5-47.
 SELF TESTS
 CONTROL
See page 5-48.
 PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-49.
 PUSHBUTTONS
 FLEX STATE
See page 5-54.
 PARAMETERS
 USER-DEFINABLE
See page 5-55.
 DISPLAYS
 DIRECT I/O
See page 5-57.

 TELEPROTECTION
See page 5-65.

 INSTALLATION
See page 5-65.

 SETTINGS  AC INPUTS
See page 5-68.
 SYSTEM SETUP 
 POWER SYSTEM
See page 5-69.

 SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 5-70.


5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
 MOTOR
See page 5-72.

 BREAKERS
See page 5-75.

 SWITCHES
See page 5-79.

 FLEXCURVES
See page 5-82.

 SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-104.
 FLEXLOGIC  EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-104.
 TIMERS
 FLEXELEMENTS
See page 5-105.

 NON-VOLATILE
See page 5-109.
 LATCHES
 SETTINGS  SETTING GROUP 1

See page 5-110.
 GROUPED ELEMENTS 
5  SETTING GROUP 2

↓
 SETTING GROUP 6

 SETTINGS  TRIP BUS

See page 5-185.
 CONTROL ELEMENTS 
 SETTING GROUPS
See page 5-187.

 SELECTOR SWITCH
See page 5-188.

 UNDERFREQUENCY
See page 5-194.

 OVERFREQUENCY
See page 5-195.

 START SUPERVISION
See page 5-196.

 REDUCED VOLTAGE
See page 5-199.
 STARTING
 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
See page 5-201.

 DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 5-205.


 MONITORING
See page 5-207.
 ELEMENTS
 SETTINGS  CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-217.
 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 
 VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 5-219.

 CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 5-220.

 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 5-222.

 REMOTE DEVICES
See page 5-223.

 REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5-224.

 REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 5-225.

 REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-225.
 DNA BIT PAIRS
 REMOTE OUTPUTS
 UserSt BIT PAIRS
See page 5-226.
5
 RESETTING
See page 5-226.

 DIRECT INPUTS
See page 5-227.

 DIRECT OUTPUTS
See page 5-227.

 TELEPROTECTION
See page 5-230.

 IEC 61850
See page 5-232.
 GOOSE ANALOGS
 IEC 61850
See page 5-234.
 GOOSE UINTEGERS
 SETTINGS  DCMA INPUTS

See page 5-235.
 TRANSDUCER I/O 
 RTD INPUTS
See page 5-236.

 RRTD INPUTS
See page 5-238.

 DCMA OUTPUTS
See page 5-242.

 SETTINGS TEST MODE

See page 5-246.
 TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled

TEST MODE FORCING:

See page 5-246.
On
 FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-247.
 INPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-248.
 OUTPUTS
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The compar-
ator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to deter-
mine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog parameter
actual values as the input.
An exception to this rule is digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.
NOTE
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with
six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by
the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active
5 setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT.
Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or pri-
mary current to which the sum is scaled (that is, normalized to the larger of the two rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 =
300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will
be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary.
For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based
on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V delta-connected VTs, the second-
ary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- × 120 = 115 V (EQ 5.1)
14400
For wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- × 120
---------- = 66.4 V (EQ 5.2)
14400 3
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
• FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as “Enabled”. The factory
default is “Disabled”. Once programmed to “Enabled”, any element associated with the function becomes active and all
options become available.
• NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
• SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.

• PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
• PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup
and operate output states.
• RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
• BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
• TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to “Disabled”,
no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to
“Self-Reset”, the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element, and self-resets once the
operate element condition clears. When set to “Latched”, the target message and LED indication will remain visible
after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay.
• EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout or operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to “Disabled”, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
“Enabled”, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0. 5
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The M60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two
three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker fail-
ure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying
and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each
of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped
with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the
AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements.
Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control
comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component,
total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process
by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels.
The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of
phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation.
A mechanism called a source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources,
in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains
all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some
of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage
from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. (The
breaker-and-a-half scheme is used for illustrative purposes and is available on select UR products.) In this application, the
current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location or power
equipment, and some current flows into transformer winding 1. The current into winding 1 is the phasor sum (or difference)
of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT connec-
tions). The same considerations apply to transformer winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net current
for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.

CT1 through current CT2
Winding 1
current
Winding 1
UR-series
relay Power
transformer
Winding 2
CT3 CT4
827791A3.CDR
Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summa-
tion are applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for
example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features
5 that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name
through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can
be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above
diagram, the user configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as “Wdg1 I”.
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the pro-
tection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION

CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 > < bank 3 > < bank 5 >
< bank 2 > < bank 4 > < bank 6 >

The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module 2
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 8
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 4
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the
user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in
which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and
voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make
multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a 5
watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An applica-
tion example of the grouping of parameters in a source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is mea-
sured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.2PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 SECURITY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

 Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
 CHANGE LOCAL
MESSAGE See page 5–9.
 PASSWORDS
 ACCESS
 SUPERVISION
 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS
PASSWORD ACCESS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level
is not available and intended for factory use only.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
• Changing the state of virtual inputs.
• Clearing the event records.
5 •
•
Clearing the oscillography records.
Changing the date and time.
• Clearing energy records.
• Clearing the data logger.
• Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision:
• Changing any setting.
• Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to “0” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is
set to “0”, the password security feature is disabled.
and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the correspond-
ing connection password. If the connection is to the back of the M60, the remote password must be used. If the connection
is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.
The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command ses-
sions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic™ operands.
• ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
• ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
• ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
• ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.
• ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
• ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
• ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
• ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic™ operands and events are updated
every five seconds.
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands
shown above.
NOTE
b) LOCAL PASSWORDS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes

CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED SETTING Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE Note: ---------- indicates no password
PASSWORD: ----------
ENCRYPTED COMMAND Range: 0 to 9999999999
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.
5
When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel
interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according
to the access level timeout setting values.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and
settings.
NOTE
c) REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the
Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 5–2: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists
of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to “0”. The following procedure describes how the set the com-
mand or setting password.
1. Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.
2. Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.
3. Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.
4. If the original password is not “0”, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send
Password to Device button.
5. The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password
value.
d) ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION
 ACCESS  ACCESS LEVEL

 SUPERVISION  TIMEOUTS
INVALID ATTEMPTS Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
PASSWORD LOCKOUT Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DURATION: 5 min
The following access supervision settings are available.

• INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be
entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic™ operands are set to “On”. These operands are returned to the “Off” state upon
expiration of the lockout.
• PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the M60 will lockout password access after
the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The M60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic™ operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.

The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The
operand does not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed
with event logs or targets enabled.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION  ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
 ACCESS LEVEL COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

 TIMEOUTS TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note
that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
• COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
• SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
e) DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS
LOCAL SETTING AUTH:
On
Range: selected FlexLogic™ operands (see below)
5
REMOTE SETTING AUTH: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
On
ACCESS AUTH Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended
upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
• LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic™ operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.
If this setting is “On“, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing
the local setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel.
• REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
required). If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to pro-
viding the remote setting password to gain setting access.
• ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except “On”. The state of the FlexLogic™ oper-
and is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer pro-
grammed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the time-
out is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.

The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required. If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is pro-
vided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable
when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off”. The state of the
FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is per-
mitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer
expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™
operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES

5  DISPLAY LANGUAGE: Range: English; English, French; English, Russian;
 PROPERTIES English English, Chinese
(range dependent on order code)
FLASH MESSAGE Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
MESSAGE Visible only if a VFD is installed
INTENSITY: 25 %
SCREEN SAVER Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE Visible only if an LCD is installed
FEATURE: Disabled
SCREEN SAVER WAIT Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE Visible only if an LCD is installed
TIME: 30 min
CURRENT CUT-OFF Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
• LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is
dependent on the order code of the relay.
• FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal mes-
sages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.

• DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
• SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the M60 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is “Enabled”, the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
• CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The M60 applies a cut-
off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substi-
tuted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical compo-
nents. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
• VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measure-
ments (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual sig-
nal. The M60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical
components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The
power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections:
3 × CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × VT primary × CT primary

5
3-phase power cut-off = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ (EQ 5.3)
VT secondary
For Wye connections:
3 × CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × VT primary × CT primary
3-phase power cut-off = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (EQ 5.4)
VT secondary
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × VT primary × CT primary

per-phase power cut-off = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (EQ 5.5)
VT secondary
where VT primary = VT secondary × VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary × CT ratio.
For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: “0.02 pu”
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: “1.0 V”
PHASE CT PRIMARY: “100 A”
PHASE VT SECONDARY: “66.4 V”
PHASE VT RATIO: “208.00 : 1"
PHASE VT CONNECTION: “Delta”.
We have:
CT primary = “100 A”, and
VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore:
power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × CT primary × VT primary)/VT secondary
= ( 3 × 0.02 pu × 1.0 V × 100 A × 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V
= 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumu-
late if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.

Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as
valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02 pu” for CUR-
NOTE
RENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and “1.0 V” for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
 CLEAR RELAY CLEAR USER REPORTS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 RECORDS Off
CLEAR MOTOR DATA: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
No
CLEAR ENERGY: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR START DATA: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
5 MESSAGE
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand.
Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
Off
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic™ operands. Assigning user-program-
mable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the M60 responds to rising
edges of the configured FlexLogic™ operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-program-
mable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programma-
ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be
applied.
1. Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP
 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
2. Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS
 COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS

See below.
 
 NETWORK

 MODBUS PROTOCOL

 DNP PROTOCOL

 DNP / IEC104
 POINT LISTS
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

 WEB SERVER
 HTTP PROTOCOL
 TFTP PROTOCOL

MESSAGE
 IEC 60870-5-104
See page 5–35. 5
 PROTOCOL
 SNTP PROTOCOL

 EGD PROTOCOL

 ETHERNET SWITCH

b) SERIAL PORTS
The M60 is equipped with up to three independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for
local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet
or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port be used for either RS485 or RRTD communications.

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS
 SERIAL PORTS RS485 COM1 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
 RATE: 19200 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only
active if CPU Type E is ordered.
RS485 COM1 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
None
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type E is ordered
MIN TIME: 0 ms
COM2 USAGE: Range: RS485, RRTD
MESSAGE
RS485
RRTD SLAVE ADDRESS: Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1. Shown only if the COM2
MESSAGE USAGE setting is “RRTD”.
254
RS485 COM2 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
MESSAGE 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Shown
RATE: 19200
only if the COM2 USAGE is setting is “RS485”.
RRTD BAUD RATE: Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200. Shown only if
MESSAGE the COM2 USAGE is setting is “RRTD”.
19200
RS485 COM2 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even.
MESSAGE
None
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10.
MESSAGE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
5 It is important that the baud rate and parity settings agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is
connected to these ports.
The RS485 ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload
setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained
and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
The baud rate for standard RS485 communications can be selected as 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps.
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set.
This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmis-
NOTE
sion.
If the COM2 USAGE setting is “RRTD”, then the COM2 port is used to monitor the RTDs on a remote RTD unit. The remote
RTD unit uses the Modbus RTU protocol over RS485. The RRTD device must have a unique address from 1 to 254. The
baud rate for RRTD communications can be selected as 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, or 19200 bps.
If the RS485 COM2 port is used for an RRTD, then there must not be any other devices connected in the daisy-chain for
any other purpose. The port is strictly dedicated to RRTD usage when COM2 USAGE is selected as “RRTD”.
Power must be cycled to the M60 for changes to the COM2 USAGE setting to take effect.
NOTE

c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK
 NETWORK IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format

 0.0.0.0 Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
SUBNET IP MASK: Range: Standard IP address format

MESSAGE Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered.
0.0.0.0
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format
0.0.0.0
 OSI NETWORK Range: Select to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS.
 ADDRESS (NSAP)
ETHERNET OPERATION Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
MESSAGE Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.
MODE: Full-Duplex
These messages appear only if the M60 is ordered with an Ethernet card.
To obtain a list of all port numbers used, for example for audit purposes, contact GE technical support with substantiating
information, such as the serial number and order code of your device.
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The
NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a set-
ting for the TCP/UDP port number. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally
be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays
behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can
map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured
to use the correct port number if these settings are used. 5
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP port number, or any user map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it
will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-on).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL
 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

 ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see
descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device
only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the M60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS pro-
grammed. For the RS485 ports each M60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address
which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same
address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher
address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.
Changes to the MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting do not take effect until the M60 is restarted.
NOTE

e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL
 DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS Range: see sub-menu below

 
DNP ADDRESS: Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1
 DNP NETWORK Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP TCP/UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 20000
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MAX RETRIES: 10
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
5
FACTOR: 1
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP POWER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP ENERGY SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP PF SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP OTHER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP PF DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP TIME SYNC IIN Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 1440 min

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
SIZE: 240
DNP OBJECT 1 Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 2 Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 20 Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 30 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 32 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
MESSAGE
DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CONTROL POINTS: 0
DNP TCP CONNECTION Range: 10 to 7200 s in steps of 1 5
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 120 s
The M60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The M60 can be used as a DNP slave device con-
nected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the M60 maintains two sets of DNP
data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the M60 at one time.
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION set-
ting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become
NOTE
active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS
 DNP CHANNELS DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
 NONE FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485,
MESSAGE FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NONE
NETWORK - UDP
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol
for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can
be used only in non-Ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to “Network - TCP”, the DNP protocol can be used over
TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to “Network - UDP”, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on chan-
nel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol.
Changes to the DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings take effect only after power has been
cycled to the relay.
NOTE
The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the M60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The
settings in this sub-menu are shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
 DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS 1: Range: standard IP address

 CLIENT ADDRESSES 0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 2: Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the M60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the M60 retransmits an unsolic-
ited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolic-
ited responses are sent is determined by the M60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the M60 analog
input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to “1000”,
all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000
5 V on the M60 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within cer-
tain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value will be 10
times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These
settings group the M60 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolic-
ited responses from the M60 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting
should be set to “15”. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to
change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. Whenever power is removed and
re-applied to the M60, the default deadbands will be in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the M60.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
When the DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) are configured for Ethernet-enabled relays, check
the “DNP Points Lists” M60 web page to view the points lists. This page can be viewed with a web browser by
NOTE
entering the M60 IP address to access the M60 “Main Menu”, then by selecting the “Device Information Menu” >
“DNP Points Lists” menu item.
The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP
default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation
response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP implementation section in
appendix E for additional details.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single
physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the M60 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However,
some legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to sup-
port the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the
DNP master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The M60 can be configured to

support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CON-
TROL POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired oper-
ate on a one-to-one basis.
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the M60 on a DNP communications link. Each
DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If
there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be
aborted by the M60. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting for the changes to take
effect.
NOTE
f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
 DNP / IEC104  BINARY INPUT / MSP Range: see sub-menu below

 POINT LISTS  POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 POINTS
The binary and analog inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, can
configured to a maximum of 256 points. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning
FlexLogic™ operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS 5
 BINARY INPUT / MSP Point: 0 Range: FlexLogic™ operand
 POINTS Off
Point: 1 Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Point: 255 Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by
assigning an appropriate FlexLogic™ operand. Refer to the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section in this chapter for the full
range of assignable operands.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME Point: 0 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

 POINTS Off
Point: 1 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Point: 255 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

MESSAGE
Off
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is config-
ured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the
full range of assignable parameters.

The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first “Off” value. Since DNP / IEC
60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first “Off” point are ignored.
NOTE
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the M60 is restarted.
NOTE
g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE / GOOSE

  CONFIGURATION
 SERVER
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 IEC 61850 LOGICAL
MESSAGE
 NODE NAME PREFIXES
 MMXU DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

 GGIO1 STATUS
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 GGIO2 CONTROL
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
5 MESSAGE
 GGIO4 ANALOG
 CONFIGURATION
 GGIO5 UINTEGER
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 REPORT CONTROL
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 XCBR
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 XSWI
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
The M60 Motor Protection System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability. This
feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2
for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol features are not available if CPU type E is ordered.
The M60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported
over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The M60 operates as an IEC 61850
server. The Remote inputs and outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme.
The EnerVista software includes an interface that is compatible with firmware versions 5.0 to 7.2 to configure subscribers.
Use the Simplified GOOSE Configurator in the Offline Window area.
The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
 GSSE / GOOSE  TRANSMISSION

 CONFIGURATION 
 RECEPTION
MESSAGE


The main transmission menu is shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE...  TRANSMISSION
 TRANSMISSION  GENERAL
 
 GSSE
MESSAGE

 FIXED GOOSE
MESSAGE

 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
MESSAGE

The general transmission settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GSSE/GOOSE...  TRANSMISSION  GENERAL
 GENERAL DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1

 UPDATE TIME: 60 s
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote out-
put state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This
setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval.
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE, fixed M60 GOOSE, and configurable GOOSE.
The GSSE settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GSSE/GOOSE...  TRANSMISSION  GSEE 5
 GSSE GSSE FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled
 Enabled
GSSE ID: Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GSSEOut
DESTINATION MAC: Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
000000000000
These settings are applicable to GSSE only. If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled, GSSE messages are not transmitted.
The GSSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This
string identifies the GSSE message to the receiving device. In M60 releases previous to 5.0x, this name string was repre-
sented by the RELAY NAME setting.

The fixed GOOSE settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT...  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GSSE/GOOSE...  TRANSMISSION  FIXED GOOSE
 FIXED GOOSE GOOSE FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
GOOSE ID: Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GOOSEOut
DESTINATION MAC: Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
000000000000
GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY: Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
4
GOOSE VLAN ID: Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
GOOSE ETYPE APPID: Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
These settings are applicable to fixed (DNA/UserSt) GOOSE only.

The GOOSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE
message. This string identifies the GOOSE message to the receiving device. In revisions previous to 5.0x, this name string
was represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
The DESTINATION MAC setting allows the destination Ethernet MAC address to be set. This address must be a multicast
address; the least significant bit of the first byte must be set. In M60 releases previous to 5.0x, the destination Ethernet
5 MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address (that is, the unique, local MAC address of
the M60) and setting the multicast bit.
The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to
have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the selection of a specific application
ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the GOOSE VLAN
PRIORITY and GOOSE ETYPE APPID settings are required by IEC 61850.
Firmware version 5.83 introduces dynamic GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY, and this feature is included only with firmware version
5.8x, starting with 5.83. Dynamic VLAN priority allows changing the priority of retransmitted GOOSE messages. The first
GOOSE message triggered on a state change has the highest priority and each subsequent re-transmitted GOOSE mes-
sage follows the pre-defined priority level according to the following GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting table. Each subsequent
GOOSE re-transmission (based on the retransmission profile setting) has a priority that is decremented by one count. This
repeats until the actual priority value reaches the “end” of the dynamic priority range. For Instance, a VLAN priority setting
of 7 sets the priority of the first GOOSE publishing to 7. The priority of the first re-transmission of the GOOSE is 6, the prior-
ity of the next re-transmission is 5, and then finally 4.
Table 5–1: DYNAMIC VLAN PRIORITY
UR SETTING ACTUAL PRIORITY
7 7 to 4
6 6 to 4
5 5 to 4
4 default - fixed at 4
3 7 to 5
2 6 to 5
1 fixed at 5
0 fixed at 6

The configurable GOOSE settings are shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS...  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GSSE...  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
 CONFIGURABLE CONFIG GSE 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

 GOOSE 1 FUNCTION: Enabled
CONFIG GSE 1 ID: Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GOOSEOut_1
CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC: Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
010CDC010000
CONFIG GSE 1 Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
VLAN PRIORITY: 4
MESSAGE
VLAN ID: 0
MESSAGE
ETYPE APPID: 0
MESSAGE
CONFREV: 1
CONFIG GSE 1 Range: Aggressive, Medium, Relaxed, Heartbeat
MESSAGE
RESTRANS: Relaxed
 CONFIG GSE 1 Range: 64 data items; each can be set to all valid MMS
MESSAGE data item references for transmitted data
 DATASET ITEMS
5
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the M60 to be configured to transmit a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured and transmitted. This is useful for
intercommunication between M60 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the M60.
The M60 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Datasets 1 and 2 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer trip-
ping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in the required dataset to
enable transmission of configured data. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 or 2 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes-
sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The M60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the M60 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a min-
imum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the M60 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The M60 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error mes-
sage on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
For versions 5.70 and higher, the M60 supports four retransmission schemes: aggressive, medium, relaxed, and heartbeat.
The aggressive scheme is only supported in fast type 1A GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 1 and GOOSEOut 2). For slow
GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 3 to GOOSEOut 8) the aggressive scheme is the same as the medium scheme.

The table shows details about each scheme. Times are maximum values. Retransmitted messages can occur faster than
the times listed.
Table 5–2: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES

SCHEME SQ NUM TIME FROM THE TIME BETWEEN COMMENT TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE
EVENT MESSAGES IN MESSAGE
Aggressive 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 4 ms 4 ms T1 2000 ms
2 8 ms 4 ms T1 2000 ms
3 16 ms 8 ms T2 Heartbeat * 4, 5
4 Heartbeat Heartbeat T0 Heartbeat * 4, 5
Medium 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 16 ms 16 ms T1 2000 ms
2 32 ms 16 ms T1 2000 ms
Relaxed 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 100 ms 100 ms T1 2000 ms
2 200 ms 100 ms T1 2000 ms
5 4
5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
T0
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat * 4, 5
Heartbeat 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 Heartbeat Heartbeat T1 2000 ms
2 Heartbeat Heartbeat T1 2000 ms
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup
software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to
the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1. Configure the transmission dataset.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings.
3. Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1. Configure the reception dataset.

This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1. Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION 
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
– Set ITEM 1 to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q” to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1.
– Set ITEM 2 to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.
– Set ITEM 3 to “MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f” to indicate the analog frequency magnitude for MMXU1 (the metered fre-
quency for SRC1).
The transmission dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog
value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGU-
RABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to “Enabled”.

– Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is “GOOSEOut_1”).
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of “4” is OK for this example.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is “0”, but some switches may require this value to be “1”.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match 5
the configuration on the receiver (the default value is “0”).
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
3. Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC 61850 PROTO-
COL  GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu:
– Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic™ operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example,
a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
4. Configure the MMXU1 Hz Deadband by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION 
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  MMXU DEADBANDS MMXU1 DEADBANDS settings menu:
– Set MMXU1 HZ DEADBAND to “0.050%”. This will result in an update to the MMXU1.MX.mag.f analog value with a
change greater than 45 mHz, from the previous MMXU1.MX.mag.f value, in the source frequency.
The M60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1. Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC
61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
– Set ITEM 3 to “GGIO3.MX.AnIn1.mag.f” to indicate the analog magnitude for GGIO3 analog input 1.
The reception dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog
value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DEVICES
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter “GOOSEOut_1”.

– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is
“0” in the example above.
– Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as “GOOSEIn 1”.
3. Configure the Boolean data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE INPUTS  REMOTE
INPUT 1settings menu:
– Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to “GOOSEOut_1”.
– Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to “Dataset Item 2”. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
4. Configure the analog data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOG
INPUTS settings menu:
– Set the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 DEFAULT VALUE to “60.000”.
– Enter “Hz” for the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS setting.
The GOOSE analog input 1 can now be used as a FlexAnalog™ value in a FlexElement™ or in other settings. The M60
must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of GOOSE analog input 1 in the receiving device will be determined by the MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f value in the
sending device. This MMXU value is determined by the source 1 frequency value and the MMXU Hz deadband setting of
the sending device.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic™ equations or other settings. The M60 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
5 in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com-
plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
For intercommunication between M60 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset con-
tains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the
M60 (DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN
support).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION function to “Disabled” when configuration changes are required. Once changes are
entered, return the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to “Enabled” and restart the unit for changes to take effect.
NOTE
PATH:...TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)  CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS  ITEM 1(64)
 CONFIG GSE 1 ITEM 1: Range: all valid MMS data item references for
 DATASET ITEMS GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal transmitted data
To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated qual-
ity flags, the following dataset items can be selected: “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” and “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q”. The M60 will then cre-
ate a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic™
operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages con-
taining the defined dataset.
The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items
for reception:
PATH:...RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)  CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS
 CONFIG GSE 1 ITEM 1: Range: all valid MMS data item references for
 DATASET ITEMS GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal transmitted data
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the M60 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for
intercommunication between M60 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
For intercommunication between M60 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset con-
tains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages.

To set up a M60 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the
following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): “GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal” and
“GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal”. The M60 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values
from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic™ operands. First, the REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET setting
must be set to contain dataset “GOOSEIn 1” (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM settings
must be set to “Dataset Item 1” and “Dataset Item 2”. These remote input FlexLogic™ operands will then change state in
accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset.
Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (non-
instantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 and higher items.
Received values are also available as FlexAnalog™ parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up).
GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 to GGIO3.MX.AnIn32 can only be used once for all eight reception datasets.
NOTE
The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  SERVER CONFIGURATION
 SERVER IEDNAME: IECDevice Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters

 CONFIGURATION
LD INST: LDInst Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
LOCATION: Location Range: up to 80 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
IEC/MMS TCP PORT
NUMBER: 102
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
5
INCLUDE NON-IEC Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
DATA: Disabled
SERVER SCANNING: Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
Disabled
The IED NAME and LD INST settings represent the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical
nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_)
character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The LOCATION is a
variable string and can be composed of ASCII characters. This string appears within the PhyName of the LPHD node.
The IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The INCLUDE
NON-IEC DATA setting determines whether or not the “UR” MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large num-
ber of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC
61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be
“Disabled”.
The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to “Disabled” when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC
61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the
GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled
to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node sta-
tus values in the M60. Clients will still be able to connect to the server (M60 relay), but most data values will not be updated.
This setting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation.
Changes to the IED NAME setting, LD INST setting, and GOOSE dataset will not take effect until the M60 is restarted.
NOTE

The main menu for the IEC 61850 logical node name prefixes is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
 IEC 61850 LOGICAL  LPHD LOGICAL NODE

 NODE NAME PREFIXES  NAME PREFIXES
 PIOC LOGICAL NODE

MESSAGE
 NAME PREFIXES
 PTOC LOGICAL NODE

MESSAGE
 NAME PREFIXES
↓
 PTRC LOGICAL NODE

MESSAGE
 NAME PREFIXES
The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node.
For example, the logical node “PTOC1” may have the name prefix “abc”. The full logical node name will then be
“abcMMXU1”. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the
underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard.
Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the M60 is restarted.
The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  MMXU DEADBANDS
 MMXU DEADBANDS  MMXU1 DEADBANDS

5  
 MMXU2 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

 MMXU3 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

 MMXU4 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU “mag” and
“cVal” values from the associated “instmag” and “instcVal” values. The “mag” and “cVal” values are used for the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated “db” data items in the CF functional con-
straint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value “shall repre-
sent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%”. Thus, it is important to know the
maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband.
The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows:
• phase current: 46 × phase CT primary setting
• neutral current: 46 × ground CT primary setting
• voltage: 275 × VT ratio setting
• power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46 × phase CT primary setting × 275 × VT ratio setting
• frequency: 90 Hz
• power factor: 2

The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
 GGIO1 STATUS NUMBER OF STATUS Range: 8 to 128 in steps of 8

 CONFIGURATION POINTS IN GGIO1: 8
GGIO1 INDICATION 1 Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off

MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off
The NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting specifies the number of “Ind” (single point status indications) that are
instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. Changes to the NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting will not take effect until
the M60 is restarted.
The GGIO2 control configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GGIO2 CONTROL...  GGIO2 CF SPSCO 1(64)
 GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1 GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1 Range: 0, 1, or 2

 CTLMODEL: 1
The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are “0”
(status only), “1” (direct control), and “2” (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the M60 5
virtual inputs.
The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
 GGIO4 ANALOG NUMBER OF ANALOG Range: 4 to 32 in steps of 4

 CONFIGURATION POINTS IN GGIO4: 4
 GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MESSAGE
 MEASURED VALUE
 GGIO4 ANALOG 2
MESSAGE
 MEASURED VALUE
↓
 GGIO4 ANALOG 32
MESSAGE
 MEASURED VALUE
The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4. When this value is
changed, the M60 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re-instantiated and contain the newly
configured number of analog points.

The measured value settings for each of the 32 analog values are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT...  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GGIO4...  GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE
 GGIO4 ANALOG 1 ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: Range: any FlexAnalog value

 MEASURED VALUE Off
ANALOG IN 1 DB: Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
100.000%
ANALOG IN 1 MIN: Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

MESSAGE of 0.001
0.000
ANALOG IN 1 MAX: Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

MESSAGE of 0.001
1000000.000
These settings are configured as follows.

• ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 ana-
log status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f).
• ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3
for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous
magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values.
• ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determina-
tion of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
• ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
5 61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determi-
nation of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
Note that the ANALOG IN 1 MIN and ANALOG IN 1 MAX settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point
numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded
NOTE to the closest possible floating point number.
The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
 GGIO5 UINTEGER GGIO5 UINT In 1: Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter

 CONFIGURATION Off
GGIO5 UINT In 2: Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter

MESSAGE
Off
↓
GGIO5 UINT 1n 16: Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter

MESSAGE
Off
The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values. This allows access to as many as 16
unsigned integer value points, associated timestamps, and quality flags. The method of configuration is similar to that of
GGIO1 (binary status values). The settings allow the selection of FlexInteger™ values for each GGIO5 integer value point.
It is intended that clients use GGIO5 to access generic integer values from the M60. Additional settings are provided to
allow the selection of the number of integer values available in GGIO5 (1 to 16), and to assign FlexInteger™ values to the
GGIO5 integer inputs. The following setting is available for all GGIO5 configuration points.
• GGIO5 UINT IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexInteger™ value to drive each GGIO5 integer status value
(GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1). This setting is stored as an 32-bit unsigned integer value.

The report control configuration settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850...  REPORT...  REPORT 1(6) CONFIGURATION
 REPORT 1 REPORT 1 Range: up to 66 alphanumeric characters

 CONFIGURATION RptID:
REPORT 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
OptFlds: 0

MESSAGE
BufTm: 0

MESSAGE
TrgOps: 0

MESSAGE
IntgPd: 0
Changes to the report configuration take effect when the M60 is restarted.
Disconnect any IEC 61850 client connection to the M60 prior to making setting changes to the report configuration.
Disconnecting the rear Ethernet connection from the M60 disconnects the IEC 61850 client connection.
NOTE
The breaker configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  XCBR CONFIGURATION
 XCBR XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 CONFIGURATION Off 5
XCBR2 ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
XCBR6 ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt: Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
No

MESSAGE
No
↓

MESSAGE
No
The CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt setting represents the breaker operating counter. As breakers operate by opening and closing, the
XCBR operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent breaker operation may result
in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XCBR1.

The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is
restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  XSWI CONFIGURATION
 XSWI XSWI 1ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 CONFIGURATION Off
XSWI 2ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
↓
XSWI24ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR XSWI 1OpCnt: Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
No
CLEAR XSWI 2OpCnt: Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
No
↓
CLEAR XSWI24OpCnt: Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
No
The CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt setting represents the disconnect switch operating counter. As disconnect switches operate by
opening and closing, the XSWI operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent switch
5 operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XSWI1.
Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast Ethernet by specification, they will not usually be forwarded by net-
work routers. However, GOOSE messages may be fowarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN
NOTE functionality.
h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
 WEB SERVER HTTP TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

 HTTP PROTOCOL NUMBER: 80
The M60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. This feature is available only if the M60 has the ethernet option installed. The web
pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the M60 “Main Menu”. Web pages are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, etc. The web pages can be
accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The main menu will be displayed in the web
browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the M60 into the “Address” box on the web browser.
i) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  TFTP PROTOCOL
 TFTP PROTOCOL TFTP MAIN UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

 NUMBER: 69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the M60 over a network. The M60 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the M60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).

j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-104 Range: Enabled, Disabled

 PROTOCOL FUNCTION: Disabled
IEC TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 2404
 IEC NETWORK Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
IEC COMMON ADDRESS Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
OF ASDU: 0
IEC CYCLIC DATA Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 60 s
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC PF DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 5
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC REDUNDANCY Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
ENABLED: No
The M60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The M60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to
a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the M60 maintains two sets of IEC
60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the M60 at one time.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the M60 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger
spontaneous responses from the M60 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD set-
ting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of mea-
sured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the M60, the default thresholds will be in effect.
The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not. If redundancy is set to Yes,
two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time.
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be used simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION set-
ting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become
NOTE
active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL  IEC NETWORK CLIENT
ADDRESSES
 IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS 1: Range: Standard IPV4 address format

 CLIENT ADDRESSES 0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 2: Range: Standard IPV4 address format
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
The UR can specify a maximum of five clients for its IEC 104 connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to
which the UR can connect.
A maximum of two simultaneous connections are supported at any given time.
k) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SNTP PROTOCOL
 SNTP PROTOCOL SNTP FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
5 MESSAGE
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: Range: Standard IP address format
0.0.0.0
SNTP UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 123
The M60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the M60 can obtain clock time
over an Ethernet network. The M60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a
dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the M60 clock for
as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If
either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the M60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is “Enabled”, the M60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the M60 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the M60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to “0.0.0.0” and SNTP FUNCTION to “Enabled”. The
M60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The M60 waits up to eighteen
minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.
l) EGD PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL
 EGD PROTOCOL  FAST PROD EXCH 1

  CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 2
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION

The M60 Motor Protection System is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications
capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering sec-
tion of chapter 2 for additional details. The Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol feature is not available if
CPU Type E is ordered.
The relay supports one fast Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items
in the fast-produced EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes.
The relay can be configured to ‘produce’ EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to ‘consume’ EGD
data exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the
exchange production rate can be configured.
EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR-series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD
exchange will not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to
a valid Modbus register address. Note that the default setting value of “0” is considered invalid.
The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL  FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
 FAST PROD EXCH 1 EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disable, Enable

 CONFIGURATION Disable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1
MESSAGE
5
1000 ms
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE (Modbus register address range)
0
↓

MESSAGE (Modbus register address range)
0
Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The M60 has one fast exchange (Exchange 1) and
two slow exchanges (Exchanges 2 and 3).
The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL  SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1 EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disable, Enable

 CONFIGURATION Disable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: Range: 500 to 1000 ms in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1000 ms
MESSAGE (Modbus register address range in decimal)
0
↓

MESSAGE (Modbus register address range in decimal)
0
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the
fast and slow exchanges are described below:
• EXCH 1 DESTINATION: This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usu-
ally unicast or broadcast.

• EXCH 1 DATA RATE: This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms,
the exchange data will be updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data will be
updated and sent once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a
setting range of 500 to 1000 ms.
• EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50: These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any
data from the M60 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting
Modbus register address for the data item in decimal format. Refer to Appendix B for the complete Modbus memory
map. Note that the Modbus memory map displays shows addresses in hexadecimal format; as such, it will be neces-
sary to convert these values to decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints.
To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item.
That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values),
only the first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items
up to the first setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid
Modbus addresses and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange will contain three data items.
m) ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  ETHERNET SWITCH
 ETHERNET SWITCH SWITCH IP ADDRESS: Range: standard IP address format

 127.0.0.1
SWITCH MODBUS TCP Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PORT NUMBER: 502
PORT 1 EVENTS: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
5 Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
↓

MESSAGE
Disabled
These settings appear only if the M60 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T).
The IP address and Modbus TCP port number for the Ethernet switch module are specified in this menu. These settings
are used in advanced network configurations. Please consult the network administrator before making changes to these
settings. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) is the preferred interface to configure these settings.
The PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings allow Ethernet switch module events to be logged in the event
recorder.
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  MODBUS USER MAP
 MODBUS USER MAP ADDRESS 1: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 VALUE: 0
ADDRESS 2: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0
↓
ADDRESS 256: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
VALUE: 0

The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is dis-
played in the VALUE line. A value of “0” in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS lines incremented by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” will be dis-
played for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK
 REAL TIME IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
 CLOCK None
REAL TIME CLOCK Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
LOCAL TIME OFFSET Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
FROM UTC: 0.0 hr
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
TIME: Disabled
DST START MONTH: Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
April
DST START DAY: Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
Sunday
MESSAGE
DST START DAY
INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
5
DST START HOUR: Range: 0:00 to 23:00
MESSAGE
2:00
DST STOP MONTH: Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
January
DST STOP DAY: Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
Sunday
DST STOP DAY Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
INSTANCE: First
DST STOP HOUR: Range: 0:00 to 23:00
MESSAGE
2:00
The date and time can be synchronized a known time base and to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same
accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month. If an IRIG-B signal is connected to the relay, only the
current year needs to be entered. See the COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME menu to manually set the relay clock.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record.
The LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time
(Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. This setting has two uses. When the M60 is time synchronized with IRIG-B, or has no
permanent time synchronization, the offset is used to calculate UTC time for IEC 61850 features. When the M60 is time
synchronized with SNTP, the offset is used to determine the local time for the M60 clock, since SNTP provides UTC time.
The daylight savings time (DST) settings can be used to allow the M60 clock can follow the DST rules of the local time
zone. Note that when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the DST settings are ignored. The DST settings are used when
the M60 is synchronized with SNTP, or when neither SNTP nor IRIG-B is used.
Only timestamps in the event recorder and communications protocols are affected by the daylight savings time set-
tings. The reported real-time clock value does not change.
NOTE

5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1(2)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 FAULT REPORT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
FAULT REPORT 1 #1: Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Off
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for prospective cre-
ation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the pre-
fault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the fault data is stored and the com-
plete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre-fault trigger drops out, the element
5 resets and no record is created.
The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed firmware
revision (5.8x, for example) and relay model (M60), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault trigger (a specific
FlexLogic™ operand), the name of fault trigger (a specific FlexLogic™ operand), the active setting group at pre-fault trig-
ger, the active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault
trigger), and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger).
Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The
EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when
the report is triggered.
The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip from ther-
mal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report configured to include
voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue.
The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols.
• PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic™ operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this
operand stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a
record as long as the operand selected as PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER is “On”. If the operand remains “Off” for 1 second, the
element resets and no record is created.
• FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic™ operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand
stores the data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time
of the report.
• FAULT REPORT 1 #1 to FAULT REPORT 1 #32: These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current
magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency, temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32
channels can be configured. Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest.

5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY NUMBER OF RECORDS: Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

 5
TRIGGER MODE: Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
Automatic Overwrite
TRIGGER POSITION: Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
50%
TRIGGER SOURCE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
MESSAGE
16 samples/cycle
 DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE

 ANALOG CHANNELS
MESSAGE

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillography records can be cap-
tured simultaneously.
5
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors, such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for
oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES 
RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sam-
ple configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
Table 5–3: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE

RECORDS CT/VTS SAMPLE DIGITAL ANALOG CYCLES PER
RATE CHANNELS CHANNELS RECORD
1 1 8 0 0 1872.0
1 1 16 16 0 1685.0
8 1 16 16 0 276.0
8 1 16 16 4 219.5
8 2 16 16 4 93.5
8 2 16 64 16 93.5
8 2 32 64 16 57.6
8 2 64 64 16 32.3
32 2 64 64 16 9.5
A new record can automatically overwrite an older record when TRIGGER MODE is set to “Automatic Overwrite.”
Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, and so on). A trigger posi-
tion of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and
can be any FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, and so on). The relay sampling rate is 64
samples per cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.

When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records are cleared.
NOTE
b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  DIGITAL CHANNELS
 DIGITAL CHANNELS DIGITAL CHANNEL 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 Off
DIGITAL CHANNEL 2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
A DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of
each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.
c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  ANALOG CHANNELS
 ANALOG CHANNELS ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

 Off See Appendix A for complete list.
5 MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL 2: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
Off See Appendix A for complete list.
ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

MESSAGE See Appendix A for complete list.
Off
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace
depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The parameters available
in a given relay are dependent on:
• The type of relay,
• The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
• The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value
parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is
used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list
of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB desig-
nates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will
appear.

5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DATA LOGGER
 DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE: Range: Continuous, Trigger

 Continuous
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DATA LOGGER RATE: Range: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
MESSAGE
60000 ms
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
MESSAGE FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Off
Off
↓
Off
DATA LOGGER CONFIG: Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
MESSAGE
0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may
be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost. 5
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Exam-
ple storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table.
Table 5–4: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE

SAMPLING RATE CHANNELS DAYS STORAGE CAPACITY
15 ms 1 0.1 954 s
8 0.1 120 s
9 0.1 107 s
16 0.1 60 s
1000 ms 1 0.7 65457 s
8 0.1 8182 s
9 0.1 7273 s
16 0.1 4091 s
60000 ms 1 45.4 3927420 s
8 5.6 490920 s
9 5 436380 s
16 2.8 254460 s
3600000 ms 1 2727.5 235645200 s
8 340.9 29455200 s
9 303 26182800 s
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
• DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to “Continu-
ous”, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The

data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to “Trigger”, the data logger will begin to
record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic™
operand. The data logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is
full. Once the data logger is full a CLEAR DATA LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a
new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR DATA LOGGER command will also stop the current record and reset
the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.
• DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any
FlexLogic™ operand can be used as the trigger source. The DATA LOGGER TRIGGER setting only applies when the
mode is set to “Trigger”.
• DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.
• DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of
the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/
VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup,
the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is
shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to
expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of
parameters via the relay keypad/display – entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
• DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to “Off” without over-writing old data.
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
5 PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE  LED TEST

See below
 LEDS 
 TRIP & ALARM
 LEDS
 LED 1
MESSAGE
 LED 2
↓
MESSAGE
 LED 48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST
 LED TEST LED TEST FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled.

 Disabled
LED TEST CONTROL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-program-
mable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
1. All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned”. This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.

2. All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at
the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead
to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3. All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left
panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more
than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitor-
ing features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from
relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic™ operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is ini-
tiated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL set-
ting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
READY TO TEST
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
rising edge of the
operand
control input
Start the software image of Restore the LED states
5
the LEDs from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1 time-out
(all LEDs on) (1 minute)
dropping edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

Wait 1 second
control input
STAGE 2 rising edge of the

(one LED on at a time) control input
rising edge of the

Wait 1 second
control input
rising edge
STAGE 3
of the control
(one LED off at a time) input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 5–3: LED TEST SEQUENCE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following set-
tings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”

Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”

LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  TRIP & ALARM LEDS
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS TRIP LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
 Off
ALARM LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
5 The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each
indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 LED 1 Off
LED 1 TYPE: Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illumi-
nate when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
• LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
• LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
• LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
Refer to the LED indicators section in chapter 4 for additional information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic™ operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is
“Self-Reset” (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE set-
ting is “Latched”, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a com-
munications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.

Table 5–5: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

SETTING PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETER
LED 1 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1 LED 13 operand Off
LED 7 operand Off LED 19 operand Off
Refer to the Control of setting groups example in the Control elements section of this chapter for group activation.
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE DIRECT RING BREAK Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with
 SELF TESTS Direct Input/Output module.
5
FUNCTION: Enabled
DIRECT DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with
MESSAGE Direct Input/Output module.
FUNCTION: Enabled
REMOTE DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
MESSAGE CPU with Ethernet capability.
FUNCTION: Enabled
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
MESSAGE CPU with a primary fiber port.
FUNCTION: Disabled
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
MESSAGE CPU with a redundant fiber port.
FUNCTION: Disabled
BATTERY FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
SNTP FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a
MESSAGE CPU with Ethernet capability.
FUNCTION: Enabled
IRIG-B FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled Displays when Ethernet switch present.
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic™ operands, events, and targets.
Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the “Disabled” mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic™ operand, write to the event recorder, or display
target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the “Enabled”
mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay self-tests section in
chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.

5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS  CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
 CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front
panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching
setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
Figure 5–4: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

5 An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the M60 is ordered with the twelve
user-programmable pushbutton option.
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TROUBLE CURRENT RESET
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1 THREE
ALARM PHASE A STANDARD
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2
PHASE C
CONTROL
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3 PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4
USER 5 FOUR EXTRA

OPTIONAL
USER 6
CONTROL
USER 7 PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 5–5: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However,
by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic™ operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to per-
form the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the push-
button is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by
various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously – a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.

SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
{
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
When applicable
AND RUN
Enabled=1
OFF TIMER
SYSTEM SETUP/ FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ ON 0 CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON 100 msec
CONTROL:
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
Figure 5–6: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC
5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

 FUNCTION: Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
USER PB 1
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

5
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE
0.0 s
PUSHBTN 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.0 s
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
TIME: 0.00 s
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority
MESSAGE
Disabled
PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled

The M60 is provided with this optional feature, specified as an option at the time of ordering. Using the
order code for your device, see the order codes in chapter 2 for details.
User-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The
number depends on the front panel ordered.
• Enhanced horizontal front panel — 16 user-programmable pushbuttons
• Enhanced vertical front panel — 6 user-programmable pushbuttons
• Standard horizontal front panel — 12 user-programmable pushbuttons
User-programmable pushbuttons require a front panel with that option. If the front panel was ordered separately,
update the EnerVista software under Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton.
NOTE
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic oper-
ands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control,
autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of
password protection.
The figure shows user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced front panel.
USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER
LABEL 1 LABEL 2 LABEL 3 LABEL 4 LABEL 5 LABEL 6 LABEL 7 LABEL 8 LABEL 9 LABEL 10 LABEL 11 LABEL 12 LABEL 13 LABEL 14 LABEL 15 LABEL 16
5
842814A1.CDR
Figure 5–7: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FRONT PANEL

The following figure shows user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard front panel.
1 3 5 7 9 11
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
2 4 6 8 10 12
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
842779A1.CDR
Figure 5–8: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FRONT PANEL

Both the standard and enhanced front panel pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available
online at http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin. The EnerVista software can also be used to create labels for the
enhanced front panel.
Each pushbutton asserts its own “On” and “Off” FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1
OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is
active, the ANY PB ON operand is asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the correspond-
ing pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the PUSHBTN 1
LED CTL setting.
The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons depends on whether latched or self-reset mode is pro-
grammed.
• Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSH-
BTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The state of each pushbutton is stored
in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power.

The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET set-
ting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY set-
tings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be
used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker
location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if con-
trol is not executed within a specified time period.
• Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a user-programmable pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand
assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting or by pressing the front panel pushbutton. A pushbutton remains active for the
time it is pressed plus the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated
via FlexLogic, the pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand remains
assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting remains On has no effect on the pulse duration.
The pulse duration of the remote set or local front panel pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbut-
ton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various
NOTE system disturbances that can cause transient assertion of the operating signals.
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL and
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings. If local inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands executed through
the front panel pushbuttons. If remote inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands executed through
FlexLogic operands.
The inhibit functions are not applied to the autoreset feature. The inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to
prevent user-programmable pushbutton activation and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The inhibit functions can also be used to prevent pushbutton activation from the accidental pressing of the front panel push-
buttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control super-
vision. 5
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder. User-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbut-
ton and displayed when the pushbutton is activated and when in latched mode when the pushbutton deactivated.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the mode of the pushbutton (Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled). If set
to “Disabled,” the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-
asserted.
• PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message
and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. See the User-definable Displays section in this chapter for
instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. See the User-definable Displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton
message and displays when the pushbutton is deactivated and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Latched”. A message
does not display when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be
“Off” upon its release. The length of the “Off” message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
• PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a front panel pushbutton to be pressed before it is
deemed active. This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that user-programmable pushbutton operation
requires the front panel pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activat-
ing the user-programmable pushbutton hold timer.
• PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to activate the user-programmable pushbutton
element. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 50 ms.
• PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to deactivate the user-programmable push-
button element. This setting is applicable only if the user-programmable pushbutton is in "Latched" mode.
• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is
applicable only if the pushbutton is in “Latched” mode.

• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in
"Latched" mode.
• PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton
operation from the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.
• PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton
operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This inhibit functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
• PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to “Self-Reset” mode and specifies the duration of the user-
programmable pushbutton active status after the front panel pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely,
this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton; the length of time the operand selected by PUSHBTN
1 SET remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.
• PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive the front panel pushbutton LED. If
this setting is “Off”, then LED operation is directly linked to the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand.
• PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: This setting controls the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton that is programmed
in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings, and the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton off mes-
sage that is programmed in the PUSHBTN1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT settings.
When set to "Disabled", user-programmable pushbutton messages do not display. Otherwise the on message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes activated, and if in the "Latched" mode the off message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes deactivated.
When set to "Normal", the duration the message displays is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
When set to "High Priority", the duration of the off message is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting, but the
on message is displayed as long as the user-programmable pushbutton is activated. While activated, target and other
messages are suppressed. To allow front panel keypad operation, when a keypad button is pressed the message is
5 supressed for 10 seconds.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each user-programmable pushbutton state change is logged as
an event into the event recorder.

The figures show the user-programmable pushbutton logic.
SETTING
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION
= Enabled
= Latched LATCHED To user-programmable
= Self-Reset pushbuttons logic
sheet 2
OR From front panel
SETTING SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL PUSHBTN 1 HOLD
Off = 0 TPKP
From front panel AND
0
AND
TIMER
50 ms
SETTING 0 OR
PUSHBTN 1 SET
Off = 0 TIMER
50 ms Non-volatile latch
SETTING AND S
AND
0
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE Latch
Off = 0 R
TIMER
SETTING 200 ms
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
0
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 RESET AND
Off = 0
OR To user-programmable
SETTING OR PUSHBUTTON ON pushbuttons logic
SETTING sheet 2
5
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
TPKP
= Enabled
AND AND
= Disabled
0
TIMER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 200 ms OR
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
0
SETTING
AND PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME
0
OR
TRST
AND
842021A4.CDR
Figure 5–9: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

OFF MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTING
LATCHED FLASH MESSAGE TIME
SETTINGS
0 PUSHBTN ID TEXT
AND
OR TRST = XXXXXXXXXX
PUSHBTN OFF TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
Instantaneous
From user-programmable reset *
pushbuttons logic sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
AND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON ON PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
ON MESSAGE
SETTING ENGAGE MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE
AND
= Disabled
= High Priority SETTINGS
= Normal PUSHBTN ID TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
OR
PUSHBTN ON TEXT
SETTING
= XXXXXXXXXX
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
0
AND The message is temporarily removed if
5
TRST any keypad button is pressed. Ten
seconds of keypad inactivity restores
Instantaneous the message.
Instantaneous reset is executed if any reset *
front panel button is pressed or any new
target or message becomes active.
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC

1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
Pushbutton 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LED
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON 2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
OR ANY PB ON
SETTING Pushbutton 1
LED
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON = any FlexLogic operand
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands;
the standard front panel has 12
842024A3.CDR
Figure 5–10: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
 FLEX STATE PARAMETER 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 PARAMETERS Off
PARAMETER 2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
PARAMETER 256: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for efficient moni-
toring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.

The state bits may be read out in the “Flex States” register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are sixteen registers to accommo-
date the 256 state bits.
5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
 USER-DEFINABLE INVOKE AND SCROLL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 DISPLAYS Off
 USER DISPLAY 1 Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

↓

MESSAGE

This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facili-
tate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
• KEYPAD: Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note 5
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPER-
TIES  DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
• USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic™ operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navi-
gate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the DOWN key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the
user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user dis-
play, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.

b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS  USER DISPLAY 1(16)
 USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters


DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
DISP 1 ITEM 5: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the ENTER key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting “Yes”, a message indi-
cates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content – this content may subsequently be edited.
5 This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user dis-
play. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start
of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a
user display - the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7. Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate
keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of ‘0’ for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected sys-
tem display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion).
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in
sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the ‘Yes” option
to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.

An example user display setup and result is shown below:
 USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
 Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register
MESSAGE Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
6016
DISP 1 ITEM 2: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus
MESSAGE Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
6357
DISP 1 ITEM 3: This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE
0 Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
USER DISPLAYS Current X 0.850 A Shows the resultant display content.

→
Current Y 0.327 A
5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O
 DIRECT I/O DIRECT OUTPUT Range: 1 to 16

 DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O DATA Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
RATE: 64 kbps
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CROSSOVER: Disabled
 CRC ALARM CH1

 CRC ALARM CH2

 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH1
 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH2
Direct inputs and outputs are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays
connected directly via type 7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GSSE, except that
communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7 cards that sup-
port two channels, direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output

messages both ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are
sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at
the receiver.
Direct output message timing is similar to GSSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic™ operands:
1. DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic™ operand indicates that direct output messages
sent from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay.
2. DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline). These FlexLogic™ operands indicate that direct
output messages from at least one direct device are not being received.
Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name
strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting identifies the
relay in all direct output messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used
to identify the sender of the direct input and output message.
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION or DIRECT I/O
CH2 RING CONFIGURATION is “Yes”), all direct output messages should be received back. If not, the direct input/output ring
break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic™ operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All IEDs communicating
over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communica-
tions cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and output messages is approximately
0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each ‘bridge’.

Table 5–6: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA RATES

MODULE CHANNEL SUPPORTED DATA RATES
74 Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7L Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7M Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7P Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7T Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7W Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7V Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
2A Channel 1 64 kbps
2B Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
2G Channel 1 128 kbps
2H Channel 1 128 kbps
77 Channel 1 64 kbps 5
Channel 2 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7E Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7F Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7G Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7Q Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7R Channel 1 64 kbps
7S Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
NOTE
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to M60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network
regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. Please refer to the
Inputs and outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic™ operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.

EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable logic
that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such
as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected
via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Figure 5–11: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
For UR-series IED 2:

5 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION:

DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
“Yes”
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and
from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (for
example: fiber, G.703, or RS422).
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–12: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.

TX1 RX1
UR IED 1
RX2 TX2
RX1 TX2 RX2 TX1

UR IED 2 UR IED 4
TX1 RX2 TX2 RX1
TX2 RX2
UR IED 3
RX1 TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 5–13: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes” 5
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of ‘bridges’ between the ori-
gin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum ‘communications distance’ by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle;
IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle.
If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power sys-
tem cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system
cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings,
failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature
would be primarily used to address these concerns.

EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES

Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–14: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute
a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
5
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–15: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as
explained in the Inputs and outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and,
ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.

TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1
TX1 RX1
UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 5–16: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION

DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION:
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
“Yes”
5
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and
cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  CRC ALARM CH1(2)
 CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The M60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds
up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
FlexLogic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT set-
ting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.

The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly.
The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that
failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS  CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual
value.
• Message count and length of the monitoring window: To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message
per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For
example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to “10000”, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at
64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitor-
ing time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC
ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 × 60 × 1 = 600.
• Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER): The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are cor-
rupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assump-
tions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits
of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10–4 implies 1 bit
error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed
packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.
c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
 UNRETURNED UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

 MESSAGES ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled
5 MESSAGE
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The M60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring
configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned
messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unre-
turned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed
to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM
CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET
ALM FlexLogic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly.
The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT
INPUTS  UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.

5.2.17 TELEPROTECTION
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  TELEPROTECTION
 TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION Range: Disabled, Enabled

NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Range: 2, 3
MESSAGE
2
NUMBER OF COMM Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
CHANNELS: 1
LOCAL RELAY ID Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
Digital teleprotection functionality is designed to transfer protection commands between two or three relays in a secure,
fast, dependable, and deterministic fashion. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct
transfer trip (DTT). Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such
as direct fiber, copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted continu-
ously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel data is
achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet.
5
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive – as such, they cannot be used simu-
latneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and vice
NOTE versa.
• NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers.
• NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is “3” (three-terminal
system), set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to “2”. For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to “1” or
“2” (redundant channels).
• LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: In installa-
tions that use multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line
is from the correct relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmit-
ting relays and comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inad-
vertently set to loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel.
If an incorrect ID is found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL
FlexLogic™ operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commis-
sioning purposes, the result of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS  CHANNEL TESTS  VALIDITY OF
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual value. The default value of “0” for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID
is not to be checked. On two- terminals two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over
both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end.
5.2.18 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION
 INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

 Not Programmed
RELAY NAME: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Relay-1

To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet com-
munications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.

5 SETTINGS 5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES
5.3REMOTE RESOURCES 5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION
When M60 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, then an additional Remote Resources
menu tree is available in EnerVista UR Setup software to allow configuring HardFiber system.
Figure 5–17: REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION MENU

The remote resources settings configure a M60 with a process bus module to work with devices called Bricks. Remote
resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista UR Setup software, and is not available through the M60
front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to 5
be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The M60 with a process bus module
has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection
between specific fiber optic ports on the M60 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure spe-
cific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
• Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process
bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus
relay.
• Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages.
AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful
reliability improvement possible with process bus.
• Configure signal sources. This functionality of the M60 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents and
voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
• Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's functional-
ity. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other equipment. They
replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper wiring.
• Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are dis-
tinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, please refer to GE publication number
GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.

5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.4SYSTEM SETUP 5.4.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  CURRENT BANK F1(M5)
 CURRENT BANK F1 PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

 PRIMARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PRIMARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
Because energy parameters are accumulated, record these values and then reset immediately prior to changing CT char-
acteristics.
Four banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents
the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
5 in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor can also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT
primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input can be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct opera-
tion, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given the fol-
lowing current banks:
• F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio.
• F5: CT bank with 1000:1 ratio
• M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio.
The following rule applies:
SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1 (EQ 5.6)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5)
 VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT F5 Range: Wye, Delta

 CONNECTION: Wye
PHASE VT F5 Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
CONNECTION: Vag
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to chang-
ing VT characteristics.
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
5
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CON-
NECTION made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta”. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as “Delta”.
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connec-
tion, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120.
5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM
 POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

 60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION: Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
ABC
FREQUENCY AND PHASE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
FREQUENCY TRACKING: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.

The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be con-
nected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A – V B – V C ) ⁄ 3 ) for better performance dur-
ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this sig-
nal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between
different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING should only be set to “Disabled” in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for spe-
cial variable-frequency applications.
NOTE
The frequency tracking feature will function only when the M60 is in the “Programmed” mode. If the M60 is “Not
Programmed”, then metering values will be available but may exhibit significant errors.
5
NOTE
5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES  SOURCE 1(4)
 SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 NAME: Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

 SRC 1
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT
MESSAGE inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT
MESSAGE inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: Range: None, F5, M5
MESSAGE Only phase voltage inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: Range: None, F5, M5
MESSAGE Only auxiliary voltage inputs are displayed.
None
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate
for the associated source.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter repre-
sents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called “5” in
a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional
details on this concept.
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be
referred. For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to
whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.

User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements:

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the ele-
ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter
may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC input actual values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and volt-
age sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be dis-
played here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:
An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
CTs VTs not applicable
This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half sys-
tem. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F1 DSP Bank
F5
5
Source 1 Source 2
Amps Amps
Source 3
51BF-1 51BF-2
U1 Volts Amps
A W Var 87T
A W Var 51P
Volts Amps
M1
M1 Source 4
UR Relay
M5
Figure 5–18: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES

5.4.4 MOTOR
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR
 MOTOR MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS Range: 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001
 (FLA): 1.000 pu
MOTOR OVERLOAD Range: 1.00 to 1.50 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1.00
MOTOR NAMEPLATE Range: 100 to 50000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 600 V
MOTOR OFFLINE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
EMERGENCY RESTART: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MOTOR LINE SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC 1
NUMBER OF STARTS Range: 1 to 5 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TO LEARN: 5
MOTOR LOAD AVERAGE Range: 1 to 90 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CALC. PERIOD: 15 min.
2-SPEED MOTOR Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 MESSAGE
PROTECTION: Disabled
SPEED2 MOTOR SWITCH: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SPEED2 SWITCH 2-1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 5.00 s
SPEED2 MOTOR SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC 1
SPEED2 MOTOR FLA: Range: 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
1.000 pu
These settings reflect the design and configuration of the motor that the relay will protect. Note that some protection ele-
ments are dependent on these settings for correct operation.
Prior to revision 5.40, RTDs used for motor stator thermal model were defined in this section. With revisions 5.40
and higher, RTDs are defined in the SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RTD INPUTS menu.
NOTE
• MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS: This setting represents the full load current (FLA) of the motor as a fraction of the CT pri-
mary rating. FLA is a standard motor parameter that can be found on the motor nameplate.
• MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR: This setting defines the current level at which the motor is considered to be over-
loaded. If the motor current exceeds the MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR threshold, the M60 thermal model reacts by accu-
mulating thermal capacity. Normally, this factor is set slightly above the motor service factor to account for inherent
load measuring errors (CTs and limited relay accuracy). The typical total inaccuracy factor is 8 to 10%; as such, for
motors with a thermal capability at rated service factor of 1 or 1.15, the MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR should be set to 1.1
or 1.25, respectively.
If the average load current is between full load and the overload factor, the thermal capacity remains constant. If the
average current is less than the full load current, the thermal capacity decays exponentially.
• MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE: This setting represents the rated phase-to-phase motor voltage. The MOTOR NAME-
PLATE VOLTAGE setting is used as a reference for the voltage dependant thermal overload curve feature and indicates
a 100% voltage starting condition.

• MOTOR OFFLINE: This input must be connected to the appropriate external contact. This setting is selected to a con-
tact input that is connected to an auxiliary contact of the breaker or contactor used to switch the motor. The motor is
declared to be stopped when the phase current falls below 2% of motor full load current (FLA) and the external contact
indicates the switching device is open.
For example, a circuit breaker 52b auxiliary contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is
closed. Therefore the setting should be "Cont Ip n On". For a 52a contact the setting should be "Cont Ip n Off".
Four mutually exclusive FlexLogic™ operands that reflect the motor state are generated by a state machine in the
relay to determine motor status. They are: MOTOR OFFLINE, MOTOR STARTING, MOTOR RUNNING, and MOTOR OVER-
LOAD.
The state machine initially sets the MOTOR OFFLINE operand, as the auxiliary contact reports the switching device is
open and motor current is less than 2% of FLA. If the previous motor status is offline and a phase current greater than
2% of FLA is detected, the MOTOR STARTING operand becomes true. After 1 second, if motor current is less than FLA
times the MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR setting, the MOTOR RUNNING operand is set (this accounts for the use of a soft-
starter mechanism that slowly increases current such that it never exceeds FLA × overload factor during a starting
sequence). For normal starting, the MOTOR STARTING operand remains set until the current falls below FLA × overload
factor, at which time the MOTOR RUNNING operand is set. If current rises above FLA × Service Factor at that point, the
MOTOR OVERLOAD operand is set. If current then falls below FLA × overload factor, the MOTOR OVERLOAD operand is
reset and the MOTOR RUNNING operand is set. A MOTOR OFFLINE state is determined per the logic noted above.
When two-speed motor functionality is employed, this setting is used to indicate the breaker or contactor position at
speed 1. As such, the speed 1 auxiliary contact is connected to the input specified by this setting for two-speed appli-
cations.
• EMERGENCY RESTART: As the name implies, this feature should only be used in an emergency, as it defeats the
purpose of the relay – protecting the motor!. The input selected by this setting is used to reset the motor thermal
capacity used from its current value to 0% so that a hot motor may be restarted. However, trip conditions that are still
present (for example, hot RTD) will still cause a trip. In the event of a real emergency, the EMERGENCY RESTART oper- 5
and should remain at logic 1 until the emergency is over. Any EMERGENCY RESTART operand transition will be logged
as an event.
• MOTOR LINE SOURCE: This setting selects the source connected to phase current transformers on the power sys-
tem side of the stator winding.
• NUMBER OF STARTS TO LEARN: This setting selects number of motor start and stop records to average data pre-
sented in the ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  MOTOR LEARNED DATA menu.
• MOTOR LOAD AVERAGE CALC. PERIOD: This setting specifies the period of time over which parameter averages
are calculated. The calculation is a sliding window.
• 2-SPEED MOTOR PROTECTION: This setting is used to enable the two-speed motor function. This function provides
proper protection for a two-speed motor where there are two different full load values. The two-speed functionality is
required for motors having two windings wound into one stator. One winding, when energized, provides one of the
speeds. When the second winding is energized, the motor takes on the speed determined by the second winding. The
M60 algorithm integrates the heating at each speed into one thermal model using a common thermal capacity used
register value for both speeds. Using the M60 for such applications provides several options, allowing the removal of
traditional wiring and interlocking:
– Use the M60 front panel pushbuttons and provide necessary operate and interlock logic via FlexLogic™.
– Use external pushbuttons and provide necessary operate and interlock logic using FlexLogic™ as shown below.
– Use a traditional external control schematic with some connections to the M60 for control and protection.
• SPEED2 MOTOR SWITCH: If the two-speed motor feature is used, this setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to
indicate the current motor speed. This is typically an indication that the contactor at speed 2 is energized. When the
assigned FlexLogic™ operand (typically a contact input operand) is asserted, the algorithm switches to speed 2 (high
speed). If the assigned FlexLogic™ operand is de-asserted, the algorithm switches to speed 1 (low speed). This allows
the M60 to determine which settings should be active at any given time. To maintain correct motor status indication, the
M60 expects a transition from speed 1 to speed 2 within two seconds; otherwise, the motor status value may be reset.
• SPEED2 SWITCH 2-1 DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay to transfer from high to low speed. This allows the
motor to slow down before energizing at low speed.

• SPEED2 MOTOR SOURCE: This setting selects source for a motor protection when two-speed motor functionality is
used. This can be separate voltage and current banks or one voltage and current bank one with different full load cur-
rent value at the second speed (entered in the SPEED2 MOTOR FLA setting). If separate CTs with different ratios or sec-
ondary currents are required for speed 2, then the relay should be ordered with two CT banks.
• SPEED2 MOTOR FLA: This setting specifies the motor full load current for speed 2.
L1 L T1
H T2
L2 L
H
L3 L T3
MOTOR
H T4
H T5
H T6
CT bank 1 CT bank 2
Contact
outputs
H
L
STOP
M60 protection
Contact inputs
LOW
and logic
HIGH
H
5 L
833723A1.CDR
Figure 5–19: TWO SPEED MOTOR CONNECTIONS

5.4.5 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1
 BREAKER 1 BREAKER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CONTROL: Disabled
BREAKER 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Bkr 1
BREAKER 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
3-Pole
BREAKER 1 OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P CLSD: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P OPND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 Toperate: Range: 0.000 to 2.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.070 s
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ALARM Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
TIME: 0.000 s
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Only informa-
tion concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more
breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
The number of breaker control elements is dependent on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the M60. The follow-
ing settings are available for each breaker control element.
• BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature.
• BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to “Enable” to allow faceplate push button operations.
• BREAKER 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash
messages related to breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-pole” mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or “1-
pole” mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
• BREAKER 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
open breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• BREAKER 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay
to close breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• BREAKER1 ΦA/3P CLOSED: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary
position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the
5 breaker is closed. If the BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single input as the oper-
and used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”, the input mentioned above
is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C,
respectively.
• BREAKER1 ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the
inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
• BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the
52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic™ operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
• BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker
alarm reporting contact.
• BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among
the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous oper-
ation of the poles.
• MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after
an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
• BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.

6(77,1*
%5($.(5)81&7,21
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
(QDEOHG
$1' %5($.(52))&0'
'LVDEOHG
%5($.(575,3$
%5($.(575,3%
6(77,1* $1'
%5($.(575,3&
%5($.(5%/2&.23(1
2II $1'
'/DQG/GHYLFHVRQO\IURPWULSRXWSXW
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6 $1'
75,33+$6($
75,33+$6(%
75,33+$6(&
75,332/(
6(77,1*
%5($.(523(1
2II
25
6HOHFW 2SHQ
7REUHDNHUFRQWURO
%.5(1$%/(' ORJLFVKHHW
86(52))21 $
7RRSHQ%5. 1DPH
$1'
6(77,1*
%5($.(5386+%87721
&21752/
(QDEOHG
$1'
86(52))21
7RRSHQ%5. 1DPH
25
6(77,1* $1'
%5($.(5&/26(
2II
25
5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$1' %5($.(501/&/6
6HOHFW &ORVH 6(77,1*
0$18$/&/26(5(&$/7,0( $1'
&'/DQG/UHOD\VIURPUHFORVHU
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'

$5&/26(%.5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1*
25 $1' %5($.(521&0'
%5($.(5%/2&.&/26(
2II $6&'5
Figure 5–20: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the M60 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE

from breaker
control logic
sheet 1, BKR ENABLED
827061AR
SETTING
BREAKER 1 MODE
= 3-Pole FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1
= 1-Pole AND AND BREAKER 1 CLOSED CLOSED
OR (DEFAULT)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1

AND AND BREAKER 1 OPEN OPEN
OR (DEFAULT)
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= Off
AND BREAKER 1 DISCREP
AND
SETTING
SETTING BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD AND
= Off
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1
OR AND BREAKER 1 TROUBLE TROUBLE
SETTING Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED
(DEFAULT)
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD AND can be latched using FlexLogic™
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
SETTING OR BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM
BREAKER 1 Toperate
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST
XOR 0 BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD
SETTING
AND BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P OPND
5
AND BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM
= Off
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND BREAKER 1 ΦB BAD ST
XOR 0 BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD
SETTING
AND BREAKER 1 ΦB OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED
AND BREAKER 1 ΦB INTERM
= Off
AND
AND
SETTING AND
BREAKER 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND BREAKER 1 ΦC BAD ST
XOR 0 BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD
SETTING
AND BREAKER 1 ΦC OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED
AND BREAKER 1 ΦC INTERM
= Off
AND
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
AND BREAKER 1 1P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
SETTING AND
XOR
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV
= Off
AND
842025A1.CDR
Figure 5–21: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)

5.4.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SWITCHES  SWITCH 1
 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

SWITCH 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
SW 1
SWITCH 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
3-Pole
SWITCH 1 OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE: Range: 0.000 to 2.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.070 s
SWITCH 1 ALARM Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
SWITCH 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of
disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to cre-
ate an interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 52/a and 52/b
auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches is
four per breaker.
• SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.
• SWITCH 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used
in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1.
• SWITCH 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-pole” mode, where all disconnect switch poles are operated simultaneously,
or “1-pole” mode where all disconnect switch poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.

• SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
open disconnect switch 1.
• SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting
can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
close disconnect switch 1.
• SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting
can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch
auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when
the disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single input
as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”, the
input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 ΦB and SWITCH 1 ΦC settings select operands to
track phases B and C, respectively.
• SWITCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not avail-
able, then the inverted SWITCH 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
• SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
5 single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 TOPERATE: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the
52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time
has expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic™ operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
• SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the
three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation
of the poles.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the M60 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE

6(77,1*
6:,7&+)81&7,21
'LVDEOHG
(QDEOHG
6(77,1*
6:,7&+23(1 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II $1' 6:,7&+2))&0'
25
6(77,1* 6HOHFW 2SHQ
6:,7&+%/.23(1
2II
6(77,1*
6:,7&+&/26(
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
25 $1' 6:,7&+21&0'
6(77,1* 6HOHFW &ORVH
6:,7&+%/.&/26(
2II
6(77,1*
6:,7&+02'(
3ROH )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3ROH $1' $1' 6:,7&+&/26('
25
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$1' $1' 6:,7&+23(1
25
6(77,1*
6:7&+Ů$3&/6'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II
$1' 6:,7&+',6&5(3
$1'
6(77,1*
6(77,1* 6:,7&+$/$50'(/$<
6:,7&+Ů%&/26('
2II
$1'

5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
25 $1' 6:,7&+7528%/(
6(77,1*
6:,7&+Ů&&/26(' $1'
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1* 25 6:,7&+%$'67$786
6:,7&+7RSHUDWH
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$1' 6:,7&+Ů$%$'67
;25 6:,7&+Ů$&/6'
6(77,1*
$1' 6:,7&+Ů$23(1
6:7&+Ů$3231'
$1' 6:,7&+Ů$,17(50
2II
$1'
$1'
$1'
6(77,1*
6:,7&+7RSHUDWH
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$1' 6:,7&+Ů%%$'67
;25 6:,7&+Ů%&/6'
6(77,1*
$1' 6:,7&+Ů%23(1
6:,7&+Ů%23(1('
$1' 6:,7&+Ů%,17(50
2II
$1'
$1'
6(77,1* $1'
6:,7&+7RSHUDWH
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
$1' 6:,7&+Ů&%$'67
;25 6:,7&+Ů&&/6'
6(77,1*
$1' 6:,7&+Ů&23(1
6:,7&+Ů&23(1('
$1' 6:,7&+Ů&,17(50
2II
$1'
$1'
$1'
$&'5
Figure 5–22: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC

5.4.7 FLEXCURVES™
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  FLEXCURVES  FLEXCURVE A(D)
 FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves™ A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98
and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a
custom FlexCurve™, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5–7: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE

RESET TIME RESET TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
MS MS MS MS MS MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
5 0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The relay using a given FlexCurve™ applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Spe-
cial care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1; that is, 0.98 pu
NOTE
and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may
result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.

b) FLEXCURVE™ CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves™ and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approxi-
mate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file
(.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves™ are customized
by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at
zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING

Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite oper-
ating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro-
tective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize FlexCurve button is
clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting
5
defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple

from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 5–23: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION

The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT set-
tings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
NOTE

d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operat-
ing time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 5–24: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 5–25: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED

Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The standard recloser curves available for the M60 are displayed in the following graphs.

1 GE106
0.5
0.2
TIME (sec)
GE103
GE104 GE105
0.1
0.05
GE101 GE102
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 842723A1.CDR
5
Figure 5–26: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
50
20 GE142
10
5
GE138
TIME (sec)
1 GE120
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–27: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142

50
20
10
GE201
TIME (sec)
GE151
2
GE134 GE140
1
GE137
0.5
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5
Figure 5–28: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
20
TIME (sec)
GE141
10
GE131
5
GE200
2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–29: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200

50
20
GE164
10
2
TIME (sec)
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
0.02 GE163
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–30: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165 5
20
GE132
10
1
TIME (sec)
0.5 GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE118 GE117
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–31: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139

20
10
5
GE122
2
1
TIME (sec)
0.5
GE114
0.2
GE111
GE121
0.1
0.05 GE115 GE112

GE107
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
5
842724A1.CDR
Figure 5–32: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
10
TIME (sec)
GE135
2 GE119
0.5
0.2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–33: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202

5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC™
5.5FLEXLOGIC™ 5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic™. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 5–34: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the M60 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, which are described
later in this section). A digital “1” is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the ele-
ment. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and
human operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcur-
rent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic™).
FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-
put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parame-
ters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of oper-
ands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 5–8: M60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES

OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact
closed).
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external
contact open).
5 Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact.
only) Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact.

Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Direct Input On DIRECT INPUT 1 On The direct input is presently in the ON state.
Element Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
(Analog) of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
Block PHASE TOC1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Element Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1.
(Digital)
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
Element Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
(Digital Counter)
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
Remote Input On REMOTE INPUT 1 On The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.
evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").

The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 5–9: M60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 8)
OPERAND TYPE OPERAND SYNTAX OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed
PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed
CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed
DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16On Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT DEVICE 1Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16Off Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT INPUT/ DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC
OUTPUT exceeded the user-specified level.
CHANNEL DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC
MONITORING exceeded the user-specified level.
DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only).
DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only).
ELEMENT: AMP UNBALANCE 1 PKP Amp unbalance 1 element is picked up
Amp unbalance AMP UNBALANCE 1 OP Amp unbalance 1 element is operated
AMP UNBALANCE 1 DPO Amp unbalance 1 element is dropped out
AMP UNBALANCE 2... Same set of operands as shown for AMP UNBALANCE 1
ELEMENT: AUX OV1 PKP Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary AUX OV1 DPO Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out
overvoltage AUX OV1 OP Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated 5
AUX OV2 Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1
ELEMENT: AUX UV1 PKP Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary AUX UV1 DPO Auxiliary undervoltage element has dropped out
undervoltage AUX UV1 OP Auxiliary undervoltage element has operated
AUX UV2 Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1
ELEMENT BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP A Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has picked up
Breaker flashover BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP Breaker 1 flashover element has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP Breaker 1 flashover element has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO Breaker 1 flashover element has dropped out
BKR 2 FLSHOVR... Same set of operands as shown for BKR 1 FLSHOVR
ELEMENT BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP Breaker failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP Breaker failure 1 timer 1 is operated
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP Breaker failure 1 trip is operated
BKR FAIL 2... Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1


ELEMENT: BREAKER 1 OFF CMD Breaker 1 open command initiated
Breaker control BREAKER 1 ON CMD Breaker 1 close command initiated
BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD Breaker 1 phase A is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN Breaker 1 phase A is open
BREAKER 1 ΦB BAD ST Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD Breaker 1 phase B is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPEN Breaker 1 phase B is open
BREAKER 1 ΦC BAD ST Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD Breaker 1 phase C is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPEN Breaker 1 phase C is open
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
BREAKER 1 CLOSED Breaker 1 is closed
BREAKER 1 OPEN Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 DISCREP Breaker 1 has discrepancy
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE Breaker 1 trouble alarm
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS Breaker 1 manual close
BREAKER 1 TRIP A Breaker 1 trip phase A command
BREAKER 1 TRIP B Breaker 1 trip phase B command
BREAKER 1 TRIP C Breaker 1 trip phase C command
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
5 BREAKER 1 OOS
BREAKER 2...
Breaker 1 is out of service
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
ELEMENT: Counter 1 HI Digital counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital counters Counter 1 EQL Digital counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 1 LO Digital counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
Counter 2 to Counter 8 Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1
ELEMENT: Dig Element 1 PKP Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital elements Dig Element 1 OP Digital Element 1 is operated
Dig Element 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Dig Element 2 to Dig Element 48 Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1
ELEMENT: DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has picked up
Sensitive directional DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has picked up
power DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has dropped out
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has dropped out
DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has operated
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has operated
DIR POWER 1 PKP The directional power element has picked up
DIR POWER 1 DPO The directional power element has dropped out
DIR POWER 1 OP The directional power element has operated
DIR POWER 2 Same set of operands as DIR POWER 1
ELEMENT: FxE 1 PKP FlexElement™ 1 has picked up
FlexElements™ FxE 1 OP FlexElement™ 1 has operated
FxE 1 DPO FlexElement™ 1 has dropped out
FxE 2 to FxE 16 Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
ELEMENT: GROUND IOC1 PKP Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground GROUND IOC1 OP Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
instantaneous GROUND IOC1 DPO Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
overcurrent
GROUND IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT: GROUND TOC1 PKP Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground time GROUND TOC1 OP Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated
overcurrent GROUND TOC1 DPO Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
ELEMENT LATCH 1 ON Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-volatile latches LATCH 1 OFF Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
LATCH 2 to LATCH 16 Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1


ELEMENT: MECHANICAL JAM PKP The mechanical jam element has picked up
Motor mechanical MECHANICAL JAM DPO The mechanical jam element has dropped out
jam MECHANICAL JAM OP The mechanical jam element has operated
ELEMENT: MOTOR ACCEL TIME OP The motor acceleration time element has operated
Motor acceleration MOTOR ACCEL TIME DPO The motor acceleration time element has dropped out
time
ELEMENT: MOTOR SPD2 TR 2-1 OP Asserted when the motor switches from speed 2 to speed 1
Two-speed motor MOTOR SPD2 ACL t OP Asserted when the acceleration time function at speed 2 operates.
MOTOR SPD2 ACL t DPO Asserted when the acceleration time function at speed 2 drops off.
ELEMENT: MOTOR THERMAL PKP The thermal model element has picked up
Motor thermal model MOTOR THERMAL OP The thermal model element has operated
MOTOR THERMAL DPO The thermal model element has dropped out
MOTOR RESTART The motor has restarted
MOTOR START INHIBIT A motor start inhibit condition has occurred
MOTOR OFFLINE The motor is offline
MOTOR STARTING The motor is starting
MOTOR RUNNING The motor is running
MOTOR OVERLOAD A motor overload condition has occurred
ELEMENT: NEG SEQ OV1 PKP Negative-sequence overvoltage element has picked up
Negative-sequence NEG SEQ OV1 DPO Negative-sequence overvoltage element has dropped out
overvoltage NEG SEQ OV1 OP Negative-sequence overvoltage element has operated
NEG SEQ OV2... Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ OV1
ELEMENT: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral NEUTRAL IOC1 OP Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
instantaneous NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
overcurrent
NEUTRAL IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1
ELEMENT:
Neutral overvoltage
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has picked up
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has dropped out
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has operated
5
ELEMENT: NTRL DIR OC1 FWD Neutral directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated
Neutral directional NTRL DIR OC1 REV Neutral directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated
overcurrent
NTRL DIR OC2 Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1
ELEMENT: OVERFREQ 1 PKP Overfrequency 1 has picked up
Overfrequency OVERFREQ 1 OP Overfrequency 1 has operated
OVERFREQ 1 DPO Overfrequency 1 has dropped out
OVERFREQ 2 to 4 Same set of operands as shown for OVERFREQ 1
ELEMENT: PH DIR1 BLK A Phase A directional 1 block
Phase directional PH DIR1 BLK B Phase B directional 1 block
overcurrent PH DIR1 BLK C Phase C directional 1 block
PH DIR1 BLK Phase directional 1 block
PH DIR2 Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1
ELEMENT: PHASE IOC1 PKP At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase PHASE IOC1 OP At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
instantaneous PHASE IOC1 DPO All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out
overcurrent PHASE IOC1 PKP A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 OP A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 and higher Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE OV1 PKP At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase overvoltage PHASE OV1 OP At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 DPO All phases of overvoltage 1 have dropped out
PHASE OV1 PKP A Phase A of overvoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 PKP B Phase B of overvoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 PKP C Phase C of overvoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 OP A Phase A of overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 OP B Phase B of overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 OP C Phase C of overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 DPO A Phase A of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 DPO B Phase B of overvoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 DPO C Phase C of overvoltage 1 has dropped out


ELEMENT: PHASE UV1 PKP At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase undervoltage PHASE UV1 OP At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO All phases of phase undervoltage 1 have dropped out
PHASE UV1 PKP A Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP B Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP C Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 OP A Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP B Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP C Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO A Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO B Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO C Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2 to 3 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
ELEMENT: REDUCED VOLT CTRL Asserted for one second upon a valid transition in any mode
Reduced voltage REDUCED VOLT OP Asserted when an invalid transition occurs
starting
ELEMENT: RESTART TIME OP The minimum restart time has not expired since the last motor stop. No
Restart delay restart is allowed when this operand is asserted (use to inhibit the motor start
command).
ELEMENT: ROTOR ALARM PKP Asserted when the broken rotor bar detection element picks up.
Broken rotor bar ROTOR ALARM OP Asserted when the broken rotor bar detection element operates.
detection
ELEMENT: RRTD COMM FAIL Asserted when RRTD loss of communications is detected.
Remote RTD RRTD RTD 1 ALARM DPO Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm stage drops out.
protection RRTD RTD 1 ALARM OP Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm stage operates.
RRTD RTD 1 ALARM PKP Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm stage picks up.
RRTD RTD 1 OPEN Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 detects an open circuit.
RRTD RTD 1 SHORTED Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 detects an short/low circuit.
5 RRTD RTD 1 TRIP DPO
RRTD RTD 1 TRIP OP
RRTD RTD 1 TRIP PKP
Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 trip stage drops out.
Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 trip stage operates.
Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 trip stage picks up.
RRTD RTD 2... The set of operands shown above are available for RRTD RTD 2 and higher
ELEMENT: RTD Ip 1 ALARM DPO Asserted when the alarm stage of RTD input 1 protection picks up.
RTD protection RTD Ip 1 ALARM OP Asserted when the alarm stage of RTD input 1 protection operates.
RTD Ip 1 ALARM PKP Asserted when the alarm stage of RTD input 1 protection drops out.
RTD Ip 1 OPEN Asserted when RTD input 1 detects an open circuit.
RTD Ip 1 SHORTED Asserted when RTD input 1 detects a shorted or low circuit.
RTD Ip 1 TRIP DPO Asserted when the trip stage of RTD input 1 protection picks up.
RTD Ip 1 TRIP OP Asserted when the trip stage of RTD input 1 protection operates.
RTD Ip 1 TRIP PKP Asserted when the trip stage of RTD input 1 protection drops out.
RTD Ip 2... The set of operands shown above are available for the RTD Ip 2 and higher
elements
ELEMENT: SELECTOR 1 POS Y Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)
Selector switch SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
SELECTOR 2 Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
ELEMENT: SETTING GROUP ACT 1 Setting group 1 is active
Setting group SETTING GROUP ACT 2 Setting group 2 is active
SETTING GROUP ACT 3 Setting group 3 is active


ELEMENT: SH STAT GND STG1 PKP Stage 1 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has picked up
Sub-harmonic stator SH STAT GND STG1 DPO Stage 1 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has dropped out
ground fault detector SH STAT GND STG1 OP Stage 1 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has operated
SH STAT GND STG2 PKP Stage 2 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has picked up
SH STAT GND STG2 DPO Stage 2 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has dropped out
SH STAT GND STG2 OP Stage 2 of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection has operated
SH STAT GND OC PKP Ground over current element of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection
has picked up
SH STAT GND OC DPO Ground over current element of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection
has dropped out
SH STAT GND OC OP Ground over current element of the sub-harmonic stator ground protection
has operated
SH STAT GND TRB PKP Sub-harmonic stator ground module trouble has picked up
SH STAT GND TRB DPO Sub-harmonic stator ground module trouble has dropped out
SH STAT GND TRB OP Sub-harmonic stator ground module trouble has operated
ELEMENT: STARTS-PER-HOUR PKP The maximum starting rate has been exceeded. No immediate start would be
Starts-per-hour allowed if the motor stops when this operand is asserted.
STARTS-PER-HOUR OP The motor stopped after the last allowable start. No restart will be allowed as
long as the operand is asserted (used to inhibit the motor start command).
STARTS-PER-HOUR DPO The maximum starting rate is not exceeded. When stopped, the motor can be
restarted immediately.
ELEMENT: STATOR DIFF OP At least one phase of stator differential has operated
Stator differential STATOR DIFF PKP A Phase A of stator differential has picked up
STATOR DIFF PKP B Phase B of stator differential has picked up
STATOR DIFF PKP C Phase C of stator differential has picked up
STATOR DIFF OP A Phase A of stator differential has operated
STATOR DIFF OP B Phase B of stator differential has operated
STATOR DIFF OP C Phase C of stator differential has operated
STATOR DIFF DPO A Phase A of stator differential has dropped out
STATOR DIFF DPO B Phase B of stator differential has dropped out
STATOR DIFF DPO C
STATOR DIFF SAT A
Phase C of stator differential has dropped out
Phase A of stator differential has is saturated 5
STATOR DIFF SAT B Phase B of stator differential has is saturated
STATOR DIFF SAT C Phase C of stator differential has is saturated
STATOR DIFF DIR A Phase A of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied
STATOR DIFF DIR B Phase B of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied
STATOR DIFF DIR C Phase C of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied
ELEMENT: SWITCH 1 OFF CMD Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated
Disconnect switch SWITCH 1 ON CMD Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
SWITCH 1 ΦA BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
SWITCH 1 ΦA INTERM Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
SWITCH 1 ΦA CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦA OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
SWITCH 1 ΦB BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
SWITCH 1 ΦC BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
SWITCH 1 CLOSED Disconnect switch 1 is closed
SWITCH 1 OPEN Disconnect switch 1 is open
SWITCH 1 DISCREP Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
SWITCH 2... Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
ELEMENT: TELEPRO CH1 FAIL Channel 1 failed
Teleprotection TELEPRO CH2 FAIL Channel 2 failed
channel tests TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed
TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed
TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1
TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2
TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST CRC detected lost packet on channel 1
TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST CRC detected lost packet on channel 2


ELEMENT: TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On Flag is set, Logic =1
Teleprotection ↓ ↓
inputs/outputs TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On Flag is set, Logic =1
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On Flag is set, Logic =1
↓ ↓
TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On Flag is set, Logic =1
ELEMENT: TIME-BTWN-STARTS PKP The time since the last start is too short. No immediate start is allowed if the
Time between starts motor stops when this operand is asserted.
TIME-BTWN-STARTS OP The motor stopped because the time since the last start was too short. No
restart is allowed as long as this operand is asserted (use to inhibit the
motor start command).
TIME-BTWN-STARTS DPO The time since the last start is long enough to accommodate the next start
should the motor stop
ELEMENT TRIP BUS 1 PKP Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up.
Trip bus TRIP BUS 1 OP Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates.
TRIP BUS 2... Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1
ELEMENT: U/CURR ALARM PKP Asserted when the undercurrent element alarm stage picks up.
Undercurrent U/CURR TRIP PKP Asserted when the undercurrent element trip stage picks up.
U/CURR ALARM OP Asserted when the undercurrent element alarm stage operates.
U/CURR TRIP OP Asserted when the undercurrent element trip stage operates.
ELEMENT: U/CURR SP2 ALARM PKP Asserted when the speed 2 undercurrent alarm picks up.
Undercurrent for U/CURR SP2 ALARM OP Asserted when the speed 2 undercurrent alarm operates.
speed 2 U/CURR SP2 TRIP PKP Asserted when the speed 2 undercurrent trip picks up.
U/CURR SP2 TRIP OP Asserted when the speed 2 undercurrent trip operates.
ELEMENT: UNDERFREQ 1 PKP Underfrequency 1 has picked up
Underfrequency UNDERFREQ 1 OP Underfrequency 1 has operated
UNDERFREQ 1 DPO Underfrequency 1 has dropped out
5 ELEMENT:
UNDERFREQ 2 to 6
UNDERPWR 1 ALARM PKP
Same set of operands as shown for UNDERFREQ 1 above
Asserted when the underpower 1 alarm stage picks up.
Underpower UNDERPWR 1 TRIP PKP Asserted when the underpower 1 trip stage picks up.
UNDERPWR 1 ALARM DPO Asserted when the underpower 1 alarm stage drops out.
UNDERPWR 1 TRIP DPO Asserted when the underpower 1 trip stage drops out.
UNDERPWR 1 ALARM OP Asserted when the underpower 1 alarm stage operates.
UNDERPWR 1 TRIP OP Asserted when the underpower 1 trip stage operates.
UNDERPWR 2 The set of operands shown above are available for the underpower 2
element
FIXED OPERANDS Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Ip 1 On (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact inputs Cont Ip 2 On (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 1 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Ip 2 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact outputs, Cont Op 2 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
current ↓ ↓
(from detector on
form-A output only)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact outputs, Cont Op 2 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
voltage ↓ ↓
(from detector on
form-A output only) Cont Op 1 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Op 2 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Direct inputs ↓ ↓
DIRECT INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: RemDPS Ip 1 BAD Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the bad state.
Remote double- RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the intermediate
point status inputs state.
RemDPS Ip 1 OFF Asserted while the remote double-point status input is off.
RemDPS Ip 1 ON Asserted while the remote double-point status input is on.
REMDPS Ip 2... Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1 above


INPUTS/OUTPUTS: REMOTE INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Remote inputs ↓ ↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Ip 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual inputs ↓ ↓
Virt Ip 64 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Op 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual outputs ↓ ↓
Virt Op 96 On Flag is set, logic=1
LED INDICATORS: LED IN SERVICE Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on.
Fixed front panel LED TROUBLE Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on.
LEDs LED TEST MODE Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on.
LED TRIP Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on.
LED ALARM Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on.
LED PICKUP Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on.
LED VOLTAGE Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on.
LED CURRENT Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on.
LED FREQUENCY Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on.
LED OTHER Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on.
LED PHASE A Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on.
LED PHASE B Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on.
LED PHASE C Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on.
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on.
LED INDICATORS: LED TEST IN PROGRESS An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
LED test
LED INDICATORS: LED USER 1 Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on.
User-programmable
LEDs LED USER 2 to 48 The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF
ACCESS LOC SETG ON
Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
5
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF Asserted when local command access is disabled.
ACCESS LOC CMND ON Asserted when local command access is enabled.
ACCESS REM SETG OFF Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
ACCESS REM SETG ON Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
ACCESS REM CMND OFF Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
ACCESS REM CMND ON Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected
level of the M60.
REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off Flag is set, logic=1
RESETTING RESET OP Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below).
RESET OP (COMMS) Communications source of the reset command.
RESET OP (OPERAND) Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu) source
of the reset command.
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command.


SELF- ANY MAJOR ERROR Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
DIAGNOSTICS ANY MINOR ERROR Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
ANY SELF-TESTS Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
BATTERY FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
DIRECT DEVICE OFF See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
DIRECT RING BREAK See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
IRIG-B FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
LATCHING OUT ERROR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
MAINTENANCE ALERT See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
PORT 1 OFFLINE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
PRI ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
PROCESS BUS FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
REMOTE DEVICE OFF See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
RRTD COMM FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
SEC ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
SNTP FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
SYSTEM EXCEPTION See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
TEMP MONITOR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
TEMPERATURE TEMP MONITOR Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum
MONITOR operating temperature (80°C)
USER- PUSHBUTTON 1 ON Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position
5 PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
ANY PB ON
Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position
Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the “On” position
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 6, 12, or 16 Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
depending on front panel
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name
or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FlexLogic™ operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in the Flex-
Logic™ operators table.
Table 5–10: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’

Table 5–11: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS

TYPE SYNTAX DESCRIPTION NOTES
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic™ parameters.
One-shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate
that generates a pulse in response to an
NEGATIVE ONE One shot that responds to a negative going edge. edge on the input. The output from a ‘one
SHOT shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and through the FlexLogic™ equation. There is
negative going edges. a maximum of 64 ‘one shots’.
Logic NOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous parameter.
gate
OR(2) 2 input OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
OR(16) 16 input OR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
AND(2) 2 input AND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
AND(16) 16 input AND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NOR(2) 2 input NOR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NOR(16) 16 input NOR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NAND(2) 2 input NAND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NAND(16) 16 input NAND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is
the reset input. The parameter preceding
5
the reset input is the set input.
Timer TIMER 1 Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer 1 settings. The timer is started by the preceding
↓ ↓ parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER 32 Timer set with FlexLogic™ timer 32 settings. TIMER #.
Assign = Virt Op 1 Assigns previous FlexLogic™ operand to virtual The virtual output is set by the preceding
virtual ↓ output 1. parameter
output = Virt Op 96 ↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ operand to virtual
output 96.
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES
When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used
once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.
5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic™ provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set input
has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power.
NOTE
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic™ equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is
entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic™ during testing, for exam-
ple, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.

5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite impor-
tant as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only
a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used –
a virtual output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay Operate Output
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout Relay H1
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c 827025A2.vsd
State=Closed
Figure 5–35: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME
5 1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic™ opera-
tors. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic™ limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must
also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to oper-
ate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic™ equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and
virtual output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
on Dropout
State=Pickup (200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Figure 5–36: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for
virtual output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND(2) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT H1c

State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 5–37: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

3. Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as vir-
tual output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay VIRTUAL
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout OUTPUT 4
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
State=ON
Time Delay
on Pickup
(800 ms)
5
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed 827028A2.VSD
Figure 5–38: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

4. Program the FlexLogic™ equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic™ parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to
list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99,
and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that
a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 5–39: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET

5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is
therefore "= Virt Op 3."

98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2-
input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
“NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 dia-
gram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 DIG ELEM 2 OP VIRTUAL
AND
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OUTPUT 3
5 96
97
Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 5–40: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

6. Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.
97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".

The equation for virtual output 4 is:

[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP
[90] XOR(2)
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 dia-
gram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
85 Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
86 Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
87
88
Virt Op 2 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Set
LATCH
5
Virt Ip 1 On
XOR OR Reset
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
89 DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
90 XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
91 Virt Op 3 On VIRTUAL
OR T2 OUTPUT 4
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
92 OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
93 LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
94 Virt Op 3 On T1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 TIMER 2
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 4 827031A2.VSD
Figure 5–41: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

7. Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic™ before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the order shown
below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)

= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations. The equations
will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR

5
PATH: SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operands

 EQUATION EDITOR END
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 2: Range: FlexLogic™ operands
MESSAGE
END
↓
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: Range: FlexLogic™ operands

MESSAGE
END
There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Ele-
ment is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC TIMERS  FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
 FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1 Range: millisecond, second, minute

 TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond
TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
TIMER 1 DROPOUT Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic™ equations.
• TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
• TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".

• TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: SETTING  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
 FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
FxE 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT Range: SIGNED, ABSOLUTE
MESSAGE
MODE: SIGNED
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP Range: LEVEL, DELTA
MESSAGE
MODE: LEVEL
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: OVER, UNDER
MESSAGE
DIRECTION: OVER
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
5
FLEXELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt Range: Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes
MESSAGE
UNIT: Milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
A FlexElement™ is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
FlexElements run every half power cycle (every four protection passes).
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.

SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
AND HYSTERESIS:
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: SETTINGS
SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
RUN DELAY:
Actual Value FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
+ tPKP
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: FxE 1 OP
- tRST
Actual Value FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig 842004A3.CDR
Figure 5–42: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC

The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
5 will not assert its output operands.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed”. The ele-
ment responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute”. Sample applications for the
“Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions, monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend.
The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and FLEX-
ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings – if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Level”. The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta”. In this case the FLEXELE-
MENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-
TERESIS settings.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
842705A1.CDR
Figure 5–43: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac-
teristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
5
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
Figure 5–44: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING

The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to “Over”, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under”, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexEle-
ment™ can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP set-
ting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 5–12: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

CURRENT UNBALANCE BASE = 100%
(Amp Unbalance)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SENSITIVE DIR POWER PBASE = maximum value of 3 × VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs of the sources
(Sns Dir Power) configured for the sensitive power directional element(s).
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
5 SOURCE POWER
SOURCE VOLTAGE
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
CURRENT (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents)
(Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr)
STATOR RESTRAINING IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd)
THERMAL MODEL BASE =100%
(Model Capacity Used)
(Model Motor Unbalance)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 minutes
(Model Lockout Time)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 1.00 pu of FLA
(Thermal Model Load)
(Biased Motor Load)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 seconds
(Trip Time on Overload)
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement™ direction, pickup, and hysteresis dia-
gram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.

5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  NON-VOLATILE LATCHES  LATCH 1(16)
 LATCH 1 LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

LATCH 1 TYPE: Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
Reset Dominant
LATCH 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch. The settings element operation is described below:
• LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
• LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operands 'sets' Latch 1.
• LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operand 'resets' Latch 1. 5
SETTING SETTING
LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N
TYPE SET RESET ON OFF LATCH 1 FUNCTION: LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset ON OFF ON OFF Enabled=1 RUN

Dominant
OFF OFF Previous Previous
State State
SETTING
ON ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON LATCH 1 SET:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Set ON OFF ON OFF Off=0 SET LATCH 1 ON
Dominant
ON ON ON OFF LATCH 1 OFF
OFF OFF Previous Previous SETTING
State State
LATCH 1 RESET:
OFF ON OFF ON
Off=0 RESET 842005A3.CDR
Figure 5–45: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N = 1 to 16) AND LOGIC

5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.6GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to setting group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system config-
uration, season of the year, etc.). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the
Control elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to elements section at the beginning of this chap-
ter.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)
 SETTING GROUP 1  MOTOR

See page 5-111.
 
 STATOR
MESSAGE See page 5-140.
 DIFFERENTIAL
 POWER

 PHASE CURRENT

 NEUTRAL CURRENT

5 MESSAGE
 GROUND CURRENT
See page 5-160.

 BREAKER FAILURE

 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if
no other group is active (see the Control elements section for additional details).

5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.3 MOTOR
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR
 MOTOR  ACCELERATION
See page 5-111.
  TIME
 THERMAL MODEL

 AMP UNBALANCE 1

 AMP UNBALANCE 2

 UNDERCURRENT

 MECHANICAL JAM

 TWO-SPEED MOTOR

b) ACCELERATION TIME
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  ACCELERATION TIME
5
 ACCELERATION TIME ACCELERATION Range: Disabled, Enabled
ACCELERATION Range: 1.00 to 10.00 x FLC in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CURRENT: 6.00 x FLC
ACCELERATION TIME: Range: 0.50 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
10.00 s
ACCELERATION MODE: Range: Definite Time, Adaptive
MESSAGE
Definite Time
ACCELERATION BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
ACCLERATION TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
ACCLERATION EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Many motors have quite a time margin between acceleration-time and the stall limit. It is advantageous to detect stalling
during a start as early as possible to minimize re-starting delays once the cause of the stall is remedied, e.g. neglecting to
release a fan brake.
The acceleration time element compares actual starting time with a pre-determined time setting and operates when it is
exceeded. This element has the functionality to adapt the tripping time for starts with lower starting current, and it stores
acceleration time and current of the last five starts. The element uses currents configured under SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR
 MOTOR LINE SOURCE and motor status asserted by the thermal model element. Both the signal source and thermal pro-
tection must be configured properly in order for the acceleration time protection to operate.
The figure below shows examples of constant and variable acceleration currents and explains measurement of the acceler-
ation time and current. Part A represents a constant current start and part B represents a variable current start.

The element stores the basic statistics for the last five successful starts. The following values are retained, available for dis-
play, and accessible via communications: date and time of starting, acceleration time (in seconds), effective acceleration
current (in multiplies of FLC), and peak acceleration current (in multiplies of FLC). Recorded effective acceleration current
and time could be used for fine-tuning of the relay settings.
i1
ACCEL. CURRENT
i2
i3
i4
i5
current
current
i12 + i22 + .. + in2
ACCEL. CURRENT =
n
i6
FLA x SERVICE FACTOR FLA x SERVICE FACTOR
time ACCEL. TIME time

ACCEL. TIME
(a) (b) 833014A1.CDR
Figure 5–46: SAMPLE ACCELERATION CURRENTS

• ACCELERATION CURRENT: This setting is only used in the Adaptive mode. The setting defines a constant current
that when applied to the motor would accelerate the motor within the normal acceleration time. The setting is used to
adapt the tripping action when the current is changing significantly during the start, such as due to voltage dips.
• ACCELERATION TIME: This setting specifies the maximum acceleration time. If the motor is not in the running state
5 when this time expires, the element operates. This setting could be estimated experimentally by starting a given motor
several times under various load and electrical conditions and measuring the starting time. Some security margin
should be applied.
• ACCELERATION MODE: This setting defines the operating mode of the acceleration time element. When set to “Def-
inite Time”, the element times duration of the motor start and operates when the starting time exceeds the ACCELERA-
TION TIME setting. When set to “Adaptive”, the element uses the effective accelerating current to adapt to the starting
conditions. The operating equation assumes that the accelerating power is proportional to the square of the current
and neglects any current unbalance or impact of the rotor slip. Consequently, in the adaptive mode, the element oper-
ates when the square of the current integrated from the beginning of the start up to a given time exceeds
2
( Acceleration Current ) × Acceleration Time .
SETTINGS
ACCELERATION
FUNCTION
= Enabled
ACCELERATION BLOCK
= Off AND
MOTOR OFFLINE
= On
SETTING SETTINGS
ACCCELERATION MODE ACCELERATION TIME
= Definite Time ACCELERATION
CURRENT
= Adaptive Definite Time
RUN
SETTING T > ACCELERATION TIME FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Adaptive
THERMAL MODEL RUN OR MOTOR ACCEL TIME OP
FUNCTION MOTOR ACCEL TIME DPO
= Enabled I2T > ( ACCEL. CURRENT )2
× ACCEL. TIME
RECORDS
SETTING
RUN START DATE
MOTOR LINE SOURCE
CALCULATE: START TIME
= Ia magnitude
Peak acceleration current ACCELERATION TIME
= Ib magnitude MAX Effective acceleration current EFFECTIVE CURENT
= Ic magnitude Acceleration time
PEAK CURRENT
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
MOTOR STARTING
MOTOR RUNNING 833013A3.CDR
Figure 5–47: ACCELERATION TIME SCHEME LOGIC

c) THERMAL MODEL
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  THERMAL MODEL
 THERMAL MODEL THERMAL MODEL Range: Disabled, Enabled

THERMAL MODEL Range: Motor, Flexcurve A, Flexcurve B, Flexcurve C,
MESSAGE Flexcurve D, IEC
CURVE: Motor
THERMAL MODEL CURVE Range: Cutoff, Shift
MESSAGE
EFFECT: Cutoff
IEC CURVE k FACTOR: Range: 1.00 to 1.50 in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
1.10
THERMAL MODEL Range: 0.00 to 16.00 in steps of 0.01 when thermal
MESSAGE modle curve is Motor, otherwise 0.00 to 600.00 in
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
steps of 0.01
UNBALANCE BIAS Range: 0 to 19 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
K FACTOR: 0
COOL TIME CONSTANT Range: 1 to 65000 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RUNNING: 15 min.
COOL TIME CONSTANT Range: 1 to 65000 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
STOPPED: 30 min.
HOT/COLD SAFE Range: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
STALL RATIO: 1.00
RTD BIAS: Range: Disabled, Enabled 5
MESSAGE
Disabled
RTD BIAS MINIMUM Range: 0 to 250°C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
40 C
RTD BIAS CENTER Range: 0 to 250°C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
POINT: 130 C
RTD BIAS MAXIMUM: Range: 0 to 250°C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
155 C
START INHIBIT Range: 0 to 25% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TCU MARGIN: 0%
VOLTAGE DEPENDENT Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
VOLTAGE DEPENDENT Range: 60 to 99% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MIN MOTOR VOLTS: 80%
VD VOLTAGE LOSS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
VD STALL CURRENT @ Range: 1.50 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MIN V: 4.50 x FLA
VD SAFE STALL TIME @ Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MIN V: 20.0 sec.
VD ACCELL. INTERSECT Range: 1.50 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
@ MIN V: 4.00 x FLA
VD STALL CURRENT @ Range: 1.50 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
100% V: 6.00 x FLA

VD SAFE STALL TIME @ Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE
100% V: 10.0 sec.
VD ACCELL. INTERSECT Range: 1.50 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
@100% V: 5.00 x FLA
THERMAL MODEL Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BLOCK: Off
THERMAL MODEL Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGETS: Self-Reset
THERMAL MODEL Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The thermal model is the primary protective function of the relay. It consists of five key functions:
• Thermal model curve (overload).
• Overload pickup level.
• Unbalance biasing of the motor current while the motor is running.
• Motor cooling time constants.
• Biasing of the thermal model based on hot/cold information and/or measured stator temperature.
The algorithm integrates both stator and rotor heating into a single model. The motor heating level is maintained in the ther-
mal capacity used register. If the motor has been stopped for a long time, it will be at ambient temperature and thermal
capacity used will be zero. If the motor is in overload, the output operand is set once the thermal capacity used reaches
100%.
5 Once the motor load current exceeds the overload level (FLA x overload factor), it enters an overload phase; that is, the
heat accumulation becomes greater than the heat dissipation. The M60 thermal model reacts by incrementing the thermal
capacity used (TCU) at a rate dependent on the selected thermal curve and overload level. When the thermal capacity
reaches 100%, the MOTOR THERMAL OP operand (typically configured to trip the motor) is set. This operand remains
asserted until TCU decays to the level that permits a new motor start. For additional details, see the description of the
START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN setting in this section.
• THERMAL MODEL CURVE: The thermal model curve determines the thermal limit overload conditions that can dam-
age the motor. This curve accounts for motor heating in both the stator and rotor during stall, acceleration, and running
conditions. The overload curve can take one of six formats: Motor, FlexCurve™ A, FlexCurve™ B, FlexCurve™ C,
FlexCurve™ D, or IEC. The selected curve can also serve as a base for a voltage dependent overload curve if the
VOLTAGE DEPENDENT FUNCTION setting is “Enabled”. The algorithm uses memory in the form of a register called Ther-
mal Capacity Used. This register is updated every power cycle using the following equation:
1 ⁄ f (in ms)
TC used ( t ) = TC used (t – 1) + ------------------------------- × 100% (EQ 5.7)
time_to_trip
where time_to_trip represents the time coordinate on the time-current overload curve, corresponding to the equivalent
motor current detected within any power cycle period of motor overload. Always set the overload curve slightly lower
than the thermal limits provided by the motor manufacturer. This ensures that the motor is tripped before the thermal
limit is reached.
The “Motor” curve is based on typical motor thermal limit curves and is normally used for standard motor applications
(see the Standard Motor Curves figure and Standard Curve Multipliers table below). The pickup level for the “Motor”
curve is calculated as MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR setting (OF) times the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting (FLA). The
MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS (FLA) setting can be found in the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR menu.

PICKUP M60 STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS

LEVEL ×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×5 ×6 ×7 ×8 ×9 × 10 × 11 × 12 × 13 × 14 × 15
1.01 4353.6 8707.2 13061 17414 21768 26122 30475 34829 39183 43536 47890 52243 56597 60951 65304
1.05 853.71 1707.4 2561.1 3414.9 4268.6 5122.3 5976.0 6829.7 7683.4 8537.1 9390.8 10245 11098 11952 12806
1.10 416.68 833.36 1250.0 1666.7 2083.4 2500.1 2916.8 3333.5 3750.1 4166.8 4583.5 5000.2 5416.9 5833.6 6250.2
1.20 198.86 397.72 596.58 795.44 994.30 1193.2 1392.0 1590.9 1789.7 1988.6 2187.5 2386.3 2585.2 2784.1 2982.9
1.30 126.80 253.61 380.41 507.22 634.02 760.82 887.63 1014.4 1141.2 1268.0 1394.8 1521.6 1648.5 1775.3 1902.1
1.40 91.14 182.27 273.41 364.55 455.68 546.82 637.96 729.09 820.23 911.37 1002.5 1093.6 1184.8 1275.9 1367.0
1.50 69.99 139.98 209.97 279.96 349.95 419.94 489.93 559.92 629.91 699.90 769.89 839.88 909.87 979.86 1049.9
1.75 42.41 84.83 127.24 169.66 212.07 254.49 296.90 339.32 381.73 424.15 466.56 508.98 551.39 593.81 636.22
2.00 29.16 58.32 87.47 116.63 145.79 174.95 204.11 233.26 262.42 291.58 320.74 349.90 379.05 408.21 437.37
2.25 21.53 43.06 64.59 86.12 107.65 129.18 150.72 172.25 193.78 215.31 236.84 258.37 279.90 301.43 322.96
2.50 16.66 33.32 49.98 66.64 83.30 99.96 116.62 133.28 149.94 166.60 183.26 199.92 216.58 233.24 249.90
2.75 13.33 26.65 39.98 53.31 66.64 79.96 93.29 106.62 119.95 133.27 146.60 159.93 173.25 186.58 199.91
3.00 10.93 21.86 32.80 43.73 54.66 65.59 76.52 87.46 98.39 109.32 120.25 131.19 142.12 153.05 163.98
3.25 9.15 18.29 27.44 36.58 45.73 54.87 64.02 73.16 82.31 91.46 100.60 109.75 118.89 128.04 137.18
3.50 7.77 15.55 23.32 31.09 38.87 46.64 54.41 62.19 69.96 77.73 85.51 93.28 101.05 108.83 116.60
3.75 6.69 13.39 20.08 26.78 33.47 40.17 46.86 53.56 60.25 66.95 73.64 80.34 87.03 93.73 100.42
4.00 5.83 11.66 17.49 23.32 29.15 34.98 40.81 46.64 52.47 58.30 64.13 69.96 75.79 81.62 87.45
4.25 5.12 10.25 15.37 20.50 25.62 30.75 35.87 41.00 46.12 51.25 56.37 61.50 66.62 71.75 76.87
4.50 4.54 9.08 13.63 18.17 22.71 27.25 31.80 36.34 40.88 45.42 49.97 54.51 59.05 63.59 68.14
4.75 4.06 8.11 12.17 16.22 20.28 24.33 28.39 32.44 36.50 40.55 44.61 48.66 52.72 56.77 60.83
5.00 3.64 7.29 10.93 14.57 18.22 21.86 25.50 29.15 32.79 36.43 40.08 43.72 47.36 51.01 54.65
5.50 2.99 5.98 8.97 11.96 14.95 17.94 20.93 23.91 26.90 29.89 32.88 35.87 38.86 41.85 44.84
6.00 2.50 5.00 7.49 9.99 12.49 14.99 17.49 19.99 22.48 24.98 27.48 29.98 32.48 34.97 37.47 5
6.50 2.12 4.24 6.36 8.48 10.60 12.72 14.84 16.96 19.08 21.20 23.32 25.44 27.55 29.67 31.79
7.00 1.82 3.64 5.46 7.29 9.11 10.93 12.75 14.57 16.39 18.21 20.04 21.86 23.68 25.50 27.32
7.50 1.58 3.16 4.75 6.33 7.91 9.49 11.08 12.66 14.24 15.82 17.41 18.99 20.57 22.15 23.74
8.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
10.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
15.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
20.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
If “IEC” is selected as the thermal model curve, the M60 can apply the IEC 255-8 hot and cold curve characteristics to
the thermal model. The M60 will evaluate the thermal capacity at motor start and choose the appropriate curve. The
hot curve characteristic is applied when the thermal capacity is greater than or equal to 5% (that is, a point above
where the motor is not at complete rest, or cold). Otherwise, the cold curve characteristic is applied.
The IEC255-8 cold curve is defined as follows:
 2 
I
t = τ × ln  ------------------------------
2
-
2
(EQ 5.8)
 I – ( k × Ib ) 
The IEC255-8 hot curve is defined as follows:

2 2
 I – Ip 
t = τ × ln  ------------------------------
- (EQ 5.9)
 I 2 – ( k × I b ) 2
where:
– t = time to trip.
– τ = value of the THERMAL MODEL TD MULTIPLIER setting.
– I = measured motor load current.
– Ip = value of the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting.
– k = value of the IEC CURVE K FACTOR setting as applied to Ib.

– Ib = the value of MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS x MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR.

• THERMAL MODEL CURVE EFFECT: This setting affects the time-to-trip thermal curves when the THERMAL MODEL
CURVE is selected as “Motor”. This setting takes into account the design of the machine with respect to overload capa-
bility as determined by the overload (service) factor. For motor designs where temperature rise above ambient is
based on full load current, this setting should be selected as “Cutoff”. The time to trip is then calculated using the fol-
lowing equation:
TD × 2.2116623
trip time = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
(EQ 5.10)
I I motor
0.02530337 ×  -------------- motor
– 1 + 0.05054758 ×  -------------- – 1
 FLA   FLA 
In the above equation, the motor stator current (Imotor) and motor rated current (FLA) are expressed in per units of
relay current.
For specialized motor designs where temperature rise above ambient is based on the product of the service factor and
full load current (OF × FLA), this setting should be selected as “Shifted”. The time to trip is then calculated using the
following equation:
TD × 2.2116623
trip time = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
- (EQ 5.11)
I I motor
0.02530337 ×  ------------------------- – 1 + 0.05054758 ×  ------------------------
motor
- – 1
 OF × FLA   OF × FLA 
In the above equation, the motor stator current (Imotor) and motor rated current (FLA) are expressed in per units of
relay current.
In case of uncertainty, the more conservative “Cutoff” value should be used.
The following figure illustrates the impact of this setting on the time to trip thermal curves.
5
10000
1000
Trip time (seconds)
100
10 SF = 1.15, EFFECT = shift

SF = 1.15, EFFECT = cutoff
1
0 5 8
Stator current (multiples of FLA)
Figure 5–48: IMPACT OF THE THERMAL MODEL CURVE EFFECT SETTING

• IEC CURVE k FACTOR: This setting applies only to the IEC motor curve and is applied as described in the THERMAL
MODEL CURVEsetting description. Refer to the IEC 255-8 standard for additional details on its application.

• THERMAL MODEL TD MULTIPLIER: This multiplier is used to shift the overload curve on the time axis to create a
family of the different curves. The TD multiplier value is used to select the curve that best matches the thermal charac-
teristics of the protected motor.
If thermal model curve is selected as “Motor”, then the THERMAL MODEL TD MULTIPLIER can be specified
between “1.00” and “15.00” as indicated in the Standard motor curves diagram below.
NOTE
OF x FLA 8 x OF x FLA
100000
10000
1000
5
Time To Trip in Seconds
100
x15
10
x1
1.00
0.10 1.00 10 100
833003A2.CDR
Multiples of Pickup ( Pickup = OF x FLA)

Figure 5–49: STANDARD MOTOR CURVES
During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nuisance
tripping during motor starts.
NOTE

In some applications, the shape of the motor thermal damage curve substantially deviates from the standard. Further-
more, the characteristics of the starting (locked rotor and acceleration) and running thermal damage curves may not
correspond smoothly. In these cases, it may be necessary to use a custom curve so the motor can be started success-
fully and used to its full potential without compromising protection. For these conditions, it is recommended that the
FlexCurves™ be used. FlexCurves™ allows the user to program selected trip times for pre-determined current levels.
As seen below, if the running (2) and the locked rotor thermal limit curves were smoothed into one standard overload
curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve (1) is required.
For high inertia load applications (when the VOLTAGE DEPENDENT FUNCTION is enabled), the locked rotor thermal limit
section of the programmed motor or the FlexCurve™ overload curve is modified and becomes dynamically adaptive to
system voltage changes. The detailed explanation of this function is covered later in this section.
Typical FlexCurve™
6500 hp, 13800 volt induced draft fan motor
Full load current = 280 amps; CT ratio = 500/5
10000
1 Programmed custom curve
2 Running safe time (stator limit)
3 Acceleration safe time (rotor limit)
4 Motor current at 100% voltage
5
1000
Motor current at 80% voltage
5 1
2
100
Time to trip (in seconds)
3
10
4
5
1.0
0.1
pu 0.56 5.6 56
Amp 280 2800 28000
FLA 1 10 100
833004A2.CDR
Figure 5–50: FLEXCURVE™ EXAMPLE

The FlexCurve™ programming is based on per-unit current values. The equivalent primary amperes and mul-
tiplier of full load current are also indicated above.
NOTE

• UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR: Unbalanced phase currents will cause rotor heating that is not shown in the motor
thermal damage curve. When the motor is running, the rotor will rotate in the direction of the positive sequence current
at near synchronous speed. Negative sequence current, which has a phase rotation that is opposite to the positive
sequence current, and hence opposite to the direction of rotor rotation, will generate a rotor voltage that will produce a
substantial current in the rotor. This current will have a frequency that is approximately twice the line frequency: 100 Hz
for a 50 Hz system or 120 Hz for a 60 Hz system. Skin effect in the rotor bars at this frequency will cause a significant
increase in rotor resistance and therefore, a significant increase in rotor heating. This extra heating is not accounted for
in the thermal limit curves supplied by the motor manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence currents
from a perfectly balanced supply voltage and motor design.
The thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current when
the motor is running. This biasing is done by creating an equivalent motor heating current rather than simply using
average three phase RMS. This equivalent current is calculated using the equation shown below.
2 Ieq = equivalent motor heating current

I_2
⋅  1 + k ⋅  --------  ,
2
I eq = I per_unit where: Iper_unit = per unit current based on FLA
I_1
I_1 = positive sequence current
I_2 = negative sequence current
k = constant (EQ 5.12)
The motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers
Association) is shown below. Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 × FLA and a negative sequence
impedance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5% equals current unbalances of 6, 12, 18, 24, and 30%
respectively. Based on this assumption, the amount of motor derating for different values of k entered for setting
UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR is also shown below. Note that the curve created when k = 8 is almost identical to the
NEMA derating curve.
5
1.05 1.05
1.00 1.00
DERATING FACTOR
DERATING FACTOR
0.95 0.95
k=2
0.90 0.90
0.85 0.85 k=4
0.80 0.80 k=6
k=8
0.75 0.75
k=10
0.70 0.70
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
NEMA GE Multilin
808728A2.CDR
Figure 5–51: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE

If a value of k = 0 is entered, unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against the measured
per unit motor positive sequence current. The following equations can be used to calculate k.
175
- (typical estimate); k = 230
k = --------- ---------- (conservative estimate), where I LR is the per unit locked rotor current (EQ 5.13)
2 2
I LR I LR
• COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING / STOPPED: The thermal capacity used value is reduced in an exponential man-
ner when the motor current is below the full load amps × service factor settings to simulate motor cooling. The motor
cooling time constants should be entered for both the stopped and running cases. A stopped motor will normally cool
significantly slower than a running motor.
Motor cooling is calculated as follows:
–t ⁄ τ
TCU = ( TCU start – TCU end ) ( e ) + TCU end (EQ 5.14)
I eq hot
TCU end =  -------------------------------------------  1 – ----------- × 100% (EQ 5.15)
 overload_pickup  cold

where: TCU = thermal capacity used

TCUstart = TCU value caused by overload condition
TCUend = TCU value dictated by the hot/cold curve ratio when the motor is running
(= 0 when the motor is stopped)
t = time in minutes
τ = Cool Time Constant (running or stopped)
Ieq = equivalent motor heating current
overload_pickup = overload pickup setpoint as a multiple of FLA
hot / cold = hot/cold curve ratio
100 100
75 75
Thermal Capacity Used

Cool Time Constant= 15 min Cool Time Constant= 15 min

TCused_start= 85% TCused_start= 85%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
50 Ieq/Overload Pickup= 80% 50 Ieq/Overload Pickup= 100%
25 25
0 0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time in Minutes Time in Minutes
5 80% LOAD 100% LOAD
100 100
75 75
Cool Time Constant= 30 min Cool Time Constant= 30 min

TCused_start= 85% TCused_start= 100%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
Motor Stopped after running Rated Load Motor Overload
50 TCused_end= 0% 50 TCused_end= 0%
25 25
0 0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time in Minutes Time in Minutes
MOTOR STOPPED MOTOR TRIPPED

808705A2.CDR
Figure 5–52: THERMAL MODEL COOLING

• HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO: The motor manufacturer will sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/
cold motor. The algorithm will use this data if this setting is programmed. The value entered for this setting dictates the
level at which thermal capacity used will settle for current that is below the motor service factor times FLA. When the
motor is running at a level that is below this limit thermal capacity used will rise or fall to a value based on Iequivalent
(average three phase RMS and the selected setting. Thermal capacity used will either rise at the fixed rate of 5% per
minute or fall as dictated by the running cool time constant.
hot
TCU end = I eq ×  1 – ----------- × 100% (EQ 5.16)
 cold

where: TCUend = THERMAL CAPACITY USED if Iequivalent remains steady state

Ieq = Iequivalent motor heating current
hot / cold = HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting
• RTD BIAS: This setting enables or disables the RTD bias mechanism. See the RTD BIAS MINIMUM, RTD BIAS CENTER,
and RTD BIAS MAXIMUM setting descriptions below for details on using the RTD bias mechanism.
The RTD Bias feature is active when the optional RTD Input module (module 5C or 5E) is installed.
NOTE
• RTD BIAS MINIMUM / CENTER / MAXIMUM: The relay thermal replica operates as a complete and independent
model. The thermal overload curves however, are based solely on measured current, assuming a normal 40°C ambi-
ent and normal motor cooling. If there is an unusually high ambient temperature, or if motor cooling is blocked, motor
temperature will increase. If the motor stator has embedded RTDs, the RTD bias feature should be used to augment
the thermal model calculation of Thermal Capacity Used.
The RTD bias feature is a two-part curve (RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used) constructed from three points: minimum,
center and maximum. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below the RTD BIAS MINIMUM setting (typically 40°C),
no biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the RTD BIAS MAXIMUM setting (typically at the sta-
tor insulation rating or slightly higher), then the thermal memory is fully biased and RTD bias thermal capacity used is
forced to 100%. At values in between, the present RTD bias thermal capacity used created by other features of the
thermal model is compared to the RTD bias thermal capacity used. If the value of the RTD bias thermal capacity used
is higher, then this value is used from that point onward. The RTD BIAS CENTER setting should be selected to the rated
running temperature of the motor. The relay will automatically determine the RTD bias thermal capacity used value for
the center point using the HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting.
hot
TCU at RTD_Bias_Center =  1 – ----------- × 100%
 cold
(EQ 5.17)
5
At < RTD_Bias_Center temperature,
Temp actual – Temp min
RTD_Bias_TCU = -------------------------------------------------------- × TCU at RTD_Bias_Center (EQ 5.18)
Temp center – Temp min
At > RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

Temp actual – Temp center
RTD_Bias_TCU = ------------------------------------------------------------- × ( 100 – TCU at RTD_Bias_Center ) + TCU at RTD_Bias_Center (EQ 5.19)
Temp max – Temp center
where: RTD_Bias_TCU = thermal capacity used due to hottest stator RTD

Tempacutal = current temperature of the hottest stator RTD
Tempmin = RTD Bias minimum setting
Tempcenter = RTD Bias center setting
Tempmax = RTD Bias maximum setting
TCU at RTD_Bias_Center = thermal capacity used defined by the HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting
In simple terms, the RTD bias feature is feedback of measured stator temperature. This feedback acts to correct the
assumed thermal model. Since RTDs have a relatively slow response, RTD biasing is useful for slow motor heating.
Other portions of the thermal model are required during starting and heavy overload conditions when motor heating is
relatively fast.
It should be noted that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. Even if the RTD bias feature forces the RTD
bias thermal capacity used to 100%, the load current must be above the overload pickup setting to set the output.
Do not program RTD BIAS MAXIMUM setpoint greater than 200°C if using a remote RTD unit, since the RRTD
only measures temperatures up to 200°C.
NOTE

RTD Bias Maximum

100
Hot/Cold = 0.85
RTD Thermal Capacity Used

80 Rated Temperature=130°C
Insulation Rating=155°C
60
40
20
RTD Bias Center Point
RTD Bias Minimum
0
–50 0 50 100 150 200 250
Maximum Stator RTD Temperature
808721A1.CDR
Figure 5–53: RTD BIAS CURVE

• START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN: This setting prevents starting of a motor if there is insufficient thermal capacity avail-
able for a successful start. The motor start inhibit logic algorithm is defined by MOTOR START INHIBIT MARGIN setpoint. If
MOTOR START INHIBIT MARGIN is set to “0”, the MOTOR START INHIBIT FlexLogic™ operand is asserted only when motor
is tripped by thermal protection (TCU = 100%). After being asserted, the MOTOR START INHIBIT operand resets and a
new motor start is permitted when TCused decays to a level of 15%. The thermal lockout time is calculated as follows.
–T ⁄ τ
TCU end = TCU start × e (EQ 5.20)
5 where TCUstart is the thermal capacity level when the MOTOR START INHIBIT operand is asserted, TCUend is the ther-
mal capacity level when MOTOR START INHIBIT operand is reset, and τ is the COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED setpoint.
To calculate the thermal lockout time for the case when MOTOR START INHIBIT MARGIN is set to “0”, the following TCU
values are to be applied to the above equation: TCUstart = 100% and TCUend = 15%.
If the motor is tripped or stopped by a means other than thermal protection (TCU < 100%), the MOTOR START
INHIBIT operand is not asserted and a new start is permitted. There is a potential risk in this situation to trip out
NOTE the motor by thermal protection during the new start.
If MOTOR START INHIBIT MARGIN is greater than “0”, the MOTOR START INHIBIT operand will be asserted either when
motor is tripped by thermal protection (TCU = 100%) or tripped/stopped by any other reason (TCU < 100%).
Each time motor is tripped/stopped by a means other than thermal protection (TCU < 100%) the available thermal
capacity (100% – TCU) is evaluated and compared to the TC required for starting the motor. If the available thermal
capacity is not sufficient to perform new motor start, then the MOTOR START INHIBIT operand will be asserted. The ther-
mal capacity required for starting the motor (TCUonStart) is defined from the following equation:
TCU margin + 100%

TCU onStart = TCU maxStart ×  ------------------------------------------------ (EQ 5.21)
 100% 
where TCUmargin is the relay setpoint, and TCmaxStart is the maximum thermal capacity value from the last five suc-
cessful motor starts. The relay monitors motor starting and captures the TCU for each successful start. The largest
value from the last five (5) starts is used in the start inhibit calculation.
In this case, the MOTOR START INHIBIT operand resets when TCU decays to the level satisfying the following equation:
TCU margin + 100%

TCU ≤ 100% –  TCU maxStart × ------------------------------------------------ (EQ 5.22)
 100% 
To calculate the thermal lockout time for the case when the MOTOR START INHIBIT MARGIN setting is greater than “0”, the
following TCU values are to be applied:
TCU start = TC accumulated from the moment the motor was stopped
TCU margin (EQ 5.23)
TCU end = 100% –  TCU maxStart ×  1 + -------------------------- 
  100%  

If MOTOR START INHIBIT MARGIN is greater than “0”, but relay does not contain records for five successful starts, then the
MOTOR START INHIBIT operand can be asserted again either when motor is tripped by thermal protection
(TCU = 100%) or tripped/stopped by any other reason (TCaccumulated < 100%). However, operand reset is evaluated
based on 15% level of thermal capacity. To calculate the thermal lockout time in this case, the following values of TCU
are to be applied to the above equation: TCUstart = thermal capacity accumulated from the moment the motor was
stopped, and TCUend = 15%.
• VOLTAGE DEPENDENT FUNCTION: If the motor is called upon to drive a high inertia load, it is quite possible and
acceptable for the acceleration time to exceed the safe stall time (keeping in mind that a locked rotor condition is differ-
ent than an acceleration condition). The voltage dependent overload curve feature is tailored to protect these types of
motors. This curve is composed of the three characteristic of thermal limit curve shapes as determined by the stall or
locked rotor condition, acceleration, and running overload. The figure below presents the typical thermal limit curve for
high inertia application.
g GE Multilin
HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES
8800 HP, 13.2 kV, REACTOR COOLANT PUMP
1000
900
800
700
1- Running Overload Thermal Limit
600 1
2- Acceleration Thermal Limit at 80%V
500 3- Acceleration Thermal Limit at 100%V
4- Locked Rotor Thermal Limit
400 5- Motor Acceleration Curve at 80% V
6- Motor Acceleration Curve at 100%V
300
2
200
3
5
100
90
80
TIME TO TRIP (SECONDS)
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
4
6
5
4
5
3
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD AMPS 806821A4.CDR
Voltage dependent overload functionality is operational only if the selected MOTOR LINE SOURCE (see the SYS-
TEM  MOTOR SETUP menu) is assigned to a valid three-phase VT.
NOTE

In this instance, each distinct portion of the thermal limit curve must be known and protection coordinated against that
curve. The relay protecting the motor must be able to distinguish between a locked rotor condition (curve 4) and an
accelerating condition for different levels of the system voltage (curves 2 and 3). Voltage is continually monitored dur-
ing motor starting and the acceleration thermal limit portion of the relay overload curve is dynamically adjusted based
on motor voltage variations.
The acceleration thermal limit is a function of motor speed during the start. The dynamically shifted voltage dependent
overload curve inherently accounts for the change in motor speed as a function of motor impedance. The change in
impedance is reflected by motor terminal voltage and line current. This method aids to set dynamically the appropriate
value of the thermal limit time for any given line current at any given terminal voltage.
The VOLTAGE DEPENDENT FUNCTION setpoint enables the voltage dependent feature and modifies the locked rotor por-
tion of the programmed relay overload curve with respect to the acceleration thermal limits. These thermal limits are
typically available from the machine specifications provided by motor manufacturer.
• VOLTAGE DEPENDENT MIN MOTOR VOLTS: This setting defines the minimum allowable line voltage applied to the
motor during the acceleration if VOLTAGE DEPENDENT FUNCTION is enabled. This voltage is expressed as a percentage
of the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR NAMEPLATE VOLTAGE setting. If the measured line voltage drops below
this setting during acceleration, the thermal curve is switched to one based on the programmed minimum voltage ther-
mal limit:
2
I1 × t1
trip_time = --------------
2
- (EQ 5.24)
I
• VD VOLTAGE LOSS. This setting is used to address situations when the voltage input into thermal model has been
lost. In this case, the voltage dependent algorithm readjusts the voltage dependent curve to avoid an inadequate ther-
mal protection response. The VT fuse failure function is typically used to detect a voltage loss condition. If a voltage
5 loss has been detected while motor accelerates, the thermal curve is switched to one based on the programmed 100%
voltage thermal limit:
2
I3 × t3
trip_time = --------------
2
- (EQ 5.25)
I
• VD STALL CURRENT @ MIN V: This setting defines the locked rotor current level at minimum motor voltage (I1).
• VD SAFE STALL TIME @ MIN V: This setting defines the maximum time that motor is allowed to withstand the locked
rotor current at minimum motor voltage (t1).
• VD ACCEL. INTERESECT @ MIN V: This setting defines the starting current level corresponding to the crossing point
between the acceleration thermal limit at minimum voltage and the programmed relay overload curve (I2). This value
can be typically determined from motor acceleration curves. The value at the breakdown torque for the minimum volt-
age start is recommended for this setting.
833714A1.CDR
Figure 5–54: TYPICAL MOTOR ACCELERATION CHARACTERISTICS

• VD STALL CURRENT @ 100% V: This setting defines the locked rotor current level at the rated motor voltage (I3).
• VD SAFE STALL TIME @ 100% V: This setting defines the maximum time the motor is allowed to withstand the
locked rotor current at rated motor voltage (t3).
• VD ACCEL. INTERESECT @ 100% V: This setting defines the starting current level corresponding to the crossing
point between the acceleration thermal limit at rated voltage and the programmed relay overload curve (I4). This value
can be typically determined from the motor acceleration curves. The current value at the breakdown torque for the
100% voltage start is recommended for this setting.
The voltage dependent overload curves are shown below.
10000.00
THERMAL MODEL CURVE
ACCELERATION INTERSECT@ minV (2)

1000.00
ACCELERATION INTERSECT@ 100%V (4)
ACCELERATION INTERSECT@ 110%V (6)
A
5
LOCKED ROTOR THERMAL LIMIT CURVE
C
100.00
THERMAL LIMIT CURVES

FOR ABNORMAL CONDITIONS:
- LESS THAN Vmin (A)
- MORE THAN 110%V (B)
- LOSS OF VOLTAGE (C)
10.00
SAFE STALL POINT @ minV (1)
SAFE STALL POINT @ 100%V (3)
SAFE STALL POINT @ 110%V (5)
1.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PER UNIT CURRENT
THERMAL MODEL CURVE LOCKED ROTOR LINE MIN V ACCELERATE

100% ACCELERATE 110% ACCELERATE MIN V LINE
100% V LINE 110% V LINE
833715A1.CDR
Figure 5–55: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD CURVES

The following procedure, along with the figure above, illustrate the construction of the voltage overload curves.
1. Draw a curve for the running overload thermal limit. The curve is one that has been selected in the relay as a
THERMAL MODEL CURVE.
2. Determine the point of intersection between the THERMAL MODEL CURVE and the vertical line corresponding to the
per-unit current value of VD ACCEL. INTERESECT @ MIN V (see point 2).
3. Determine the locked rotor thermal limit point for the minimum voltage motor start. The coordinates of this point
are the per-unit current value of VD STALL CURRENT @ MIN VOLTS and the time value of VD SAFE STALL TIME @ MIN V
(see point 1).
4. The line connecting points 1 and 2 constructs the acceleration curve for the system voltage level defined by the
VOLTAGE DEPENDENT MIN MOTOR VOLTS setting. The acceleration time-current curve for the minimum voltage start-
ing is calculated from the following equation:
–I ⁄ σ
trip_time = A FACTOR × e
I1 – I2 I1 ⁄ σ
(EQ 5.26)
where σ = ----------------------- and A FACTOR = t 1 × e
ln ( t 2 ⁄ t 1 )
I is a variable multiplier of the motor rated current (values between I1 and I2),
I1 is a multiplier of the rated motor current (FLA) specified by the VD STALL CURRENT @ MIN V setting,
t1 is a time value specified by the VD SAFE STALL TIME @ MIN V setting,
I2 is a multiplier of the rated motor current (FLA) specified by the VD ACCEL. INTERESECT @ MIN V setting, and
t2 is a time coordinate of the intersection point between the thermal model curve and the vertical line correspond-
ing to the per-unit current value of the VD ACCEL. INTERESECT @ MIN V setting.
5. Determine the point of intersection between the thermal model curve and the vertical line corresponding to the
5 multiplier of the rated current value of the VD ACCEL. INTERESECT @ 100% V setting (see point 4).
6. Draw the locked rotor thermal limit point for the 100% voltage motor start. The coordinates of this point are the
multiplier of the rated current value (FLA) of the VD STALL CURRENT @ 100% V setting and the time value of the VD
SAFE STALL TIME @ 100% V setting (see point 3).
7. The line connecting points 3 and 4 constructs the acceleration curve for the motor rated system voltage. The
acceleration time-current curve for the rated voltage starting is calculated from the same equations, but the set-
points associated with the 100% voltage starting will be applied.
8. The line connecting points 1, 3 and 5 represent the motor safe stall conditions for any system voltage from the
minimum to 110% of rated. Ideally, all the points on this line are characterized by the same thermal limit (I2t), but
the equivalent starting impedance at reduced voltage is greater than the impedance at full voltage. As such, the
higher terminal voltages tend to reduce I2t. The rate of I2t reduction is dictated by the VD STALL CURRENT and VD
SAFE STALL TIME setpoints for rated and minimum voltage conditions. For voltage conditions above rated, the
locked rotor thermal limit and acceleration curve are extrapolated up to 110% of the terminal voltage. The point
coordinates (Is, Ts) for 110% are extrapolated based on the I1, T1, I3, and T3 values. For starting currents at volt-
ages higher than 110%, the trip time computed from 110% V thermal limit value will be used.
The voltage dependent curve for current values above 8 times pickup (OF × FLA) will be clamped and the time
to trip will be frozen at the level calculated for the 8 times pickup current.
NOTE
The following three figures illustrate the resultant overload protection curve for minimum, 100%, and maximum line
voltages. For voltages between these limits, the M60 will shift the acceleration curve linearly and constantly, based on
the measured line voltage during a motor start.

10000.00
1000.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
0 1 2 3 4
PER UNIT CURRENT
5 6 7 8
5
833716A1.CDR
Figure 5–56: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD CURVE PROTECTION AT MINIMUM VOLTAGE
10000.00
1000.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PER UNIT CURRENT
833717A1.CDR
Figure 5–57: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD CURVE PROTECTION AT 100% VOLTAGE

10000.00
1000.00
100.00
10.00
5
1.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PER UNIT CURRENT
833718A1.CDR
Figure 5–58: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD CURVE PROTECTION AT 110% VOLTAGE

The following three figures illustrate the motor starting curves for the following abnormal conditions: line voltages below the
minimum, above 110%, and the situation for voltage loss.
10000.00
1000.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PER UNIT CURRENT
833719A1.CDR
Figure 5–59: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD CURVE PROTECTION AT LESS THAN MINIMUM VOLTAGE

10000.00
1000.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
0 1 2 3 4
PER UNIT CURRENT
5 6 7 8 5
833720A1.CDR
Figure 5–60: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD CURVE PROTECTION AT VOLTAGE LOSS CONDITION
10000.00
1000.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PER UNIT CURRENT
833721A1.CDR
Figure 5–61: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD CURVE PROTECTION AT MORE THAN 110% VOLTAGE

For the three abnormal voltage situations, the M60 makes a transition from the acceleration curve to Motor or Flex-
Curve when the MOTOR RUNNING or MOTOR OVERLOADED operands are asserted.
NOTE
SETTING
Voltage Dependent Function
Disabled = 0
AND Motor curve
Enabled = 1
TD ´ 2.2116623
t( I ) =
SETTING 0.02530337 ´ ( I - 1 )2 + 0.05054758 ´ ( I - 1 )
Curve
Motor
AND FlexCurve™
FlexCurve
SETTING
Voltage Dependent Voltage AND
Loss
= Off
AND
from the System Setup > Motor menu
SETTINGS
Motor Line Source
SRC 1 Voltage dependent
AND
Motor Nameplate Voltage motor curve
Vrated
from the System Setup

> AC Inputs > Voltage menu
VRMS ´ Vratio
SETTINGS V=
Vrated
Phase VT Ratio Voltage dependent
AND
Auxiliary VT Ratio FlexCurve™
Vratio Vmin < V < V110 %
V > V110 % 110% voltage

AND
locked rotor curve
5 SETTING
Voltage Dependent Min
Motor Volts V < Vmin
t( I ) =
I52 ´ t5
I2
Vmin
Minimum voltage
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND
locked rotor curve
MOTOR RUNNING
I12 ´ t1
t( I ) =
OR I2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
MOTOR OVERLOAD
100% voltage
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND locked rotor curve
MOTOR STARTING I32 ´ t3
t( I ) =
I2 833018A2.CDR
Figure 5–62: VOLTAGE DEPENDENT OVERLOAD SCHEME LOGIC

• THERMAL MODEL BLOCK: The thermal model can be blocked by any asserted FlexLogic™ operand. While the
blocking signal is applied, the element will remain running and update the thermal memory, but the states of the
MOTOR START INHIBIT and MOTOR THERMAL OP operands will remain unchanged. When the element blocking signal
is removed, the element logic will be based on the new value of thermal capacity and will update the status of the
MOTOR START INHIBIT and MOTOR THERMAL OP operands.
In the event of a loss of control power to the relay while the motor status is not offline, the thermal capacity will remain
unchanged when control power is restored. If the motor status is offline when control power is lost, the thermal capacity will
decay for the duration of the loss of control power based on the stopped motor cooling rate.

SETTINGS
RTD BIAS:
RTD BIAS
MINIMUM:
RTD BIAS CENTER
POINT:
RTD BIAS
MAXIMUM:
TCU MARGIN:
THERMAL MODEL
CURVE:
THERMAL MODEL
SETTING
TD MULTIPLIER:
THERMAL MODEL
COOL TIME CONSTANT SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION:
RUNNING:
Enabled=1 TC USED MARGIN: MOTOR START INHIBIT
COOL TIME CONSTANT
STOPPED: TCU Margin = 0% AND AND
SETTING
AND RUN TCU Margin > 0%
THERMAL MODEL THERMAL MEMORY
BLOCK : TC Used > 15%
Off=0 AND OR OR R
OR
AND
5 STARTS History Available AND
TC Used on START > TC available
(
TC Used on Start=TCMAX Start x TCU MARGIN(%)+100%
100% )
AND
TCU 100% Stop
Stop TC Used
on START AND
START INHIBIT
SETTING
5
THERM MOD OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS MOTOR STATUS
EMERGENCY
MOTOR OFFLINE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESTART:
MOTOR STARTING MOTOR THERMAL OP
Off=0 Reset TC Used To 0% ACTUAL VALUES
MOTOR RUNNING
ACTUAL VALUE MOTOR OVERLOAD
IEq PICKUP MOTOR THERMAL PKP
MOTOR LINE
SOURCE: MOTOR THERMAL DPO
IA RMS
IB RMS t
IC RMS
TC used =
Pos Seq I
Neg Seq I TC used 100%
I
ACTUAL VALUE
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 1 AND S
TC OR
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 2
TC used RTD=
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 5 MAX STATOR RTD TC used 100%
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 6 Hottest RTD 833007A6.CDR
Figure 5–63: THERMAL MODEL LOGIC

d) AMP UNBALANCE
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  AMP UNBALANCE 1(2)
 AMP UNBALANCE 1 AMP UNBAL 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP: Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
0.0%
AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
AMP UNBAL 1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
AMP UNBAL 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AMP UNBAL 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
AMP UNBAL 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
This element receives current inputs from the source selected by the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR
LINE SOURCE setting. Generally, this element compares the ratio of motor negative sequence current (I_2) to the positive
sequence current (I_1) times an adjustment factor to compensate for the actual motor load to a set threshold. The adjust-
ment factor is used to prevent nuisance alarms at light loads. If the motor is operating at an average current level equal to
5 or greater than the programmed full load current (FLA, as selected by the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR FULL LOAD
AMPS setting) the adjustment factor is one. If the motor is operating at an average current level less than the programmed
full load current (as selected by the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting) the adjustment factor is
the ratio of average current to full load current. It is intended that the Amp Unbalance 1 element is used to generate an
alarm and Amp Unbalance 2 element is used to generate a trip.
A declaration of a “single-phasing” condition is made 2 seconds after the unbalanced current level exceeds 40%, or the
average current is above 25% of FLA and the current in any one phase is less than 2% of FLA
• AMP UNBAL 1(2) PICKUP: This setting selects the level of unbalanced current that generates a stage 1 (intended to
alarm) output. Note that a supply voltage unbalance of 1% creates a current unbalance of 6% in a typical three-phase
induction motor; a supply voltage unbalance of 2% creates a current unbalance of 12%. As a 2% voltage unbalance is
common in most applications, a setting of 0.15 is often used as the alarm level, and AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP is usually set
to this level or higher.
• AMP UNBAL 1(2) PICKUP DELAY: The alarm delay is often set from 5 to 10 seconds. A higher level of unbalance will
cause motor stress in a shorter period; thus, a reasonable setting is 3 to 10 seconds.
• AMP UNBAL 1(2) RESET DELAY: This timer can be used to maintain the output until other equipment or an operator
can react to the unbalance condition.

SETTING
AMP UNBAL 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
ACTUAL VALUES
AMP UNBALANCE
SETTING
AND
AMP UNBAL 1
BLK:
Off = 0 NOTE: SETTING
- FLA is programmed in
*SYSTEM SETUP / MOTOR / FULL LOAD AMPS
AMP UNBAL 1
SETTING SETTING PICKUP DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYSTEM SETUP/MOTOR/ AMP UNBAL 1 AMP UNBAL 1 AMP UNBALANCE 1 PKP
MOTOR LINE SOURCE: PICKUP: PICKUP RESET: AMP UNBALANCE 1 DPO
I_1 RUN t PKP
I_2 I_2
Kx x100% UNBAL >
= PKP 1 t RST
IA I_1
If Iavg >
= FLA*, K=1
IA+IB+IC = Iavg Iavg FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IB If Iavg < FLA*, K=
3 FLA*
IC OR AMP UNBALANCE 1 OP
UNBAL > 40 % AND
Iavg >
= 0.25 FLA*
OR 2s
0
AND
AND
IA < 0.02 FLA*
AND OR
IB < 0.02 FLA*
AND
IC < 0.02 FLA* 833002A4.CDR
Figure 5–64: AMP UNBALANCE SCHEME LOGIC
e) MECHANICAL JAM 5
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  MECHANICAL JAM
 MECHANICAL JAM MECHANICAL JAM Range: Disabled, Enabled

MECH JAM OVERCURRENT Range: 1.00 to 10.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 2.00 x FLA
MECH JAM PICKUP Range: 0.10 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.10 s
MECH JAM RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
MECH JAM BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MECH JAM TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
MECH JAM EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
A motor load can become constrained (mechanical jam) during starting or running. The starting current magnitude alone
cannot provide a definitive indication of a mechanical jam; however, the running current magnitude can. The Mechanical
Jam element is specifically designed to operate for running load jams. Starting load jams are detected by monitoring accel-
eration time and speed. The thermal element will also operate during mechanical jams but after a delay when the thermal
capacity reaches 100%. Not only is this ineffective due to the delay but it also implies the maximum waiting time for cooling
before a re-start, which could be restrictive.
This element is armed as long as the motor status is not “Starting”; this includes “Running”, “Overload”, and “Offline”. As
soon as any phase current exceeds the user-selectable threshold, the element picks up and operates after the pro-
grammed time delay. The element uses currents configured under SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR LINE SOURCE and
motor status asserted by the thermal model element. Both the signal source and thermal protection must be configured
properly in order for the mechanical jam protection to operate.

• MECH JAM OVERCURRENT PICKUP: This setting defines excessive current condition that identifies a mechanical
jam. As the element is not armed during start conditions, this threshold can be set below the starting current. Since the
element is armed during overload conditions, this setting should be higher than the maximum overload current. The
setting is entered in multiplies of FLA (defined in the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR menu).
• MECH JAM PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. In the case of large motors that
could feed close-in feeder faults, this setting can coordinate with feeder protection to avoid false tripping due to exces-
sive fault currents fed by the motor.
• MECH JAM RESET DELAY: This setting defines the reset delay of the element. Typical application includes time seal-
in of the tripping command.
SETTING
MECH JAM FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
SETTING MECH JAM
OVERCURRENT PICKUP:
MECH JAM BLK:
AND RUN SETTINGS
Off = 0 MECH JAM PICKUP
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND IA PICKUP OR MECH JAM RESET
MOTOR STARTING DELAY:
IB > PICKUP OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
t PKP
t RST MECHANICAL JAM OP
SETTING IC > PICKUP MECHANICAL JAM DPO
SYSTEM SETUP/MOTOR/
MECHANICAL JAM PKP
MOTOR LINE SOURCE:
IA mag
IB mag
IC mag 833012A1.CDR
Figure 5–65: MECHANICAL JAM SCHEME LOGIC
5 f) UNDERCURRENT
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  UNDERCURRENT
 UNDERCURRENT UNDERCURRENT Range: Enabled, Disabled

UNDERCURRENT START Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
BLOCK DLY: 0.50 s
UNDERCURRENT ALARM Range: 0.10 to 0.95 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.70 x FLA
UNDERCURRENT ALARM Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP DLY: 2.00 s
UNDERCURRENT TRIP Range: 0.10 to 0.95 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.70 x FLA
UNDERCURRENT TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP DLY: 1.00 s
UNDERCURRENT TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RESET DLY: 1.00 s
UNDERCURRENT BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UNDERCURRENT TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
UNDERCURRENT EVENTS: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The undercurrent function uses the source defined by the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR LINE SOURCE setting.
Phase currents must be configured on this source; otherwise, the undercurrent function will not be operational. The ele-
ment responds to a per-phase current.

If the undercurrent function is enabled, a trip or alarm is initiated once the IA, IB or IC current magnitude falls below the
pickup level for a time specified by the delay setting For example, the undercurrent element may be used to detect loss-of-
load conditions. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.
The undercurrent element is active when the motor is running at speed 1; that is, when the motor status is running and
speed 2 is not employed or active.
• UNDERCURRENT START BLOCK DLY: This setting specifies the length of time to block the undercurrent function
when motor is starting. If not in the starting state, the motor status is indicated by the MOTOR OFFLINE operand. Refer
to the Motor setup section for additional information on using the MOTOR OFFLINE operand for state determination.
The undercurrent element is active only when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for
a period of time specified by this setting. For example, this block delay may be used to allow pumps to build up head
before the undercurrent element trips or alarms. A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from start. For
values other than 0, the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until
the time entered expires.
• UNDERCURRENT ALARM PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm stage. The alarm pickup
threshold should be less than the motor load current during normal operations.
• UNDERCURRENT ALARM PICKUP DLY: This setting specifies a time delay for the alarm stage. The time delay
should long enough to overcome any short lowering of the current (for example, during system faults).
• UNDERCURRENT TRIP PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip stage. This setting should be
less than the corresponding setting for the alarm stage.
• UNDERCURRENT TRIP PICKUP DLY: This setting specifies a time delay for the trip stage. This time delay should be
long enough to overcome any short lowering of the current (for example, during system faults).
• UNDERCURRENT TRIP RESET DLY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This delay should
be set long enough to allow breaker or contactor to disconnect the motor. 5
• UNDERCURRENT BLOCK: This setting specifies an operand used to block the undercurrent function. A panel cutoff
switch or other user specified condition is typically used to block the function.
SETTINGS
UNDERCURRENT
FUNCTION
= Enabled
UNDERCURRENT BLOCK AND
= Off
SETTINGS
UNDERCURRENT START
BLOCK DLY AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TPKP SETTINGS
MOTOR OFFLINE
SETTING UNDERCURRENT ALARM
0 PICKUP DLY
UNDERCURRENT ALARM
MOTOR STATUS PICKUP UNDERCURRENT TRIP
Running at speed 1 PICKUP DLY
RUN
UNDERCURRENT TRIP
magnitude Ia < PICKUP RESET DLY
TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
magnitude Ib < PICKUP OR U/CURR ALARM OP
0
magnitude IC < PICKUP TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
U/CURR TRIP OP
TRST
SETTING
UNDERCURRENT TRIP
PICKUP
RUN
SETTING magnitude Ia < PICKUP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
MOTOR LINE SOURCE U/CURR ALARM PKP
= Ia magnitude Ib < PICKUP OR U/CURR TRIP PKP
= Ib
= Ic magnitude IC < PICKUP
833024A1.CDR
Figure 5–66: UNDERCURRENT LOGIC

g) TWO-SPEED MOTOR MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  TWO-SPEED MOTOR
 TWO-SPEED MOTOR  SPEED2 THERMAL

See page 5-136.
  MODEL
 SPEED2
 ACCELERATION TIME
 SPEED2
 UNDERCURRENT
The two-speed motor menu appears only if two-speed motor functionality is enabled in the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP
 MOTOR menu.
h) TWO-SPEED MOTOR THERMAL MODEL

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  TWO-SPEED MOTOR
 SPEED2 THERMAL MODEL
 SPEED2 THERMAL SPEED2 THERMAL MODEL Range: Motor, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C,
 MODEL CURVE: Motor FlexCurve D, IEC
SPEED2 THERMAL MODEL Range: 0.00 to 16.00 in steps of 0.01 when speed 2
MESSAGE thermal modle curve is Motor, otherwise 0.00 to
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
600.00 in steps of 0.01
SPEED2 VOLT DEPEND Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
5 MESSAGE
SPEED2 VOLT DEPEND Range: 60 to 99% in steps of 1
MIN MOTOR VOLTS: 80%
SPEED2 VD VOLT LOSS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SPEED2 VD STALL CURR Range: 1.50 to 20.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
@ MIN V: 4.50 x FLA
SPEED2 VD SAFE STALL Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
TIME @ MIN V: 20.0 s
SPEED2 VD ACCL INSCT Range: 1.50 to 20.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
@ MIN V: 4.00 x FLA
SPEED2 VD STALL CURR Range: 1.50 to 20.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
@ 100%V: 6.00 x FLA
SPEED2 VD SAFE STALL Range: 0.1 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
TIME @ 100%V: 20.0 s
SPEED2 VD ACCL INSCT Range: 1.50 to 20.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
@ 100%V: 5.00 x FLA
When two-speed motor functionality is used, these settings allow the selection of proper parameters for the thermal model
when motor is switched to the second speed. There is one thermal model in the M60, and it has inputs for overload condi-
tions from calculations at both speeds. As such, the accumulated thermal capacity is calculated from overload contributions
at each speed.
Refer to the Thermal model sub-section for details on settings for thermal model at the second motor speed.

SETTING
MOTOR LINE SOURCE
= Ia
Ia
= Ib
= Ic
Ib
VOLTAGE CONNECTION
Wye Delta Ic
Thermal model,
Vag Vab voltage dependent
Va
Vbg Vbc
Vcg Vca
Vb
SETTING
SPEED2 MOTOR SOURCE Vc
= Ia Thermal model Thermal model
= Ib settings, speed 1 settings, speed 2
= Ic
Off On
VOLTAGE CONNECTION
Wye Delta ACTIVE
Vag Vab
Vbg Vbc
Vcg Vca
SETTING
SPEED2 MOTOR SWITCH SETTING
Off = 0 SPEED2 SWITCH 2-1
DELAY
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
AND MOTOR SPD2 TR 2-1 OP
2-SPEED MOTOR TRST
PROTECTION
Enabled = 1 833020A1.CDR
Figure 5–67: TWO-SPEED MOTOR THERMAL MODEL LOGIC
i) TWO-SPEED MOTOR ACCELERATION TIME

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  TWO-SPEED MOTOR 5
 SPEED2 ACCELERATION TIME
 SPEED2 SPEED2 ACCELERATION Range: 1.00 to 10.00 × FLC in steps of 0.01
 ACCELERATION TIME CURRENT: 6.00 x FLC
SPEED2 ACCELERATION Range: 0.05 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TIME: 10.00 s
SPEED2 ACCEL MODE: Range: Definite Time, Adaptive
MESSAGE
Definite Time
SPEED2 ACCEL TIME FR Range: 0.05 to 180.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
SPEED 1-2: 10.00 s
SPEED2 ACCEL BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
If the speed 2 acceleration time functionality is enabled, the element will read current from the source selected for speed 2
by the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  2-SPEED MOTOR SOURCE setting when the motor is switched from
speed 1 to speed 2.
Acceleration time settings and functionality at speed 2 are identical to those of speed 1 and are described in the
Acceleration time sub-section. This applies to the SPEED2 ACCELERATION CURRENT, SPEED2 ACCELERATION TIME
NOTE and SPEED2 ACCEL MODE settings.
Two additional setting define the transition between speeds. A two-speed motor is usually started at a low speed (speed 1)
and then switched to a higher speed (speed 2) when required. When the motor starts directly at high speed, then the
SPEED2 ACCELERATION TIME setting specifies the maximum acceleration time at speed 2. When motor is switched from a
low-to-high speed setting, the SPEED2 TIMER FROM SPEED 1-2 setting specifies the acceleration time. When motor is
switched from high speed to low speed, the SPEED2 TRANS 2-1 OP FlexLogic™ operand is set for time defined by the
SPEED2 SWITCH 2-1 DELAY setting to allow inputs for control logic of contactors and breakers at both speeds. FlexLogic™
operands required for contactor and breaker control are provided. The acceleration time at speed 2 becomes functional
only if the acceleration time at speed 1 is enabled. When the acceleration time at any speed is not required, it can be per-
manently blocked.

• SPEED2 ACCEL TIME FROM SPEED 1-2: This setting is provide to select maximum accelerating time from speed 1
to speed 2 when motor is switched from low-to-high speed.
SETTING
SPEED 2 ACCEL BLOCK
= Off
AND SETTINGS
SPEED 2 MOTOR SWITCH
SPEED 2 ACCELERATION
= Off TIME
SPEED2 ACCELERATION
SETTING CURRENT
SPEED2 ACCEL MODE SPEED2 ACCEL TIME FROM
= Definite Time Definite Time SPEED 1-2
= Adaptive RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
T > Acceleration time MOTOR SPD2 ACL t OP
Adaptive
OR MOTOR SPD2 ACL t DPO
RUN
I2T > Acceleration current

× acceleration time
SETTING RECORDS
SPEED 2 MOTOR SOURCE RUN START DATE
= Ia magnitude Calculate peak acceleration START TIME
= Ib magnitude MAX current, effective acceleration ACCELERATION TIME
= Ic magnitude current, and acceleration time EFFECTIVE CURRENT
PEAK CURRENT
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
MOTOR STARTING
MOTOR RUNNING 833021A1.CDR
Figure 5–68: TWO-SPEED ACCELERATION TIME LOGIC
j) TWO-SPEED MOTOR UNDERCURRENT

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR  TWO-SPEED MOTOR
 SPEED2 UNDERCURRENT
5  SPEED2 SPEED2 U/CURR START Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
 UNDERCURRENT BLOCK DLY: 0.50 s
SPEED2 U/CURR ALARM Range: 0.10 to 0.95 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.70 x FLA
SPEED2 U/CURR ALARM Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP DLY: 2.00 s
SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP Range: 0.10 to 0.95 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.70 x FLA
SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP DLY: 2.00 s
SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RESET DLY: 2.00 s
SPEED2 U/CURR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
The speed 2 undercurrent function uses the same source as other speed 2 motor functions as defined by the SYSTEM
SETUP  MOTOR  2-SPEED MOTOR SOURCE setting. The phase currents must be configured on this source; otherwise,
the function will not be enabled. The element responds to per-phase currents.
If the speed 2 undercurrent function is enabled, a trip or alarm are initiated once the IA, IB or IC current magnitude falls
below the pickup level for a period of time specified by the delay. For example, undercurrent may be used to detect loss-of-
load conditions. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.
This element is active if the motor is running at speed 2. The undercurrent function at speed 2 becomes functional only if
undercurrent at speed 1 is enabled. When the undercurrent function at any speed is not required, it can be permanently
blocked.
• SPEED2 U/CURR START BLOCK DLY: This setting specifies a time to block the undercurrent function when motor is
starting directly at speed 2. Prior to starting, the motor state is determined from the MOTOR OFFLINE operand. Refer to
the Motor setup section for additional information on the motor offline state determination. The speed 2 undercurrent

element is active only when the motor is running at speed 2 and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a
period of time defined by the SPEED2 U/CURR START BLOCK DLY setting (for example, this block may be used to allow
pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips or alarms). A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not
blocked from start. For values other than 0, the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a
start is detected until the time entered expires.
• SPEED2 U/CURR ALARM PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm stage. The alarm pickup
• SPEED2 U/CURR ALARM PICKUP DLY: This setting specifies a time delay for the alarm stage. The time delay
• SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip stage. This setting should be
less than the corresponding setting for the alarm stage.
• SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP PICKUP DLY: This setting specifies a time delay for the trip stage. This time delay should be
• SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP RESET DLY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This time delay
should be long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to disconnect the motor.
• SPEED2 U/CURR BLOCK: This setting specifies an operand used to block the speed 2 undercurrent function. A panel
cutoff switch or other user specified condition is typically used to block the function.
SETTING
SPEED2 U/CURR BLOCK
= Off SETTINGS
SPEED2 U/CURR ALARM
SETTING PICKUP DLY
SPEED2 U/CURR START SETTING
SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP
5
BLOCK DLY SPEED2 U/CURR ALARM PICKUP DLY
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PICKUP
TPKP SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP
MOTOR OFFLINE AND RUN RESET DLY
0 IA_mag < PICKUP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TPKP
IB_mag < PICKUP OR U/CURR SP2 ALARM OP
IC_mag < PICKUP 0
TIMER
MOTOR STATUS TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
1 sec.
Switched to speed 2 U/CURR SP2 TRIP OP
TRST
0 SETTING
SPEED2 U/CURR TRIP
SETTING PICKUP
SPEED 2 MOTOR SOURCE RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Ia magnitude IA_mag < PICKUP U/CURR SP2 ALARM PKP
= Ib magnitude IB_mag < PICKUP OR U/CURR SP2 TRIP PKP
= Ic magnitude IC_mag < PICKUP 833022A1.CDR
Figure 5–69: SPEED 2 UNDERCURRENT LOGIC

5.6.4 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
 STATOR STATOR DIFF Range: Disabled, Enabled

 DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION: Disabled
STATOR DIFF LINE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
END SOURCE: SRC 1
STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
END SOURCE: SRC 1
STATOR DIFF Range: 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.100 pu
STATOR DIFF Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SLOPE 1: 10 %
MESSAGE
BREAK 1: 1.15 pu
STATOR DIFF Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SLOPE 2: 80 %
MESSAGE
BREAK 2: 8.00 pu
STATOR DIFF Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5 MESSAGE
BLK: Off
STATOR DIFF Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
STATOR DIFF Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The stator differential protection element is intended for use on the stator windings of rotating machinery.
differential
Operate Block
Slope 2
Slope 1
Pickup
Break 1
Break 2
restraining
830735A1.CDR
Figure 5–70: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC

This element has a dual slope characteristic. The main purpose of the percent-slope characteristic is to prevent a maloper-
ation caused by unbalances between CTs during external faults. CT unbalances arise as a result of the following factors:
1. CT accuracy errors

2. CT saturation
The characteristic allows for very sensitive settings when fault current is low and less sensitive settings when fault current is
high and CT performance may produce incorrect operate signals.
• STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE: This setting selects the source connected to CTs in the end of the machine stator
winding closest to the load and furthest from the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be wired
to measure their currents in the same direction with respect to the neutral point of the winding.
If the two-speed motor functionality is employed with two separate CTs at each speed, the source which is sum of cur-
rents of two CT banks at line side should be assigned with this setting for proper differential functionality.
• STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE: This setting selects the source connected to CTs in the end of the machine
stator winding furthest from the load and closest to the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be
wired to measure their currents in the same direction with respect to the neutral point of the winding.
• STATOR DIFF PICKUP: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. This setting is
based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal operating conditions. A setting of 0.1 to
0.3 pu is generally recommended.
• STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1: This setting is applicable for restraint currents from zero to STATOR DIFF BREAK 1, and defines
the ratio of differential to restraint current above which the element will operate. This slope is set to ensure sensitivity to
internal faults at normal operating current levels. The criteria for setting this slope is to allow for maximum expected CT
mismatch error when operating at the maximum permitted current. This maximum error is generally in the range of 5 to
10% of CT rating.
• STATOR DIFF BREAK 1: This setting defines the end of the Slope 1 region and the start of the transition region. It
should be set just above the maximum normal operating current level of the machine.
• STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: This setting is applicable for restraint currents above the STATOR DIFF BREAK 2 setting when
the element is applied to generator stator windings. This slope is set to ensure stability under heavy external fault con-
ditions that could lead to high differential currents as a result of CT saturation. A setting of 80 to 100% is recom-
5
mended. The transition region (as shown on the characteristic plot) is a cubic spline, automatically calculated by the
relay to result in a smooth transition between STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1 and STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2 with no discontinuities.
• STATOR DIFF BREAK 2: This setting defines the end of the transition region and the start of the Slope 2 region. It
should be set to the level at which any of the protection CTs are expected to begin to saturate.
SETTING
STATOR DIFF SETTINGS
FUNCTION:
STATOR DIFF
Disabled = 0 PICKUP:
Enabled = 1
STATOR DIFF
SLOPE 1:
SETTING
AND STATOR DIFF
BREAK 1:
STATOR DIFF BLOCK:
STATOR DIFF
Off = 0 SLOPE 2:
STATOR DIFF
SETTING BREAK 2:
STATOR DIFF RUN
LINE END SOURCE: Differential Phasors FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Iad
IA Iad STATOR DIFF PKP A
IB Ibd STATOR DIFF DPO A
IC Icd Iar
RUN
DC Offset
Ibd FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Removal
D.F.T. STATOR DIFF PKP B
SETTING
and STATOR DIFF DPO B
STATOR DIFF Differential Ibr
NEUTRAL END SOURCE: and Restraint Restraint Phasors RUN
IA Iar Icd FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
IB Ibr STATOR DIFF PKP C
IC Icr STATOR DIFF DPO C
Icr
Figure 5–71: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC

SATURATION DETECTION:
External faults near generators typically result in very large time constants of DC components in the fault currents. Also,
when energizing a step-up transformer, the inrush current being limited only by the machine impedance may be significant
and may last for a very long time. In order to provide additional security against maloperations during these events, the M60
incorporates saturation detection logic. When saturation is detected the element will make an additional check on the angle
between the neutral and output current. If this angle indicates an internal fault then tripping is permitted.
The saturation detector is implemented as a state machine (see below). "NORMAL" is the initial state of the machine. When
in "NORMAL" state, the saturation flag is not set (SAT = 0). The algorithm calculates the saturation condition, SC. If SC = 1
while the state machine is "NORMAL", the saturation detector goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state and sets the satura-
tion flag (SAT = 1). The algorithm returns to the "NORMAL" state if the differential current is below the first slope, SL, for
more than 200 ms. When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state, the algorithm goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATU-
RATION" state if the differential flag is set (DIF = 1). When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state, the algo-
rithm keeps the saturation flag set (SAT = 1). The state machine returns to the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state if the differential
flag is reset (DIF = 0) for 100 ms.
NORMAL SC = (|ID| < SL x IR) and (IR > BL)

SAT := 0 where:
IR = restraint current
(|ID| < SL x IR) or (|ID| < PICKUP) ID = differential current
SC
AND DIF = stator differential pickup flag
(saturation condition)
(NOT (SC)) for 200 ms SL = slope 1 setting
BL = break point 1 setting
EXTERNAL FAULT PICKUP = pickup setting
5 SAT := 1
DIF = 0
for 100 ms
EXTERNAL FAULT
AND CT SATURATION
SAT := 1
830736A1.CDR
Figure 5–72: SATURATION DETECTION STATE MACHINE

PHASE COMPARISON PRINCIPLE:
The test for direction can be summarized by the following equation:
If ( I TS > B L or ( I TS > K ⋅ I R and I TS > 0.1 pu ) ) and ( I NS > B L or ( I NS > K ⋅ I R and I NS > 0.1 pu ) )
then DIR = abs ( ∠I TS – ∠I NS ) > 90° (EQ 5.27)
else DIR = 1
where: IR = restraining current, DIR = flag indicating that the phase comparison principle is satisfied
BL = breakpoint 1 setting, ITS, INS = current at the terminal and neutral sources, respectively
K = factory constant of 0.25

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
STATOR DIFF PKP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
STATOR DIFF SAT A AND STATOR DIFF OP A
OR
STATOR DIFF DIR A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
STATOR DIFF PKP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
STATOR DIFF SAT B AND STATOR DIFF OP B
OR
STATOR DIFF DIR B
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
STATOR DIFF PKP C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
STATOR DIFF SAT C AND STATOR DIFF OP C
OR
STATOR DIFF DIR C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR STATOR DIFF OP
842707A1.CDR
Figure 5–73: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL FINAL OUTPUT LOGIC
5.6.5 POWER
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  POWER
 POWER  SENSITIVE
See page 5-144.
  DIRECTIONAL POWER
MESSAGE
 UNDERPOWER
See page 5-147. 5


b) SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  POWER  SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
 DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2)
 DIRECTIONAL DIR POWER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
 POWER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
DIR POWER 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
DIR POWER 1 Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RCA: 0°
DIR POWER 1 Range: 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
CALIBRATION: 0.00°
DIR POWER 1 STG1 Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
DIR POWER 1 STG2 Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG2 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 20.00 s
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5
DIR POWER 1 BLK:
MESSAGE
Off
DIR POWER 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-Reset
DIR POWER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The sensitive directional power element responds to three-phase directional power and is designed for reverse power and
low forward power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation. The relay measures
the three-phase power from either full set of wye-connected VTs or full-set of delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the
two-wattmeter method is used. Refer to the UR-series metering conventions section in chapter 6 for details regarding the
active and reactive powers used by the sensitive directional power element.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional power char-
acteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos θ + Q sin θ > SMIN (EQ 5.28)
where: P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR-series metering convention,
θ is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION) angles, and
SMIN is the minimum operating power
The operating quantity is displayed in the ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2) actual
value. The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip, respectively.

n
io
ct
re
Di
OPERATE
RCA+
CALIBRATION
SMIN
P
+
RESTRAIN
-
Figure 5–74: DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC

By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum operating
power a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For example, section (a) in
the figure below shows settings for reverse power, while section (b) shows settings for low forward power applications.
(a) Q (b) Q
RESTRAIN
OPERATE RESTRAIN OPERATE
P P
RCA = 180o RCA = 180o

5
SMIN > 0 SMIN < 0
(c) Q (d) Q
OPERATE OPERATE
P P
RESTRAIN RESTRAIN
RCA = 0o RCA = 0o
SMIN < 0 SMIN > 0
(e) Q
OPERATE
(f) Q
RESTRAIN
RESTRAIN OPERATE
P P
RCA = 90o RCA = 270o

SMIN > 0 SMIN < 0
842702A1.CDR
Figure 5–75: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS

• DIR POWER 1 RCA: Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the sensitive directional power function. Appli-
cation of this setting is threefold:
1. It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower/underpower, etc.).
2. Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more
sensitive settings.
3. It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye connected
power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required.
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “0°”, reactive overpower by
setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “90°”, active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “180°”, and reactive underpower by
setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to “270°”.
• DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION: This setting allows the relay characteristic angle to change in steps of 0.05°. This may
be useful when a small difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings.
This setting virtually enables calibration of the directional power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs
and CTs. The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER 1 RCA and DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION settings.
• DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN: This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle
(RCA) for the stage 1 of the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line;
the negative values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. Refer to the Directional power sample
applications figure for details. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics.
This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in per-unit (pu) values. The base quantity is 3 × VT pu
base × CT pu base.
For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine is 0.02 × 200 MW = 4 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage and
10 kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN should be set at 4 MW / 239 MVA =
5 0.0167 pu ≈ 0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 pu.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops below
the cutoff level.
• DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. For reverse power or low forward power
applications for a synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.
SETTING
DIR POWER 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTINGS SETTING
SETTING DIR POWER 1 RCA: DIR POWER 1 STG1
DIR POWER 1 BLK: DELAY:
AND
DIR POWER 1 tPKP

CALIBRATION:
Off = 0
DIR POWER 1 STG1 100 ms
SMIN:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIR POWER 1 STG2 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
SETTING SMIN: DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
RUN DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 SOURCE: DIR POWER 1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP
OR
DIRECTIONAL POWER DIR POWER 1 PKP

Three-phase active power (P)
CHARACTERISTICS DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP
OR
DIR POWER 1 OP
Three-phase reactive power (Q)
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 STG2
DELAY:
tPKP
100 ms
842003A3.CDR
Figure 5–76: SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER SCHEME LOGIC

c) UNDERPOWER
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  POWER  UNDERPOWER  UNDERPOWER 1
 UNDERPOWER UNDERPOWER 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

UNDERPOWER 1 START Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
BLOCK DLY: 0.50 s
UNDERPOWER 1 ALARM Range: 0.05 to 2.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PWR PICKUP: 0.50 pu
UNDERPOWER 1 ALARM Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP DLY: 2.00 s
UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP Range: 0.05 to 2.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PWR PICKUP: 0.50 pu
UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP DLY: 1.00 s
UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RESET DLY: 1.00 s
UNDERPOWER 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UNDERPOWER 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
UNDERPOWER 1 EVENTS: Range: Enabled, Disabled 5
MESSAGE
Disabled
Two underpower elements are provided.

The underpower function uses the source selected by the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR LINE SOURCE setting.
Phase currents and voltages must configured on that source, otherwise the underpower function will not be functional. The
underpower element responds to total three-phase apparent power measured from the phase current and voltages.
When the underpower element is enabled, a trip or alarm are initiated once the magnitude of three-phase apparent power
falls below the pickup level for a period of time specified by the delay. For example, underpower may be used to detect
loss-of-load conditions. Loss of load conditions will not always cause a significant loss of current. Power is a more accurate
representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive detection of load loss or pump cavitations. This may be espe-
cially useful for detecting process related problems.
• UNDERPOWER 1 START BLOCK DELAY: This setting specifies the length of time to block the underpower function
when motor is starting. If not in the starting state, the motor status is indicated by the MOTOR OFFLINE operand. Refer
to the Motor setup section for additional information on using the MOTOR OFFLINE operand for state determination.
The underpower element is active only when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for
a period of time specified by this setting. For example, this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before
the underpower element trips or alarms. A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from start. For values
other than 0, the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time
entered expires.
• UNDERPOWER 1 ALARM PWR PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm stage. The base per-
unit power quantity is 3 × VT pu base × CT pu base per source selected as a motor line source. The alarm pickup
• UNDERPOWER 1 ALARM PICKUP DLY: This setting specifies a time delay for the alarm stage. The time delay
• UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP PWR PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip stage. The base per-unit
power quantity is 3 × VT pu base × CT pu base per source selected as a motor line source. This setting should be less
than the corresponding setting for the alarm stage.

• UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP PICKUP DLY: This setting specifies a time delay for the trip stage. This time delay should be
• UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP RESET DLY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset the trip command. This delay should
be set long enough to allow breaker or contactor to disconnect the motor.
• UNDERPOWER 1 BLOCK: This setting specifies an operand used to block the underpower function. A panel cutoff
switch or other user specified condition is typically used to block the function.
SETTINGS
UNDERPOWER 1 ALARM
SETTINGS PICKUP DLY
SETTING CALCULATE UNDERPOWER 1 ALARM UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP
MOTOR LINE SOURCE
PWR PICKUP PICKUP DLY
= Ia
UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP UNDERPOWER 1 TRIP
= Ib PWR PICKUP RESET DLY
= Ic RUN TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Sop < ALARM PICKUP UNDERPWR 1 ALARM OP
Sop = sum (Sa + Sb + Sc)
VOLTAGE CONNECTION 0
Wye Delta RUN TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Vag Vab UNDERPWR 1 TRIP OP
Sop < TRIP PICKUP
Vbg Vbc TRST
Vcg Vca
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
UNDERPWR 1 ALARM PKP
UNDERPWR 1 ALARM DPO
COMPARATORS UNDERPWR 1 TRIP PKP
magnitude Ia > 0.1 × FLA UNDERPWR 1 TRIP DPO
magnitude Ib > 0.1 × FLA AND
magnitude Ic > 0.1 × FLA
magnitude Va > 0.25 pu
SETTINGS
magnitude Vb > 0.25 pu AND
UNDERPOWER 1
magnitude Vc > 0.25 pu
FUNCTION
= Enabled
AND
UNDERPOWER 1 BLOCK AND
5
= Off
SETTING
UNDERPOWER 1 START
BLOCK DLY
TPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
MOTOR OFFLINE 0 833025A1.CDR
Figure 5–77: UNDERPOWER LOGIC

5.6.6 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT
 PHASE CURRENT  PHASE IOC1

See page 5-150.
 
 PHASE IOC2

 PHASE IOC3

 PHASE IOC4

 PHASE IOC5

 PHASE IOC6

 PHASE IOC7

 PHASE IOC8

MESSAGE
 PHASE
See page 5-152. 5
 DIRECTIONAL 1
 PHASE
 DIRECTIONAL 2
The M60 Motor Protection System has up to eight (8) phase instantaneous overcurrent elements (dependent on CT/VT
modules ordered) and two (2) phase directional overcurrent elements.

b) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE IOC 1(8)
 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
5
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude. The phase instantaneous overcurrent timing
curves are shown below for form-A contacts in a 60 Hz system.


0LOOLVHFRQGV

0D[LPXP
0LQLPXP

0XOWLSOHRISLFNXS $&'5 5
Figure 5–78: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT TIMING CURVES
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SETTING
SETTING Pickup Delay PHASE IOC1 A PKP
Function
Pickup Reset Delay PHASE IOC1 A DPO
= Enabled
AND RUN TPKP PHASE IOC1 B PKP
= Disabled
IA > Pickup PHASE IOC1 B DPO
TRST PHASE IOC1 C PKP
AND RUN TPKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO
SETTING
Source IB > Pickup
TRST
= IA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND RUN TPKP
= IB PHASE IOC1 A OP
IC > Pickup PHASE IOC1 B OP
= IC TRST
PHASE IOC1 C OP
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Block A OR PHASE IOC1 PKP
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Block B
OR PHASE IOC1 OP
= Off
Block C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= Off AND PHASE IOC1 DPO
827033A6.CDR
Figure 5–79: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT(ANSI 67P)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1(2)
 PHASE PHASE DIR 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 DIRECTIONAL 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE DIR 1 Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ECA: 30°
PHASE DIR POL V1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
WHEN V MEM EXP: No
PHASE DIR 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE DIR 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The TARGET setting is not user-selectable and forced to "Disabled". If Targets are required from directional ele-
5 NOTE
ments, it can be achieved by assigning directional element output to a digital element, where targets selection can
be used as required.
The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for steady
state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the BLOCK inputs
of these elements.
S
UT 0
TP
OU
–90°
VAG (Unfaulted) Fault angle

set at 60° Lag
VPol
VAG(Faulted) IA
ECA
set at 30°
VBC
VBC
VCG VBG +90°
Phasors for Phase A Polarization:
VPol = VBC × (1/_ECA) = polarizing voltage

IA = operating current
ECA = Element Characteristic Angle at 30° 827800A2.CDR
Figure 5–80: PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION

This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is flowing
in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from
the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90° or quadrature connection. If there is a requirement
to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen through a bus-tie breaker, two
phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite element characteristic angle (ECA) settings.
To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory
feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to
determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed.
The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating signal
(phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic angle, ECA).
The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:
PHASE OPERATING POLARIZING SIGNAL Vpol
SIGNAL
ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A angle of IA angle of VBC × (1∠ECA) angle of VCB × (1∠ECA)
B angle of IB angle of VCA × (1∠ECA) angle of VAC × 1∠ECA)
C angle of IC angle of VAB × (1∠ECA) angle of VBA × (1∠ECA)
MODE OF OPERATION:
• When the function is “Disabled”, or the operating current is below 5% × CT nominal, the element output is “0”.
• When the function is “Enabled”, the operating current is above 5% × CT nominal, and the polarizing voltage is above
the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL value, the element output is dependent on
the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals:
– The element output is logic “0” when the operating current is within polarizing voltage ±90°. 5
– For all other angles, the element output is logic “1”.
• Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set to block or
trip on overcurrent as follows:
– When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to “Yes”, the directional element will block the operation of any phase
overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires.
– When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to “No”, the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements
under directional control when voltage memory expires.
In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the ‘polariz-
ing voltage threshold’.
SETTINGS:
• PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals.
The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polar-
izing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90° or ‘quadrature’ connection and shifted in the
leading direction by the element characteristic angle (ECA).
• PHASE DIR 1 ECA: This setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polariz-
ing voltage is shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of the UR-series elements,
a block is applied to an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. This element should be programmed via the
ECA setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction.
• PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase
angle measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is “0.700 pu”.
• PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of
voltage memory. When set to "Yes", the directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element
under directional control, when voltage memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of
phase overcurrent elements under directional control.

The phase directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the ele-
ment needs some time – in the order of 8 ms – to establish a blocking signal. Some protection elements such as
NOTE
instantaneous overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is established. Therefore, a
coordination time of at least 10 ms must be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervi-
sion of the phase directional element. If current reversal is of a concern, a longer delay – in the order of 20 ms –
may be needed.
SETTING
PHASE DIR 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
PHASE DIR 1
BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 ECA:
PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE: I 0.05 pu AND RUN 0

IA Vpol
1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB I OR PH DIR1 BLK
SETTING
VBC VCB
PHASE DIR 1 POL V
THRESHOLD: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR PH DIR1 BLK A
-Use V when V Min
-Use V memory when
V < Min MEMORY TIMER
1 cycle
V MINIMUM
1 sec
AND
5 SETTING
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC
USE ACTUAL VOLTAGE
WHEN V MEM EXP:

USE MEMORIZED VOLTAGE
No
Yes
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A PH DIR1 BLK B
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A PH DIR1 BLK C
827078A6.CDR
Figure 5–81: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.7 NEUTRAL CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT
 NEUTRAL CURRENT  NEUTRAL IOC1

See page 5-155.
 
 NEUTRAL IOC2

↓
 NEUTRAL IOC8

 NEUTRAL
 DIRECTIONAL 1
 NEUTRAL
 DIRECTIONAL 2
The M60 Motor Protection System has up to eight (8) neutral instantaneous overcurrent elements (dependent on CT/VT
modules ordered) and two (2) neutral directional overcurrent elements.
b) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT  NEUTRAL IOC1(8)
 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled 5

NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
definite time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency pha-
sor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming
the operating quantity of the element as follows:
I op = 3 × ( I_0 – K ⋅ I_1 ) where K = 1 ⁄ 16 (EQ 5.29)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
• System unbalances under heavy load conditions

• Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults.
• Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection):
1
I op = --- × ( 3 – K ) x I injected (EQ 5.30)
3
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION: SETTINGS
Disabled=0 NEUTRAL IOC1

SETTING PICKUP DELAY :
Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
RESET DELAY :
SETTING NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
tRST NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
Off=0
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:

827035A4.CDR
I_0
Figure 5–82: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
c) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT(ANSI 67N)

5 PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT  NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1(2)
 NEUTRAL NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 DIRECTIONAL OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
MESSAGE
POLARIZING: Voltage
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX
MESSAGE
VOLT: Calculated V0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG
MESSAGE
CURR: Calculated 3I0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS- Range: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0.00 Ω
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Range: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ECA: 75° Lag
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Range: 0.006 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.050 pu
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Range: 0.006 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.050 pu

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The neutral directional overcurrent element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications the NEUTRAL DIR
OC1 FWD and NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV operands, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the oper-
ating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively
(directional unit).
The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the either the neutral current calcu-
lated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are separate pickup settings for the forward-looking and
reverse-looking functions. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better per-
formance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-
sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity.
I op = 3 × ( I_0 – K × I_1 ) (EQ 5.31)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
• System unbalances under heavy load conditions.
• Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults.
• Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
5
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
Iop = (1 – K) × Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 × Iinjected).
The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the restraint is
removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance
is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low.
The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and may
be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage (“Calculated V0” or “Measured VX”), ground current (IG), or both for
polarizing. The following tables define the neutral directional overcurrent element.
Table 5–13: QUANTITIES FOR "CALCULATED 3I0" CONFIGURATION

DIRECTIONAL UNIT
OVERCURRENT UNIT
POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
Forward –V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 I_0 × 1∠ECA
Voltage
Reverse –V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 –I_0 × 1∠ECA
Forward IG I_0
Current
Reverse IG –I_0
–V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 I_0 × 1∠ECA Iop = 3 × (|I_0| – K × |I_1|) if |I1| > 0.8 pu
Forward or Iop = 3 × (|I_0|) if |I1| ≤ 0.8 pu
IG I_0
Dual
–V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 –I_0 × 1∠ECA
Reverse or
IG –I_0

Table 5–14: QUANTITIES FOR "MEASURED IG" CONFIGURATION

DIRECTIONAL UNIT
OVERCURRENT UNIT
POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
Forward –V_0 + Z_offset × IG/3 IG × 1∠ECA
Voltage Iop = |IG|
Reverse –V_0 + Z_offset × IG/3 –IG × 1∠ECA
1
where: V_0 = --- ( VAG + VBG + VCG ) = zero sequence voltage ,
3
1 1
I_0 = --- IN = --- ( IA + IB + IC ) = zero sequence current ,
3 3
ECA = element characteristic angle and IG = ground current
When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to “Measured VX”, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0. The following
figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element.
The figure below shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:
• ECA = 90° (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
• FWD LA = 80° (forward limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)
• REV LA = 80° (reverse limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The above bias should be taken into account when using the neutral directional overcurrent element to directionalize other
protection elements.
5 REV LA
–3V_0 line
FWD LA
line line
VAG
(reference)
REV Operating FWD Operating

Region Region
LA
LA
3I_0 line
ECA
ECA line
–ECA line
–3I_0 line LA
VCG LA
VBG
FWD LA
REV LA line
3V_0 line
line 827805A1.CDR
Figure 5–83: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE-POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.
– If “Voltage” polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user
can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence voltage
supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X, both from the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE.

The calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The
auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK
 AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION is set to “Vn” and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage
source (such as open delta connected secondary of VTs).
The zero-sequence (V_0) or auxiliary voltage (Vx), accordingly, must be higher than the PRODUCT SETUP  DIS-
PLAY PROPERTIES  VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL value to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing
signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
– If “Current” polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured
under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization. The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral
point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be greater than 0.05 pu to be vali-
dated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. In
addition, the zero-sequence current (I_0) must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES 
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value.
For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known
direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current
as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side
fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this condition. A similar sit-
uation arises for a wye/delta/wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral may reverse when
faults on both sides of the transformer are considered.
– If “Dual” polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A given
direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous forward
and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual"
polarizing mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated
from the phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX"). 5
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or
the ground current shall be used by this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground
modes of operation (67N and 67G). If set to “Calculated 3I0” the element uses the phase currents and applies the pos-
itive-sequence restraint; if set to “Measured IG” the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT
bank configured as NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. If this setting is “Measured IG”, then the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING
setting must be “Voltage”, as it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating and polarizing signal simulta-
neously.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set
to 0.063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set
higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary appli-
cation for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. In
regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying
point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of
the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary
ohms.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the
"Voltage" polarizing mode. The "Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0°. The ECA in the reverse direction is
the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180°.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the forward direction.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the
forward direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence
restraint’ technique for the “Calculated 3I0” mode of operation.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the reverse direction.

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the
reverse direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint
technique for the “Calculated 3I0” mode of operation.
SETTING
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
PICKUP:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-

SETTING SEQ RESTRAINT:
RUN
NEUTRAL DIR OC1
FUNCTION: 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
Disabled=0 OR
Enabled=1 IG PICKUP AND
SETTING
AND SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: AND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
ECA:
Off=0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LIMIT ANGLE:
SETTING AND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
SOURCE: LIMIT ANGLE:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL NEUTRAL DIR OC1

VOLT: OFFSET:
RUN
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR:
FWD
}
Measured VX OR
Calculated V_0 FWD
1.25 cy
}
-3V_0 AND
Zero Seq Crt (I_0) 1.5 cy
Ground Crt (IG) REV
3I_0 REV
5
Voltage Polarization
SETTING IG 0.05 pu AND RUN

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
POLARIZING:
Voltage OR Current Polarization
Current OR
REV
Dual OR
NOTE:
1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH
THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO
AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE SETTING
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
2) GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION PICKUP:
AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
3) POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT APPLIED WHEN CURR: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
I_1 IS BELOW 0.8pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-
SEQ RESTRAINT:
RUN
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP 827077AB.CDR
OR
IG PICKUP
Figure 5–84: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC
5.6.8 GROUND CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT
 GROUND CURRENT  GROUND TOC1

See page 5-166.
 
 GROUND TOC2

 GROUND IOC1

 GROUND IOC2


b) INVERSE TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t stan-
dard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves™ may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics.
The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 5–15: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

IEEE IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inverse IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inverse I2t
IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurves™ A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inverse IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indi-
cates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capac-
ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The “Instan-
taneous” selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays. 5

IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A tr
---------------------------------- + B -----------------------------------
-
I - p
T = TDM ×  --------------- , T TDM × I 2 (EQ 5.32)
1 –  ---------------- 
=
 I pickup – 1
RESET
 I pickup 
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”),
tr = characteristic constant
Table 5–16: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
Table 5–17: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
5 0.5
1.0
11.341
22.682
4.761
9.522
1.823
3.647
1.001
2.002
0.648
1.297
0.464
0.927
0.355
0.709
0.285
0.569
0.237
0.474
0.203
0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr
--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
-
T = TDM × ( I ⁄ I pickup ) E – 1 , T RESET = TDM × 1 – ( I ⁄ I 2 (EQ 5.33)
pickup )
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–18: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E TR
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Table 5–19: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10
0.20
1.719
3.439
1.003
2.006
0.630
1.260
0.498
0.996
0.428
0.856
0.384
0.767
0.353
0.706
0.330
0.659
0.312
0.623
0.297
0.594
5
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT TIME
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
 B D E  tr
T = TDM ×  A + ------------------------------ + -------------------------------------2- + -------------------------------------3- , T RESET = TDM × -------------------------------
- (EQ 5.34)
 ( I ⁄ I pkp ) – C ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C ) ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C )  2
pkp pkp 1 – ( I ⁄ I pkp )
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–20: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E TR
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221 0.222
Table 5–21: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
5 1.0
2.0
3.398
6.796
1.498
2.997
0.606
1.212
0.356
0.711
0.246
0.491
0.186
0.372
0.149
0.298
0.124
0.248
0.106
0.212
0.093
0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100 100
-------------------------- ----------------------------
I  2 , T RESET = TDM ×  I  – 2
T = TDM ×  --------------- (EQ 5.35)
- ----------------
 I pickup   I pickup 
where: T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting;
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 5–22: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
FLEXCURVES™:
The custom FlexCurves™ are described in detail in the FlexCurves™ section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves™ are derived from the formulae:
I
T = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ----------------
I
when  ---------------- ≥ 1.00 (EQ 5.36)
5
I pickup I pickup
I I
T RESET = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ---------------- when  ---------------- ≤ 0.98 (EQ 5.37)
I pickup I pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instanta-
neous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup (EQ 5.38)
T RESET = TDM in seconds (EQ 5.39)
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The M60 uses the FlexCurve™ feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve™
section in this chapter for additional details.

c) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND TOC1(4)
 GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND TOC1 Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
GROUND TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
RESET: Instantaneous
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUND TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
5
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the funda-
mental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to
the Inverse time overcurrent curve characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from
0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
SETTING INPUT:
GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0 GROUND TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1
AND RUN IG ≥ PICKUP GROUND TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
GROUND TOC1 OP
IG t
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
827036A3.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–85: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND IOC1(8)
 GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUND IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The ground instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental
phasor magnitude. 5
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is
from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOIC DPO
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 OP
Enabled = 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP

SETTING DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESET
SETTING
PICKUP: DELAY:
GROUND IOC1
AND RUN tPKP
SOURCE:
IG
IG ≥ PICKUP tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
827037A4.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–86: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.9 BREAKER FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  BREAKER FAILURE  BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)
 BREAKER FAILURE 1 BF1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
BF1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

MESSAGE
3-Pole
BF1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE
SRC 1
BF1 USE AMP SUPV: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 USE SEAL-IN: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP SUPV Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
5
BF1 N AMP SUPV
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 USE TIMER 1: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 N AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 PH AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu

BF1 N AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 LOSET TIME Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TARGET Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
BF1 EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
BF1 PH A INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
Off
BF1 PH B INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 PH C INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φB Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φC Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φB Range: FlexLogic™ operand 5
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φC Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time,
so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local
and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of
a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of
breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.
Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name “3BF”) and one for three pole plus sin-
gle-pole operation (identified by the name “1BF”). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a
breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.
INITIATION STAGE:
A FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the
scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have
finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete
sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic™ timer, set longer
than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to
decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele-
ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for trans-
former faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH
AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature
should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used.
Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of
the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes
into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of
closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.

When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually
described as re-trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.
DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:
The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three paths. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay, after
which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed paths are
associated with breaker failure timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing timer num-
bers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.
Timer 1 logic (early path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indi-
cated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the
breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates
that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.
Timer 2 logic (main path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval,
an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the
logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.
The timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, high-set and low-set, that allow the supervision level to
change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after
resistor insertion. The high-set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the low-
set detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between high-set and low-set is the expected breaker opening time.
Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent
detectors are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcur-
rent detectors.
Timer 3 logic (slow path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the
breaker is in or out-of-service, disabling this path when the breaker is out-of-service for maintenance. There is no current
5 level check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate.
OUTPUT:
The outputs from the schemes are:
• FlexLogic™ operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme
• FlexLogic™ operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
• FlexLogic™ operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an
adjustable period.
• Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared
• Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)
MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:
ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE

FAILED INTERRUPTION
0
AMP CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE
CORRECT INTERRUPTION
Rampdown
0
PROTECTION OPERATION BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME
(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles) (ASSUMED 3 cycles)
MARGIN BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME
(Assumed 2 Cycles) (Assumed 3 Cycles)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (±1/8 cycle)

INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)

BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT cycles
OCCURS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
827083A6.CDR
Figure 5–87: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE

The current supervision elements reset in less than 0.7 of a power cycle for any multiple of pickup current as shown below.
0.8
Margin
Maximum
Breaker failure reset time (cycles)

Average
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Mulitple of pickup fault current
threshold setting 836769A4.CDR
Figure 5–88: BREAKER FAILURE OVERCURRENT SUPERVISION RESET TIME

SETTINGS:
• BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
• BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above
•
the supervision pickup level.
BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the
5
supervision pickup level.
• BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate three-pole tripping of the breaker.
• BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level.
Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as
necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) – high-set and low-set current supervision
will guarantee correct operation.
• BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Gener-
ally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is
used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping
schemes.
• BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the early path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to
open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.
• BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the main path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This
safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equip-
ment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In M60 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated
current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag
should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker failure main path
sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most
applications.
Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be
significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
• BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as timer 2, plus an increased safety margin.
Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.

• BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type
auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the pro-
tected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied form-A contact. The con-
tact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected
breaker auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.
• BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker in-ser-
vice/out-of-service switch set to the out-of-service position.
• BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
• BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid
only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current).
• BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.
5 • BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This
timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure ele-
ment sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a transfer trip
signal on longer than the reclaim time.
• BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to ini-
tiate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly.
This setting is only valid for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS1 φB / BF1 BKR POS 1 φC: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-
A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for
single-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φB: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for single-pole breaker fail-
ure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φC: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type
auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has
the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The
approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is
supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This
setting is valid only for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a three-pole trip command should be
given via output operand BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP.

6(77,1*6
)XQFWLRQ
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG 25 ,QLWLDWHG
$1' WREUHDNHUIDLOXUH
%ORFN
VLQJOHSROHORJLFVKHHW
2II
6(77,1*
3KDVH$,QLWLDWH
2II
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1* 25
$1' %.5)$,/5(75,3$
7KUHH3ROH,QLWLDWH
2II 25
$1' ,QLWLDWHGSKDVH$
6(77,1*
WREUHDNHUIDLOXUH
8VH6HDO,Q VLQJOHSROHORJLFVKHHW
<HV 6HDOLQSDWK
1R
6(77,1*
8VH$PS6XSHUYLVLRQ
25
$1' 25
5
<HV
1R 25
$1' )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(77,1*
$1' %.5)$,/5(75,3%
3KDVH%,QLWLDWH 25 6HDOLQSDWK
2II
,QLWLDWHGSKDVH%
25
6(77,1* WREUHDNHUIDLOXUH
3KDVH&,QLWLDWH 25 VLQJOHSROHORJLFVKHHW
2II
25
$1'
6(77,1*
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3KDVH&XUUHQW
6XSHUYLVLRQ3LFNXS 6HDOLQSDWK $1' %.5)$,/5(75,3&
581
,$3LFNXS
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
6RXUFH 581
,$ ,%3LFNXS 25 ,QLWLDWHGSKDVH&
,% WREUHDNHUIDLOXUH
581
VLQJOHSROHORJLFVKHHW
,& ,&3LFNXS
,&
WREUHDNHUIDLOXUH
,% VLQJOHSROHORJLFVKHHW
,$
$&'5
Figure 5–89: SINGLE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, INITIATE (Sheet 1 of 2)

5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
5-174
25 %.5)$,/723
6(77,1*6
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH$3 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II 25 %.5)$,/723
8VH7LPHU 6(77,1* 6(77,1*
1R 7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\ $1' 3KDVH&XUUHQW+L6HW3LFNXS
<HV 581
25
$1' ,$ 3LFNXS

,QLWLDWHGSKDVH$
IURPVLQJOHSROHEUHDNHU 6(77,1*
IDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW 6(77,1*
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\ /R6HW7LPH'HOD\ 6(77,1*
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
3KDVH&XUUHQW/R6HW3LFNXS
6(77,1*
$1' 581
8VH7LPHU

<HV ,$ 3LFNXS
1R
6(77,1*
6(77,1*6
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\ $1' 6(77,1*
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH%
3KDVH&XUUHQW+L6HW3LFNXS
2II
$1' 25 581

,QLWLDWHGSKDVH% ,% 3LFNXS
IDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW 6(77,1*
6(77,1* 7ULS'URSRXW'HOD\
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
/R6HW7LPH'HOD\ 6(77,1* )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
3KDVH&XUUHQW/R6HW3LFNXS 25 %.5)$,/75,323
$1'
6(77,1*6 581

%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH%
,% 3LFNXS
2II
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
$1' 3KDVH&XUUHQW+L6HW3LFNXS
7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
581
$1' 25 ,& 3LFNXS

,QLWLDWHGSKDVH&
IDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW 6(77,1* /R6HW7LPH'HOD\ 6(77,1*

7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
3KDVH&XUUHQW/R6HW3LFNXS
581
$1'
,& 3LFNXS
,$
,%
,&
6(77,1*6
8VH7LPHU
<HV
Figure 5–90: SINGLE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS (Sheet 2 of 2)

%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH$3
2II 6(77,1*
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH% 7LPHU3LFNXS'HOD\
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%UHDNHU3RV3KDVH& $1' %.5)$,/723
2II
%UHDNHU7HVW2Q
2II
,QLWLDWHG
IURPVLQJOHSROHEUHDNHUIDLOXUHORJLFVKHHW $&'5
5 SETTINGS
GE Multilin
Figure 5–91: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, INITIATE (Sheet 1 of 2)

Figure 5–92: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS (Sheet 2 of 2)

5.6.10 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  PHASE

See page 5-179.
  UNDERVOLTAGE1
 PHASE
 UNDERVOLTAGE2
 PHASE
 OVERVOLTAGE1
 NEUTRAL OV1

 NEUTRAL OV2

 NEUTRAL OV3

 NEG SEQ OV1

 NEG SEQ OV2

MESSAGE
 NEG SEQ OV3
See page 5-182. 5

 AUXILIARY UV1

 AUXILIARY UV2

 AUXILIARY OV1

 AUXILIARY OV2

These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
• Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the
drawn current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used
to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time
delay.
• Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operat-
ing an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be
used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
• Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load
from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic. The definite time curve oper-
ates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 0.01. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay char-
acteristic.

The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
D
T = ---------------------------------- (EQ 5.40)
V 
 1 – ------------------
 V pickup
where: T = operating time

D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
V = secondary voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = pickup level
Time (seconds)
5
% of voltage pickup
842788A1.CDR
Figure 5–93: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
NOTE

b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(3)
 PHASE PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 UNDERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE UV1 MODE: Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
Phase to Ground
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE UV1 Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
CURVE: Definite Time
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE UV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled 5
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite
time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting
selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage
below which the element is blocked (a setting of “0” will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING SETTING
PHASE UV1 PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0 PHASE UV1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
PHASE UV1
SETTING DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
PHASE UV1 AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP PHASE UV1 A PKP
BLOCK: t PHASE UV1 A DPO
Off = 0 PHASE UV1 A OP
V
SETTING
SETTING AND RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP PHASE UV1 B PKP
}
PHASE UV1
t PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 SOURCE: MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
PHASE UV1 B OP
VAG or VAB < Minimum
Source VT = Delta V
VBG or VBC < Minimum
VAB AND RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP PHASE UV1 C PKP
VCG or VCA < Minimum
VBC t PHASE UV1 C DPO
VCA PHASE UV1 C OP
Source VT = Wye V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING OR PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VAG VAB OR PHASE UV1 OP
VBG VBC
VCG VCA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND PHASE UV1 DPO
827039AB.CDR
Figure 5–94: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
 PHASE PHASE OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 OVERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE OV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE OV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a definite
5 time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from delta-connected VTs or as cal-
culated from phase-to-ground (wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below.
SETTINGS
SETTING
PHASE OV1 PICKUP
PHASE OV1 SETTING DELAY:
FUNCTION: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE OV1 PHASE OV1 RESET
Disabled = 0 PICKUP: DELAY: PHASE OV1 A PKP
Enabled = 1 PHASE OV1 A DPO
RUN tPKP
VAB ≥ PICKUP PHASE OV1 A OP
tRST
PHASE OV1 B PKP
SETTING AND RUN tPKP PHASE OV1 B DPO
PHASE OV1 VBC ≥ PICKUP
BLOCK: PHASE OV1 B OP
tRST
RUN PHASE OV1 C PKP
Off = 0
VCA ≥ PICKUP tPKP PHASE OV1 C DPO
PHASE OV1 C OP
tRST
SETTING
PHASE OV1
SOURCE: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Source VT = Delta OR PHASE OV1 OP
VAB
VBC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VCA
AND PHASE OV1 DPO
Source VT = Wye
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR PHASE OV1 PKP
827066A7.CDR
Figure 5–95: PHASE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

If the source VT is wye-connected, then the phase overvoltage pickup condition is V > 3 × Pickup for VAB, VBC,
and VCA.
NOTE

d) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  NEUTRAL OV1(3)
 NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE: Range: Definite time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
MESSAGE FlexCurve C
Definite time
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
5
There are three neutral overvoltage elements available. The neutral overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetri-
cal system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds
to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase volt-
age channels entered under SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK  PHASE VT SECONDARY is the
p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
The neutral overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (initialized
from FlexCurves A, B, or C) or be used as a definite time element. The NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if
the NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE setting is “Definite time”. The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be wye-connected.
Figure 5–96: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

e) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59_2)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  NEG SEQ OV1(3)
 NEG SEQ OV1 NEG SEQ OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
NEG SEQ OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEG SEQ OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
NEG SEQ OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
There are three negative-sequence overvoltage elements available.
5 The negative-sequence overvoltage element may be used to detect loss of one or two phases of the source, a reversed
phase sequence of voltage, or a non-symmetrical system voltage condition.
SETTING
NEG SEQ OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTING
Enabled = 1
NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP: SETTINGS
SETTING NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP
AND RUN DELAY:
NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEG SEQ OV1 RESET
NEG SEQ OV1 PKP
DELAY:
Off = 0 NEG SEQ OV1 DPO
t PKP
t RST NEG SEQ OV1 OP
SETTING
V_2 or 3 × V_2 ≥ PKP
NEG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
Wye VT Delta VT
V_2 3 × V_2 827839A3.CDR
Figure 5–97: NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

f) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  AUXILIARY UV1(2)
 AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX UV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.700 pu
AUX UV1 CURVE: Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
Definite Time
AUX UV1 DELAY: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
1.00 s
AUX UV1 MINIMUM: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
AUX UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX UV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
AUX UV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
5
The M60 contains one auxiliary undervoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring undervolt-
age conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the voltage level at which the time undervoltage ele-
ment starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SETTINGS  SYSTEM
SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK X5  AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit base used when setting the
pickup level.
The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP
and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element
can be programmed to use either definite time delay or inverse time delay characteristics. The operating characteristics
and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element.
The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is
blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1
FUNCTION: SETTING
Disabled=0
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
Enabled=1
AUX UV1 CURVE:

SETTING
AUX UV1 BLOCK: AUX UV1 DELAY:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off=0 AND RUN Vx < Pickup AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
SETTING
SETTING t AUX UV1 OP
AUX UV1 MINIMUM
AUX UV1 SIGNAL VOLTAGE:
SOURCE:
AUX VOLT Vx Vx < Minimum
V
827849A2.CDR
Figure 5–98: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

g) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  AUXILIARY OV1(2)
 AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
AUX OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
AUX OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The M60 contains one auxiliary overvoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage
5 conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM
SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK X5  AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit (pu) base used when setting the
pickup level.
A typical application for this element is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta
VT connection.
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
827836A2.CDR
Figure 5–99: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.7.2 TRIP BUS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  TRIP BUS  TRIP BUS 1(6)
 TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: Range: FlexLogic™ operand 5

MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
LATCHING: Disabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic™ and assign-
ing them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip condition-
ing such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista UR Setup software A protection summary
is displayed by navigating to a specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box. Once the
desired element is selected for a specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned
to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is required, it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.

5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
Figure 5–100: TRIP BUS FIELDS IN THE PROTECTION SUMMARY

The following settings are available.
• TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
• TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is
used.
5 • TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. The time delay should be
set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action.
• TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: These settings select a FlexLogic™ operand to be assigned as an
input to the trip bus.
• TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING: This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when
lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
• TRIP BUS 1 RESET: The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the
RESET OP operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command the front panel interface or via
communications will reset the trip bus output.
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
DELAY
= Off Non-volatile,
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
OR set-dominant
***
DELAY
AND S TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 TRIP BUS 1 OP
Latch
= Off TRST
R
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND
= Off
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP 842023A1.CDR
Figure 5–101: TRIP BUS LOGIC

5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTINGS GROUPS
 SETTING GROUPS SETTING GROUPS Range: Disabled, Enabled

SETTING GROUPS BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Off
GROUP 1 NAME: Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
SETTING GROUP Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED
ELEMENTS settings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service.
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic™ parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic™ operand which, when set, will make the
particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a
given time – the highest-numbered group which is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-
numbered groups. There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically
becomes active if no other group is active.
The SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME settings allows to user to assign a name to each of the six settings
groups. Once programmed, this name will appear on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)
menu display.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic™ equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic™ equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(for example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1 ON) to initiate the use of a par-
ticular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular
settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the “On” state of a particular settings group.

1 VIRT IP 1 ON (VI1)
OR (2)
2 CONT IP 1 ON (H5A)
3 OR (2)
AND (3) = VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
4 PHASE TOC1 PKP
5 NOT
6 PHASE TOC2 PKP
7 NOT
8 AND (3)
9 = VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
10 END
842789A1.CDR
Figure 5–102: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP
5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH  SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
 SELECTOR SWITCH 1 SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
5 MESSAGE
RANGE: 7
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MESSAGE
MODE: Restore
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows set-
ting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after time-
out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word (user set-
ting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input being out
of range.
A selector switch runs every two power cycles.
• SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through avail-
able positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct three-
bit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word
is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established
by setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out”, the setting specifies the required period of
inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-
UP MODE is “Acknowledge”, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 5
FULL RANGE) to the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1:
POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for
the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(“Time-out” mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically,
a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge”,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit con-
trol word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2 A1 A0 POSITION
0 0 0 rest
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7

The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
three-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out”, the pre-selected position is
applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is
“Acknowledge”, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging
input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2)
lock-out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit
control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge”, the selector changes its posi-
tion only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The pre-
selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic™ operand. This setting is active only under
the “Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELEC-
TOR TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and
three-bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accord-
ingly).
• SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to “Restore”, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up
the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and
5 an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).

When set to “Synchronize” selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the
synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the
selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR
ALARM).
The operation of “Synch/Restore” mode is similar to the “Synchronize” mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The
“Synch/Restore” mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in
redundant (two relay) protection schemes.
• SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
EVENT NAME DESCRIPTION

SELECTOR 1 POS Z Selector 1 changed its position to Z.
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed
before the time out.

The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with a changed to 7 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input pushbutton a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6 5
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
Figure 5–103: TIME-OUT MODE

pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
5 POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Figure 5–104: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via
output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of
the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.
Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: “Enabled” GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
SETTING GROUPS BLK: “Off” GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 2" GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 3"
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH 
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:

SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”

SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: “CONT IP 2 ON”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: “CONT IP 3 ON”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s” SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON” SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 ACK: “Off” SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:

PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: ACTUAL VALUE

SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
5
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1 RUN
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
Off = 0 step up SELECTOR 1 POS 1
2
SELECTOR 1 ACK: 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2
3
Off = 0 acknowledge SELECTOR 1 POS 3
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
three-bit control input
Off = 0 SELECTOR 1 POS 5

ON
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: 7 5
SELECTOR 1 POS 6
Off = 0 6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
Off = 0 3-bit acknowledge
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
3-bit position out
OR
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A2.CDR
Figure 5–105: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC

5.7.5 UNDERFREQUENCY
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  UNDERFREQUENCY  UNDERFREQUENCY 1(6)
 UNDERFREQUENCY 1 UNDFREQ 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC 1
UNDERFREQ 1 MIN Range: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
VOLT/AMP: 0.10 pu
UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP: Range: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
59.50 Hz
UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 2.000 s
UNDERFREQ 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY : 2.000 s
UNDERFREQ 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
UNDERFREQ 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 MESSAGE
Disabled
There are six identical underfrequency elements, numbered from 1 through 6.

The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the generated power
and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unit or the isolation of part of
the system from the rest of the system, the effect will be a reduction in frequency. If the control systems of the system gen-
erators do not respond fast enough, the system may collapse. A reliable method to quickly restore the balance between
load and generation is to automatically disconnect selected loads, based on the actual system frequency. This technique,
called “load-shedding”, maintains system integrity and minimize widespread outages. After the frequency returns to normal,
the load may be automatically or manually restored.
The UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting is used to select the source for the signal to be measured. The element first checks for a
live phase voltage available from the selected source. If voltage is not available, the element attempts to use a phase cur-
rent. If neither voltage nor current is available, the element will not operate, as it will not measure a parameter below the
minimum voltage/current setting.
The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfre-
quency element to operate. This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure.
This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example,
if the system frequency is 60 Hz and the load shedding is required at 59.5 Hz, the setting will be 59.50 Hz.
SETTING
UNDERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING SETTING SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1 UNDERFREQ 1
UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK: PICKUP : PICKUP DELAY :
AND RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off = 0 UNDERFREQ 1
UNDERFREQ 1 PKP
RESET DELAY :
SETTING UNDERFREQ 1 DPO
SETTING tPKP
UNDERFREQ 1 0 < f ≤ PICKUP tRST UNDERFREQ 1 OP
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE: ACTUAL VALUES MIN VOLT / AMP:
Level ≥ Minimum
VOLT / AMP
Frequency 827079A8.CDR
Figure 5–106: UNDERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC

5.7.6 OVERFREQUENCY
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  OVERFREQUENCY  OVERFREQUENCY 1(4)
 OVERFREQUENCY 1 OVERFREQ 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
OVERFREQ 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC 1
OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP: Range: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
60.50 Hz
OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.500 s
OVERFREQ 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY : 0.500 s
OVERFREQ 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
OVERFREQ 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
There are four overfrequency elements, numbered 1 through 4.

A frequency calculation for a given source is made on the input of a voltage or current channel, depending on which is
5
available. The channels are searched for the signal input in the following order: voltage channel A, auxiliary voltage chan-
nel, current channel A, ground current channel. The first available signal is used for frequency calculation.
The steady-state frequency of a power system is an indicator of the existing balance between the generated power and the
load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the disconnection of significant load or the isolation of a part of the sys-
tem that has a surplus of generation, the effect will be an increase in frequency. If the control systems of the generators do
not respond fast enough, to quickly ramp the turbine speed back to normal, the overspeed can lead to the turbine trip. The
overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location. This element can
also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the "after load shedding restoration".
The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured. The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects
the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup.
SETTING
OVERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTING
Enabled = 1
OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP : SETTING
SETTING OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP
AND RUN DELAY :
OVERFREQ 1 BLOCK: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OVERFREQ 1 RESET
OVERFREQ 1 PKP
DELAY :
Off = 0 OVERFREQ 1 DPO
tPKP
tRST OVERFREQ 1 OP
SETTING f ≥ PICKUP
OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE:
Frequency 827832A5.CDR
Figure 5–107: OVERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC

5.7.7 MOTOR START SUPERVISION
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  START SUPERVISION
 START SUPERVISION  MAXIMUM STARTING

See page 5-197.
  RATE (STARTS/HR)
 TIME BETWEEN
 STARTS
 RESTART DELAY

The motor start supervision feature consists of three elements that guard against excessive starting duty. These elements
are in addition to the start inhibit that could be imposed by the thermal model. A method to prevent starting is by wiring an
M60 output contact actuated by motor start supervision elements in the motor energizing control circuit. The output contact
changes state only when the motor is stopped to accommodate control circuits that must be continuously energized such
as a contactor.
The three elements of motor start supervision are:
1. Maximum starting rate (starts per hour): This element defines the number of starts attempts allowed in a program-
mable time interval. Only the number of re-start attempts during the interval is controlled and not the time in between.
The latter is controlled by the time between starts element. When the motor is stopped after the last allowed start the
energizing or closing control circuit is disabled until the end of the defined interval. Every start initiate a new interval in
which the start number is limited A typical starting frequency is three starts per hour.
5 2. Time between starts: This function enforces a programmable minimum time duration between two successive starts
attempts. A time delay is initiated with every start and if the motor is stopped a restart is not allowed until the specified
interval has lapsed.
3. Restart Delay: The restart delay function defines a programmable delay after a motor has stopped before it can be
started again. It allows load interruption transient conditions such as down-hole pump applications where gravitational
force causes reverse rotation to subside. Starting when the load is reversing could cause damage to the motor or
pump.

b) MAXIMUM STARTING RATE

PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  START SUPERVISION  MAXIMUM STARTING RATE
 MAXIMUM STARTING STARTS/HR FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 RATE (STARTS/HR) Disabled
STARTS/HR TIME Range: 1 to 300 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
INTERVAL: 60 min
STARTS/HR MAX NUMBER Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
OF STARTS: 3
STARTS/HR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
STARTS/HR TARGET: Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
STARTS/HR EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The element can be programmed to perform classical monitoring function of Starts Per Hour. However, time interval units
specified by the START/HR TIME INTERVAL setting are in minutes for increased flexibility. The STARTS/HR MAX NUMBER OF
STARTS setting specifies start attempt number limit during the interval. The time unit and ranges accommodate the starting
requirements of large direct-on-line motors.
The element asserts the following three FlexLogic™ operands:
• The STARTS-PER-HOUR PKP operand indicates that the maximum permitted starting rate has been reached. When
stopped, the motor should not be restarted until the lockout time elapses. 5
• The STARTS-PER-HOUR OP operand indicates the motor stopped when the maximum permitted starting rate has been
already reached. This operand should be used to inhibit the start command.
• The STARTS-PER-HOUR DPO operand indicates that the maximum permitted starting rate has not been reached. When
stopped, the motor could be restarted immediately.
The element uses motor status asserted by the Thermal Model element. The thermal protection must be configured prop-
erly in order for this function to operate.
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
STARTS/HR FUNCTION: STARTS/HR TIME INTERVAL:
Enabled = 1 STARTS/HR MAX NUMBER OF STARTS:

AND
STARTS/HR BLOCK: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Off STARTS/HR TIME INTERVAL
STARTS-PER-HOUR PKP
LAST
STARTS-PER-HOUR DPO
START
START
START
STOP
STOP
STOP
STARTS-PER-HOUR OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS ACTUAL VALUE

PKP OP DPO
MOTOR STARTING
STARTS/HR LOCKOUT
MOTOR OFFLINE LOCKOUT TIME
reset from
SETTINGS
lockout
SETTINGS / SYSTEM
SETUP / MOTOR /
EMERGENCY RESTART:
Off
833015A2.CDR
Figure 5–108: MAXIMUM STARTING RATE SCHEME LOGIC

c) TIME BETWEEN STARTS

PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  START SUPERVISION  TIME BETWEEN STARTS
 TIME BETWEEN TIME BETWEEN STARTS Range: Disabled, Enabled

 STARTS FUNCTION: Disabled
TIME BETWEEN STARTS Range: 0 to 300 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MIN TIME: 20 min
TIME BWN STARTS BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TIME BETWEEN STARTS Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-Reset
TIME BETWEEN STARTS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The time between starts element prevents restart attempts in quick succession. It requires that the minimum duration spec-
ified by the TIME BETWEEN STARTS MIN TIME setting expires before a subsequent start attempt is allowed. The time between
starts supervising element complements the maximum starting rate element in that the former controls the time spacing
between starts and the latter limits the number of starts.
The element asserts the following three FlexLogic™ operands:
• The TIME-BTWN-STARTS PKP operand indicates that the time since the last start was too short. When stopped, the
motor should not be restarted until the lockout time elapses.
• The TIME-BTWN-STARTS OP operand indicates the motor stopped when the time since the last start was too short. This
5 operand should be used to inhibit the start command.
• The TIME-BTWN-STARTS DPO operand indicates that the time between last two starts was long enough. When stopped,
the motor could be restarted immediately.
The element uses motor status asserted by the thermal model element. The thermal protection must be configured properly
in order for this function to operate.
SETTINGS
TIME BETWEEN STARTS SETTING
FUNCTION:
TIME BETWEEN STARTS
Enabled = 1 MIN TIME:
TIME BWN STARTS BLK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off 0
AND
TIME-BTWN-STARTS PKP
t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TIME-BTWN-STARTS DPO
AND
MOTOR STARTING TIME-BTWN-STARTS OP

MOTOR OFFLINE
ACTUAL VALUE
SETTINGS
reset from
lockout
BTWN STARTS LOCKOUT

SETTINGS / SYSTEM
SETUP / MOTOR /
EMERGENCY RESTART:
833016A2.CDR
Off
Figure 5–109: TIME BETWEEN STARTS SCHEME LOGIC

d) RESTART DELAY
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  START SUPERVISION  RESTART DELAY
 RESTART DELAY RESTART DELAY Range: Disabled, Enabled

RESTART DELAY Range: 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MIN TIME: 0 s
RESTART DELAY BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
RESTART DELAY Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
RESTART DELAY Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The RESTART DELAY MIN TIME setting specifies the lockout time to start the motor after motor was stopped. The restart delay
element asserts the RESTART DELAY OP FlexLogic™ operand for RESTART DELAY MIN TIME after the motor stopped. The
element uses motor status asserted by the thermal model element. The thermal protection must be configured properly in
order for this function to operate.
6(77,1*
)XQFWLRQ
(QDEOHG 6(77,1*
'LVDEOHG 0LQLPXP7LPH
%ORFN )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II $1'
75(6(7
5(67$57'(/$<23
5
027252))/,1(
$&78$/9$/8(
6(77,1* 5HVWDUW'HOD\/RFNRXW
(PHUJHQF\5HVWDUW
UHVWDUWIURPORFNRXW
2II
IURPWKHPRWRUVHWXSVHWWLQJV $&'5
Figure 5–110: RESTART DELAY SCHEME LOGIC
5.7.8 REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING
 REDUCED VOLTAGE REDUCED VOLTAGE Range: Disabled, Enabled

 STARTING STARTING: Disabled
TRANSITION MODE: Range: Current Only, Current or Timer,
MESSAGE Current and Timer
Current Only
REDUCED VOLT FLA: Range: 25 to 300% FLA in steps of 1
MESSAGE
125% FLA
REDUCED VOLT TIMER: Range: 1.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
10.0 s
REDUCED VOLT BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
REDUCED VOLT TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
REDUCED VOLT EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

The M60 can control the transition of a motor start from reduced to full voltage. This feature uses motor load and a supervi-
sory timer to initiate a one second control signal (the REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand) that can be used to switch to full volt-
age. The feature can also assert a trip signal (the REDUCED VOLT OP operand) from the starting logic if the current or timer
transitions do not occur as expected. This transition may be defined as current only, current or timer, or current and timer as
described below.
When the current falls below the REDUCED VOLT

Motor FLA setting and/or the REDUCED VOLT TIMER setting expires,
current the REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand asserts for 1 second.
(% FLA)
signifies an
open transition
REDUCED VOLT FLA

setting
MOTOR FULL LOAD

AMPS setting
time
FlexLogic™
operand
states
5 MOTOR STARTING
REDUCED VOLT CTRL
MOTOR RUNNING
833752A1.CDR
Figure 5–111: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC

All FlexLogic™ operands are asserted upon the initiation of a motor start. The REDUCED VOLT OP operand is set
when the transition timer expires if the motor load never exceeds the REDUCED VOLT FLA setting and the motor sta-
NOTE tus is starting. The REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand is set when the transition timer expires and the motor load has
dropped below the motor full load current setting; that is, the motor status is not starting.
• REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING: This setting enables and disabled the reduced voltage starting feature.
• TRANSITION MODE: This setting selects the reduced voltage starting transition method. The reduced voltage timer is
initiated at the beginning of a motor start; that is, when the motor status transitions from offline to starting. There are
three modes of transition:
– “Current Only”: When the motor load falls below the REDUCED VOLTAGE FLA setting prior to the expiration of the
reduced voltage timer, a transition will be initiated by asserting the REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand for a period of
one second. Any contact output assigned to this operand will operate for this period of time. If the reduced voltage
timer expires prior to the motor load dropping below the REDUCED VOLTAGE FLA setting, the REDUCED VOLT CTRL
operand does not change state and the REDUCED VOLT OP operand is asserted.
– “Current Or Timer”: When the motor load falls below the REDUCED VOLTAGE FLA setting, or if the reduced voltage
timer expires, a transition will be initiated by asserting the REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand for one second. Any con-
tact output assigned to this control signal will operate for this period of time.
– “Current And Timer”: A transition will be initiated by asserting the REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand for one second
when the reduced voltage timer expires and the motor load has dropped below the REDUCED VOLTAGE FLA setting
prior to the expiration of the reduced voltage timer. If the reduced voltage timer expires prior to the motor load
dropping below the REDUCED VOLTAGE FLA setting, the REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand does not change state and
the REDUCED VOLT OP operand is asserted.

• REDUCED VOLT FLA: This setting specifies the current level used when determining the transition mode and initiat-
ing the REDUCED VOLT CTRL operand. This setting should be greater than the product of the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS
setting and the MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR setting. See the Motor setup section for details.
• REDUCED VOLT TIMER: This setting specifies the timeout value of the transition timer used in the selected transition
mode.
SETTING
REDUCED VOLT FLA
RUN TIMER
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Motor load < PICKUP
AND REDUCED VOLT OP
50 ms
SETTING OR
TRANSITION MODE
= Current Only AND
= Current or Timer
= Current and Timer TIMER
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
OR REDUCED VOLT CTRL
1 sec.
OR
SETTING
AND
REDUCED VOLTAGE
STARTING
= Enabled
REDUCED VOLT BLOCK SETTING
= Off REDUCED VOLT TIMER
TPKP
AND
SETTING 0
REDUCED VOLT TIMER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0
MOTOR STARTING
TPKP
833023A1.CDR
Figure 5–112: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING LOGIC 5

5.7.9 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(48)
 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Dig Element 1
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
PICKUP LED: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled

Digital elements run once per power system cycle.

As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block signal with a duration less than one power system
NOTE
cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to one power system cycle later than the pickup and
reset delay settings indicate.
Do not use digital elements with transient signals, such as communications commands. Do not use digital elements
where random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.
There are 48 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 48. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic™ operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic™
operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to be monitored by the digital element.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0”.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to
“Disabled”, the operation of the pickup LED is blocked.
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 SETTINGS
Enabled = 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
SETTING PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
NAME: RESET DELAY: DIG ELEM 01 DPO
5
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 AND RUN tPKP
INPUT: DIG ELEM 01 PKP
Off = 0 DIG ELEM 01 OP
INPUT = 1 tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
827042A1.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–113: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts. The
voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the “Cont
Op 1 VOn” FlexLogic™ operand will be set (for contact input 1 – corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If
the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and
the “Cont Op 1 VOff” FlexLogic™ operand will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators
of the integrity of the circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.
EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper-
ation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resis-
tance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.

In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
85VHULHVGHYLFH
ZLWKIRUP$FRQWDFWV
+D
,
+E '&²
9 '&
+F D 7ULSFRLO
, FXUUHQWPRQLWRU
9 YROWDJHPRQLWRU $&'5
Figure 5–114: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1

Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name; for
example, “Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status.
Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, for example, “Cont Ip 1", and will be set “On” when the
breaker is closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated below (EnerVista UR
Setup example shown):
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance alarms.
NOTE

EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the fig-
ure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
selected to “Off”. In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista UR Setup example shown).
85VHULHVGHYLFH
ZLWKIRUP$FRQWDFWV
5 +D
9DOXHVIRUUHVLVWRU´5µ
3RZHUVXSSO\ 5HVLVWDQFH 3RZHU
,
9'& ű :
+E '&² 9'& ű :
9'& ű :
9 '&
9'& ű :
+F D 7ULSFRLO
9'& ű :
5
9'& ű :
%\SDVV
, FXUUHQWPRQLWRU UHVLVWRU
9 YROWDJHPRQLWRU $&'5
Figure 5–115: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and
solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.
NOTE

5.7.10 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  COUNTER 1(8)
 COUNTER 1 COUNTER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

COUNTER 1 NAME: Range: 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Counter 1
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 UP: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
COUNTER 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
• COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status.
• COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
• COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic™ output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set
value.
• COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to –2,147,483,648.
• COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
• COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.

• CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will
be set to the preset value in the following situations:
1. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
2. When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
PRESET changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
3. When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
• COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0”.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTINGS
Enabled = 1
COUNTER 1 NAME:
5 SETTING
COUNTER 1 UP:
AND COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
Off = 0 SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: OPERANDS
SETTING
CALCULATE Count more than Comp. COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 DOWN: VALUE Count equal to Comp. COUNTER 1 EQL
Off = 0 Count less than Comp. COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE
SETTING SET TO ZERO

ACTUAL VALUE
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING AND ACTUAL VALUES

COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Off = 0
OR STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 5–116: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC

5.7.11 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS
 MONITORING  BREAKER
See page 5–208.
 ELEMENTS  FLASHOVER 1
 BREAKER
 FLASHOVER 2
 VT FUSE FAILURE 1




 BROKEN ROTOR BAR


b) BREAKER FLASHOVER
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  BREAKER FLASHOVER 1(2)
 BREAKER BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Disabled, Enabled

 FLASHOVER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC: SRC 1
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SRC: None
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP: Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.850 pu
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PKP: 1000 V
BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
5
PKP: 0.600 pu
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The detection of the breaker flashover is based on the following condition:

1. Breaker open,
2. Voltage drop measured from either side of the breaker during the flashover period,
3. Voltage difference drop, and
4. Measured flashover current through the breaker.
Furthermore, the scheme is applicable for cases where either one or two sets of three-phase voltages are available across
the breaker.

THREE VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION

When only one set of VTs is available across the breaker, the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC setting should be “None”. To detect
an open breaker condition in this application, the scheme checks if the per-phase voltages were recovered (picked up), the
status of the breaker is open (contact input indicating the breaker status is off), and no flashover current is flowing. A con-
tact showing the breaker status must be provided to the relay. The voltage difference will not be considered as a condition
for open breaker in this part of the logic.
Voltages must be present prior to flashover conditions. If the three VTs are placed after the breaker on the line (or
feeder), and the downstream breaker is open, the measured voltage would be zero and the flashover element will
NOTE not be initiated.
The flashover detection will reset if the current drops back to zero, the breaker closes, or the selected FlexLogic™ operand
for supervision changes to high. Using supervision through the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A, BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV B, and BRK 1
FLSHOVR SPV C settings is recommended by selecting a trip operand that will not allow the flashover element to pickup prior
to the trip.
The flashover detection can be used for external alarm, re-tripping the breaker, or energizing the lockout relay.
Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs Breaker
Line/Feeder
Bus VTs
842746A1.CDR
5
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are feeder CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs, and Contact Input 1 is set as Breaker
52a contact. The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1. 52a status = 0.
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting.
3. IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker.
4. ΔVA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme).
The conditions at flashover detection are:
1. 52a status = 0.
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting.
3. IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker.
4. ΔVA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme).
SIX VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION
The per-phase voltage difference approaches zero when the breaker is closed. The is well below any typical minimum
pickup voltage. Select the level of the BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting to be less than the voltage difference measured
across the breaker when the close or open breaker resistors are left in service. Prior to flashover, the voltage difference is
larger than BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP. This applies to either the difference between two live voltages per phase or when the
voltage from one side of the breaker has dropped to zero (line de-energized), at least one per-phase voltage is larger than
the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, and no current flows through the breaker poles. During breaker flashover, the per-phase
voltages from both sides of the breaker drops below the pickup value defined by the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, the volt-
age difference drops below the pickup setting, and flashover current is detected. These flashover conditions initiate Flex-
Logic™ pickup operands and start the BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP DELAY timer.
This application do not require detection of breaker status via a 52a contact, as it uses a voltage difference larger than the
BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting. However, monitoring the breaker contact will ensure scheme stability.

Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs Breaker
Line/Feeder
VTs
VTs
842745A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs. The source 2 (SRC2) phase voltages are
line VTs. Contact input 1 is set as the breaker 52a contact (optional).
The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1. ΔVA is greater than pickup
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting
3. IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker
4. 52a status = 0 (optional)
The conditions at flashover detection are:
1. ΔVA is less than pickup
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting
5 3.
4.
IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker
52a status = 0 (optional)
The element is operational only when phase-to-ground voltages are connected to relay terminals. The flashover
element will not operate if delta voltages are applied.
NOTE
The breaker flashover settings are described below.

• BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide three-phase voltages and three-
phase currents from one side of the current breaker. The source selected as a setting and must be configured with
breaker phase voltages and currents, even if only three (3) VTs are available across the breaker.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide another set of three phase volt-
ages whenever six (6) VTs are available across the breaker.
• BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C: These settings specify FlexLogic™ operands to indicate the
open status of the breaker. A separate FlexLogic™ operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status
and provide flashover detection. The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the
breaker poles open status.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltages from both sides of the breaker. If
six VTs are available, opening the breaker leads to two possible combinations – live voltages from only one side of the
breaker, or live voltages from both sides of the breaker. Either case will set the scheme ready for flashover detection
upon detection of voltage above the selected value. Set BRK FLSHOVR V PKP to 85 to 90% of the nominal voltage.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltage difference when two VTs per
phase are available across the breaker. The pickup voltage difference should be below the monitored voltage differ-
ence when close or open breaker resistors are left in service. The setting is selected as primary volts difference
between the sources.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP: This setting specifies the normal load current which can flow through the breaker.
Depending on the flashover protection application, the flashover current can vary from levels of the charging current
when the line is de-energized (all line breakers open), to well above the maximum line (feeder) load (line/feeder con-
nected to load).
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A to BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV C: These settings specifiy FlexLogic™ operands (per breaker
pole) that supervise the operation of the element per phase. Supervision can be provided by operation of other protec-

tion elements, breaker failure, and close and trip commands. A six-cycle time delay applies after the selected Flex-
Logic™ operand resets.
• BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected.

5
5-212
SETTINGS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV A:

0
FlexLogic operand: Off=0
6 cycle
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B: Phase B
logic
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
FlexLogic operand: Off=0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C: Phase C

logic FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FlexLogic operand: Off=0 BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP B OR BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
SETTING
SETTING BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP C BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO
BREAKER FLASHOVER
FUNCTION: BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Enable=1
AND RUN BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO A
Block: OFF=0
VA > PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
0 AND BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
OR SET
5 cycle
dominant
Va > PKP Phase C logic
Phase B logic
RESET
SETTINGS
5 cycle
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A:
0 OR
SET SETTING
RUN dominant
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
FlexLogic operand: On=1
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD B: Phase B tPKP
logic 0 BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP A
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FlexLogic operand: On=1
Phase B logic BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP B OR BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C: Phase C RESET
logic OR Phase C logic BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP C
SETTINGS RUN
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 FlexLogic operand: On=1
SRC:

SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6 SETTING
VA
BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP:
VB
VC RUN
IA IA > PKP
IB
AND
IC
Figure 5–117: BREAKER FLASHOVER SCHEME LOGIC

SETTINGS
SETTING
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2
SRC: BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V
PKP:
SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6, none
RUN
Va DVA > PKP
DVA = | VA - Va |
Vb
Vc 842018A2.CDR
5 SETTINGS
GE Multilin
c) VT FUSE FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  VT FUSE FAILURE 1(4)
 VT FUSE FAILURE 1 VT FUSE FAILURE 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme.

The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or
partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK input)
are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.
There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:
• Class A: loss of one or two phases.
• Class B: loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of class A failures is a significant level of negative
sequence voltage, whereas an indication of class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an
insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults
are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is pro-
vided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.
An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive
sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The function setting enables and disables the fuse failure feature for each source.
AND
5
Reset-dominant
OR SET
FAULT
Latch
AND
RESET
SETTING
Function
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
AND
COMPARATORS
SOURCE 1 Run
V_2 V_2 > 0.1 pu
V_1 Run
OR OR SET
I_1 V_1 < 0.05 pu FUSE
FAIL
Run AND
I_1 > 0.075 pu
Run AND
TIMER
V_1 < 0.80 pu
2 cycles
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Run AND
I_1 < 0.05 pu Latch SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP
20 cycles
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SRC1 50DD OP
OPEN POLE OP
The OPEN POLE OP operand applies
AND
to the D60, L60, L90, and N60
RESET
OR
Reset-dominant
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
827093AM_v58.CDR
Figure 5–118: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC

d) BROKEN ROTOR BAR DETECTION

PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  BROKEN ROTOR BAR
 BROKEN ROTOR BAR BROKEN ROTOR BAR Range: Disabled, Enabled

START OF BRB Range: –12.00 to 11.99 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0.40 Hz
END OF BRB Range: –11.99 to 12.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 2.00 Hz
BRB START BLOCK Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 60.00 s
MINIMUM MOTOR LOAD: Range: 0.50 to 1.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.70 x FLA
MAX. LOAD DEVIATION: Range: 0.50 to 1.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.10 x FLA
MAXIMUM CURRENT Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
UNBALANCE: 15.0%
BROKEN ROTOR BAR Range: –60 to –12 dB in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PICKUP: -40 dB
BROKEN ROTOR BAR Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
5
RESET DLY: 1.00 s
BRB BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BROKEN ROTOR BAR Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
BROKEN ROTOR BAR Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The broken rotor bar detection function uses the same source as other motor protection functions. This source is defined by
the SYSTEM SETUP  MOTOR  MOTOR LINE SOURCE setting. The following items must addressed for the broken rotor
bar detection function to operate:
• Phase currents must be configured on this source for the broken rotor bar detection function.
• The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS oscillography setting must not be “Off”.
• The thermal model must be enabled.
This function monitors only phase A current.
When the broken rotor bar detection function is enabled, an alarm is initiated once the value of ratio of the broken bar
related sideband component versus the system fundamental component is greater than the pickup level for two consecu-
tive measurements. To reduce probability of a false alarm (caused by impairments other than a rotor bar failure), the ele-
ment is active only if the following conditions hold.
• The motor status is “Running” and the motor load is between preset minimum acceptable value and a value just below
the overload (defined by MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS × MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR).
Trying to detect the broken rotor bar during a motor start will return an incorrect result because of the rapid movement
of broken rotor bar components and a heavy change in the motor current. On the other hand, while the motor load is
small, there is not enough resolution to accurately calculate a miniscule spectral component caused by a rotor bar fail-
ure.

• The motor load is steady.

Variations in motor load cause spectral components that can be misinterpreted as rotor bar failure. Instantaneous
motor load values are collected alongside with data for the broken rotor bar algorithm to prevent this from happening.
The average motor load and its standard deviation are calculated. If the standard deviation is greater than its corre-
sponding setting, the data set is discarded and the broken bar algorithm is not initiated.
• The motor current unbalance is below a corresponding setpoint.
The excessive current unbalance stresses the motor, and it may cause a false broken rotor bar detection.
It is recommended that frequency tracking be enabled to avoid possible false broken rotor bar detection results when the
system frequency drifts from the nominal frequency.
The following settings are available for the broken rotor bar detection element.
• START OF BRB OFFSET: This setting specifies the beginning of the frequency range where the spectral component
due to a rotor bar failure will be searched. The beginning of the frequency range is defined as follows, where f1 is the
system frequency and fstart_offset is this setting.
f start = f 1 + f start_offset (EQ 5.41)
If the upper sideband is to be measured, this setting should be programmed as follows, where f1 is the system fre-
quency and s is the motor slip at full load.
f start_offset = 2sf 1 – max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) ) (EQ 5.42)
For example, if the full load slip is 0.01, program this setting as follows for a 60 Hz power system.
f start_offset = 2sf 1 – max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) )
(EQ 5.43)
= 2 × 0.01 × 60 Hz – 0.8 = 0.40 Hz
5
If the lower sideband is to be measured, this setting should be programmed as follows, where f1 is the system fre-
f start_offset = – 2 sf 1 – max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) ) (EQ 5.44)
Using the same values from previous example, this value should be programmed as follows.
f start_offset = – 2 sf 1 – max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) )
(EQ 5.45)
= – 2 × 0.01 × 60 Hz – 0.8 = – 2.00 Hz
• END OF BRB OFFSET: This setting specifies the end of the frequency range where the spectral component due to a
rotor bar failure will be searched. The end of the frequency range is defined as follows, where f1 is the system fre-
quency and fend_offset is this setting
f end = f 1 + f end_offset (EQ 5.46)
If the upper sideband is to be measured, this setting should be programmed as follows, where f1 is the system fre-
f end_offset = 2sf 1 + max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) ) (EQ 5.47)
For example, if the full load slip is 0.01, program this setting as follows for a 60 Hz power system.
f end_offset = 2sf 1 + max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) )
(EQ 5.48)
= 2 × 0.01 × 60 Hz + 0.8 = 2.00 Hz
If the lower sideband is to be measured, this setting should be programmed as follows, where f1 is the system fre-
f end_offset = – 2 sf 1 + max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) ) (EQ 5.49)
Using the same values from previous example, this value should be programmed as follows.
f end_offset = – 2 sf 1 + max ( 0.3, min ( 2sf 1 – 0.4, 1.0 ) )
(EQ 5.50)
= – 2 × 0.01 × 60 Hz + 0.8 = – 0.40 Hz

• BRB START BLOCK DELAY: This setting is used to block the broken rotor bar detection function while the motor is
starting for the specified time. This ensures that the broken rotor bar element is active only when the motor is running.
• MINIMUM MOTOR LOAD: When the motor load is less than the value specified by this setting, the data acquisition of
the broken rotor bar detection function is blocked. The broken rotor bar detection algorithm cannot accurately deter-
mine the broken rotor bar spectral component when a motor is lightly loaded.
• MAX. LOAD DEVIATION: When the standard deviation of the motor load is greater than the value specified by this
setting, the data acquisition of the broken rotor bar detection function is blocked. The broken rotor bar detection algo-
rithm cannot accurately determine the broken rotor bar spectral component when the motor load varies.
• MAXIMUM CURRENT UNBALANCE: When the current unbalance is greater than the value specified by this setting,
the data acquisition of the broken rotor bar detection function is blocked. The broken rotor bar detection algorithm can-
not accurately determine the broken rotor bar spectral component in a current unbalance situation.
• BROKEN ROTOR BAR PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the broken rotor bar detection feature.
The pickup threshold should normally be set to a level between –54 dB (very likely, a cracked rotor bar) and –50 dB
(probably a broken rotor bar).
• BROKEN ROTOR BAR RESET DLY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset the broken rotor bar detection fea-
ture. This setting can be left at its default value since the element updates its state one to two times per minute.
• BRB BLOCK: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand used to block the broken rotor bar detection feature. Typi-
cally, a panel cut-off switch or other user-specified conditions blocks this function.

5 SETTINGS 5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.8INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS

 CONTACT INPUT H5a


CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

MESSAGE
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
↓
 CONTACT INPUT xxx


 CONTACT INPUT
 THRESHOLDS
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
5
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
↓
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CON-
TACT IP X On” (Logic 1) FlexLogic™ operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corre-
sponds to contact input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maxi-
mum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT
INPUT EVENTS is set to “Enabled”, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a user-
settable debounce time in order for the M60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (de-
bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic™ operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the con-
tact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic™ equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic™ operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the fig-
ure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic™ equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.

5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
The FlexLogic™ operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a con-
tact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 μs accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic™ operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
VOLTAGE
INPUT
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
6
2 1 3 5
Time stamp of the first
5
TM
Time stamp of the first At this time, the The FlexLogic scan corresponding to the
At this time, the new
scan corresponding to new (HIGH) operand is going to new validated state is
(LOW) contact state is
the new validated state is contact state is be asserted at this logged in the SOE record
validated
logged in the SOE record validated protection pass
7
RAW CONTACT
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
STATE
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
4
The FlexLogicTM operand
DEBOUNCE TIME
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the
SCAN TIME (user setting)
changes reflecting the validated contact state
FLEXLOGICTM
(0.5 msec) validated contact state

OPERAND
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5–119: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64)
 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID: Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
TYPE: Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COM-
MANDS menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to “Off” (logic 0) unless the appropri-
ate input signal is received.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to “Disabled”, the input will be forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the
input. If set to “Enabled”, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic™ operands in
response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is “Self-Reset”, when the input signal tran-
sits from off to on, the output operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations and then return
to off. If set to “Latched”, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received
input.
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations. If 5
the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic™ equation, it will likely have to be length-
NOTE
ened in time. A FlexLogic™ timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1 S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0” R VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING (Flexlogic Operand)
OR
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched AND
Self - Reset 827080A2.CDR
Figure 5–120: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic™
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic™ operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A con-
tacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the specifications for
Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic™ operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the
name of the flag; for example, CONT OP 1 ION.
5 In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper-
ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized in the M60 using the CONT OP 1 ION FlexLogic™ operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic™ operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1a OUTPUT H1a ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 L-Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1a RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
Operate-dominant
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

The M60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and pop-
ulates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic™).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching con-
tacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabili-
ties for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic™ operand, event, and target message.
• OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off),
any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and
RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
• OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay
will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any
activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
• OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
“Operate-dominant” and will open if set to “Reset-dominant”.
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The 5
following settings should be applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUT-
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-
TONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset” PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s” PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. There-
fore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the con-
trol inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:

Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO4” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
5
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)
 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Virt Op 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic™. If not assigned, the output will be forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic™ equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic™ and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW

Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices.
The IEC 61850 GSSE (Generic Substation State Event) and GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) stan-
dards are used.
The IEC 61850 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet. For UR-
series relays, Ethernet communications is provided on all CPU modules except type 9E.
NOTE
The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE/GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to Flex-
Logic™, allowing distributed FlexLogic™ by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications net-
work. In addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other
information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only from
messages that have originated in selected devices.
IEC 61850 GSSE messages are compatible with UCA GOOSE messages and contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC
61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable data items. When used by the remote input/output fea-
ture, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE messages.
Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high priority. GOOSE messages have additional
advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN (virtual LAN) and Ethernet priority tagging functionality.
The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850
specification provides 32 “DNA” bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 30 user-defined events. All
remaining bit pairs are “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The M60 implementation 5
provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting
and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when
the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not
occurred. The transmitting device also sends a ‘hold time’ which is set greater than three times the programmed default
time required by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the mes-
sage time allowed to live. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to this time interval, and if it
has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so
it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. If a message is received from a
remote device before the time allowed to live expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the
message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where “Offline” indicates non-communicating, can
be displayed.
The remote input/output facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE MESSAGES

In a M60 relay, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each
GOOSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  FIXED GOOSE  GOOSE ID setting.
Likewise, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE mes-
sage is programmed in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE
CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  GSSE  GSSE ID setting.
In M60 releases previous to 5.0x, these name strings were represented by the RELAY NAME setting.

c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GSSE MESSAGES

PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DEVICES  REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 Remote Device 1
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ETYPE APPID: 0
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: Fixed, GOOSE 1 through GOOSE 8
MESSAGE
DATASET: Fixed
Remote devices are available for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only
those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row)
the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID setting is only used with GOOSE messages; they are not applicable to GSSE mes-
sages. This setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. It should match the corre-
sponding settings on the sending device.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET setting provides for the choice of the M60 fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset (that is, containing
DNA and UserSt bit pairs), or one of the configurable datasets.
Note that the dataset for the received data items must be made up of existing items in an existing logical node. For this rea-
son, logical node GGIO3 is instantiated to hold the incoming data items. GGIO3 is not necessary to make use of the
received data. The remote input data item mapping takes care of the mapping of the inputs to remote input FlexLogic™
operands. However, GGIO3 data can be read by IEC 61850 clients.
5 5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE INPUTS  REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
 REMOTE INPUT 1 REMOTE INPUT 1 ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Remote Ip 1
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote device 16
MESSAGE
Remote Device 1
REMOTE IN 1 ITEM: Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32,
MESSAGE Config Item 1 to Config Item 64
None
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
STATE: Off
REMOTE IN 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Inputs that create FlexLogic™ operands at the receiving relay are extracted from GSSE/GOOSE messages origi-
nating in remote devices. Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections: DNA-1 through DNA-32
and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in
the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user
selection of the FlexLogic™ operand whose state is represented in the GSSE/GOOSE message. A user must program a
DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic™ operand.
Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
The REMOTE INPUT 1 ID setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input. The REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE setting
selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote
device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) ID (see the Remote devices section). The REMOTE IN 1 ITEM setting selects the
specific bits of the GSSE/GOOSE message required.
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:

• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to logic 1.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to logic 0.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on GSSE/GOOOSE messaging, refer to the Remote devices section in this chapter.
NOTE
5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DPS INPUTS  REMOTE DPS INPUT 1(5)
 REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 REM DPS IN 1 ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 RemDPS Ip 1
REM DPS IN 1 DEV: Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote Device 16
MESSAGE
Remote Device 1
REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: Range: None, Dataset Item 1 to Dataset Item 64
MESSAGE
None
REM DPS IN 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
5
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Remote double-point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device. Each remote
double point status input must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device
for local use. This functionality is accomplished with the five remote double-point status input settings.
• REM DPS IN 1 ID: This setting assigns descriptive text to the remote double-point status input.
• REM DPS IN 1 DEV: This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message. The range is
selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote devices section.
• REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message.
The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double-point status item from a GOOSE dataset
(changes are made in the SETTINGS  COMMUNICATION  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION 
RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS menus). Dataset
items configured to receive any of “GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV” to “GGIO3.ST.IndPos5.stV” will accept double-point status
information that will be decoded by the remote double-point status inputs configured to this dataset item.
The remote double point status is recovered from the received IEC 61850 dataset and is available as through the RemDPS
Ip 1 BAD, RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM, RemDPS Ip 1 OFF, and RemDPS Ip 1 ON FlexLogic™ operands. These operands can then be
used in breaker or disconnect control schemes.
5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS  REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 DNA- 1 BIT PAIR Off
DNA- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

Remote outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into GSSE/GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ oper-
and. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 5–23: IEC 61850 DNA ASSIGNMENTS

DNA IEC 61850 DEFINITION FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND
1 Test IEC 61850 TEST MODE
2 ConfRev IEC 61850 CONF REV
b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS  REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR Off
UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE/GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the
message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GSSE/GOOSE messages when there has been no change of
state of any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTO-
COL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION settings menu.
5 DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE
UPDATE TIME: 60 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
For more information on GSSE/GOOSE messaging, see the Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the Remote
Devices section.
NOTE
5.8.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
 RESETTING RESET OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic™ latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel,
or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic™ operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each cre-
ate the RESET OP FlexLogic™ operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting
shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.

5.8.10 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT INPUTS  DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
 DIRECT INPUT 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 NAME: Dir Ip 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 16
MESSAGE
DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 32
MESSAGE
BIT NUMBER: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
DEFAULT STATE: Off
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to
assign a descriptive name to the direct input. The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID represents the source of direct input 1. The
specified direct input is driven by the device identified here.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit
identified as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The
following choices are available:
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
5
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
 DIRECT OUTPUT 1 DIRECT OUT 1 NAME: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Dir Out 1
DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIRECT OUTPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The DIRECT OUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output. The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is
the FlexLogic™ operand that determines the state of this direct output.
c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES
The examples introduced in the earlier Direct inputs and outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are continued
below to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.

EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A M60 RELAY

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable logic
that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such
as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via
single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 5–121: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Assume contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5
and bit number 12 are used, as an example):
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2” UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = “Cont Ip 1 On”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
5 devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–122: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1
would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs
7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals):
UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"

DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"



Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9
ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to “On”), or to trip
the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to “Off”).
EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–123: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
5
TX1 RX1 RX2
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–124: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION

In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a ‘bridge’. The fol-
lowing settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"

DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"

DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3 DIRECT INPUT 5

DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
842717A1.CDR
Figure 5–125: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT – EXAMPLE 3
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, direct
inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic™ and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT
RX1 setting).
5.8.11 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

5 a) OVERVIEW
The relay provides sixteen teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and sixteen
teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only, num-
bered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by assigning
FlexLogic™ operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create distributed pro-
tection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional comparison pilot
schemes and direct transfer tripping. It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection
functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs.
b) TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT INPUTS
 TELEPROT INPUTS TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
 DEFAULT: Off
TELEPROT INPUT 1-2 Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
↓

MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
↓

MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off

Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to “On” defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of “Off”
defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails.
The “Latest/On” and “Latest/Off” values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known,
such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for “Latest/On”
and logic 0 for “Latest/Off”.
c) TELEPROTECTION OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT OUTPUTS
 TELEPROT OUTPUTS TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

 Off
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
MESSAGE
TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-16:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5
As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of com-
munication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each chan-
nel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand on
both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end). On
three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of channel
failure between any pair of relays.

UR-1 UR-2
ACTUAL VALUES SETTING
CHANNEL 1 STATUS: TELEPROT INPUT 1-1
DEFAULT:
SETTING (same for 1-2...1-16)
(same for 1-2...1-16) On FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Fail
Off (Flexlogic Operand) Off TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On
OK OR
(same for 1-2...1-16)
SETTING ACTUAL VALUES

TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
DEFAULT:
Communication channel #1
(same for 1-2...1-16) (Teleprotection I/O Enabled) SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
On (same for 1-2...1-16)
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On Fail
OR Off Off (Flexlogic Operand)
(same for 1-2...1-16) OK
UR-2 or UR-3
ACTUAL VALUES SETTING
CHANNEL 2 STATUS: TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT:
SETTING (same for 2-2...2-16)
(same for 1-2...1-16) On FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Fail
Off TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On
Off (Flexlogic Operand) OK OR
(same for 2-2...2-16)
SETTING ACTUAL VALUES

CHANNEL 2 STATUS:
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 Communication channel #2
DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16) (On 3-terminal system or 2-terminal SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
with redundant channel)
On (same for 2-2...2-16)
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On Fail
Off
(same for 1-2...1-16) OR OK Off (Flexlogic Operand)
842750A2.CDR
Figure 5–126: TELEPROTECTION INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING

5 5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS  GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1(32)
 GOOSE ANALOG ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: Range: –1000000.000 to 1000000.000 in steps of 0.001

 INPUT 1 1000.000
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT Range: Default Value, Last Known
MESSAGE
MODE: Default Value
GOOSE ANALOG 1 Range: up to 4 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
UNITS:
GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: Range: 0.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
1.000
The IEC 61850 GOOSE analog inputs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series
devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE analog input.
• ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the sending device is offline
and the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to “Default Value”.This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating
point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values may be
rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
• ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is “Last Known”, the value of the
GOOSE analog input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
“Default Value”, then the value of the GOOSE analog input is defined by the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT setting.
• GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS: This setting specifies a four-character alphanumeric string that can is used in the actual
values display of the corresponding GOOSE analog input value.
GOOSE Analogs are floating-point values, with no units. The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to
configure GOOSE Analog, so that it can be used in a FlexElement.

GOOSE Analogs that represent current, voltage, power, frequency, angles, or power factor can be used in a FlexEle-
ment. The following text must be used in the UNITS setting, to represent these types of analogs: A, V, W, var, VA, Hz,
deg, and no text (blank setting) for power factor.
GOOSE Analogs can be compared to other GOOSE Analogs with any character string or no string.
• GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: This setting specifies the per-unit base factor when using the GOOSE analog input FlexAna-
log™ values in other M60 features, such as FlexElements™. The base factor is applied to the GOOSE analog input
FlexAnalog quantity to normalize it to a per-unit quantity. The base units are described in the following table.
The per-unit base setting represents thousands, not single units. For example, a PU base of 1.000 is actually 1000 and
a PU base of 0.001 is 1.
When using GOOSE Analogs and PU base in FlexElements, the largest value that can be displayed in the FlexEle-
ment actual values is 2,140,000.000.
Table 5–24: GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS

ELEMENT BASE UNITS
(Amp Unbalance)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SENSITIVE DIR POWER
(Sns Dir Power)
PBASE = maximum value of 3 × VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs of the sources
configured for the sensitive power directional element(s).
5
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Biased Motor Load)
The GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog™ values are available for use in other M60 functions that use FlexAnalog™ values.

5.8.13 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS  GOOSE UINTEGER INPUT 1(16)
 GOOSE UINTEGER UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: Range: 0 to 429496295 in steps of 1

 INPUT 1 1000
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT Range: Default Value, Last Known
MESSAGE
MODE: Default Value
The IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger inputs feature allows the transmission of FlexInteger™ values between any two UR-
series devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input.
• UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is
offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to “Default Value”.This setting is stored as a 32-bit unsigned integer
number.
• UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is “Last Known”, the value of the
GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
“Default Value”, then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting.
The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger™ values are available for use in other M60 functions that use FlexInteger™ values.

5 SETTINGS 5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.9TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT H1(W8)
 DCMA INPUT H1 DCMA INPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DCMA INPUT H1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DCMA Ip 1
DCMA INPUT H1 Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
UNITS: μA
DCMA INPUT H1 Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,
MESSAGE 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
DCMA INPUT H1 MIN Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
DCMA INPUT H1 MAX Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital for-
mat for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are con-
tained in chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
5
dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If “Disabled”, no actual values are created for the chan-
nel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250°C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is “250”. Another example would be a watts transducer with
a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value would be “–20” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
VALUE value “180”. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.

5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
5.9.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT H1(W8)
 RTD INPUT H1 RTD INPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

RTD INPUT H1 ID: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
RTD Ip 1
RTD INPUT H1 TYPE: Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
MESSAGE 120Ω Nickel
100Ω Nickel
RTD INPUT H1 Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Group 1,
MESSAGE Group 2
APPLICATION: Bearing
RTD INPUT H1 ALARM Range: 1 to 249°C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TEMPERATURE: 130°C
RTD INPUT H1 ALARM Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PKP DELAY: 0.00 s
RTD INPUT H1 TRIP Range: 1 to 249°C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TEMPERATURE: 130°C
RTD INPUT H1 TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PKP DELAY: 0.00 s
RTD INPUT H1 TRIP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
5 MESSAGE
RST DELAY: 0.00 s
RTD INPUT H1 TRIP Range: None, Group, RTD Inp H1, RTD Inp H2,...,
MESSAGE RTD Inp W8
VOTING: None
RTD INPUT H1 OPEN: Range: None, Alarm, Block
MESSAGE
None
RTD INPUT H1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
RTD INPUT H1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
RTD INPUT H1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The RTD inputs convert values of input resistance into temperature for further operations. These channels are intended to
be connected to any of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
• RTD INPUT H1 FUNCTION: The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If set to “Disabled”,
there will not be an actual value created for the channel.
• RTD INPUT H1 ID: An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel. This ID will be included in the channel actual val-
ues. It is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of
parameter.

• RTD INPUT H1 TYPE: This setting specifies the RTD type. Four different RTD types are available: 100 Ω Nickel, 10 Ω
Copper, 100 Ω Platinum, and 120 Ω Nickel. Refer the table below for reference temperature values for each type.
Table 5–25: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
°C °F 100 OHM PT 120 OHM NI 100 OHM NI 10 OHM CU
(DIN 43760)
–50 –58 80.31 86.17 71.81 7.10
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 77.30 7.49
–30 –22 88.22 99.41 82.84 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 88.45 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.17 8.65
0 32 100.00 120.00 100.00 9.04
10 50 103.90 127.17 105.97 9.42
20 68 107.79 134.52 112.10 9.81
30 86 111.67 142.06 118.38 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 124.82 10.58
50 122 119.39 157.74 131.45 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.90 138.25 11.35
70 158 127.07 174.25 145.20 11.74
80 176 130.89 182.84 152.37 12.12
90 194 134.70 191.64 159.70 12.51
100 212 138.50 200.64 167.20 12.90 5
110 230 142.29 209.85 174.87 13.28
120 248 146.06 219.29 182.75 13.67
130 266 149.82 228.96 190.80 14.06
140 284 153.58 238.85 199.04 14.44
150 302 157.32 248.95 207.45 14.83
160 320 161.04 259.30 216.08 15.22
170 338 164.76 269.91 224.92 15.61
180 356 168.47 280.77 233.97 16.00
190 374 172.46 291.96 243.30 16.39
200 392 175.84 303.46 252.88 16.78
210 410 179.51 315.31 262.76 17.17
220 428 183.17 327.54 272.94 17.56
230 446 186.82 340.14 283.45 17.95
240 464 190.45 353.14 294.28 18.34
250 482 194.08 366.53 305.44 18.73
• RTD INPUT H1 APPLICATION: This setting allows each individual RTD to be assigned to a group application. This is
useful for applications that require group measurement for voting. A value of “None” specifies that the RTD will operate
individually and not part of any RTD group. All RTDs programmed to “Stator” are used for RTD biasing of the M60 ther-
mal model. Common groups are provided for rotating machines applications such as ambient, bearing, group 1, or
group 2. If the RTD INPUT H1 TRIP VOTING setting value is “Group”, then it is allowed to issue a trip if N – 1 RTDs from the
same group also pick up, where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group.
• RTD INPUT H1 ALARM TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the alarm stage.
• RTD INPUT H1 ALARM PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the alarm stage until the output can be
asserted.
• RTD INPUT H1 TRIP TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the trip stage.
• RTD INPUT H1 TRIP PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the trip stage until the output can be asserted.

• RTD INPUT H1 TRIP RST DELAY: This setting specifies the reset delay to seal-in the trip signal.
• RTD INPUT H1 TRIP VOTING: This setting allows securing trip signal by voting with other RTDs. A value of “None”
indicates that element operates individually and no voting takes place.
A value of “Group” indicates that element is allowed to issue a trip if N – 1 of other RTDs of the same group pick up as
well (where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group). For example, if three RTDs are assigned to the same
group, there should be at least one additional RTD of the same group picked up to issue a trip command.
The “RTD Inp H1” through “RTD Inp W8” values indicate that element is allowed to issue a trip if the corresponding
peer RTD is also picked up.
• RTD INPUT H1 OPEN: This setting allows monitoring an open RTD sensor circuit. If this functionality is not required,
then a value of “None” will disable monitoring and assertion of output operands.
If set to “Alarm”, the monitor will set an alarm when a broken sensor is detected.
If set to “Block”, the monitor will set an alarm and simultaneously block RTD operation when a broken sensor is
detected.
If targets are enabled, a message will appear on the display identifying the broken RTD. If this feature is used, it is rec-
ommended that the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may
be taken.
• RTD INPUT H1 BLOCK: This setting is used to block RTD operation.
SETTINGS
RTD INPUT H1 FUNCTION
= Enabled
RTD INPUT H1 BLOCK AND To other RTDs for voting
5
Off = 0
SETTINGS
RTD INPUT H1 TRIP
SETTINGS PKP DELAY SETTINGS
SETTINGS RTD INPUT H1 TRIP RTD INPUT H1 TRIP RTD INPUT H1
RTD INPUT H1 ID TEMPERATURE RST DELAY APPLICATION
= RTD Inp H1 RTD INPUT H1 ALARM RTD INPUT H1 ALARM RTD INPUT H1 TRIP
TEMPERATURE PKP DELAY VOTING
RTD INPUT H1 TYPE
RUN TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Resistance to Voting logic RTD Ip TRIP OP
temperature > TRIP PICKUP TDPO
temperature conversion
RUN TPKP
AND temperature > ALARM PICKUP From other RTDs for voting FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
0
RTD Ip ALARM OP
SETTING
RTD Ip TRIP PKP
RTD INPUT H1 OPEN
Block RTD Ip TRIP DPO
RUN
Alarm RTD Ip ALARM PKP
R ³ 250°C OR
None RTD Ip ALARM DPO
RUN RTD Ip OPEN
RTD Ip SHORTED
R £ –50°C
833019A2.CDR
Figure 5–127: RTD INPUT PROTECTION LOGIC
5.9.3 RRTD INPUTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RRTD INPUTS
 RRTD INPUTS  RRTD 1

See page 5-239.
 
 RRTD 2

↓
 RRTD 12

Menus are available to configure each of the remote RTDs.

It is recommended to use the M60 to configure the RRTD parameters. If the RRTDPC software is used to change the
RRTD settings directly (the application and type settings), then one of the following two operations is required for changes
to be reflected in the M60.
• Cycle power to M60.
• Break then re-establish the communication link between the RRTD unit and the M60. This will cause the RRTD COMM
FAIL operand to be asserted then de-asserted.
b) REMOTE RTDS 1 THROUGH 12

PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RRTD INPUTS  RRTD RTD 1(12)
 RRTD 1 RRTD 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
RRTD 1 ID: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
RRTD 1
RRTD 1 TYPE: Range: 100 Ω Nickel, 10 Ω Copper, 100 Ω Platinum,
MESSAGE 120 Ω Nickel
100 Ω Nickel
RRTD 1 Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Group 1,
MESSAGE Group 2
APPLICATION: Bearing
RRTD 1 ALARM Range: 1 to 200°C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TEMPERATURE: 130°C
RRTD 1 ALARM Range: 5 to 600 s in steps of 5
MESSAGE
PKP DELAY: 5 s
RRTD 1 TRIP Range: 1 to 200°C in steps of 1
5
MESSAGE
TEMPERATURE: 130°C
RRTD 1 TRIP Range: 5 to 600 s in steps of 5
MESSAGE
PKP DELAY: 5 s
RRTD 1 TRIP Range: 5 to 600 s in steps of 5
MESSAGE
RST DELAY: 5 s
RRTD 1 TRIP VOTING: Range: None, Group, Remote RTD 1, Remote RTD 2,...,
MESSAGE Remote RTD 12
None
RRTD 1 OPEN: Range: None, Alarm, Block
MESSAGE
None
RRTD 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
RRTD 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
RRTD 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The remote RTD inputs convert values of input resistance into temperature for further operations. These inputs are
intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
On power up, the M60 reads and saves all application and type settings from the RRTD. This synchronizes the RRTD and
M60. Any changes to RRTD settings (function, application, or type) from the M60 interface are immediately reflected in the
RRTD. The following rules are followed.
• If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is “Enabled”, then the RRTD 1 APPLICATION setting value will be written to RRTD device.
• If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is “Disabled”, then RRTD1 APPLICATION setting value is set as “None”.
• If the RRTD 1 APPLICATION or RRTD 1 TYPE settings are changes, then these settings are immediately written to the
RRTD device.

• If the RRTD 1 APPLICATION setting is “Group 1” or “Group 2”, then a value of “Other” is written to the RRTD device.
An RRTD actual value of –43°C implies that the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is “Enabled” but the corresponding RRTD 1 APPLI-
CATION setting is “None”.
If the RRTD communication link with the M60 is broken, then the last temperature actual values are retained until the RRTD
communication failure is detected. When this occurs, a RRTD COMM FAILURE self-test alarm and target message is gen-
erated, and an event is logged in the event recorder and the temperature actual values reset to 0. When the link is re-estab-
lished, the RRTD 1 APPLICATION and RRTD 1 TYPE settings are read from the RRTD to re-synchronize the device.
• RRTD 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the remote RTD. If set to “Disabled”, no actual value is created
for the remote RTD.
• RRTD 1 ID: This setting is used to assign alphanumeric ID is assigned to the remote RTD. This ID will be included in
the remote RTD actual values. It is also used to reference the remote RTD input to features using the remote RTD.
• RRTD 1 TYPE: This setting specifies the remote RTD type. Four different RTD types are available: 100 Ω Nickel, 10 Ω
Copper, 100 Ω Platinum, and 120 Ω Nickel.
The RRTD converts resistance to temperature as per the values in the following table. The M60 reads the RTD tem-
peratures from the RRTD once every five seconds and applies protection accordingly. The RRTDs can be used to pro-
vide RTD bias in the existing thermal model.
Table 5–26: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
°C °F 100 OHM PT 120 OHM NI 100 OHM NI 10 OHM CU
(DIN 43760)
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 79.13 7.49
5 –30 –22 88.22 99.41 84.15 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 89.23 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113 94.58 8.65
0 32 100 120 100 9.04
10 50 103.9 127.17 105.6 9.42
20 68 107.79 134.52 111.2 9.81
30 86 111.67 142.06 117.1 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 123 10.58
50 122 119.39 157.74 129.1 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.9 135.3 11.35
70 158 127.07 174.25 141.7 11.74
80 176 130.89 182.84 148.3 12.12
90 194 134.7 191.64 154.9 12.51
100 212 138.5 200.64 161.8 12.9
110 230 142.29 209.85 168.8 13.28
120 248 146.06 219.29 176 13.67
130 266 149.82 228.96 183.3 14.06
140 284 153.58 238.85 190.9 14.44
150 302 157.32 248.95 198.7 14.83
160 320 161.04 259.3 206.6 15.22
170 338 164.76 269.91 214.8 15.61
180 356 168.47 280.77 223.2 16
190 374 172.46 291.96 231.6 16.39
200 392 175.84 303.46 240 16.78
An RRTD open condition is detected when actual RRTD resistance is greater than 1000 ohms and RRTD open is dis-
played as “250°C” in the M60.

An RRTD short condition is detected when actual RRTD temperature is less than –40°C and RRTD short is displayed
as is “–50°C”. in the M60.
• RRTD 1 APPLICATION: This setting allows each remote RTD to be assigned to a group application. This is useful for
applications that require group measurement for voting. A value of “None” specifies that the remote RTD will operate
individually and not part of any RTD group. All remote RTDs programmed to “Stator” are used for RTD biasing of the
M60 thermal model. Common groups are provided for rotating machines applications such as ambient, bearing, group
1, or group 2. If the REMOTE RTD 1 TRIP VOTING setting value is “Group”, then it is allowed to issue a trip if N – 1 RTDs
from the same group also pick up, where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group.
• RRTD 1 ALARM TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the alarm stage. The range
of 1 to 200°C differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit.
• RRTD 1 ALARM PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the alarm stage until the output can be asserted.
The range of 5 to 600 seconds differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit.
• RRTD 1 TRIP TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the trip stage. The range of 1 to
200°C differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit.
• RRTD 1 TRIP PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the trip stage until the output can be asserted. The
range of 5 to 600 seconds differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit.
• RRTD 1 TRIP RST DELAY: This setting specifies the reset delay to seal-in the trip signal.
• RRTD 1 TRIP VOTING: This setting allows securing trip signal by voting with other RTDs. A value of “None” indicates
that element operates individually and no voting takes place.
A value of “Group” indicates that element is allowed to issue a trip if N – 1 of other RTDs of the same group pick up as
well (where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group). For example, if three RTDs are assigned to the same
group, there should be at least one additional RTD of the same group picked up to issue a trip command.
The “Remote RTD 1” through “Remote RTD 12” values indicate that element is allowed to issue a trip if the corre- 5
sponding peer RTD is also picked up.
• RRTD 1 OPEN: This setting allows monitoring an open remote RTD sensor circuit. If this functionality is not required,
then a value of “None” will disable monitoring and assertion of output operands.
If set to “Alarm”, the monitor will set an alarm when a broken sensor is detected.
If set to “Block”, the monitor will set an alarm and simultaneously block remote RTD operation when a broken sensor is
detected.
If targets are enabled, a message will appear on the display identifying the broken RTD. If this feature is used, it is rec-
ommended that the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may
be taken.
• RRTD 1 BLOCK: This setting is used to block remote RTD operation.

SETTINGS
Function
Enabled = 1
Block AND
Off = 0
SETTING To other remote RTDs

ID for voting
= RRTD 1
SETTINGS
SETTINGS Trip Pickup Delay SETTINGS
AND
Trip Temperature Trip Reset Delay Application
SETTING
Alarm Temperature Alarm Pickup Delay Trip Voting
Type
RUN TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Temperature read Voting logic REMOTE RTD 1 TRIP OP
temperature > Trip Pickup TDPO
from RRTD
RUN TPKP
temperature > Alarm Pickup From other remote FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
0 RTDs for voting
RRTD 1 ALARM OP
SETTING
RRTD 1 TRIP PKP
Open
Block RRTD 1 TRIP DPO
RUN
Alarm RRTD 1 ALARM PKP
R > 1000 ohms OR
None RRTD 1 ALARM DPO
RUN RRTD 1 OPEN
RRTD 1 SHORTED
T £ –40°C
833026A1.CDR
Figure 5–128: REMOTE RTD INPUT PROTECTION LOGIC
5.9.4 DCMA OUTPUTS
5 PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA OUTPUTS  DCMA OUTPUT H1(W8)
 DCMA OUTPUT H1 DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
 SOURCE: Off
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hard-
ware details are contained in chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or
CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an exam-
ple for channel M5 is shown).
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently re-
scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The follow-
ing equation is applied:
 I min if x < MIN VAL


I out =  I max if x > MAX VAL (EQ 5.51)

 k ( x – MIN VAL ) + I min otherwise

where: x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting

Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max – I min
k = ------------------------------------------------- (EQ 5.52)
MAX VAL – MIN VAL
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL – MIN
VAL< 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Imax
OUTPUT CURRENT
Imin
DRIVING SIGNAL
MIN VAL MAX VAL 842739A1.CDR
Figure 5–129: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC

The dcmA output settings are described below. 5
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set inde-
pendently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement™ base units.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement™ base units.
The DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (i.e. if
the DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
NOTE
Three application examples are described below.

EXAMPLE: POWER MONITORING
A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1
output of the range of –1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT
connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The
power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.
The nominal three-phase power is:
P = 3 × 13.8 kV × 0.8 kA × 0.9 = 17.21 MW (EQ 5.53)
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:

P max = 1.2 × 17.21 MW = 20.65 MW (EQ 5.54)

The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
P BASE = 115 V × 120 × 1.2 kA = 16.56 MW (EQ 5.55)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
– 20.65 MW 20.65 MW
minimum power = ------------------------------ = – 1.247 pu, maximum power = --------------------------- = 1.247 pu (EQ 5.56)
16.56 MW 16.56 MW
The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: “SRC 1 P”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: “–1 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: “–1.247 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: “1.247 pu”
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for
this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 1 – ( – 1 ) ) × 20.65 MW = ± 0.207 MW
• ±1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 × 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.
EXAMPLE: CURRENT MONITORING
The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allow-
ing for 50% overload.
5 The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:

I max = 1.5 × 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA (EQ 5.57)
The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
I BASE = 5 kA (EQ 5.58)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
0 kA 6.3 kA
minimum current = ------------ = 0 pu, maximum current = ----------------- = 1.26 pu (EQ 5.59)
5 kA 5 kA
DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: “SRC 1 Ia RMS”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: “4 to 20 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: “0.000 pu”
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 20 – 4 ) × 6.3 kA = ± 0.504 kA
• ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 × 4.2 kA, 0.001 × 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
EXAMPLE: VOLTAGE MONITORING
A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is
“Delta”. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
400 kV 400 kV
V min = 0.7 × ------------------- = 161.66 kV, V max = 1.1 × ------------------- = 254.03 kV (EQ 5.60)
3 3
The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:

V BASE = 0.0664 kV × 6024 = 400 kV (EQ 5.61)
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
161.66 kV 254.03 kV
minimum voltage = --------------------------- = 0.404 pu, maximum voltage = --------------------------- = 0.635 pu (EQ 5.62)
400 kV 400 kV
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: “SRC 2 V_1 mag”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: “0 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL: “0.404 pu”
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in “Delta” (refer to the Metering conventions section
in chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in
this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 .
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 1 – 0 ) × 254.03 kV = ± 1.27 kV
• ±0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is
0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.

5.10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS
5.10TESTING 5.10.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS  TESTING  TEST MODE
 SETTINGS TEST MODE Range: Disabled, Isolated, Forcible

 TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled
TEST MODE FORCING: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
On
The M60 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication channels and
the phasor measurement unit (where applicable), using simulated conditions. The test mode is indicated on the relay face-
plate by a Test Mode LED indicator.
The test mode may be in any of three states: disabled, isolated, or forcible.
In the “Disabled” mode, M60 operation is normal and all test features are disabled.
In the “Isolated” mode, the M60 is prevented from performing certain control actions, including tripping via contact outputs.
All relay contact outputs, including latching outputs, are disabled. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain
usable on applicable UR-series models.
In the “Forcible” mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting controls the relay inputs and outputs. If the
test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is “Off”, the M60 inputs and outputs
operate normally. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is “On”, the M60
contact inputs and outputs are forced to the values specified in the following sections. Forcing may be controlled by manu-
ally changing the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting between on and off, or by selecting a user-program-
mable pushbutton, contact input, or communication-based input operand. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit
5 tests remain usable on applicable UR-series models.

Communications based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode. If a control action is programmed
using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs, then the test procedure must take this into account.
NOTE
When in “Forcible” mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the M60 to
testing conditions. To force contact inputs and outputs through relay settings, set TEST MODE FORCING to “On”. To force con-
tact inputs and outputs through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic™ operand (pushbutton, digital input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FORCING to the desired operand. The contact input
or output is forced when the selected operand assumes a logic 1 state.
The M60 remains fully operational in test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and
control elements, FlexLogic™, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the test mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
contact inputs can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational, whereas the contact outputs can be
forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the test
mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the force contact inputs and force contact outputs test
functions described in the following sections.
The test mode state is indicated on the relay faceplate by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service LED
indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the following table.

5 SETTINGS 5.10 TESTING
Table 5–27: TEST MODE OPERATION

TEST MODE TEST MODE IN-SERVICE TEST MODE CRITICAL INPUT AND OUTPUT BEHAVIOR
FUNCTION FORCING LED LED FAIL
OPERAND RELAY
Disabled No effect Unaffected Off Unaffected Contact outputs and inputs are under normal
operation. Channel tests and PMU tests not
operational (where applicable).
Isolated No effect Off On De- Contact outputs are disabled and contact inputs
energized are operational. Channel tests and PMU tests
are also operational (where applicable).
Forcible On (logic 1) Off Flashing De- Contact inputs and outputs are controlled by the
energized force contact input and force contact output
functions. Channel tests and PMU tests are
Off (logic 0) Off Flashing De- Contact outputs and inputs are under normal
energized operation. Channel tests and PMU tests are also
The TEST MODE FUNCTION setting can only be changed by a direct user command. Following a restart, power up, settings
upload, or firmware upgrade, the test mode will remain at the last programmed value. This allows a M60 that has been
placed in isolated mode to remain isolated during testing and maintenance activities. On restart, the TEST MODE FORCING
setting and the force contact input and force contact output settings all revert to their default states.
5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT
 INPUTS
FORCE Cont Ip 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
5
FORCE Cont Ip 2 Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
MESSAGE
:Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Ip xx Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

MESSAGE
:Disabled
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode in the following ways:
• If set to “Disabled”, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
• If set to “Open”, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
• If set to “Closed”, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into test mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be on, indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as “Dis-
abled”, “Open”, or “Closed”. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.

5.10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS
5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Op 1 Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

 OUTPUTS :Disabled
FORCE Cont Op 2 Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
MESSAGE
:Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Op xx Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

MESSAGE
:Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode.
If set to “Disabled”, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is logic 0. If set to “Energized”, the output will close and remain closed for the entire dura-
tion of the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “De-ener-
gized”, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the status of the
operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “Freeze”, the output retains its position from before entering the
test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Sec-
ond, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating test mode through user-programmable pushbutton 1
5 For example, the test mode can be initiated from user-programmable pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
“Latched” (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, digital input 1
should remain operational, digital inputs 2 and 3 should open, and digital input 4 should close. Also, contact output 1 should
freeze, contact output 2 should open, contact output 3 should close, and contact output 4 should remain fully operational.
The required settings are shown below.
To enable user-programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS 
TESTING  TEST MODE menu: TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
Make the following changes to configure the contact inputs and outputs. In the SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS and FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: “Disabled”, FORCE Cont Ip 2: “Open”, FORCE Cont Ip 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: “Closed”
FORCE Cont Op 1: “Freeze”, FORCE Cont Op 2: “De-energized”, FORCE Cont Op 3: “Energized”,
and FORCE Cont Op 4: “Disabled”
Example 2: Initiating a test from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or through remote input 1
In this example, the test can be initiated locally from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or remotely through remote input 1.
Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as “Latched”. Write the following FlexLogic™ equation:
Set the user-programmable pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1  PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to “Latched”. To enable either pushbutton 1 or remote
input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS  TESTING  TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “VO1”

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
 ACTUAL VALUES  MOTOR

See page 6-3.
 STATUS 
 CONTACT INPUTS
See page 6-3.

 VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 6-4.

 REMOTE INPUTS
See page 6-4.

 REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 6-4.

 TELEPROTECTION
See page 6-5.
 INPUTS
 CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 6-5.

 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 6-6.

 REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-6.
 STATUS
 REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-7.
 STATISTICS
 DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 6-7.

 SELECTOR SWITCHES
See page 6-7.
6

 FLEX STATES
See page 6-8.

 ETHERNET
See page 6-8.

 DIRECT INPUTS
See page 6-8.

 DIRECT DEVICES
See page 6-9.
 STATUS
 IEC 61850
See page 6-9.
 GOOSE UINTEGERS
 EGD PROTOCOL
See page 6-9.
 STATUS
 TELEPROT CH TESTS
See page 6-10.

 ETHERNET SWITCH
See page 6-11.


6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES
 ACTUAL VALUES  STATOR

See page 6-15.
 METERING  DIFFERENTIAL
 MOTOR
See page 6-15.

 SOURCE SRC 1
See page 6-16.

 SOURCE SRC 2

 SOURCE SRC 3

 SOURCE SRC 4

 SENSITIVE
See page 6-19.
 DIRECTIONAL POWER
 BROKEN ROTOR BAR
See page 6-20.

 TRACKING FREQUENCY
See page 6-21.

 FLEXELEMENTS
See page 6-21.

 IEC 61850
See page 6-22.
 GOOSE ANALOGS
 TRANSDUCER I/O
6
See page 6-22.
 DCMA INPUTS
 TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-22.
 RTD INPUTS
 ACTUAL VALUES  USER-PROGRAMMABLE

See page 6-23.
 RECORDS  FAULT REPORTS
 STARTING RECORDS
See page 6-23.

 MOTOR LEARNED
See page 6-24.
 DATA
 EVENT RECORDS
See page 6-25.

 OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-26.

 DATA LOGGER
See page 6-26.

 ACTUAL VALUES  MODEL INFORMATION

See page 6-27.
 PRODUCT INFO 
 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-27.


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.1 MOTOR
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  MOTOR
 MOTOR MOTOR STATUS:

 Offline
MOTOR THERMAL
MESSAGE
CAPACITY USED: 0%
ESTIMATED TRIP TIME
MESSAGE
ON OVERLOAD: Never
THERMAL LOCKOUT
MESSAGE
TIME: 0 min
START/HOUR LOCKOUT
MESSAGE
TIME: 0 min
TIME-BTWN-STARTS LO
MESSAGE
TIME: 0 min
RESTART DELAY LO
MESSAGE
TIME: 0 s
TOTAL MOTOR LOCKOUT
MESSAGE
TIME: 0 min
The MOTOR STATUS value reflects operating state of the motor. The MOTOR THERMAL CAPACITY USED represents the thermal
model accumulated thermal capacity used as a percentage value. The ESTIMATED TRIP TIME ON OVERLOAD value repre-
sents the estimated time to trip (in seconds) from the thermal model assuming that the motor current remains at its current
level. It is obtained from the thermal model curve and takes into account that some percent of the thermal capacity has
6
already been used.
The THERMAL LOCKOUT TIME reflects the calculated time required for the thermal capacity used to decay from its current
value to the level when thermal start inhibit is removed and new motor start is permitted. The THERMAL LOCKOUT TIME value
is displayed only when motor is offline. For details of lockout time calculations see the Thermal Model section of Chapter 5.
The START/HOUR LOCKOUT TIME, TIME-BTWN-STARTS LO TIME, and RESTART DELAY LO TIME lockout time values are calcu-
lated from the Maximum Starting Rate, Time Between Starts, and Restart Delay elements, respectively. The TOTAL MOTOR
LOCKOUT TIME value is calculated as the maximum of all lockout times shown in this menu.
6.2.2 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS Cont Ip 1 Range: On, Off

 Off
Cont Ip 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Cont Ip xx Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 VIRTUAL INPUTS Virt Ip 1 Range: On, Off

 Off
Virt Ip 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Virt Ip 64 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the 64 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates
the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.4 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE INPUTS
 REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 Range: On, Off

 STATUS: Off
REMOTE INPUT 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
STATUS: Off
↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
STATUS: Off
6 The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be “Offline” in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
6.2.5 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE DPS INPUTS
 REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad
 STATUS: BAD
REMOTE DPS INPUT 2 Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad
MESSAGE
STATUS: BAD
↓
REMOTE DPS INPUT 5 Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad

MESSAGE
STATUS: BAD
The present state of the remote double-point status inputs is shown here. The actual values indicate if the remote double-
point status inputs are in the on (close), off (open), intermediate, or bad state.

6.2.6 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
 TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION Range: Off, On

 INPUTS INPUT 1-1: Off
TELEPROTECTION Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
INPUT 1-2: Off
↓

MESSAGE
INPUT 1-16: Off
MESSAGE
INPUT 2-1: Off
MESSAGE
INPUT 2-2: Off
↓

MESSAGE
INPUT 2-16: Off
The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed will
be that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed.
6.2.7 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT OUTPUTS
 CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op 1 Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
 Off
Cont Op 2 Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff 6
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Cont Op xx Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff

MESSAGE
Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff, On, IOn,
and VOn. For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.
NOTE

6.2.8 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS Virt Op 1 Range: On, Off

 Off
Virt Op 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Virt Op 96 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
Off
The present state of up to 96 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic™ equation for that output.
6.2.9 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
 REMOTE DEVICES ALL REMOTE DEVICES Range: Yes, No

 STATUS ONLINE: No
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
REMOTE DEVICE 2 Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
6 MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indi-
cates whether or not all programmed remote devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one
required remote device is not online.

a) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS  REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1

 StNum: 0
REMOTE DEVICE 1
MESSAGE
SqNum: 0
Statistical data (two types) for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here.
The StNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at
least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented
whenever a GSSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4 294 967 295 is incremented.
6.2.10 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
 DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 ACCUM:

 Counter 1 0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1 MICROS:
MESSAGE
0
The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter
name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date and
time stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.11 SELECTOR SWITCHES

6
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  SELECTOR SWITCHES
 SELECTOR SWITCHES SELECTOR SWITCH 1 Range: Current Position / 7

 POSITION: 0/7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2 Range: Current Position / 7
MESSAGE
POSITION: 0/7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.

6.2.12 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  FLEX STATES
 FLEX STATES PARAM 1: Off Range: Off, On

 Off
PARAM 2: Off Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Off
↓
PARAM 256: Off Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
6.2.13 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  ETHERNET
 ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Fail, OK

 STATUS: OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Fail, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: OK
These values indicate the status of the primary and secondary Ethernet links.
6.2.14 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS
 DIRECT INPUTS
6
AVG MSG RETURN
 TIME CH1: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH1: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH1: 0
AVG MSG RETURN
MESSAGE
TIME CH2: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH2: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH2: 0
DIRECT INPUT 1:
MESSAGE
On
DIRECT INPUT 2:
MESSAGE
On
↓
DIRECT INPUT 32:

MESSAGE
On

The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output
ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last
ten messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate
on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or one or more relays. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL
COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT (32) values represent the state of each direct input.
6.2.15 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
 DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1 Range: Offline, Online

 STATUS STATUS: Offline
DIRECT DEVICE 2 Range: Offline, Online
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16 Range: Offline, Online

MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.
6.2.16 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
 IEC 61850 UINT INPUT 1

 GOOSE UINTEGERS 0
6
UINT INPUT 2
MESSAGE
0
↓
UINT INPUT 16
MESSAGE
0
The IEC 61850 GGIO5 integer input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO5 integer data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6.2.17 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS
a) FAST EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  FAST EXCHANGE 1
 FAST EXCHANGE 1 FAST EXCHANGE 1

 SIGNATURE: 0
FAST EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
DATA LENGTH: 0

These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the fast EGD exchange is displayed.
b) SLOW EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)
 SLOW EXCHANGE 1 SLOW EXCHANGE 1

 SIGNATURE: 0
SLOW EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the slow EGD exchanges are displayed.
6.2.18 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROT CH TESTS
 TELEPROT CH TESTS CHANNEL 1 Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

 STATUS: n/a
CHANNEL 1 LOST Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PACKETS: 1
CHANNEL 2 Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: n/a
CHANNEL 2 LOST Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PACKETS: 1
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: FAIL
6 The status information for two channels is shown here.

• CHANNEL 1 STATUS: This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is “OK”, teleprotection is
enabled and data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is “FAIL”, teleprotection enabled and data is
not being received from the remote terminal. If “n/a”, teleprotection is disabled.
• CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS: Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per
cycle. The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu.
• VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: This value displays the current state of the communications channel
identification check, and hence validity. If a remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the
“FAIL” message will be displayed. The “N/A” value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of “0”, the chan-
nel is failed, or if the teleprotection inputs/outputs are not enabled.

6.2.19 ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  ETHERNET SWITCH
 ETHERNET SWITCH SWITCH 1 PORT Range: FAIL, OK

 STATUS: OK
SWITCH 2 PORT Range: FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: OK
↓
SWITCH 6 PORT Range: FAIL, OK

MESSAGE
STATUS: OK
SWITCH MAC ADDRESS: Range: standard MAC address format
MESSAGE
00A0F40138FA
These actual values appear only if the M60 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T). The status informa-
tion for the Ethernet switch is shown in this menu.
• SWITCH 1 PORT STATUS to SWITCH 6 PORT STATUS: These values represents the receiver status of each port on
the Ethernet switch. If the value is “OK”, then data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is “FAIL”,
then data is not being received from the remote terminal or the port is not connected.
• SWITCH MAC ADDRESS: This value displays the MAC address assigned to the Ethernet switch module.

6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS

Generator
PARAMETERS AS SEEN
G BY THE UR RELAY
Voltage +Q
VCG
WATTS = Positive IC
PF = Lead PF = Lag
VARS = Positive
PF = Lag IA
VAG -P +P
Current
IB IA
PF = Lag PF = Lead
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
M LOAD
- 1
Inductive Resistive S=VI
Generator
VCG
+Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Positive
IA
VARS = Negative IC
PF = Lead VAG -P +P
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
IB
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
LOAD S=VI
6 Inductive
Resistive
Resistive
- 2
M LOAD
VCG +Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
IB
IA
WATTS = Negative
VAG
VARS = Negative -P +P
PF = Lag
IA
IC PF = Lag PF = Lead
Current
VBG
-Q
UR RELAY
G S=VI
- 3
Generator
Resistive
LOAD
VCG
+Q
Voltage IB
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Negative IA
VARS = Positive VAG -P +P
PF = Lead
IC
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
VBG -Q
UR RELAY
G 827239AC.CDR
- 4
S=VI
Generator
Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM  FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular AC signal source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any “Phase VT” bank is indicated in the source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any “Aux VT” bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include “Phase CT” bank and “Ground CT” bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o -315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o 0o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o -45o
-90o 827845A1.CDR
6
Figure 6–2: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage,
and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common refer-
ence as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
1 1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG ) V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3 3
The above equations apply to currents as well.

DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
V_0 = N/A V_0 = N/A

1 ∠– 30 ° 1 ∠30° 2
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3 3 3
1 ∠ 30° 1 ∠– 30 ° 2
2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 6–1: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VT RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
CONN.
VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2
13.9 76.2 79.7 84.9 138.3 85.4 WYE 13.9 76.2 79.7 19.5 56.5 23.3
∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–313° ∠–97° ∠–241° ∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–192° ∠–7° ∠–187°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 84.9 138.3 85.4 DELTA 84.9 138.3 85.4 N/A 56.5 23.3
can be determined) ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠–54° ∠–234°
* The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the M60 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM  FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES SYMMETRICAL

COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
6
reference
1
UR phase angle
A
reference
WYE VTs
C
B
0
2
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
A U
1
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
DELTA VTs le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 6–3: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

6.3.2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  STATOR DIFFERENTIAL  STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
 STATOR STATOR DIFF OPERATE

 DIFFERENTIAL Iad: 0.00 A
STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN
MESSAGE
Iar: 0.00 A
STATOR DIFF OPERATE
MESSAGE
Ibd: 0.00 A
MESSAGE
Iar: 0.00 A
STATOR DIFF OPERATE
MESSAGE
Icd: 0.00 A
MESSAGE
Icr: 0.00 A
The phasors of differential and restraint currents are displayed in primary amperes.
6.3.3 MOTOR
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  MOTOR
 MOTOR MOTOR LOAD:

 0.00 x FLA
CURRENT UNBALANCE:
MESSAGE
0 %
6
U/B BIASED MOTOR
MESSAGE
LOAD: 0.00 x FLA
There are three metered values available for the motor.

• MOTOR LOAD: This value represents the measured three phase average RMS current from the line source divided by
the Full Load Amps setting, in per unit.
• MOTOR UNBALANCE: This value is the amount of unbalance in the motor currents. A full explanation of the calcula-
tion of this value is presented for the Amp Unbalance element
• U/B BIASED MOTOR LOAD: Unbalance Bias Motor Load shows the equivalent motor heating current caused by the
unbalance k factor.

6.3.4 SOURCES
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC1
 SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE CURRENT

See page 6–16.
  SRC 1
 GROUND CURRENT
 SRC 1
 PHASE VOLTAGE
 SRC 1
 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
 SRC 1
 POWER
 SRC 1
 ENERGY
 SRC 1
 FREQUENCY
 SRC 1
This menu displays the metered values available for each source.
Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs assignments
for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage, energy, and power val-
ues will be unavailable.
b) PHASE CURRENT METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE CURRENT
6  PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

 SRC 1 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°

SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:

MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
The metered phase current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
c) GROUND CURRENT METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  GROUND CURRENT
 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ig:

 SRC 1 0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
The metered ground current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
d) PHASE VOLTAGE METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE VOLTAGE
 PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vag:

 SRC 1 0.00 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
6
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 RMS Vab:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 RMS Vca:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:

MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
The metered phase voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
e) AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vx:

 SRC 1 0.00 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
The metered auxiliary voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
f) POWER METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  POWER
 POWER SRC 1 REAL POWER

 SRC 1 3φ: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 W
6
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 var
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 VA

SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

MESSAGE
3φ: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φa: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φb: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φc: 1.000
The metered values for real, reactive, and apparent power, as well as power factor, are displayed in this menu. The "SRC
1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYS-
TEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
g) ENERGY METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  ENERGY
 ENERGY SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:

 SRC 1 0.000 Wh
SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 Wh
SRC 1 POS VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
The metered values for real and reactive energy are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever
name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing
CT or VT characteristics. 6
h) FREQUENCY METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  FREQUENCY
 FREQUENCY SRC 1 FREQUENCY:

 SRC 1 0.00 Hz
The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was pro-
grammed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
6.3.5 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1

 DIRECTIONAL POWER 3Φ: 0.000 W
DIRECTIONAL POWER 2
MESSAGE
3Φ: 0.000 W

The effective operating quantities of the sensitive directional power elements are displayed here. The display may be useful
to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA and CALIBRATION
settings.
6.3.6 BROKEN ROTOR BAR
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  BROKEN ROTOR BAR
 BROKEN ROTOR BAR COMPONENT LEVEL:

 -60.0 dB
COMPONENT FREQ.:
MESSAGE
61.85 Hz
MOTOR LOAD AT BRB
MESSAGE
CALC.: 0.81 x FLA
LOAD DEV.AT BRB
MESSAGE
CALC.: 0.01 x FLA
TIME OF BRB CALC.:
MESSAGE
2009/03/05 10:22:39
MAXIMUM COMPONENT
MESSAGE
LEVEL: -58.3 dB
MAXIMUM COMPONENT
MESSAGE
FREQ.: 62.05 Hz
MOTOR LOAD AT BRB
MESSAGE
MAX: 0.95 x FLA
LOAD DEV. AT BRB
MESSAGE
MAX: 0.02 x FLA
6 MESSAGE
TIME OF MAXIMUM BRB:
2009/03/04 11:32:18
The following metered values are available for the broken rotor bar detection feature.
• COMPONENT LEVEL: This value indicates the level of the broken rotor bar spectral component relative to the spec-
tral component of the system frequency.
• COMPONENT FREQ.: This value indicates the frequency of the broken rotor bar spectral component.
• MOTOR LOAD AT BRB CALC.: This value indicates the average motor load at the time of the broken rotor bar data
acquisition stage.
• LOAD DEV.AT BRB CALC.: This value indicates the motor load standard deviation at the time of the broken rotor bar
data acquisition stage.
• TIME OF BRB CALC.: This value indicates the time stamp of the broken rotor bar calculation.
• MAXIMUM COMPONENT LEVEL: This value indicates the learned maximum level of the broken rotor bar spectral
component since the last data clear.
• MAXIMUM COMPONENT FREQ.: This value indicates the frequency of the learned maximum broken rotor bar spec-
tral component.
• MOTOR LOAD AT BRB MAX: This value indicates the average motor load at the time when data for the maximum
broken rotor bar was acquired.
• LOAD DEV. AT BRB MAX: This value indicates the motor load standard deviation at the time when data for the maxi-
mum broken rotor bar was acquired.
• TIME OF MAXIMUM BRB: This value indicates the time stamp of the maximum broken rotor bar component level.

6.3.7 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRACKING FREQUENCY
 TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY:

 60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on the selection of the reference source with the
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting in the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM menu. Refer to the
Power System section of chapter 5 for additional details.
6.3.8 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
 FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1
 OpSig: 0.000
The operating signals for the FlexElements™ are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 6–2: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

(Amp Unbalance)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SENSITIVE DIR POWER PBASE = maximum value of 3 × VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs of the sources
(Sns Dir Power)
SOURCE CURRENT
configured for the sensitive power directional element(s).
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
6
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Biased Motor Load)

6.3.9 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
 IEC 61850 ANALOG INPUT 1

 GOOSE ANALOGS 0.000
ANALOG INPUT 2
MESSAGE
0.000
↓
ANALOG INPUT 32
MESSAGE
0.000
The IEC 61850 GGIO3 analog input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO3 analog data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6.3.10 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a) RTD AND DCMA INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT xx
 DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx

 0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
6 PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT xx
 RTD INPUT xx RTD INPUT xx

 -50 °C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and
the bottom line as the value.
b) RRTD INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O RRTD INPUTS  RRTD INPUT 1(12)
 RRTD INPUT 1 RRTD INPUT 1

 -50°C
Actual values for each RRTD input channel that is enabled are displayed this menu. The top line the programmed RRTD ID
and the bottom line displays the metered value.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4RECORDS 6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE NEWEST RECORD

 FAULT REPORT NUMBER: 0
LAST CLEARED DATE:
MESSAGE
2002/8/11 14:23:57
LAST REPORT DATE:
MESSAGE
2002/10/09 08:25:27
This menu displays the user-programmable fault report actual values. See the User-Programmable Fault Report section in
chapter 5 for additional information on this feature.
6.4.2 STARTING RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  STARTING RECORDS  MOTOR START 1(5)
NO STARTING RECORDS
TO REPORT
or
 MOTOR START 1 START 1 DATE: Range: Date in format YYYY/MM/DD

 2002/08/11
START 1 TIME: Range: Time in format HH:MM:SS.ssssss
MESSAGE
00:00:00.000000
START 1 ACCELERATION
MESSAGE
TIME: 4.57 s
START 1 EFFECTIVE
MESSAGE
CURRENT: 5.85 x FLA 6
START 1 PEAK
MESSAGE
CURRENT: 6.70 x FLA
Up to five motor starts are displayed. When the buffer is full, the newest record overwrites the oldest record.

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4.3 MOTOR LEARNED DATA
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  MOTOR LEARNED DATA
 MOTOR LEARNED NUMBER OF RECORDS: Range: 0 to 250

 DATA 0
LAST CLEARED DATE: Range: date and time in standard format
MESSAGE
2007/07/14 15:40:16
LAST ACCELER. TIME Range: value in seconds
MESSAGE
LEARNED: 0.00 s
LAST STARTING CURR. Range: value in multiples of full load current
MESSAGE
LEARNED: 0.00 x FLA
LAST STARTING CAPAC. Range: value in percentage
MESSAGE
LEARNED: 0%
LAST AVRG MOTOR LOAD Range: value in multiples of full load current
MESSAGE
LEARNED: 0.00 x FLA
LAST RUN t AFT. STRT Range: value in hours
MESSAGE
LEARNED: 00:00 hr
The NUMBER OF RECORDS value indicates how many records are available to the user through the EnerVista UR Setup soft-
ware or via HTTP with Internet Explorer. The LAST CLEARED DATE value indicates the last time that learned data records
were cleared.
The values for the last motor start-running-stop cycle are available in this menu. The LAST AVRG MOTOR LOAD LEARNED
value is computed during motor running conditions at intervals defined by the MOTOR LOAD AVERAGE CALC. PERIOD setting.
This value is updated whenever new values become available.
Up to 250 motor learned data records are stored and accessible via the EnerVista UR Setup software through the following
methods.
6 • Select the Actual Values > Records > Motor Learned Data menu item.
• Select the Maintenance > Retrieve File menu item and open the “MotorLD.htm” file.
• Select the Maintenance> Retrieve File menu item and open the “MotorLD.txt” file.
The following historical data is displayed in the motor learned data records.
• Report number.
• Report date.
• Learned acceleration time (in seconds).
• Learned starting current (in multiples of full load current).
• Learned starting capacity (in percent).
• Learned average motor load (in multiples of full load current).
• Learned run time after start (in hours).
The learned values for acceleration time and effective starting current are the maximum of the individual values acquired
for the last N successful starts, where N is defined by the NUMBER OF STARTS TO LEARN setting.
The learned value for the starting thermal capacity is calculated using the maximum of the last motor start measurements
and incorporates a security margin defined by the SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  MOTOR 
THERMAL MODEL  START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN setting. For example, if the thermal capacity used for the last five starts is
24, 23, 27, 26, and 21%, respectively, with the START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN = 25%, then the LEARNED STARTING CAPACITY is
27% × 1.25 = 33.75%.
Learned values associated with motor acceleration require the acceleration time function to be enabled. The
learned features are not be used until at least N + 1 successful motor starts have occurred.
NOTE

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
The starting capacity, starting current, and acceleration time values for the last start are displayed in ACTUAL VALUES  STA-
TUS  MOTOR menu. Clearing the motor data (refer to the Clear records section in chapter 7) resets these values to their
default.
Idle
Motor starting
(status)
Capture starting
thermal capacity
11 12 1
10 2
9
8 4
3
Acceleration time
7 6 5
No
I > 0 and
I < overload PKP
Yes Successful start
Motor running
(status)
Store last acceleration time

Capture acceleration n− N
time taccel = max t n
accel ,..., t accel Store learned acceleration time
Store last starting current

n n− N
Capture starting I ,..., I
effective current nSTRT Istart = start start Store learned starting current
−N
Capture thermal TC learned = max TC nlearned ,..., TC nlearned Store learned thermal capacity used
capacity used × Start TCU margin
11 12 1
10
9
8
2
4
3
1 minute Store last thermal capacity used
7 6 5
n n− N
Every 1 minute - sum Iload ,..., Iload
Iload = Store average load current every
6
capture load current tavg tavg interval and update display
Motor stopped
(status)
Capture run time

IRun=(In-1Run,...,In-NRun)/N Store average run time after start
after start
833724A1.CDR
Figure 6–4: MOTOR LEARNED DATA FUNCTIONALITY
6.4.4 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  EVENT RECORDS
 EVENT RECORDS EVENT: XXXX

 RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
↓
EVENT: 3 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER ON DATE: 2000/07/14
EVENT: 2 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER OFF TIME: 14:53:00.03405
EVENT: 1
MESSAGE Date and Time Stamps
EVENTS CLEARED

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order
from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is
added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the
event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6.4.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY FORCE TRIGGER? Range: No, Yes

 No
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
MESSAGE
0
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
MESSAGE
0
CYCLES PER RECORD:
MESSAGE
0
LAST CLEARED DATE:
MESSAGE
2000/07/14 15:40:16
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
CYCLES PER RECORD value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillog-
raphy section of chapter 5 for additional details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting “Yes” to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS 
CLEAR RECORDS menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.
6.4.6 DATA LOGGER
6 PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  DATA LOGGER
 DATA LOGGER OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:

 2000/01/14 13:45:51
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:
MESSAGE
2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log
gets full, at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the
most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then
both values are static.
Refer to the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION
 MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE LINE 1: Range: standard GE order code format;
 M60-A00-HCH-F8A-H6A example order code shown
ORDER CODE LINE 2: Range: standard GE order code format

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE
SERIAL NUMBER: Range: standard GE serial number format

MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format

MESSAGE
000000000000
MANUFACTURING DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
0
OPERATING TIME: Range: operating time in HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
0:00:00
CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
ACTIVE: No
LAST SETTING CHANGE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
1970/01/01 23:11:19
The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS 6

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  FIRMWARE REVISIONS
 FIRMWARE REVISIONS M60 Motor Relay Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 5.8x Revision number of the application firmware.
MODIFICATION FILE Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)

MESSAGE Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
NUMBER: 0
BOOT PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35
MESSAGE Revision number of the boot program firmware.
REVISION: 3.01
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35
MESSAGE Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
REVISION: 0.08
COMPILE DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.
MESSAGE Date and time when product firmware was built.
2004/09/15 04:55:16
BOOT DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.
MESSAGE Date and time when the boot program was built.
2004/09/15 16:41:32
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS

 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 VIRTUAL INPUTS
 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 CLEAR RECORDS
 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 SET DATE AND TIME
 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 RELAY MAINTENANCE
The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash mes-
sage appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
PATH: COMMANDS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 COMMANDS Virt Ip 1 Range: Off, On

 VIRTUAL INPUTS Off
Virt Ip 2 Range: Off, On
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 64
Off
Range: Off, On
7
The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).

7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS
 COMMANDS CLEAR USER FAULT Range: No, Yes

 CLEAR RECORDS REPORTS? No
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR ENERGY? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED Range: No, Yes
ACCESS? No
CLEAR MOTOR START Range: No, Yes
DATA? No
CLEAR BROKEN ROTOR Range: No, Yes
BAR DATA? No
CLEAR DIRECT I/O Range: No, Yes. Valid only for units with Direct Input/
COUNTERS? No Output module.
CLEAR TELEPROTECT Range: No, Yes

COUNTERS? No
CLEAR ALL RELAY Range: No, Yes
RECORDS? No
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a com-
mand setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to “No”.
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
7 PATH: COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME
 COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME: (YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

 SET DATE AND TIME 2000/01/14 13:47:03
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time
setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this com-
mand. The new time will take effect at the moment the ENTER key is clicked.

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE
 COMMANDS PERFORM LAMP TEST? Range: No, Yes

 RELAY MAINTENANCE No
UPDATE ORDER CODE? Range: No, Yes
No
SERVICE COMMAND: Range: 0, 101
0
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are activated
by changing a command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting will then automatically revert
to “No”. The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key.
The PERFORM LAMP TEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.
The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific M60 service actions. Presently, there is only one service action avail-
able. Code “101” is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code other than “101”
is entered, the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken. Various self-checking diagnostics are performed in
the background while the M60 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile memory from time to time
based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the M60 is shipped from the factory,
the user may want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain circumstances. For example, it may be
desirable to clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic information is cleared, all self-
checking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch.

7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.2TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
DIGITAL ELEMENT 48: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
MESSAGE
↓
↓
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read NO
ACTIVE TARGETS:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES
When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that mes-
sage. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the tar-
get message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a tar-
get message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

PRIORITY ACTIVE STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.
7
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
a) DESCRIPTION
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
• The critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized.
• All other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation.
• The faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off.
• A RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded.

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS
b) MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

The major self-test errors are listed and described below.
MODULE FAILURE___:
Contact Factory (xxx)
• Latched target message: Yes.

• Description of problem: Module hardware failure detected.
• How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
• What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The “xxx” text identifies the failed mod-
ule (for example, F8L).
INCOMPATIBLE H/W:
Contact Factory (xxx)
• Description of problem: One or more installed hardware modules is not compatible with the M60 order code.
• How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
• What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The “xxx” text identifies the failed mod-
ule (for example, F8L).
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH:
with 2nd line detail
• Latched target message: No.
• Description of problem: The configuration of modules does not match the order code stored in the M60.
• How often the test is performed: On power up. Afterwards, the backplane is checked for missing cards every five sec-
onds.
• What to do: Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power. If
the problem persists, contact the factory.
FLEXLOGIC ERROR:
with 2nd line detail 7
• Description of problem: A FlexLogic™ equation is incorrect.
• How often the test is performed: The test is event driven, performed whenever FlexLogic™ equations are modified.
• What to do: Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED:

Check Settings
• Description of problem: The PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS setting indicates the M60 is not pro-
grammed.
• How often the test is performed: On power up and whenever the PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS
setting is altered.
• What to do: Program all settings and then set PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS to “Programmed”.

c) MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-programmable self-tests section in chap-
ter 5 for additional details.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Replace Battery

• Description of problem: The battery is not functioning.
• How often the test is performed: The battery is monitored every five seconds. The error message is displayed after 60
seconds if the problem persists.
• What to do: Replace the battery located in the power supply module (1H, 1L, RH, RL, SH, or SL).
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Direct I/O Ring Break

• Description of problem: Direct input and output settings are configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring.
• How often the test is performed: Every second.
• What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
ENET MODULE OFFLINE

• Description of problem: The M60 has failed to detect the Ethernet switch.
• How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds. An error is issued after five consecutive failures.
• What to do: Check the M60 device and switch IP configuration settings. Check for incorrect UR port (port 7) settings on
the Ethernet switch. Check the power to the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
ENET PORT # OFFLINE
7 • Latched target message: No.
• Description of problem: The Ethernet connection has failed for the specified port.
• How often the test is performed: Every five seconds.
• What to do: Check the Ethernet port connection on the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
**Bad IRIG-B Signal**
• Description of problem: A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected.
• How often the test is performed: Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal is received.
• What to do: Ensure the following:
– The IRIG-B cable is properly connected.
– Proper cable functionality (that is, check for physical damage or perform a continuity test).
– The IRIG-B receiver is functioning.
– Check the input signal level (it may be less than specification).

If none of these apply, then contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Port ## Failure

• Description of problem: An Ethernet connection has failed.
• How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds.
• What to do: Check Ethernet connections. Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
SNTP Failure

• Description of problem: The SNTP server is not responding.
• How often the test is performed: Every 10 to 60 seconds.
• What to do: Check SNTP configuration and network connections.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
4L Discrepancy

• Description of problem: A discrepancy has been detected between the actual and desired state of a latching contact
output of an installed type “4L” module.
• How often the test is performed: Upon initiation of a contact output state change.
• What to do: Verify the state of the output contact and contact the factory if the problem persists.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
GGIO Ind xxx oscill
• Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is oscillating.
• How often the test is performed: Upon scanning of each configurable GOOSE data set. 7
• What to do: The “xxx” text denotes the data item that has been detected as oscillating. Evaluate all logic pertaining to
this item.
DIRECT I/O FAILURE:

COMM Path Incomplete
• Description of problem: A direct device is configured but not connected.
• How often the test is performed: Every second.
• What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
REMOTE DEVICE FAIL:

COMM Path Incomplete
• Description of problem: One or more GOOSE devices are not responding.

• How often the test is performed: Event driven. The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. This can be from 1 to 60 seconds, depending on GOOSE packets.
• What to do: Check GOOSE setup.
TEMP MONITOR:
OVER TEMPERATURE
• Description of problem: The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (+80°C).
• How often the test is performed: Every hour.
• What to do: Remove the M60 from service and install in a location that meets operating temperature standards.
UNEXPECTED RESTART:
Press “RESET” key
• Description of problem: Abnormal restart from modules being removed or inserted while the M60 is powered-up, when
there is an abnormal DC supply, or as a result of internal relay failure.
• How often the test is performed: Event driven.
• What to do: Contact the factory.
HARDFIBER SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

In addition to those provided by the standard UR-series devices, the UR devices implement HardFiber self-tests. These are
listed below. Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also results in a self-test
message, so troubleshooting is described here. For other relays, such at the B95Plus, see that product’s instruction manual.
Equipment Mismatch Major Self-Test
Description: The number or type of installed hardware modules does not match the order code stored in the CPU. The stan-
dard UR-series Equipment Mismatch self-test is extended to cover the possible presence of a Process Card.
Severity: Protection is not available and all contact outputs and shared outputs are de-asserted.
If this message appears, check all modules against the order code. Ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle the control
power. If a module has intentionally been added or removed use the Update Order Code command to notify the relay that
7 the current module configuration is correct.
Module Failure Major Self-Test
Description: UR-series device module hardware failure detected.
If this message appears, contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. Text in the message identifies
the failed module (for example, H81). If operated on a Process Card failure, the Module Fail self-test seals-in (latches) till
the UR-series device is restarted.
Process Bus Failure Major Self-test
Description: Mission critical data is not available via the process bus. An AC quantity is considered critical if both AC bank
origins and the crosschecking settings are other than none. This self-test is also initiated by an AC input discrepancy being
detected. See the description of the crosschecking setting in this manual for further information. In addition, this self-test
can be initiated by user logic responding to loss of critical contact input/output or other data using the Process Bus Failure
Operand user-programmable self-test setting. This setting is located in the Settings > Product Setup > User-Program-
mable Self Test menu.
If this message appears, first rectify any Process Bus Trouble and Brick Trouble self-test errors. Check the actual value of
the operand referenced by the Process Bus Failure Operand setting, and if “On”, determine the cause and rectify.

Should the problem persist with the foregoing all clear, the cause must be an AC input discrepancy, which is typically the
result of problems in the input signals to the Bricks, or faults in the Brick input conditioning hardware. If the error was
annunciated the first time significant signal was encountered, suspect the former cause and check the copper connections
external to the Brick. Where multiple UR-series devices have self-test errors, look for common causes.
To further isolate AC input discrepancy errors, put the relay in test-isolated mode, then one by one, temporally change an
AC bank crosschecking setting to none, until the Process Bus Failure clears. Once the problem AC bank has been identi-
fied, the values from each of the two Bricks can be examined individually by temporarily mapping each to an AC bank with
a single origin.
Process Bus Trouble Minor Self-Test
Description: Communications problems with one or more Bricks. The text of the message identifies the affected field units.
This self-test is initiated by low received signal levels at either the Brick or Process Card end, and by the sustained failure
to receive poll responses from the proper Brick.
Severity: This self-test error does not directly inhibit protection. However, the affected Brick inputs/outputs may not be avail-
able to the UR-series device.
If this message appears, check the field unit actual values. An indication of equipment mismatch means that messages are
being received from a Brick, but there is a discrepancy between the settings and the actual Brick serial number, order code,
and/or core number. Check that the correct core on the correct Brick is patched through to the correct Process Card port,
and that the field unit settings are correct. An indication of communications loss means that no messages are being
received. Check that the patching is correct, and that the Brick has power. If that is not the problem, use a professional opti-
cal fiber connector cleaning kit to clean both sides of all optical fiber connections from the Process Card through to the
affected Brick. If the problem continues after cleaning, consult the factory.
Brick Trouble Minor Self-Test
Description: Brick internal self-testing has detected a trouble internal to the Brick.
Severity: This self-test error does not directly inhibit protection. However, some or all of the affected Brick inputs/outputs
may not be available to the UR-series device.
If this message appears, check the Brick environment for over/under temperatures and the voltage of its power source. If
the ambient temperature and supply voltage are within Brick specifications, consult the factory. Troubles resulting from a
Brick output failing to respond to an output command can only be detected while the command is active, and so in this case
the target is latched. A latched target can be unlatched by pressing the faceplate reset key if the command has ended,
however the output may still be non-functional.


8 SECURITY 8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY
8 SECURITY 8.1PASSWORD SECURITY 8.1.1 OVERVIEW
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level
is not available and intended for factory use only.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
• Changing the state of virtual inputs.
• Clearing the event records.
• Clearing the oscillography records.
• Changing the date and time.
• Clearing energy records.
• Clearing the data logger.
• Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision:
• Changing any setting.
• Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to “0” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is
set to “0”, the password security feature is disabled.
and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command ses-
sions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic™ operands.
• ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled.
• ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled.
• ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.
•
•
ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled.
ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled.
8
• ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled.
• ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled.
• ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic™ operands and events are updated
every five seconds.
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands
shown above.
NOTE

8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY 8 SECURITY
8.1.2 PASSWORD SECURITY MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

 Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS
 ACCESS
 SUPERVISION
 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS
PASSWORD ACCESS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
8.1.3 LOCAL PASSWORDS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes

CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED SETTING Range: 0 to 9999999999
ENCRYPTED COMMAND Range: 0 to 9999999999
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters.
When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel
interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according
8 to the access level timeout setting values.

If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and
settings.
NOTE

8.1.4 REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the
Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 8–1: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists
of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to “0”. The following procedure describes how the set the com-
mand or setting password.
1. Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field.
2. Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field.
3. Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.
4. If the original password is not “0”, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send
Password to Device button.
5. The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password 8
value.
8.1.5 ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION
 ACCESS  ACCESS LEVEL

 SUPERVISION  TIMEOUTS
INVALID ATTEMPTS Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
PASSWORD LOCKOUT Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DURATION: 5 min

8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY 8 SECURITY
The following access supervision settings are available.

• INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be
entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic™ operands are set to “On”. These operands are returned to the “Off” state upon
expiration of the lockout.
• PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the M60 will lockout password access after
the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The M60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic™ operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The
operand does not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed
with event logs or targets enabled.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION  ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
 ACCESS LEVEL COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

 TIMEOUTS TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note
that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
• COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
• SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
8.1.6 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
 DUAL PERMISSION LOCAL SETTING AUTH: Range: selected FlexLogic™ operands (see below)
 SECURITY ACCESS On
REMOTE SETTING AUTH: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
On
8 MESSAGE
ACCESS AUTH Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended
upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
• LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic™ operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.
If this setting is “On“, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing
the local setting password to gain setting access.

If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel.
• REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required). If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to pro-
viding the remote setting password to gain setting access.
• ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except “On”. The state of the FlexLogic™ oper-
and is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer pro-
grammed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™ operand is detected, the time-
out is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
required. If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is pro-
vided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic™ operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable
when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off”. The state of the
FlexLogic™ operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is per-
mitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer
expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic™
operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.

8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY 8 SECURITY
8.2SETTINGS SECURITY 8.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An exam-
ple of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example,
these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate
on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers install-
ing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings tem-
plates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The func-
tionality is identical for both purposes.
The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the M60 firmware are at ver-
sions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem-
plate for UR-series settings files.
1. Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2. Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing
mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1. Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2. Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be
at least four characters in length.
8 3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic™ equation editor settings are locked.
1. With the template already enabled, locate the device or settings file in the Online or Offline Window area in the soft-
ware.
2. Right-click the device or file and select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template
editing mode. If prompted, enter the template password then click OK.
3. Open the relevant settings window that contains settings to be specified as viewable.

8 SECURITY 8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window also indicates that the EnerVista software is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 8–2: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

4. Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them.
The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 8–3: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

5. Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
6. Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
The next time that the device/settings are accessed, only those specified as viewable/editable display in the menu
hierarchy. 8
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE
GE recommends that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
To add password protection to a settings file template:

1. In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Password Protect Template
option.

The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.

The settings file template is now secured with password protection.
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
• Display only those settings available for editing.
• Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing.
View In Template Mode option.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The
effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
8
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
842858A1.CDR
Figure 8–4: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND

Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied. Typical settings tree view with template applied via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 8–5: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template.
View All Settings option.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings
will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied. Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View All Settings command. 8
842859A1.CDR
Figure 8–6: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND
e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once a settings template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before use.
3. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and select the Template Mode > Remove Template
option.
4. Enter the template password and click OK to continue.

5. Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available.
8.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic™ equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of
critical FlexLogic™ applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within
FlexLogic™ equations.
Secured FlexLogic™ equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION ENTRIES

To lock individual entries of a FlexLogic™ equation:
1. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the set-
tings template feature.
2. If prompted, enter the template password.
3. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic™ entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on
the upper right of the window also indicates that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
4. Specify the entries to lock by clicking on them.
The locked entries display against a grey background as shown in the example.
Figure 8–7: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE

5. Click the Save button to save and apply changes to the settings template.
6. Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
7. Optionally apply a password to the template by right-clicking the device and selecting the Template Mode > Pass-
word Protect Template option.

Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic™ entries not locked by the tem-
plate. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic™ entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied. Typical FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via
842861A1.CDR
Figure 8–8: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES

The FlexLogic™ entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
8
Figure 8–9: SECURED FLEXLOGIC™ IN GRAPHICAL VIEW
b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER

A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number. Once FlexLogic entries in a
settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number. A serial number is
viewable under Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information, the inside front panel, and the rear of the device.

1. Right-click the setting file in the Offline Window area and select the Edit Settings File Properties option. The window
opens.
Figure 8–10: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

2. Enter the serial number of the M60 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
3. Click the OK button to apply the change. The serial number is not validated.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic™ equations are now locked to the M60 device specified by the serial
number.
8.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a M60 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a M60 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the M60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This infor-
mation can be compared with the M60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the M60
device or obtained from the M60 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
1 SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the settings file when settings files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the

SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE
2
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised. SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE. 842864A1.CDR
Figure 8–11: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
1. The transfer date of a setting file written to a M60 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or
the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2. Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes
have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an M60 device.
The M60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
842863A1.CDR
Figure 8–12: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data
in settings report
8
842862A1.CDR
Figure 8–13: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The M60 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the
example below.
Traceability data in online

device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 8–14: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature
• If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file.
• If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
• If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file.
• If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file.

8 SECURITY 8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8.3ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8.3.1 OVERVIEW
The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows a security adminis-
trator to easily manage the security privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of URPlus-series devices by
multiple personnel within a substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The
EnerVista security management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista soft-
ware after installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.
8.3.2 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The EnerVista security management system is disabled by default. This allows access to the device immediately after
installation. When security is disabled, all users are granted administrator access.
1. Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window.
2. Check the Enable Security box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.
Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. It will now be necessary to enter a username and password
upon starting the software.
8.3.3 ADDING A NEW USER
The following pre-requisites are required to add new users to the EnerVista security management system.
• The user adding the new user must have administrator rights.
• The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
8
The following procedure describes how to add new users.
2. Enter a username in the User field. The username must be between 4 and 20 characters in length.

8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8 SECURITY
3. Select the user access rights by checking one or more of the fields shown.
The access rights are described in the following table

Table 8–1: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.
Actual Values Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.
Settings Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.
Commands Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.
Event Recorder Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.
FlexLogic Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic™ values.
Update Info Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of
the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read
access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and
write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update
Info field is checked.
Admin When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore
receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
4. Click OK to add the new user to the security management system.
8.3.4 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES
The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system.
8 • The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights.
• The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
The following procedure describes how to modify user privileges.
2. Locate the username in the User field.

8 SECURITY 8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3. Modify the user access rights by checking or clearing one or more of the fields shown.
The access rights are described in the following table

Table 8–2: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window.
Actual Values Checking this box allows the user to read actual values.
Settings Checking this box allows the user to read setting values.
Commands Checking this box allows the user to execute commands.
Event Recorder Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder.
FlexLogic Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic™ values.
Update Info Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of
the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read
access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and
write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update
Info field is checked.
Admin When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore
receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
4. Click OK to save the changes to user to the security management system.

8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8 SECURITY

9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1 SATURATION DETECTOR
9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1SATURATION DETECTOR 9.1.1 CT SATURATION DETECTION
The saturation detector of the M60 takes advantage of the fact that any CT operates correctly for a short period of time
even under very large primary currents that would subsequently cause a very deep saturation. As a result of that, in the
case of an external fault, the differential current stays very low during the initial period of linear operation of the CTs while
the restraining signal develops rapidly. Once one or more CTs saturate, the differential current will increase. The restraining
signal, however, yields by at least a few milliseconds. During internal faults, both the differential and restraining currents
develop simultaneously. This creates characteristic patterns for the differential - restraining trajectory as depicted below.
N
differential
TTER
RN
TTE
A
ULT P
OPERATE
A
LT P
FA
FAU
RNAL
BLOCK
AL
ERN
INTE
EXT
ERN
EXTERNAL FAULT PATT
restraining
836728A1.CDR
Figure 9–1: CT SATURATION DETECTION: INTERNAL & EXTERNAL FAULT PATTERNS

The CT saturation condition is declared by the saturation detector when the magnitude of the restraining signal becomes
larger than the higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) and at the same time the differential current is below the first slope (LOW
SLOPE). The said condition is of a transient nature and requires a seal-in. A special logic in the form of a “state machine” is
used for this purpose as depicted in the following figure.
As the phasor estimator introduces a delay into the measurement process, the aforementioned saturation test would fail to
detect CT saturation occurring very fast. In order to cope with very fast CT saturation, another condition is checked that
uses relations between the signals at the waveform level. The basic principle is similar to that described above. Addition-
ally, the sample-based stage of the saturation detector uses the time derivative of the restraining signal (di/dt) to better
trace the saturation pattern shown in the following figure.
The saturation detector is capable of detecting saturation occurring in approximately 3 ms from fault inception. It is worth
emphasizing that the saturation detector, although having no dedicated settings, uses the main differential characteristic for
proper operation. This must be kept in mind when setting the characteristic as its parameters must retain their original
meaning.
The operation of the saturation detector is available as the FlexLogic™ operand STATOR DIFF SAT A/B/C.

9.1 SATURATION DETECTOR 9 THEORY OF OPERATION
NORMAL
SAT := 0
The differential
current below the saturation
first slope for a condition
certain period of
time
EXTERNAL
FAULT
SAT := 1
The differential-
The differential restraining trajectory
characteristic out of the differential
entered characteristic for a
certain period of time
EXTERNAL
FAULT and CT
SATURATION
SAT := 1
836729A1.CDR
Figure 9–2: SATURATION DETECTOR STATE MACHINE

10 COMMISSIONING 10.1 TESTING
10 COMMISSIONING 10.1TESTING 10.1.1 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENTS
Underfreqency and overfrequency protection requires techniques with subtle testing implications. Whereas most protection
is designed to detect changes from normal to fault conditions that occur virtually instantaneously, power system inertia
requires frequency protection to pickup while the frequency is changing slowly. Frequency measurement is inherently sen-
sitive to noise, making high precision in combination with high speed challenging for both relays and test equipment.
Injection to a particular M60 frequency element must be to its configured source and to the channels the source uses for
frequency measurement. For frequency measurement, a source will use the first quantity configured in the following order:
1. Phase voltages.
2. Auxiliary voltage.
3. Phase currents.
4. Ground current.
For example, if only auxiliary voltage and phase currents are configured, the source will use the auxiliary voltage, not the
phase voltages or any of the currents.
When phase voltages or phase currents are used, the source applies a filter that rejects the zero-sequence component. As
such, the same signal must not be injected to all three phases, or the injected signal will be completely filtered out. For an
underfrequency element using phase quantities, the phase A signal must be above the MIN VOLT/AMP setting value. There-
fore, either inject into phase A only, or inject a balanced three-phase signal.
Frequency
Injection frequency
Source frequency
Tracking frequency
Pickup
frequency
Relay conditioning time
Source frequency calculation delay
Time
Underfrequency element detection time
Underfrequency element pickup

set “pickup delay”
Underfrequency element operate

831771A1.CDR
Figure 10–1: TYPICAL UNDERFREQUENCY ELEMENT TEST TIMING

The static accuracy of the frequency threshold may be determined by slowly adjusting the frequency of the injected signal
about the set pickup. If the M60 frequency metering feature is used to determine the injected frequency, the metering accu-
racy should be verified by checking it against a known standard (for example, the power system).
To accurately measure the time delay of a frequency element, a test emulating realistic power system dynamics is required.
The injected frequency should smoothly ramp through the set threshold, with the ramp starting frequency sufficiently out-
side the threshold so the relay becomes conditioned to the trend before operation. For typical interconnected power sys-
tems, the recommended testing ramp rate is 0.20 Hz/s.
10

10.1 TESTING 10 COMMISSIONING
The desired delay time is the interval from the point the frequency crosses the set threshold to the point the element oper-
ates. Some test sets can measure only the time from the ramp start to element operation, necessitating the subtraction of
the pre-threshold ramp time from the reading. For example, with a ramp rate of 0.20 Hz/s, start the ramp 0.20 Hz before the
threshold and subtract 1 second from test set time reading of ramp start to relay operation.
Note that the M60 event records only show the “pickup delay” component, a definite time timer. This is exclusive of the time
taken by the frequency responding component to pickup.
The M60 oscillography can be used to measure the time between the calculated source frequency crossing the threshold
and element operation; however, this method omits the delay in the calculated source frequency. The security features of
the source frequency measurement algorithm result in the calculated frequency being delayed by 2 to 4 cycles (or longer
with noise on the input). In addition, oscillography resolution is 0.004 Hz, which at 0.20 Hz/s corresponds to a delay of
20 ms. The tracking frequency should not be used in timing measurements, as its algorithm involves phase locking, which
purposely sets its frequency high or low to allow the M60 sample clock to catch-up or wait as necessary to reach synchro-
nism with the power system.
10

APPENDIX A A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
AppendicesAPPENDIX A FlexAnalog and FlexInteger ParametersA.1Parameter Lists A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS
A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 10)
ADDRESS FLEXANALOG NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION
5728 Stator Diff Iad Amps Stator differential phase A current (Iad)
5730 Stator Rest Iar Amps Stator restraint phase A current (Iar)
5732 Stator Diff Ibd Amps Stator differential phase B current (Ibd)
5734 Stator Rest Ibr Amps Stator restraint phase B current (Ibr)
5736 Stator Diff Icd Amps Stator differential phase C current (Icd)
5738 Stator Rest Icr Amps Stator restraint phase C current (Icr)
5760 Sns Dir Power 1 Watts Sensitive directional power 1 actual value
5762 Sns Dir Power 2 Watts Sensitive directional power 2 actual value
6144 SRC 1 Ia RMS Amps Source 1 phase A current RMS
6146 SRC 1 Ib RMS Amps Source 1 phase B current RMS
6148 SRC 1 Ic RMS Amps Source 1 phase C current RMS
6150 SRC 1 In RMS Amps Source 1 neutral current RMS
6152 SRC 1 Ia Mag Amps Source 1 phase A current magnitude
6154 SRC 1 Ia Angle Degrees Source 1 phase A current angle
6155 SRC 1 Ib Mag Amps Source 1 phase B current magnitude
6157 SRC 1 Ib Angle Degrees Source 1 phase B current angle
6158 SRC 1 Ic Mag Amps Source 1 phase C current magnitude
6160 SRC 1 Ic Angle Degrees Source 1 phase C current angle
6161 SRC 1 In Mag Amps Source 1 neutral current magnitude
6163 SRC 1 In Angle Degrees Source 1 neutral current angle
6164 SRC 1 Ig RMS Amps Source 1 ground current RMS
6166 SRC 1 Ig Mag Degrees Source 1 ground current magnitude
6168 SRC 1 Ig Angle Amps Source 1 ground current angle
6169 SRC 1 I_0 Mag Degrees Source 1 zero-sequence current magnitude
6171 SRC 1 I_0 Angle Amps Source 1 zero-sequence current angle
6172 SRC 1 I_1 Mag Degrees Source 1 positive-sequence current magnitude
6174 SRC 1 I_1 Angle Amps Source 1 positive-sequence current angle
6175 SRC 1 I_2 Mag Degrees Source 1 negative-sequence current magnitude
6177 SRC 1 I_2 Angle Amps Source 1 negative-sequence current angle
6178 SRC 1 Igd Mag Degrees Source 1 differential ground current magnitude
6180 SRC 1 Igd Angle Amps Source 1 differential ground current angle
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System A-1

A.1 PARAMETER LISTS APPENDIX A
A ADDRESS
6232
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 2 Ig Angle
UNITS
Amps
DESCRIPTION
Source 2 ground current angle
A-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin


ADDRESS FLEXANALOG NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION A
6656 SRC 1 Vag RMS Volts Source 1 phase AG voltage RMS
6658 SRC 1 Vbg RMS Volts Source 1 phase BG voltage RMS
6660 SRC 1 Vcg RMS Volts Source 1 phase CG voltage RMS
6662 SRC 1 Vag Mag Volts Source 1 phase AG voltage magnitude
6664 SRC 1 Vag Angle Degrees Source 1 phase AG voltage angle
6665 SRC 1 Vbg Mag Volts Source 1 phase BG voltage magnitude
6667 SRC 1 Vbg Angle Degrees Source 1 phase BG voltage angle
6668 SRC 1 Vcg Mag Volts Source 1 phase CG voltage magnitude
6670 SRC 1 Vcg Angle Degrees Source 1 phase CG voltage angle
6671 SRC 1 Vab RMS Volts Source 1 phase AB voltage RMS
6673 SRC 1 Vbc RMS Volts Source 1 phase BC voltage RMS
6675 SRC 1 Vca RMS Volts Source 1 phase CA voltage RMS
6677 SRC 1 Vab Mag Volts Source 1 phase AB voltage magnitude
6679 SRC 1 Vab Angle Degrees Source 1 phase AB voltage angle
6680 SRC 1 Vbc Mag Volts Source 1 phase BC voltage magnitude
6682 SRC 1 Vbc Angle Degrees Source 1 phase BC voltage angle
6683 SRC 1 Vca Mag Volts Source 1 phase CA voltage magnitude
6685 SRC 1 Vca Angle Degrees Source 1 phase CA voltage angle
6686 SRC 1 Vx RMS Volts Source 1 auxiliary voltage RMS
6688 SRC 1 Vx Mag Volts Source 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude
6690 SRC 1 Vx Angle Degrees Source 1 auxiliary voltage angle
6691 SRC 1 V_0 Mag Volts Source 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude
6693 SRC 1 V_0 Angle Degrees Source 1 zero-sequence voltage angle
6694 SRC 1 V_1 Mag Volts Source 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude
6696 SRC 1 V_1 Angle Degrees Source 1 positive-sequence voltage angle
6697 SRC 1 V_2 Mag Volts Source 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude
6699 SRC 1 V_2 Angle Degrees Source 1 negative-sequence voltage angle

A ADDRESS
6741
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 2 Vab Mag
UNITS
Volts
DESCRIPTION
Source 2 phase AB voltage magnitude


7168 SRC 1 P Watts Source 1 three-phase real power
7170 SRC 1 Pa Watts Source 1 phase A real power
7172 SRC 1 Pb Watts Source 1 phase B real power
7174 SRC 1 Pc Watts Source 1 phase C real power
7176 SRC 1 Q Vars Source 1 three-phase reactive power
7178 SRC 1 Qa Vars Source 1 phase A reactive power
7180 SRC 1 Qb Vars Source 1 phase B reactive power
7182 SRC 1 Qc Vars Source 1 phase C reactive power
7184 SRC 1 S VA Source 1 three-phase apparent power
7186 SRC 1 Sa VA Source 1 phase A apparent power
7188 SRC 1 Sb VA Source 1 phase B apparent power
7190 SRC 1 Sc VA Source 1 phase C apparent power
7192 SRC 1 PF --- Source 1 three-phase power factor
7193 SRC 1 Phase A PF --- Source 1 phase A power factor
7194 SRC 1 Phase B PF --- Source 1 phase B power factor
7195 SRC 1 Phase C PF --- Source 1 phase C power factor

A ADDRESS
7218
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 2 Sa
UNITS
VA
DESCRIPTION
Source 2 phase A apparent power
7552 SRC 1 Frequency Hz Source 1 frequency
13504 DCMA Inputs 1 Value mA dcmA input 1 actual value


13552 RTD Inputs 1 Value --- RTD input 1 actual value

A ADDRESS
13579
FLEXANALOG NAME
RTD Inputs 28 Value
UNITS
---
DESCRIPTION
RTD input 28 actual value
24448 Communications Group --- Groups communications group
24459 Active Setting Group --- Current setting group
26177 Therm Mdl Cap Used --- Thermal model capacity used
26179 Therm Mdl Trip Time seconds Thermal model trip time on overload
26180 Therm Mdl LkOut Time seconds Thermal model lockout time
26184 Therm Mdl Load ohms Thermal model load
26186 Therm Mdl Curr Unbal --- Thermal model motor unbalance
26187 Therm Mdl Bias Load ohms Thermal model biased motor load
26188 Starts/hr Lockout seconds Starts per hour lockout time
26189 Btwn Starts Lockout seconds Time between starts lockout time
26190 Restrt Delay Lockout seconds Restart delay lockout time
26191 Total Motor Lockout seconds Total motor lockout time
32768 Tracking Frequency Hz Tracking frequency
34752 RRTD RTD 1 Value °C Remote RTD input 1 actual value
39425 FlexElement 1 Value --- FlexElement™ 1 actual value


40992 Brb Component Level dB Broken rotor bar detection component level
40993 Brb Component Freq. Hz Broken rotor bar detection component frequency
40994 Load At Brb Calc × FLA Motor load at broken rotor bar calculation
40995 Load Dev At Brb Calc × FLA Motor load deviation at broken rotor bar calculation
40998 Max Brb Comp. Level dB Maximum broken rotor bar detection component level
40999 Max Brb Comp. Freq. Hz Maximum broken rotor bar detection component frequency
40100 Load At Brb Max × FLA Motor load at maximum broken rotor bar calculation
40101 Load Dev At Brb Max × FLA Motor load deviation at maximum broken rotor bar calculation
41728 Amp Unbalance --- Current unbalance actual value
45584 GOOSE Analog In 1 --- IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1

A ADDRESS
45630
FLEXANALOG NAME
GOOSE Analog In 24
UNITS
---
DESCRIPTION
IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 24

A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS
A
Table A–2: FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS
ADDRESS FLEXINTEGER NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION
9968 GOOSE UInt Input 1 --- IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1


APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR-series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Mod-
bus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master com-
munication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
• The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to B
requests issued by a master computer.
• For Modbus®, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitor-
ing, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus® RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hard-
ware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear ter-
minal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10Base-T, or 10Base-F. Data flow is half-duplex
in all configurations. See chapter 3 for details on communications wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are avail-
able. Refer to the Communications section of chapter 5 for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay’s slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address – see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus® RTU protocol is used.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communica-
tions line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet format-
ting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
Table B–1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT

DESCRIPTION SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte
DATA N bytes
CRC 2 bytes
DEAD TIME 3.5 bytes transmission time
• SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated
with function code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System B-1

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL APPENDIX B
• FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to per-
form. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indi-
cated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section
for further details.
• DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, set-
tings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
• CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus® includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
B (CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device does not act upon or respond to the
packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the
CRC.
• DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one contin-
uous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16-bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no trans-
mission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most sig-
nificant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B–2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM

SYMBOLS: --> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
Alow low order byte of A
Ahigh high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j loop counters
(+) logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
N total number of data bytes
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
ALGORITHM: 1. FFFF (hex) --> A

2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5. j + 1 --> j
6. shr (A)
7. Is there a carry? No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8. Is j = 8? No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9. i + 1 --> i
10. Is i = N? No: go to 3; Yes: continue
11. A --> CRC
B-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus® officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION

HEX
03
DEC
3 Read holding registers Read actual values or settings
B
04 4 Read holding registers Read actual values or settings
05 5 Force single coil Execute operation
06 6 Preset single register Store single setting
10 16 Preset multiple registers Store multiple settings
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)
This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus memory map table for exact
details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h. The M60 interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting
three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the val-
ues 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B–3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE

MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11
FUNCTION CODE 04 FUNCTION CODE 04
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 BYTE COUNT 06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 50 DATA #1 - high 00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high 00 DATA #1 - low 28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low 03 DATA #2 - high 01
CRC - low A7 DATA #2 - low 2C
CRC - high 4A DATA #3 - high 00
DATA #3 - low 00
CRC - low 0D
CRC - high 60

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Sum-
mary of operation codes table below.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11h (17 decimal) to perform a reset. The high and low code value bytes always have the values “FF” and “00”
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code.
B
OPERATION CODE - high 00 OPERATION CODE - high 00
OPERATION CODE - low 01 OPERATION CODE - low 01
CODE VALUE - high FF CODE VALUE - high FF
CODE VALUE - low 00 CODE VALUE - low 00
CRC - low DF CRC - low DF
CRC - high 6A CRC - high 6A
Table B–5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION DEFINITION DESCRIPTION
CODE (HEX)
0000 NO OPERATION Does not do anything.
0001 RESET Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005 CLEAR EVENT RECORDS Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006 CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 103F VIRTUAL IN 1 to 64 ON/OFF Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 64 either “ON” or “OFF”.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device
11h (17 dec).

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51
DATA - high 00 DATA - high 00
DATA - low C8 DATA - low C8
CRC - low CE CRC - low CE
CRC - high DD CRC - high DD

APPENDIX B B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 123. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows
a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
slave device 11h (17 decimal).
B
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXMAPLE (HEX)
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02
BYTE COUNT 04 CRC - lo 07
DATA #1 - high order byte 00 CRC - hi 64
DATA #1 - low order byte C8
DATA #2 - high order byte 00
DATA #2 - low order byte 01
CRC - low order byte 12
CRC - high order byte 62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.

FUNCTION CODE 39 FUNCTION CODE B9
CRC - low order byte CD ERROR CODE 01
CRC - high order byte F2 CRC - low order byte 93
CRC - high order byte 95

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B
B.3FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
B 1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indi-
cates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the pre-
vious operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES

Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 Sep-
tember 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography sec-
tion in Chapter 5 for additional details.
The "Oscillography Number of Triggers" register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered
(captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography
file is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
"Oscillography Number of Triggers" register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The "Oscillography Number of Records" register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The "Oscillography Available Records" register specifies the actual num-
ber of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing “Yes” (i.e. the value 1) to the "Oscillography Clear Data" register clears oscillography data files, clears both the
"Oscillography Number of Triggers" and "Oscillography Available Records" registers to zero, and sets the "Oscillography
Last Cleared Date" to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace “nnn” with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT

APPENDIX B B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
e) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number)
To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:
B
EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number)
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION

and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear com-
munications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
The command password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of “0” removes command password protection.
When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. Command security is
required to change the command password. Similarly, the setting password is set up at memory location 4002. These are
the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  PASSWORD SECURITY menu via the
keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain command level security access, the command password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain setting
level security access, the setting password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered setting password must
match the current setting password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
Command and setting passwords each have a 30 minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password,
and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the setting password timer and writing a com-
mand register or forcing a coil re-starts the command password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used
to confirm whether a command password is enabled or disabled (a value of 0 represents disabled). The value read at mem-
ory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a setting password is enabled or disabled.
Command or setting password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which
the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the
passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B
B.4MEMORY MAPPING B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 59)

ADDR REGISTER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
0000 UR Product Type 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B 0002
0003
Product Version
Boot Configuration Register
0 to 655.35
0 to 65535
---
---
0.01
1
F001
F001
1
0
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0010 Serial Number --- --- --- F203 “0”
0020 Manufacturing Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0022 Modification Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0040 Order Code --- --- --- F204 “Order Code x”
0090 Ethernet MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
0093 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
00A0 CPU Module Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00B0 CPU Supplier Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) --- --- --- F203 (none)
Self Test Targets (Read Only)
0200 Self Test States (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0
Front Panel (Read Only)
0204 LED Column n State, n = 1 to 10 (10 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F501 0
0220 Display Message --- --- --- F204 (none)
0248 Last Key Pressed 0 to 47 --- 1 F530 0 (None)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
0280 Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke 0 to 46 --- 1 F190 0 (No key -- use
between real keys)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (64 modules)
0400 Virtual Input 1 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040A Virtual Input 11 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040B Virtual Input 12 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040C Virtual Input 13 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040D Virtual Input 14 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040E Virtual Input 15 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040F Virtual Input 16 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)

APPENDIX B B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

0420 Virtual Input 33 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off) B
Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
0800 Digital Counter 1 Value -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
0802 Digital Counter 1 Frozen -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
0804 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0806 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
0808 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 2
FlexStates (Read Only)
0900 FlexState Bits (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element States (Read Only)
1000 Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F502 0


User Displays Actuals (Read Only)
1080 Formatted user-definable displays (16 items) --- --- --- F200 (none)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)
1200 User Map Values (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
B 14C0
14C1
Target Sequence
Number of Targets
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F001
F001
0
0
Element Targets (Read/Write)
14C2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C3 Target Message --- --- --- F200 “.”
Digital Input/Output States (Read Only)
1500 Contact Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1508 Virtual Input States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1510 Contact Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1518 Contact Output Current States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1520 Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1528 Virtual Output States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1530 Contact Output Detectors (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)
1540 Remote Device States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1542 Remote Input States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1550 Remote Devices Online 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
1551 Remote Double-Point Status Input 1 State 0 to 3 --- 1 F605 3 (BAD)
Platform Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)
15C0 Direct Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15C8 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 1 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15C9 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 2 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15CA Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - Ch. 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15CB Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - Ch. 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D0 Direct Device States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15D1 Reserved 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D2 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D3 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Field Unit Input/Output States (Read Only)
15E0 Field Unit Contact Input States (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15E3 Field Unit Contact Input Output Operand States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15EB Field Contact Output Physical States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15F3 Field Contact Output Current States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15FB Field Contact Output Physical States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1603 Field Shared Input States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1604 Field Shared Input Channel States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1605 Field Shared Input Test States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1606 Field Shared Output Operand States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1607 Field Latching Output Open Operand States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1608 Field Latching Output Close Operand States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1609 Field Latching Output Open Driver States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
160A Field Latching Output Close Driver States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
160B Field Latching Output Physical States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
160C Field Unit Online/Offline States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0


160D Reserved 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
160E Reserved 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only) B
1618 Data Logger Channel Count 0 to 16 channel 1 F001 0
1619 Time of Oldest Available Samples 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F050 0
161B Time of Newest Available Samples 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F050 0
161D Data Logger Duration 0 to 999.9 days 0.1 F001 0
Stator Differential Actuals (Read Only)
1660 Generator Differential Iad 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1662 Generator Restraint Iar 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1664 Generator Differential Ibd 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1666 Generator Restraint Ibr 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1668 Generator Differential Icd 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
166A Generator Restraint Icr 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
166C Stator Differential CT Primary 0 to 50000 --- 1 F060 1
Sensitive Directional Power Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
1680 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Power -2147483647 to 2147483647 W 1 F060 0
1682 Sensitive Directional Power 2 Power -2147483647 to 2147483647 W 1 F060 0
Field Unit RTD Actuals (Read Only) (8 modules)
16C0 Field RTD 1 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
16C1 ...Repeated for Field RTD 2
Field Unit Transducer Actuals (Read Only) (8 modules)
16C8 Field Transducer 1 Value -32.768 to 32.767 --- 0.001 F004 0
16CA ...Repeated for Field Transducer 2
16CC ...Repeated for Field Transducer 3
16CE ...Repeated for Field Transducer 4
16D0 ...Repeated for Field Transducer 5
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
1800 Source 1 Phase A Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1802 Source 1 Phase B Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1804 Source 1 Phase C Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1806 Source 1 Neutral Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1808 Source 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180A Source 1 Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180B Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180D Source 1 Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180E Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1810 Source 1 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1811 Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1813 Source 1 Neutral Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1814 Source 1 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1816 Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0


1818 Source 1 Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1819 Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181B Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
181C Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181E Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
B 181F
1821
Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
0 to 999999.999
-359.9 to 0
A
degrees
0.001
0.1
F060
F002
0
0
1822 Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1824 Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1825 Reserved (27 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1840 ...Repeated for Source 2
18C0 ...Repeated for Source 4
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
1A00 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A02 Source 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A04 Source 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A06 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A08 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A09 Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0B Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0C Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0E Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0F Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A11 Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A13 Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A15 Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A17 Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A18 Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1A Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1B Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1D Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1E Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A20 Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A22 Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A23 Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A25 Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A26 Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A28 Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A29 Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A2B Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A2C Reserved (20 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1A40 ...Repeated for Source 2
1AC0 ...Repeated for Source 4
1B00 ...Repeated for Source 5
1B40 ...Repeated for Source 6
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)
1C00 Source 1 Three Phase Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C02 Source 1 Phase A Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000


1C04 Source 1 Phase B Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C06 Source 1 Phase C Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C08 Source 1 Three Phase Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0A Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power -1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var 0.001 F060 0
B
1C0C Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0E Source 1 Phase C Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C10 Source 1 Three Phase Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C12 Source 1 Phase A Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C14 Source 1 Phase B Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C16 Source 1 Phase C Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C18 Source 1 Three Phase Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C19 Source 1 Phase A Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1A Source 1 Phase B Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1B Source 1 Phase C Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1C Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1CA0 ...Repeated for Source 6
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
1D00 Source 1 Positive Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D02 Source 1 Negative Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D04 Source 1 Positive Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D06 Source 1 Negative Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D08 Reserved (8 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1D10 ...Repeated for Source 2
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command)
1D60 Energy Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
1D80 Frequency for Source 1 2 to 90 Hz --- F003 0
1D8A Frequency for Source 6 2 to 90 Hz --- F003 0
Breaker Flashover (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
21A6 Breaker Flashover 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
21A7 Breaker Flashover 1 Side 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
21A8 Breaker Flashover 1 Side 2 Source 0 to 6 --- 1 F211 0 (None)
21A9 Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed A 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21AA Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21AB Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21AC Breaker Flashover 1 Voltage Pickup Level 0 to 1.5 pu 0.001 F001 850


21AD Breaker Flashover 1 Voltage Difference Pickup Level 0 to 100000 V 1 F060 1000
21AF Breaker Flashover 1 Current Pickup Level 0 to 1.5 pu 0.001 F001 600
21B0 Breaker Flashover 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 100
21B1 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase A 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21B2 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B 21B3
21B4
Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase C
Breaker Flashover 1 Block
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F300
F300
0
0
21B5 Breaker Flashover 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
21B6 Breaker Flashover 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-Reset)
21B7 Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
21BB ...Repeated for Breaker Flashover 2
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)
2230 Reset Unauthorized Access 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Field Unit Raw Data Settings (Read/Write Setting)
2460 Field Raw Data Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 6 (H1a)
2461 Field Raw Data Freeze 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Remote Double-Point Status Inputs (Read/Write Setting Registers) (5 modules)
2620 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Device 1 to 32 --- 1 F001 1
2621 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Item 0 to 64 --- 1 F606 0 (None)
2622 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Name 1 to 64 --- 1 F205 "RemDPS Ip 1"
2628 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
2629 ... Repeated for Remote Double-point Status Input 2
263B ... Repeated for Remote Double-point Status Input 4
IEC 61850 GGIO5 Configuration (Read/Write Setting Registers) (16 modules)
26B0 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 1 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26BA IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 11 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26BB IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 12 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26BC IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 13 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26BD IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 14 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26BE IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 15 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26BF IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 16 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
IEC 61850 Received Integers (Read Only Actual Values) (16 modules)
26F0 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 1 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
26FA IEC 61850 Received uinteger 6 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
26FC IEC 61850 Received uinteger 7 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
26FE IEC 61850 Received uinteger 8 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
2700 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 9 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


270A IEC 61850 Received uinteger 14 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
270C IEC 61850 Received uinteger 15 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
270E IEC 61850 Received uinteger 16 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only) B
2B00 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Contact Input/Output States (Read Only)
2D00 Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2D80 Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2E00 Virtual Output States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Remote Input/Output Status (Read Only)
2F00 Remote Device States, one per register (32 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
2F80 Remote Input States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3001 Oscillography Available Records 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3002 Oscillography Last Cleared Date 0 to 400000000 --- 1 F050 0
3004 Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
3005 Oscillography Force Trigger 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3011 Oscillography Clear Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
User Programmable Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command)
3060 User Fault Report Clear 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
User Programmable Fault Report Actuals (Read Only)
3070 Newest Record Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3071 Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
3073 Report Date (10 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
User Programmable Fault Report (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
3090 Fault Report 1 Fault Trigger 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3091 Fault Report 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3092 Fault Report 1 Prefault Trigger 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3093 Fault Report Analog Channel 1 (32 items) 0 to 65536 --- 1 F600 0
30B3 Fault Report 1 Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0
30B8 ...Repeated for Fault Report 2
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)
3100 Name of file to read --- --- --- F204 (none)
Modbus File Transfer Values (Read Only)
3200 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3202 Size of currently-available data block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3203 Block of data from requested file (122 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Event Recorder Actual Values (Read Only)
3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Event Recorder Commands (Read/Write Command)
3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
34C0 DCMA Inputs 1 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34CA DCMA Inputs 6 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0


34CC DCMA Inputs 7 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34CE DCMA Inputs 8 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34D0 DCMA Inputs 9 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
B 34D6
34D8
DCMA Inputs 12 Value
DCMA Inputs 13 Value
-9999999 to 9999999
-9999999 to 9999999
---
---
0.001
0.001
F004
F004
0
0
34DA DCMA Inputs 14 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34DC DCMA Inputs 15 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34DE DCMA Inputs 16 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34E0 DCMA Inputs 17 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34EA DCMA Inputs 22 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34EC DCMA Inputs 23 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34EE DCMA Inputs 24 Value -9999999 to 9999999 --- 0.001 F004 0
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
34F0 RTD Input 1 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FA RTD Input 11 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FB RTD Input 12 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FC RTD Input 13 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FD RTD Input 14 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FE RTD Input 15 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FF RTD Input 16 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
3500 RTD Input 17 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350A RTD Input 27 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350B RTD Input 28 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350C RTD Input 29 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350D RTD Input 30 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350E RTD Input 31 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350F RTD Input 32 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0


3518 RTD Input 41 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0 B
351A RTD Input 43 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351B RTD Input 44 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351C RTD Input 45 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351D RTD Input 46 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351E RTD Input 47 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351F RTD Input 48 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
Ohm Input Values (Read Only) (2 modules)
3520 Ohm Inputs 1 Value 0 to 65535 Ohm 1 F001 0
3521 Ohm Inputs 2 Value 0 to 65535 Ohm 1 F001 0
Expanded Direct Input/Output Status (Read Only)
3560 Direct Device States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
3570 Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Field Units (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3800 Field Unit 1 ID 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "U1"
3806 Field Unit 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3807 Field Unit 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F243 0 (CC-05)
3808 Field Unit 1 Serial Number 1 to1 --- 1 F205 "000000000000"
380E Field Unit 1 Port 1 to 4 --- 1 F001 1
380F ...Repeated for Field Unit 2
381E ...Repeated for Filed Unit 3
382D ...Repeated for Filed Unit 4
383C ...Repeated for Filed Unit 5
384B ...Repeated for Filed Unit 6
385A ...Repeated for Filed Unit 7
3869 ...Repeated for Filed Unit 8
Field Unit Process Card Ports (Read/Write Setting)
3878 Field Unit 1 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 6 (H1a)
3879 Field Unit 2 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 4 (H2a)
387A Field Unit3 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 2 (H3a)
387B Field Unit 4 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 0 (H4a)
387C Field Unit 5 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 7 (H1b)
387D Field Unit 6 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 5 (H2b)
387E Field Unit 7 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 3 (H3b)
387F Field Unit 8 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 1 (H4b)
Field Unit CT VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
3890 Remote Phase CT x Origin 1 0 to 16 --- 1 F247 0 (None)
3891 Remote Phase CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 --- 1 F247 0 (None)
3892 Remote Ground CT x Origin 1 0 to 16 --- 1 F248 0 (None)
3893 Remote Ground CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 --- 1 F248 0 (None)
3894 AC Bank Redundancy Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F261 1 (Dependability
Biased)
3895 Remote Phase CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 --- 1 F001 1
3896 Remote Phase CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
3897 Remote Ground CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 --- 1 F001 1
3898 Remote Ground CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
3899 Remote Phase VT 1 Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
389A Remote Phase VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 --- 0.1 F001 664


389B Remote Phase VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 --- 1 F060 1
389D Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
389E Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 --- 0.1 F001 664
389F Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 --- 1 F060 1
38A1 ...Repeated for Field Unit 2
B 38B2
38C3
...Repeated for Field Unit 3
...Repeated for Field Unit 4
38D4 ...Repeated for Field Unit 5
38E5 ...Repeated for Field Unit 6
Field Unit Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (40 modules)
3900 Field Contact Input 1 ID --- --- --- F205 "FCI 1"
3906 Field Contact Input 1 Origin 0 to 8 --- 1 F256 0 (None)
3907 Field Contact Input 1 Input 1 to 18 --- 1 F001 1
3908 Field Contact Input 1 Failsafe Value 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
3909 Field Contact Input 1 Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
390A Field Contact Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
390B ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 2
3916 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 3
392C ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 5
394D ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 8
3958 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input9
396E ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 11
398F ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 14
399A ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 15
39A5 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 16
39B0 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 17
39BB ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 18
39C6 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 19
39D1 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 20
39DC ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 21
39E7 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 22
39F2 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 23
39FD ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 24
3A1E ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 27
3A3F ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 30
3A4A ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 31
3A6B ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 34
3A8C ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 37
3AA2 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 39


3AAD ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 40
Field Unit Shared Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
3B00 Field Shared Input 1 ID 0 to 65535 --- 1 F205 "SI 1"
3B06 Field Shared Input 1 Unit Origin 1 0 to 8 --- 1 F256 0 (None)
3B07 Field Shared Input 1 Channel Origin 1 1 to 15 --- 1 F001 1
3B08 Field Shared Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled) B
3B09 ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 2
3B1B ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 4
3B2D ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 6
3B3F ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 8
3B5A ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 11
3B6C ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 13
3B7E ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 15
Field Unit Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3BB0 Field Contact Output 1 ID (6 items) --- --- --- F205 "FCO U /OUT"
3BD4 Field Output 1 Operate (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3BDA Field Output 1 Seal In (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3BE0 Field Output 1 Events (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3BE6 ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 2
3C1C ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 3
3C52 ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 4
3C88 ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 5
3CBE ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 6
3CF4 ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 7
3D2A ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 8
Field Unit Latching Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3D60 Field Latching Output 1 ID 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "FLO Ux /LO"
3D66 Field Latching Output 1 Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3D67 Field Latching Output 1 Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3D68 Field Latching Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3D69 Field Latching Output 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
3D6B ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 2
3D76 ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 3
3D8C ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 5
3DA2 ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 7
3DAD ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 8
Field Unit Shared Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
3DC0 Field Shared Output 1 ID 0 to 65535 --- 1 F205 "SO 1"
3DC6 Field Shared Output 1 Operate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
3DC7 Field Shared Output 1 Unit Dest 1 0 to 8 --- 1 F256 0 (None)
3DC8 Field Shared Output 1 Channel Dest 1 1 to 15 --- 1 F001 1
3DC9 Field Shared Output 1 Unit Dest 2 0 to 8 --- 1 F256 0 (None)
3DCA Field Shared Output 1 Channel Dest 2 1 to 15 --- 1 F001 1
3DCB Field Shared Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)


3DCC ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 2
3DD8 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 3
3DE4 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 4
3DF0 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 5
3DFC ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 6
B 3E08
3E14
...Repeated for Field Shared Output 7
...Repeated for Field Shared Output 8
3E20 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 9
3E2C ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 10
3E5C ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 14
Field Unit RTDs (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3E80 Field Unit RTD 1Name 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "RTD 1"
3E86 Field Unit RTD 1 Origin 0 to 24 --- 1 F253 0 (None)
3E87 Field Unit RTD 1 Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F259 0 (100 Ohm Nickel)
3E88 ...Repeated for Field Unit RTD 2
3EA0 ...Repeated for Field Unit RTD 5
3EA8 ...Repeated for Field Unit RTD 6
3EB0 ...Repeated for Field Unit RTD 7
3EB8 ...Repeated for Field Unit RTD 8
Field Unit Transducers (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3ED0 Field Unit Transducer 1 Name 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "TRD 1"
3ED6 Field Unit Transducer 1 Origin 0 to 24 --- 1 F253 0 (None)
3ED7 Field Unit Transducer 1 Range 0 to 9 --- 1 F246 6 (0...20mA)
3ED8 Field Unit Transducer 1 Min Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
3EDA Field Unit Transducer 1 Max Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 100000
3EDC Field Unit Transducer 1 Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
3EDF ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 2
3EEE ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 3
3EFD ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 4
3F0C ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 5
3F1B ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 6
3F2A ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 7
3F39 ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 8
Field Unit Identifiers (Read Only) (8 modules)
3F80 Attached Field Unit 1 Serial Number --- --- 1 F205 (none)
3F86 Attached Filed Unit 1 Port Number --- --- 1 F001 0
3F87 Attached Field Unit 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F243 0 (CC-05)
3F88 Field Unit 1 Status 0 to 4 --- 1 F262 0 (Disabled)
3F89 ...Repeated for Field Unit 2
3F92 ...Repeated for Field Unit 3
3F9B ...Repeated for Field Unit 4
3FA4 ...Repeated for Field Unit 5
3FAD ...Repeated for Field Unit 6
3FB6 ...Repeated for Field Unit 7
3FBF ...Repeated for Field Unit 8
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
4000 Command Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


Passwords (Read/Write Setting)
4002 Setting Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008 Command Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
400A Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read Only Actual Values) B
4010 Command Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4011 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Passwords (Read/Write Settings)
4012 Command Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 minutes 1 F001 5
4013 Setting Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 minutes 1 F001 30
4014 Invalid Password Attempts (before lockout) 2 to 5 --- 1 F001 3
4015 Password Lockout Duration 5 to 60 minutes 1 F001 5
4016 Password Access Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4017 Local Setting Authorization 1 to 65535 --- 1 F300 1
4018 Remote Setting Authorization 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 1
4019 Access Authorization Timeout 5 to 480 minutes 1 F001 30
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)
4040 Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
LED Test (Read/Write Setting)
4048 LED Test Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4049 LED Test Control 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
404F Language 0 to 3 --- 1 F531 0 (English)
4050 Flash Message Time 0.5 to 10 s 0.1 F001 10
4051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 300
4052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 --- 1 F101 0 (25%)
4053 Screen Saver Feature 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4054 Screen Saver Wait Time 1 to 65535 min 1 F001 30
4055 Current Cutoff Level 0.002 to 0.02 pu 0.001 F001 20
4056 Voltage Cutoff Level 0.1 to 1 V 0.1 F001 10
Remote RTD Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407A RRTD Slave Address 1 to 254 --- 1 F001 254
407B RRTD Baud Rate 0 to 4 --- 1 F602 4 (19200)
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407D COM2 Selection 0 to 3 --- 1 F601 0 (RS485)
407E COM1 Minimum Response Time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
407F COM2 Minimum Response Time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
4080 Modbus Slave Address 1 to 254 --- 1 F001 254
4083 RS485 Com1 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4084 RS485 Com1 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4085 RS485 Com2 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4087 Port 1 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554706
4089 Port 1 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4294966272
408B Port 1 Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
408D Network Address NSAP --- --- --- F074 0
409A DNP Channel 1 Port 0 to 5 --- 1 F177 0 (None)
409B DNP Channel 2 Port 0 to 5 --- 1 F177 0 (None)
409C DNP Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
409E DNP Client Addresses (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40A3 TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 502
40A4 TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 20000
40A5 TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 80


40A6 Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 69
40A7 Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
(zero means “automatic”) (2 items)
40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout 0 to 60 s 1 F001 5
B 40AB
40AC
DNP Unsolicited Responses Maximum Retries
DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address
1 to 255
0 to 65519
---
---
1
1
F001
F001
10
1
40AD Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 1 (Full-Duplex)
40AE DNP Current Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40AF DNP Voltage Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B0 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B1 DNP Energy Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B2 DNP Power Factor Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B3 DNP Other Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B4 DNP Current Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40B6 DNP Voltage Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40B8 DNP Power Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40BA DNP Energy Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40BC DNP Power Factor Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40CE DNP Other Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40C0 DNP IIN Time Synchronization Bit Period 1 to 10080 min 1 F001 1440
40C1 DNP Message Fragment Size 30 to 2048 --- 1 F001 240
40C2 DNP Client Address 3 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40C8 DNP Number of Paired Binary Output Control Points 0 to 32 --- 1 F001 0
40C9 DNP TCP Connection Timeout 10 to 7200 s 1 F001 120
40CA Reserved (22 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40E0 TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 2404
40E1 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40E2 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of ASDU 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
40E3 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Transmit Period 1 to 65535 s 1 F001 60
40E4 IEC 60870-5-104 Current Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40E6 IEC 60870-5-104 Voltage Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40E8 IEC 60870-5-104 Power Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40EA IEC 60870-5-104 Energy Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40EC IEC 60870-5-104 Power Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40EE IEC 60870-5-104 Other Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40F0 IEC 60870-5-104 Client Address (5 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
4104 IEC 60870-5-104 Redundancy Port Enabled/Disabled 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
4105 Reserved (57 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
413E High Enet Traffic Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
413F High Enet Traffic Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4140 DNP Object 1 Default Variation 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
4142 DNP Object 20 Default Variation 0 to 3 --- 1 F523 0 (1)
Ethernet Switch (Read/Write Setting)
4148 Ethernet Switch IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 3232235778
414A Ethernet Switch Modbus IP Port Number 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 502


414B Ethernet Switch Port 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
414C Ethernet Switch Port 2 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
414D Ethernet Switch Port 3 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
414E Ethernet Switch Port 4 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
414F Ethernet Switch Port 5 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4150 Ethernet Switch Port 6 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled) B
Ethernet Switch (Read Only Actual Values)
4151 Ethernet Switch MAC Address --- --- 1 F072 0
4154 Ethernet Switch Port 1 Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
415A Switch Firmware Version 0.00 to 99.99 --- 0.01 F001 0
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
4168 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4169 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
416B Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP Port Number 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 123
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command)
4170 Data Logger Clear 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)
4181 Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items) --- --- --- F600 0
4191 Data Logger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F260 0 (Continuous)
4192 Data Logger Trigger 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4193 Data Logger Rate 15 to 3600000 ms 1 F003 60000
Clock (Read/Write Command)
41A0 Real Time Clock Set Time 0 to 235959 --- 1 F050 0
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
41A2 SR Date Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F051 0
41A4 SR Time Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F052 0
41A6 IRIG-B Signal Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F114 0 (None)
41A7 Clock Events Enable / Disable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
41A8 Time Zone Offset from UTC –24 to 24 hours 0.5 F002 0
41A9 Daylight Savings Time (DST) Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
41AA Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Month 0 to 11 --- 1 F237 0 (January)
41AB Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day 0 to 6 --- 1 F238 0 (Sunday)
41AC Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day Instance 0 to 4 --- 1 F239 0 (First)
41AD Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Hour 0 to 23 --- 1 F001 2
41AE Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Month 0 to 11 --- 1 F237 0 (January)
41AF Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day 0 to 6 --- 1 F238 0 (Sunday)
41B0 Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day Instance 0 to 4 --- 1 F239 0 (First)
41B1 Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Hour 0 to 23 --- 1 F001 2
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 1 to 64 --- 1 F001 5
41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F118 0 (Auto. Overwrite)
41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 % 1 F001 50
41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
41C4 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 --- 1 F183 2 (16 samples/cycle)
41D0 Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
4200 Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
4260 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4261 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
4280 FlexLogic™ Operand to Activate LED 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4281 User LED type (latched or self-resetting) 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 1 (Self-Reset)
4282 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 2
B 4286
4288
...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 4
...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 5
428A ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 6
428C ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 7
428E ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 8
429A ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 14
429C ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 15
429E ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 16
42A0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 17
42AA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 22
42AC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 23
42AE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 24
42B0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 25
42BA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 30
42BC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 31
42BE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 32
42C0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 33
42CA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 38
42CC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 39
42CE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 40
42D0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 41
42DA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 46
42DC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 47
42DE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 48
Installation (Read/Write Setting)
43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 --- 1 F133 0 (Not Programmed)
43E1 Relay Name --- --- --- F202 “Relay-1”


User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
4441 User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4442 User Programmable Direct Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4443 User Programmable Remote Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4444 User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4445 User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled) B
4446 User Programmable Battery Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4447 User Programmable SNTP Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4448 User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4449 User Programmable Ethernet Switch Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
444A Process Bus Failure Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4480 Phase CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4481 Phase CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4482 Ground CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4483 Ground CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4484 ...Repeated for CT Bank 2
448C ...Repeated for CT Bank 4
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4500 Phase VT 1 Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
4501 Phase VT 1 Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4502 Phase VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4504 Auxiliary VT 1 Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
4505 Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4506 Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4508 ...Repeated for VT Bank 2
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4580 Source 1 Name 0 to 1 --- 1 F206 “SRC 1"
4583 Source 1 Phase CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4584 Source 1 Ground CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4585 Source 1 Phase VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4586 Source 1 Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
458E ...Repeated for Source 3
459C ...Repeated for Source 5
Power System (Read/Write Setting)
4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 60
4601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 --- 1 F106 0 (ABC)
4602 Frequency And Phase Reference 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4603 Frequency Tracking Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
Breaker Control (Read/Write Settings)
4700 Breaker 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4701 Breaker 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “Bkr 1"
4704 Breaker 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
4705 Breaker 1 Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


4706 Breaker 1 Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4707 Breaker 1 Phase A / Three-pole Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4708 Breaker 1 Phase B Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4709 Breaker 1 Phase C Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
470A Breaker 1 External Alarm 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B 470B
470D
Breaker 1 Alarm Delay
Breaker 1 Pushbutton Control
0 to 1000000
0 to 1
s
---
0.001
1
F003
F102
0
0 (Disabled)
470E Breaker 1 Manual Close Recall Time 0 to 1000000 s 0.001 F003 0
4710 Breaker 1 Out of Service 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4711 Breaker 1 Block Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4712 Breaker 1 Block Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4713 Breaker 1 Phase A / Three-pole Opened 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4714 Breaker 1 Phase B Opened 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4715 Breaker 1 Phase C Opened 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4716 Breaker 1 Operate Time 0 to 2 s 0.001 F001 70
4717 Breaker 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4718 Reserved 0 to 65535 s 1 F001 0
4719 ...Repeated for Breaker 2
4732 ...Repeated for Breaker 3
474B ...Repeated for Breaker 4
Flexcurves A and B (Read/Write Settings)
4800 FlexCurve A (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
48F0 FlexCurve B (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)
4A00 Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
4C00 User-Definable Display 1 Top Line Text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C0A User-Definable Display 1 Bottom Line Text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C14 Modbus Addresses of Display 1 Items (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4C19 Reserved (7 items) --- --- --- F001 0
4C20 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 2
4CA0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 6
4CC0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 7
4CE0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 8
4D00 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 9
4DA0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 14
4DC0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 15
4DE0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 16
Field Unit Raw Data Actuals (Read Only) (8 modules)
4E00 Raw Field Data AC1 Mag 0 to 0.001 A 0.001 F003 0
4E02 Raw Field Data AC1 Angle 0 to 0.1 degree 0.1 F002 0
4E0B Raw Field Data AC4 Angle 0 to 0.01 degree 0.1 F002 0


4E0C Raw Field Data AC5 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E0E Raw Field Data AC5 Angle 0 to 0.01 degree 0.1 F002 0
4E0F Raw Field Data AC6 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E12 Raw Field Data AC7 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E14 Raw Field Data AC7 Angle 0 to 0.01 degree 0.1 F002 0 B
4E15 Raw Field Data AC8 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E18 Raw Field Data DC1 0 to 0.001 V 0.001 F002 0
4E19 Raw Field Data DC2 0 to 0.001 V 0.001 F002 0
4E1A Raw Field Data DC3 0 to 0.001 V 0.001 F002 0
4E1B Raw Field Data FCI States (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
4E1D Raw Field Data SI States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
4E1E Raw Field Data SI Test States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
4E1F Raw Field Data Brick ADC Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0
4E20 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0
4E21 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Voltage 0 to 0.01 V 0.01 F001 0
4E22 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Current 0 to 1 mA 1 F001 0
4E23 Raw Field Data Brick Tx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E24 Raw Field Data Brick Rx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E25 Raw Field Data Brick Diagnostics (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
4E27 Raw Field Data Local Transceiver Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0
4E28 Raw Field Data Local Transceiver Voltage 0 to 0.01 V 0.01 F001 0
4E29 Raw Field Data Local Transceiver Current 0 to 1 mA 1 F001 0
4E2A Raw Field Data Local Tx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E2B Raw Field Data Local Rx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E2C Repeated for Field Unit 2
4E58 Repeated for Field Unit 3
4EDC Repeated for Field Unit 6
4F08 Repeated for Field Unit 7
4F34 Repeated for Field Unit 8
FlexLogic (Read/Write Setting)
5000 FlexLogic™ Entry (512 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 8192
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
5400 RTD Input 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5401 RTD Input 1 ID --- --- --- F205 “RTD Ip 1“
5407 RTD Input 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100Ω Platinum)
5408 RTD Input 1 Application 0 to 5 --- 1 F550 0 (None)
5409 RTD Input 1 Alarm Temperature 1 to 249 °C 1 F001 130
540A RTD Input 1 Alarm Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
540B RTD Input 1 Trip Temperature 1 to 249 °C 1 F001 130
540C RTD Input 1 Trip Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
540D RTD Input 1 Trip Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
540E RTD Input 1 Trip Voting 0 to 48 --- 1 F551 0
540F RTD Input 1 Open 0 to 2 --- 1 F552 0 (None)
5410 RTD Input 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5411 RTD Input 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5412 RTD Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5413 ...Repeated for RTD Input 2
544C ...Repeated for RTD Input 5


545F ...Repeated for RTD Input 6
54AB ...Repeated for RTD Input 10
B 54BE
54D1
...Repeated for RTD Input 11
...Repeated for RTD Input 12
54E4 ...Repeated for RTD Input 13
54F7 ...Repeated for RTD Input 14
550A ...Repeated for RTD Input 15
551D ...Repeated for RTD Input 16
557C ...Repeated for RTD Input 21
558F ...Repeated for RTD Input 22
55A2 ...Repeated for RTD Input 23
55B5 ...Repeated for RTD Input 24
55C8 ...Repeated for RTD Input 25
55DB ...Repeated for RTD Input 26
55EE ...Repeated for RTD Input 27
56AC ...Repeated for RTD Input 37
56BF ...Repeated for RTD Input 38
56D2 ...Repeated for RTD Input 39
56E5 ...Repeated for RTD Input 40
56F8 ...Repeated for RTD Input 41
570B ...Repeated for RTD Input 42
571E ...Repeated for RTD Input 43
FlexLogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
5800 FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F129 0 (millisecond)
5801 FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5802 FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Dropout Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5808 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 2


5860 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 13 B
58A0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 21
58A8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 22
58B0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 23
58B8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 24
58C0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 25
58C8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 26
58D0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 27
58D8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 28
58E0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 29
58E8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 30
58F0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 31
58F8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic™ Timer 32
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5A00 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A01 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5A02 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5A03 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A04 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A05 Phase IOC1 Block For Phase A 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5A06 Phase IOC1 Block For Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5A07 Phase IOC1 Block For Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5A08 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5A09 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5A10 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
5AA0 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 11
5AB0 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 12
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5C00 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C01 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5C02 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5C03 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C04 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0


5C05 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5C06 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5C07 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5C10 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
B 5C20
5C30
...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 3
...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 4
5CA0 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 11
5CB0 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 12
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5D00 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D01 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5D02 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5D03 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5D04 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5D06 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5D07 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5D08 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5D09 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5D10 ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 2
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5E00 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5E01 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E02 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5E03 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E04 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E05 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5E06 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5E07 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5E10 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
5EA0 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 11
5EB0 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 12


Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
5F80 Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1) 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
5F81 Setting Groups Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5F82 FlexLogic Operands to Activate Groups 2 through 6 (5 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
items)
5F89
5F8A
Setting Group Function
Setting Group Events
0 to 1
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F102
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
B
Setting Groups (Read Only)
5F8B Current Setting Group 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
Setting Group Names (Read/Write Setting)
5F8C Setting Group 1 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5F94 Setting Group 2 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5F9C Setting Group 3 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5FA4 Setting Group 4 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5FAC Setting Group 5 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5FB4 Setting Group 6 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
Current Unbalance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
6440 Current Unbalance 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6441 Current Unbalance 1 Pickup 0.1 to 100 % 0.1 F001 400
6442 Current Unbalance 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
6443 Current Unbalance 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
6444 Current Unbalance 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6445 Current Unbalance 1 Targets 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6446 Current Unbalance 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6447 Current Unbalance 1 Reserved (5 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
644C ...Repeated for Current Unbalance 2
Stator Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
6470 Stator Differential Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6471 Stator Differential Pickup 0.05 to 1 pu 0.001 F001 100
6472 Stator Differential Slope 1 1 to 100 % 1 F001 10
6473 Stator Differential Slope 2 1 to 100 % 1 F001 80
6474 Stator Differential Break 1 1 to 1.5 pu 0.01 F001 115
6475 Stator Differential Break 2 1.5 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 800
6476 Stator Differential Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6477 Stator Differential Targets 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6478 Stator Differential Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6479 Stator Differential Line End Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
647A Stator Differential Neutral End Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
64A0 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64A1 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
64A2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup 0 to 1.25 pu 0.001 F001 300
64A3 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
64A4 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
64A5 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
64A6 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
64A7 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64A8 ...Repeated for Negative Sequence Overvoltage 2
64B0 ...Repeated for Negative Sequence Overvoltage 3
Overfrequency (Read/Write Setting) (4 modules)
64D0 Overfrequency 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64D1 Overfrequency 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
64D2 Overfrequency 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
64D3 Overfrequency 1 Pickup 20 to 65 Hz 0.01 F001 6050


64D4 Overfrequency 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 500
64D5 Overfrequency 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 500
64D6 Overfrequency 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
64D7 Overfrequency 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64D8 Reserved (4 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
B 64DC
64E8
...Repeated for Overfrequency 2
...Repeated for Overfrequency 3
64F4 ...Repeated for Overfrequency 4
Motor Setup (Read/Write Setting)
6600 Thermal Model Motor FLA 0.05 to 1 pu 0.001 F001 1000
6601 Thermal Model Motor Overload Factor 1 to 1.5 --- 0.01 F001 100
6602 Thermal Model Line Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
6603 Thermal Model Motor Offline 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6604 Thermal Model RTD 1 0 to 48 --- 1 F151 0 (NONE)
660A Motor Emergency Restart 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
660B Motor Nameplate Voltage 100 to 50000 V 1 F001 600
660C Speed 2 Motor Protection 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
660D Speed 2 Motor Switch 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
660E Speed 2 Switch 2-1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 500
660F Speed 2 Motor Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
6610 Speed 2 Motor FLA 0.05 to 1 pu 0.001 F001 1000
Thermal Model Actuals (Read Only)
6640 Thermal Model Motor Status 0 to 3 --- 1 F098 1 (Starting)
6641 Thermal Model Capacity Used 0 to 100 % 1 F001 0
6643 Trip Time On Overload 0 to 10000 --- 1 F001 0
6644 Thermal Model Lockout Time 0 to 65000 min 1 F001 0
6648 Thermal Model Load 0 to 40 x FLA 0.01 F001 0
664A Thermal Model Motor Unbalance 0 to 100 % 1 F001 0
664B Thermal Model Biased Motor Load 0 to 40 x FLA 0.01 F001 0
664C Start/Hour Lockout Time 0 to 65000 min 1 F001 0
664D Time-Between-Starts Lockout Time 0 to 65000 min 1 F001 0
664E Restart Delay Lockout Time 0 to 65000 s 1 F001 0
664F Total Motor Lockout Time 0 to 65000 min 1 F001 0
Sensitive Directional Power (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
66A0 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
66A1 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
66A2 Sensitive Directional Power 1 RCA 0 to 359 degrees 1 F001 0
66A3 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Calibration 0 to 0.95 degrees 0.05 F001 0
66A4 Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG1 SMIN -1.2 to 1.2 pu 0.001 F002 100
66A5 Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
66A6 Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG2 SMIN -1.2 to 1.2 pu 0.001 F002 100
66A7 Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG2 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 2000
66A8 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Block --- --- --- F001 0
66A9 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
66AA Sensitive Directional Power 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
66AB Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
66B0 ...Repeated for Sensitive Directional Power 2
Underpower (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
66D0 Underpower 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


66D1 Underpower 1 Start Block Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
66D2 Underpower 1 Alarm Power Pickup 0.05 to 2 pu 0.01 F001 50
66D3 Underpower 1 Alarm Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 200
66D4 Underpower 1 Trip Power Pickup 0.05 to 2 pu 0.01 F001 40
66D5 Underpower 1 Trip Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
66D6 Underpower 1 Trip Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100 B
66D7 Underpower 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
66D8 Underpower 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
66D9 Underpower 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
66DA ...Repeated for Underpower 2
Reduced Voltage Starting (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
67D0 Reduced Voltage Start Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
67D1 Reduced Voltage Start Transition Mode 0 to 2 --- 1 F095 0 (Current Only)
67D2 Reduced Voltage Start FLA 25 to 300 % 1 F001 125
67D3 Reduced Voltage Start Timer 1 to 600 s 0.1 F001 100
67D4 Reduced Voltage Start Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
67D5 Reduced Voltage Start Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-Reset)
67D6 Reduced Voltage Start Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
67D7 Reserved 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Motor Acceleration Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (5 modules)
6910 Motor Acceleration 1 Time/Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
6912 Motor Acceleration 1 Starting Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 0
6913 Motor Acceleration 1 Effective Current 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
6915 Motor Acceleration 1 Peak Current 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
6917 Reserved (9 items) --- --- --- F001 0
6920 ...Repeated for Motor Acceleration 2
Motor Acceleration Commands (Read/Write Command)
6970 Motor Acceleration Clear Data Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Motor Maximum Starting Rate (Read/Write Setting)
6980 Starts Per Hour Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6981 Starts Per Hour Time Interval 1 to 300 min 1 F001 60
6982 Starts Per Hour Maximum Number of Starts 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 3
6983 Starts Per Hour Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6984 Starts Per Hour Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6985 Starts Per Hour Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6986 Reserved (9 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Motor Time Between Starts (Read/Write Setting)
6990 Time Between Starts Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6991 Time Between Starts Minimum Time 0 to 300 min 1 F001 20
6992 Time Between Starts Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6993 Time Between Starts Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6994 Time Between Starts Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Motor Restart Delay (Read/Write Setting)
69A0 Restart Delay Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
69A1 Restart Delay Minimum Time 0 to 50000 s 1 F001 0
69A2 Restart Delay Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
69A3 Restart Delay Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
69A4 Restart Delay Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
69A5 Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0


Motor Mechanical Jam (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
69B0 Mechanical Jam Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
69B1 Mechanical Jam Pickup 1 to 10 x FLA 0.01 F001 200
69B2 Mechanical Jam Pickup Delay 0.1 to 600 s 0.01 F001 10
69B3 Mechanical Jam Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
B 69B4
69B5
Mechanical Jam Block
Mechanical Jam Target
0 to 65535
0 to 2
---
---
1
1
F300
F109
0
0 (Self-reset)
69B6 Mechanical Jam Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
69B7 Reserved (9 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Motor Learned Data (Read/Write Setting)
69D0 Motor Learned Data Starts to Learn 1 to 5 --- 1 F001 1
69D1 Motor Learned Data Calculation Period 1 to 90 minutes 1 F001 15
69D2 Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
Motor Learned Data (Read Only Actual Values)
69D3 Motor Learned Data Records Number 0 to 250 --- 1 F001 0
69D4 Motor Learned Data Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- --- F050 0
69D6 Motor Learned Data Acceleration Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 0
69D7 Motor Learned Data Starting Current 0 to 40 × FLA 0.01 F001 0
69D8 Motor Learned Data Thermal Capacity Used 0 to 65535 % 1 F001 0
69D9 Motor Learned Data Motor Load 0 to 40 × FLA 0.01 F001 0
69DA Motor Learned Data Run Time After Start 0 to 4294967295 hr 1 F050 0
69DC Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7000 Phase Undervoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7001 Phase Undervoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7002 Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7003 Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7004 Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7005 Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7006 Phase Undervoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7007 Phase Undervoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7008 Phase Undervoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7009 Phase Undervoltage 1 Measurement Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F186 0 (Phase to Ground)
700A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
7013 ...Repeated for Phase Undervoltage 2
7020 ...Repeated for Phase Undervoltage 3
Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
7040 Phase Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7041 Phase Overvoltage 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7042 Phase Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7043 Phase Overvoltage 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7044 Phase Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7045 Phase Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7046 Phase Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7047 Phase Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Phase Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7260 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7261 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7262 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7263 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 ECA 0 to 359 --- 1 F001 30
7264 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Pol V Threshold 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 700
7265 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Overcurrent 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
7266 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)


7267 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7270 ...Repeated for Phase Directional Overcurrent 2
Neutral Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7280 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7281 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1) B
7282 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing 0 to 2 --- 1 F230 0 (Voltage)
7283 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA -90 to 90 ° Lag 1 F002 75
7284 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
7285 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup 0.006 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 50
7286 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
7287 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup 0.006 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 50
7288 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7289 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
728A Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
728B Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing Voltage 0 to 1 --- 1 F231 0 (Calculated V0)
728C Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Op Current 0 to 1 --- 1 F196 0 (Calculated 3I0)
728D Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset 0 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 0
728E Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint 0 to 0.5 --- 0.001 F001 63
728F Reserved 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
7290 ...Repeated for Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2
DCmA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
7300 DCmA Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7301 DCmA Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 “DCMA Ip 1"
730B DCmA Inputs 1 Units --- --- --- F206 “mA”
730E DCmA Inputs 1 Range 0 to 6 --- 1 F173 6 (4 to 20 mA)
730F DCmA Inputs 1 Minimum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 4000
7311 DCmA Inputs 1 Maximum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 20000
7318 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 2
73A8 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 8
73C0 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 9
73D8 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 10
73F0 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 11
74B0 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 19
74C8 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 20
74E0 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 21
74F8 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 22
Disconnect (Breaker) Switch (Read/Write Settings) (24 modules)


7540 Disconnect Switch 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7541 Disconnect Switch 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “SW 1"
7544 Disconnect Switch 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
7545 Disconnect Switch 1 Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7546 Disconnect Switch 1 Block Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B 7547
7548
Disconnect Switch 1 Close
Disconnect Switch 1 Block Close
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F300
F300
0
0
7549 Disconnect Switch 1 Phase A / Three-pole Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
754A Disconnect Switch 1 Phase A / Three-pole Opened 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
754B Disconnect Switch 1 Phase B Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
754C Disconnect Switch 1 Phase B Opened 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
754D Disconnect Switch 1 Phase C Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
754E Disconnect Switch 1 Phase C Opened 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
754F Disconnect Switch 1 Operate Time 0 to 2 s 0.001 F001 70
7550 Disconnect Switch 1 Alarm Delay 0 to 1000000 s 0.001 F003 0
7552 Disconnect Switch 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7553 Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0
7555 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 2
756A ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 3
757F ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 4
75A9 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 6
75BE ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 7
75D3 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 8
75E8 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 9
75FD ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 10
763C ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 13
767B ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 16
76A5 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 18
76BA ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 19
76CF ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 20
76E4 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 21
76F9 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 22
770E ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 23
Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
7840 Ohm Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7841 Ohm Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 "Ohm Ip 1 "
7847 Ohm Inputs 1 Reserved (9 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
7850 ...Repeated for Ohm Inputs 2
Thermal Model (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
7B00 Thermal Model Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B01 Thermal Model Curve 0 to 5 --- 1 F099 0 (Motor)
7B02 Thermal Model TD Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
7B03 Thermal Model Bias K Factor 0 to 19 --- 1 F001 0
7B04 Thermal Model Time Constant Running 1 to 65000 min 1 F001 15
7B05 Thermal Model Time Constant Stopped 1 to 65000 min 1 F001 30
7B06 Thermal Model Hot Cold Ratio 0.01 to 1 --- 0.01 F001 100
7B07 Thermal Model RTD Bias 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


7B08 Thermal Model RTD Bias Minimum 0 to 250 °C 1 F001 40
7B09 Thermal Model RTD Bias Center 0 to 250 °C 1 F001 130
7B0A Thermal Model RTD Bias Maximum 0 to 250 °C 1 F001 155
7B0B Thermal Model Start Inhibit Margin 0 to 25 % 1 F001 0
7B0C Thermal Model Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7B0D Thermal Model Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled) B
7B0E Thermal Model Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7B0F Thermal Model Curve Effect 0 to 1 --- 1 F096 0 (Cutoff)
7B10 Speed 2 Thermal Model Curve 0 to 5 --- 1 F099 0 (Motor)
7B11 Speed 2 Thermal Model TD Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
7B12 Reserved 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
7B13 Thermal Model IEC Curve K Factor 1 to 1.5 --- 0.05 F001 110
Voltage Dependent Overload (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
7B20 Voltage Dependent Overload Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B21 Voltage Dependent Overload Minimum Motor Volts 60 to 99 % 1 F001 80
7B22 Voltage Dependent Overload Voltage Loss 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7B23 VD Overload Stall Current at Minimum Volts 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 450
7B24 VD Overload Safe Stall Time at Minimum Volts 0.1 to 1000 s 0.1 F001 200
7B25 VD Overload Acceleration Intersect at Minimum Volts 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 400
7B26 VD Overload Stall Current at 100% Voltage 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 600
7B27 VD Overload Safe Stall Time at 100% Voltage 0.1 to 1000 s 0.1 F001 100
7B28 VD Overload Acceleration Intersect at 100% Voltage 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 500
7B29 Speed 2 Voltage Dependent Overload Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B2A Speed 2 VD Overload Minimum Motor Volts 60 to 99 % 1 F001 80
7B2B Speed 2 Voltage Dependent Overload Voltage Loss 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7B2C Speed 2 VD Overload Stall Current at Minimum Volts 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 450
7B2D Speed 2 VD Overload Safe Stall Time at Minimum Volts 0.1 to 1000 s 0.1 F001 200
7B2E Speed 2 VD Acceleration Intersect at Minimum Volts 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 400
7B2F Speed 2 VD Overload Stall Current at 100% Voltage 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 600
7B30 Speed 2 VD Overload Safe Stall Time at 100% Voltage 0.1 to 1000 s 0.1 F001 200
7B31 Speed 2 VD Acceleration Intersect at 100% Voltage 1.5 to 20 × FLA 0.01 F001 500
Motor Acceleration Time (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
7B40 Motor Acceleration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B41 Motor Acceleration Current 1 to 10 × FLA 0.01 F001 600
7B42 Motor Acceleration Time 0.05 to 180 s 0.01 F001 1000
7B43 Motor Acceleration Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F097 0 (Definite Time)
7B44 Motor Acceleration Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7B45 Motor Acceleration Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7B46 Motor Acceleration Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B47 Speed 2 Motor Acceleration Current 1 to 10 x FLA 0.01 F001 600
7B48 Speed 2 Motor Acceleration Time 0.05 to 180 s 0.01 F001 1000
7B49 Speed 2 Motor Acceleration Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F097 0 (Definite Time)
7B4A Speed 2 Motor Acceleration Speed 1-2 0.05 to 180 s 0.01 F001 1000
7B4B Speed 2 Motor Acceleration Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7B4C Reserved (9 items) --- --- --- F001 0
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
7B60 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 2 --- 1 F137 0 (Disabled)
7B61 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line --- --- --- F202 (none)
7B6B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
7B75 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
7B7F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time 0 to 60 s 0.05 F001 0
7B80 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7B81 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B82 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


7B83 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay 0.2 to 600 s 0.1 F001 10
7B84 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B85 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7B86 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority 0 to 2 --- 1 F220 0 (Disabled)
7B87 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B 7B88
7B89
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset
User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F300
F300
0
0
7B8A User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Hold 0 to 10 s 0.1 F001 1
7B8B ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2
7BB6 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 3
7BE1 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 4
7C0C ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 5
7C37 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 6
7C62 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 7
7C8D ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 8
7CB8 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 9
7CE3 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 10
7D0E ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 11
7D39 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 12
7D64 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 13
7D8F ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 14
7DBA ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 15
7DE5 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 16
Underfrequency (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
7E10 Underfrequency Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7E11 Underfrequency 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7E12 Underfrequency 1 Minimum Current 0.1 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 10
7E13 Underfrequency 1 Pickup 20 to 65 Hz 0.01 F001 5950
7E14 Underfrequency 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 2000
7E15 Underfrequency 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 2000
7E16 Underfrequency 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7E17 Underfrequency 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7E18 Underfrequency 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7E21 ...Repeated for Underfrequency 2
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F00 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F01 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F02 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F03 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F04 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F05 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F06 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F07 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F08 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Curves 0 to 3 --- 1 F116 0 (Definite Time)
7F09 Reserved (7 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
7F10 ...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 2
7F20 ...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 3
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7F30 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


7F31 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F32 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F33 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F34 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F35 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F36 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset) B
7F37 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F40 ...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 2
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting (2 modules)
7F60 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F61 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F62 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 700
7F63 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F64 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7F65 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7F66 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F67 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F68 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F70 ...Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 2
Frequency (Read Only)
8000 Tracking Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
Temp Monitor Actual Values (Read Only Non-Volatile)
81C0 Reserved Register T1 -55 to 125 C 1 F002 -55
81C1 Reserved Register T2 -55 to 125 C 1 F002 125
81C2 Reserved Register T3 -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
81C4 Reserved Register T4 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
81CA Reserved Register T7 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
81CC Reserved Register T8 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
EGD Fast Production Status (Read Only)
83E0 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Signature 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83E1 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time 0 to 4294967295 --- --- F003 0
83E3 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Size 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
EGD Slow Production Status (Read Only) (2 modules)
83F0 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Signature 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83F1 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time 0 to 4294967295 --- --- F003 0
83F3 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Size 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83F4 ...Repeated for EGD Slow Producer Exchange 2
EGD Fast Production (Read/Write Setting)
8400 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8401 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
8403 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 50 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000
8404 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (20 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
8418 Reserved (80 items) --- --- --- F001 0
EGD Slow Production (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
8468 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8469 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
846B EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 500 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000
846C EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (50 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
849E Reserved (50 items) --- --- --- F001 0


84D0 ...Repeated for EGD Exchange 2
Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
8600 Breaker Failure 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8601 Breaker Failure 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
8602 Breaker Failure 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
B 8603
8604
Breaker Failure 1 Amp Supervision
Breaker Failure 1 Use Seal-In
0 to 1
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F126
F126
1 (Yes)
1 (Yes)
8605 Breaker Failure 1 Three Pole Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8606 Breaker Failure 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8607 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8608 Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8609 Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
860A Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
860B Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 2 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
860C Breaker Failure 1 Timer 2 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
860D Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 3 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
860E Breaker Failure 1 Timer 3 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
860F Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8610 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8611 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Test On 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8612 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8613 Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8614 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8615 Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8616 Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
8617 Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
8618 Breaker Failure 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
8619 Breaker Failure 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
861A Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
861B Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
861C Breaker Failure 1 Phase C Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
861D Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
861E Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
861F Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8620 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8621 ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 2
86A5 ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 6
Remote RTD inputs (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
86D0 Remote RTD 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
86D1 Remote RTD 1 ID --- --- --- F205 "RRTD 1"
86D7 Remote RTD 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100 ohm Platinum)
86D8 Remote RTD 1 Application 0 to 5 --- 1 F550 0 (None)
86D9 Remote RTD 1 Alarm Temperature 1 to 200 °C 1 F001 130
86DA Remote RTD 1 Alarm Pickup Delay 5 to 600 seconds 5 F001 5
86DB Remote RTD 1 Trip Temperature 1 to 200 °C 1 F001 130
86DC Remote RTD 1 Trip Pickup Delay 5 to 600 seconds 5 F001 5
86DD Remote RTD 1 Trip Reset Delay 5 to 600 seconds 5 F001 5
86DE Remote RTD 1 Trip Voting 0 to 13 --- 1 F603 0 (None)
86DF Remote RTD 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
86E0 Remote RTD 1 Open 0 to 2 --- 1 F552 0 (None)
86E1 Remote RTD 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-Reset)


86E2 Remote RTD 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
86E3 Repeatead for remote RTD input 2
86F6 Repeatead for remote RTD input 3
8709 Repeatead for remote RTD input 4
871C Repeatead for remote RTD input 5
872F Repeatead for remote RTD input 6 B
877B Repeatead for remote RTD input 10
878E Repeatead for remote RTD input 11
87A1 Repeatead for remote RTD input 12
Remote RTD inputs (Read Only Actual Values) (12 modules)
87C0 Remote RTD 1 Value 0 to 200 °C 1 F002 0
87CA Remote RTD 11 Value 0 to 200 °C 1 F002 0
87CB Remote RTD 12 Value 0 to 200 °C 1 F002 0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)
8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items) --- --- --- F300 0
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
8A00 Digital Element 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8A01 Digital Element 1 Name --- --- --- F203 “Dig Element 1“
8A09 Digital Element 1 Input 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8A0A Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
8A0C Digital Element 1 Reset Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
8A0E Digital Element 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8A0F Digital Element 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
8A10 Digital Element 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8A11 Digital Element 1 Pickup LED 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
8A12 Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0
8A14 ...Repeated for Digital Element 2
8A3C ...Repeated for Digital Element 4
8A8C ...Repeated for Digital Element 8
8AA0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 9
8AB4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 10
8AC8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 11
8ADC ...Repeated for Digital Element 12
8AF0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 13
8B04 ...Repeated for Digital Element 14
8B2C ...Repeated for Digital Element 16


8B7C ...Repeated for Digital Element 20
8BA4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 22
B 8BB8
8BCC
...Repeated for Digital Element 23
...Repeated for Digital Element 24
8BE0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 25
8BF4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 26
8C08 ...Repeated for Digital Element 27
8C1C ...Repeated for Digital Element 28
8C6C ...Repeated for Digital Element 32
8CA8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 35
8CBC ...Repeated for Digital Element 36
8CD0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 37
8CE4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 38
8CF8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 39
8D0C ...Repeated for Digital Element 40
8D20 ...Repeated for Digital Element 41
8D5C ...Repeated for Digital Element 44
8DAC ...Repeated for Digital Element 48
Trip Bus (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
8E00 Trip Bus 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8E01 Trip Bus 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E02 Trip Bus 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
8E03 Trip Bus 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
8E04 Trip Bus 1 Input 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E0A Trip Bus 1 Input 7 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E0B Trip Bus 1 Input 8 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E0C Trip Bus 1 Input 9 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E0D Trip Bus 1 Input 10 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E0E Trip Bus 1 Input 11 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E0F Trip Bus 1 Input 12 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
8E14 Trip Bus 1 Latching 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8E15 Trip Bus 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


8E16 Trip Bus 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
8E17 Trip Bus 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8E20 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 2
8E60 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 4 B
8EA0 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 6
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
9000 FlexElement™ 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9001 FlexElement™ 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “FxE 1”
9004 FlexElement™ 1 InputP 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9005 FlexElement™ 1 InputM 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9006 FlexElement™ 1 Compare 0 to 1 --- 1 F516 0 (LEVEL)
9007 FlexElement™ 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F515 0 (SIGNED)
9008 FlexElement™ 1 Direction 0 to 1 --- 1 F517 0 (OVER)
9009 FlexElement™ 1 Hysteresis 0.1 to 50 % 0.1 F001 30
900A FlexElement™ 1 Pickup -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
900C FlexElement™ 1 DeltaT Units 0 to 2 --- 1 F518 0 (Milliseconds)
900D FlexElement™ 1 DeltaT 20 to 86400 --- 1 F003 20
900F FlexElement™ 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9010 FlexElement™ 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9011 FlexElement™ 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9012 FlexElement™ 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
9013 FlexElement™ 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9014 ...Repeated for FlexElement™ 2
903C ...Repeated for FlexElement™ 4
90A0 ...Repeated for FlexElement™ 9
90B4 ...Repeated for FlexElement™ 10
90C8 ...Repeated for FlexElement™ 11
90DC ...Repeated for FlexElement™ 12
90F0 ...Repeated for FlexElement™ 13
DCmA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
9300 DCmA Output 1 Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9301 DCmA Output 1 Range 0 to 2 --- 1 F522 0 (–1 to 1 mA)
9302 DCmA Output 1 Minimum –90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 0
9304 DCmA Output 1 Maximum –90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
9306 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 2
930C ...Repeated for DCmA Output 3
931E ...Repeated for DCmA Output 6
932A ...Repeated for DCmA Output 8


B 935A
9360
...Repeated for DCmA Output 16
...Repeated for DCmA Output 17
938A ...Repeated for DCmA Output 24
Direct Input/Output Names (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
9400 Direct Input 1 Name 0 to 96 --- 1 F205 “Dir Ip 1”
9406 Direct Output 1 Name 1 to 96 --- 1 F205 “Dir Out 1”
940C ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 2
9418 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 3
94A8 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 15
94B4 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 16
94C0 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 17
94CC ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 18
94D8 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 19
94E4 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 20
94F0 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 21
94FC ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 22
IEC 61850 Received Integers (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
9910 IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger 1 Default Value 0 to 429496295 --- 1 F003 1000
9912 IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger Input 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F491 0 (Default Value)
9913 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 2


991C ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 5
991F ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 6
992B ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 10 B
992E ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 11
993A ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 15
993D ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 16
FlexElement Actual Values (Read Only) (16 modules)
9A01 FlexElement™ 1 Actual -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --- 0.001 F004 0
9A0B FlexElement™ 6 Actual -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --- 0.001 F004 0
9A0D FlexElement™ 7 Actual -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --- 0.001 F004 0
9A0F FlexElement™ 8 Actual -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --- 0.001 F004 0
9A1B FlexElement™ 14 Actual -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --- 0.001 F004 0
9A1D FlexElement™ 15 Actual -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --- 0.001 F004 0
9A1F FlexElement™ 16 Actual -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --- 0.001 F004 0
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)
9B00 Teleprotection Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9B01 Teleprotection Number of Terminals 2 to 3 --- 1 F001 2
9B02 Teleprotection Number of Channels 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
9B03 Teleprotection Local Relay ID 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
9B04 Teleprotection Terminal 1 ID 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
9B05 Teleprotection Terminal 2 ID 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
9B06 Reserved (10 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
9B10 Teleprotection Input 1-n Default States (16 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
9B30 Teleprotection Input 2-n Default States (16 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
9B50 Teleprotection Output 1-n Operand (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9B70 Teleprotection Output 2-n Operand (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs Commands (Read/Write Command)
9B90 Teleprotection Clear Lost Packets 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Teleprotection Channel Tests (Read Only)
9B91 Teleprotection Channel 1 Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 1 (OK)
9B92 Teleprotection Channel 1 Number of Lost Packets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
9B93 Teleprotection Channel 2 Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 2 (n/a)
9B94 Teleprotection Channel 2 Number of Lost Packets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
9B95 Teleprotection Network Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 2 (n/a)
9BA0 Teleprotection Channel 1 Input States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
9BA1 Teleprotection Channel 2 Input States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
9BB0 Teleprotection Input 1 States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
9BC0 Teleprotection Input 2 States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)


Undercurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
9F00 Undercurrent Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9F01 Undercurrent Speed 1 Start Block Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
9F02 Undercurrent Speed 1 Alarm Pickup 0.1 to 0.95 × FLA 0.01 F001 70
9F03 Undercurrent Speed 1 Alarm Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 200
B 9F04
9F05
Undercurrent Speed 1 Trip Pickup
Undercurrent Speed 1 Trip Pickup Delay
0.1 to 0.95
0 to 600
× FLA
s
0.01
0.01
F001
F001
70
100
9F06 Undercurrent Speed 1 Trip Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
9F07 Undercurrent Speed 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9F08 Undercurrent Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
9F09 Undercurrent Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9F0A Undercurrent Speed 2 Start Block Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
9F0B Undercurrent Speed 2 Alarm Pickup 0.1 to 0.95 × FLA 0.01 F001 70
9F0C Undercurrent Speed 2 Alarm Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 200
9F0D Undercurrent Speed 2 Trip Pickup 0.1 to 0.95 × FLA 0.01 F001 70
9F0E Undercurrent Speed 2 Trip Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
9F0F Undercurrent Speed 2 Trip Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
9F10 Undercurrent Speed 2 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Broken Rotor Bar Detection (Read Only Actual Values)
A020 Broken Rotor Bar Component Level –100 to 0 dB 0.1 F002 –1000
A021 Broken Rotor Bar Component Frequency 0 to 76 Hz 0.01 F001 0
A022 Motor Load at Broken Rotor Bar Calculation 0 to 1.5 × FLA 0.01 F001 0
A023 Motor Load Deviation at Broken Rotor Bar Calculation 0 to 1.5 × FLA 0.01 F001 0
A024 Time Stamp at Broken Rotor Bar Calculation 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
A026 Maximum Broken Rotor Bar Component Level –100 to 0 dB 0.1 F002 –1000
A027 Maximum Broken Rotor Bar Component Frequency 0 to 76 Hz 0.01 F001 0
A028 Motor Load at Broken Rotor Bar Maximum 0 to 1.5 × FLA 0.01 F001 0
A029 Motor Load Deviation at Broken Rotor Bar Maximum 0 to 1.5 × FLA 0.01 F001 0
A02A Time Stamp at Broken Rotor Bar Maximum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Broken Rotor Bar Commands (Read/Write Commands)
A02D Broken Rotor Bar Clear Data Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Broken Rotor Bar Detection (Read/Write Settings)
A030 Broken Rotor Bar Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A031 Start of Broken Rotor Bar Offset –12 to 11.99 Hz 0.01 F002 40
A032 End of Broken Rotor Bar Offset –11.99 to 12 Hz 0.01 F002 200
A033 Broken Rotor Bar Start Block Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 6000
A034 Minimum Motor Load 0.5 to 1 × FLA 0.01 F001 70
A035 Maximum Load Deviation 0 to 1 × FLA 0.01 F001 10
A036 Maximum Current Unbalance 0 to 100 % 0.1 F001 150
A037 Broken Rotor Bar Pickup –60 to –12 dB 1 F002 -40
A038 Broken Rotor Bar Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
A039 Broken Rotor Bar Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A03A Broken Rotor Bar Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A03B Broken Rotor Bar Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
A040 VT Fuse Failure 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A041 ...Repeated for VT Fuse Failure 2 Function
Current Unbalance Actual Values (Read Only)
A200 Current Unbalance 0 to 100 % 0.1 F001 0


Selector Switch Actual Values (Read Only)
A210 Selector Switch 1 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
A211 Selector Switch 2 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 1
Selector Switch Settings (Read/Write) (2 modules)
A280 Selector 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A281 Selector 1 Range 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 7 B
A282 Selector 1 Timeout 3 to 60 s 0.1 F001 50
A283 Selector 1 Step Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A284 Selector 1 Step Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A285 Selector 1 Acknowledge 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A286 Selector 1 Bit0 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A289 Selector 1 Bit Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A28A Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A28B Selector 1 Power Up Mode 0 to 2 --- 1 F084 0 (Restore)
A28C Selector 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A28D Selector 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A28E Reserved (10 items) --- --- 1 F001 0
A298 ...Repeated for Selector 2
DNP/IEC Points (Read/Write Setting)
A300 DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Binary Input Points (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A400 DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Analog Input Points (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
FlexCurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)
A600 FlexCurve C (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
A680 FlexCurve D (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
A700 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A701 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F519 0 (Reset Dominant)
A702 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Set 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A703 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A704 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A705 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A706 Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
A70A ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 2
A714 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 3
A71E ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 4
A73C ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 7
A75A ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 10
A76E ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 12
A78C ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 15
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
A800 Digital Counter 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A801 Digital Counter 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Counter 1"
A807 Digital Counter 1 Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
A80A Digital Counter 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


A80B Digital Counter 1 Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A80C Digital Counter 1 Down 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A80D Digital Counter 1 Preset –2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
A80F Digital Counter 1 Compare –2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
B
2147483647
A811 Digital Counter 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A812 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A813 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A814 Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A815 Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0
A820 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 2
A8A0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 6
A8C0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 7
A8E0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 8
IEC 61850 Received Analog Settings (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
AA00 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog 1 Default Value –1000000 to 1000000 --- 0.001 F060 1000
AA02 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F491 0 (Default Value)
AA03 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 1 Units --- --- --- F207 (none)
AA05 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 1 Per-Unit Base 0 to 999999999.999 --- 0.001 F060 1
AA07 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 2
AA0E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 3
AA1C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 5
AA2A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 7
AA3F ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 10
AA4D ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 12
AA5B ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 14
AA7E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 19
AA8C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 21
AA9A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 23
AAA1 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 24
AAA8 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 25
AAAF ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 26
AAB6 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 27
AABD ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 28
AAC4 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 29
AACB ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 30
AAD2 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 31
AAD9 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 32


IEC 61850 XCBR Configuration (Read/Write Settings and Commands) (6 modules)
AB24 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR1.ST.Loc status 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AB25 Command to clear XCBR1 OpCnt (operation counter) 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
AB26 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR2.ST.Loc status 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AB28 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR3.ST.Loc status 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0 B
AB2A Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR4.ST.Loc status 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AB2B Command to clear XCBR4 OpCnt (operation counter) 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
AB2C Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR5.ST.Loc status 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AB2D Command to clear XCBR5 OpCnt (operation counter) 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
AB2E Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR6.ST.Loc status 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AB2F Command to clear XCBR6 OpCnt (operation counter) 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
IEC 61850 LN Name Prefixes (Read/Write Settings)
AB30 IEC 61850 Logical Node LPHD1 Name Prefix 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AB33 IEC 61850 Logical Node PIOCx Name Prefix (72 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AC0B IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOCx Name Prefix (24 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AC53 IEC 61850 Logical Node PTUVx Name Prefix (13 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AC7A IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOVx Name Prefix (10 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AC98 IEC 61850 Logical Node PDISx Name Prefix (10 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
ACB6 IEC 61850 Logical Node RBRFx Name Prefix (24 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
ACFE IEC 61850 Logical Node RPSBx Name Prefix 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD01 IEC 61850 Logical Node RRECx Name Prefix (6 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD13 IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXUx Name Prefix (6 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD25 IEC 61850 Logical Node GGIOx Name Prefix (5 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD34 IEC 61850 Logical Node RFLOx Name Prefix (5 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD43 IEC 61850 Logical Node XCBRx Name Prefix (6 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD55 IEC 61850 Logical Node PTRCx Name Prefix (6 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD67 IEC 61850 Logical Node PDIFx Name Prefix (4 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD73 IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXNx Name Prefix (37 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
ADE2 IEC 61850 Logical Node CSWIx Name Prefix (30 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AE3C IEC 61850 Logical Node XSWIx Name Prefix (24 items) 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
IEC 61850 XSWI Configuration (Read/Write Settings) (24 modules)
AECF Operand for IEC 61850 XSWI1.ST.Loc status 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AED0 Command to clear XSWI1 OpCnt (operation counter) 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
AED1 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI2
AEDB Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI7
AEDD Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI8
AEDF Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI9
AEE1 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI10
AEEB Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI15
AEED Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI16
AEEF Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI17
AEF1 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI18


AEFB Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI23
AEFD Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI24
B IEC 61850 GGIO4 General Analog Configuration Settings (Read/Write)

AF00 Number of Analog Input Points in GGIO4 4 to 32 --- 4 F001 4
IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input Points Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
AF10 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Value --- --- --- F600 0
AF11 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Deadband 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 100000
AF13 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Minimum –1000000000000 to --- 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
AF15 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Maximum –1000000000000 to --- 0.001 F060 1000000
1000000000000
AF17 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 2
AF1E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 3
AF2C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 5
AF3A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 7
AF4F ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 10
AF5D ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 12
AF6B ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 14
AF8E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 19
AF9C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 21
AFA3 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 22
AFAA ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 23
AFB1 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 24
AFB8 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 25
AFBF ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 26
AFC6 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 27
AFCD ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 28
AFD4 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 29
AFDB ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 30
AFE2 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 31
AFE9 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 32
IEC 61850 GOOSE/GSSE Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
B01C Default GOOSE/GSSE Update Time 1 to 60 s 1 F001 60
B01D IEC 61850 GSSE Function (GsEna) 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
B01E IEC 61850 GSSE ID --- --- --- F209 “GSSEOut”
B03F IEC 61850 GOOSE Function (GoEna) 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B040 IEC 61850 GSSE Destination MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
B043 IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE ID --- --- --- F209 “GOOSEOut”
B064 IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE Destination MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
B067 IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 4
B068 IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 --- 1 F001 0


B069 IEC 61850 GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 --- 1 F001 0
B06A Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
IEC 61850 Server Configuration (Read/Write Settings/Commands)
B06C TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 / MMS Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 102
B06D IEC 61850 Logical Device Name --- --- --- F213 “IECName”
B07D IEC 61850 Logical Device Instance --- --- --- F213 “LDInst” B
B08D IEC 61850 LPHD Location 0 to 65534 --- 1 F204 “Location”
B0B5 Include Non-IEC 61850 Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B0B6 IEC 61850 Server Data Scanning Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B0B7 Reserved (9 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
B0C0 IEC 61850 MMXU TotW Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C2 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVAr Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C4 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C6 IEC 61850 MMXU TotPF Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C8 IEC 61850 MMXU Hz Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0CA IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsAB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0CC IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsBC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0CE IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsCA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D0 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsADeadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D2 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D4 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D6 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D8 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0DA IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0DC IEC 61850 MMXU A.neut Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0DE IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E0 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E2 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E4 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E6 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E8 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0EA IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0EC IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0EE IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0F0 IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0F2 IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0F4 IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0F6 ...Repeated for Deadband 2
B12C ...Repeated for Deadband 3
B162 ...Repeated for Deadband 4
B198 ...Repeated for Deadband 5
B1CE ...Repeated for Deadband 6
IEC 61850 Received Analogs (Read Only) (32 modules)
B210 IEC 61850 Received Analog 1 -1000000000000 to --- 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
B212 ...Repeated for Received Analog 2
B21A ...Repeated for Received Analog 6
B21C ...Repeated for Received Analog 7
B21E ...Repeated for Received Analog 8


B B22C
B22E
...Repeated for Received Analog 15
...Repeated for Received Analog 16
IEC 61850 Report Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
B280 IEC 61850 Report Control 1 RptID --- --- --- F209 (none)
B2A1 IEC 61850 Report Control 1 OptFlds 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B2A2 IEC 61850 Report Control 1 BufTm 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
B2A4 IEC 61850 Report Control 1 TrgOps 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B2A5 IEC 61850 Report Control 1 IntgPd 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
B2A7 ...Repeated for Report 2
B2CE ...Repeated for Report 3
B2F5 ...Repeated for Report 4
B31C ...Repeated for Report 5
B343 ...Repeated for Report 6
B36A ...Repeated for Report 7
B3B8 ...Repeated for Report 9
B3DF ...Repeated for Report 10
B42D ...Repeated for Report 12
B47B ...Repeated for Report 14
B4A2 ...Repeated for Report 15
B4C9 ...Repeated for Report 16
IEC 61850 GGIO1 Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting)
B500 Number of Status Indications in GGIO1 8 to 128 --- 8 F001 8
B501 IEC 61850 GGIO1 Indication FlexLogic Operands (128 --- --- --- F300 0
items)
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Transmission (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B5A0 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function (GoEna) 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
B5A1 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID --- --- --- F209 “GOOSEOut_x_”
B5C2 Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
B5C5 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 4
B5C6 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 --- 1 F001 0


B5C7 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 --- 1 F001 0
B5C8 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev (Configuration 1 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 1
Revision)
B5CA IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransmission Curve 0 to 3 --- 1 F611 3 (Relaxed)
B5CB Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for Transmission 0 to 542 --- 1 F232 0 (None)
(64 items)
B60B ...Repeated for Module 2 B
B676 ...Repeated for Module 3
B6E1 ...Repeated for Module 4
B74C ...Repeated for Module 5
B7B7 ...Repeated for Module 6
B88D ...Repeated for Module 8
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Reception (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B900 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for 0 to 197 --- 1 F233 0 (None)
Transmission (64 items)
B9C0 ...Repeated for Module 4
BA00 ...Repeated for Module 5
BAC0 ...Repeated for Module 8
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
BB00 Contact Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Ip 1“
BB06 Contact Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
BB07 Contact Input 1 Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
BB08 ...Repeated for Contact Input 2
BBA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 21
BBA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 22
BBB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 23
BBB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 24
BBC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 25
BBC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 26
BBD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 27
BBD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 28
BBE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 29


BBE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 30
BBF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 31
BBF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 32
BC00 ...Repeated for Contact Input 33
B BC10
BC18
...Repeated for Contact Input 35
...Repeated for Contact Input 36
BCA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 53
BCA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 54
BCB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 55
BCB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 56
BCC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 57
BCC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 58
BCD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 59
BCD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 60
BCE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 61
BCE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 62
BCF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 63
BCF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 64
BD00 ...Repeated for Contact Input 65


BDA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 85
BDA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 86
BDB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 87
BDB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 88
BDC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 89 B
BDC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 90
BDD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 91
BDD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 92
BDE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 93
BDE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 94
BDF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 95
BDF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 96
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)
BE00 Contact Input n Threshold, n = 1 to 48 (48 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F128 1 (33 Vdc)
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
BE30 Virtual Input 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
BE31 Virtual Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Ip 1“
BE37 Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 0 (Latched)
BE38 Virtual Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
BE39 Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0
BE3C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 2
BE48 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 3
BEA8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 11
BEB4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 12
BEC0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 13
BECC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 14
BED8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 15
BEE4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 16
BEF0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 17
BEFC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 18
BF08 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 19
BF2C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 22
BFA4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 32
BFB0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 33
BFBC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 34


BFC8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 35
BFD4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 36
BFE0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 37
BFEC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 38
BFF8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 39
B C004
C010
...Repeated for Virtual Input 40
...Repeated for Virtual Input 41
C01C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 42
C028 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 43
C0A0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 53
C0AC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 54
C0B8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 55
C0C4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 56
C0D0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 57
C0DC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 58
C0E8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 59
C0F4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 60
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
C130 Virtual Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Op 1 “
C136 Virtual Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C137 Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
C138 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 2
C1A0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 15
C1B0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 17
C1C0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 19
C1D0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 21


C1E0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 23
C1F0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 25
C200 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 27 B


B C3B0
C3B8
...Repeated for Virtual Output 81
...Repeated for Virtual Output 82
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)
C430 Test Mode Function 0 to 2 --- 1 F245 0 (Disabled)
C431 Force VFD and LED 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
C432 Test Mode (Initiate) Forcing 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 1
Clear Commands (Read/Write)
C433 Clear All Relay Records Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Mandatory (Read Only)
C434 DSP Advanced Diagnostics Active 0 to 1 -- 1 F126 0 (No)
C435 Synchrophasor Feature Active 0 to 1 -- 1 F126 0 (No)
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
C440 Contact Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Op 1"
C446 Contact Output 1 Operation 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C447 Contact Output 1 Seal In 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C448 Latching Output 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C449 Contact Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
C44A Latching Output 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F090 0 (Operate-dominant)
C44B Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
C44C ...Repeated for Contact Output 2
C458 ...Repeated for Contact Output 3
C4A0 ...Repeated for Contact Output 9
C4AC ...Repeated for Contact Output 10
C4B8 ...Repeated for Contact Output 11
C4C4 ...Repeated for Contact Output 12
C4D0 ...Repeated for Contact Output 13
C4DC ...Repeated for Contact Output 14
C4E8 ...Repeated for Contact Output 15
C4F4 ...Repeated for Contact Output 16


C548 ...Repeated for Contact Output 23 B
C5CC ...Repeated for Contact Output 34
C5FC ...Repeated for Contact Output 38
C6BC ...Repeated for Contact Output 54
C6EC ...Repeated for Contact Output 58
Reset (Read/Write Setting)
C750 FlexLogic™ operand which initiates a reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)
C760 Control Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C761 Control Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C762 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 2


C76A ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 6
C76C ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 7
Clear Records (Read/Write Setting)
B C771
C772
Clear User Fault Reports Operand
Clear Event Records Operand
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F300
F300
0
0
C773 Clear Oscillography Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C774 Clear Data Logger Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C77D Clear Energy Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C77F Clear Unauthorized Access Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C780 Clear Start Data Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C781 Clear Platform Direct Input/Output Statistics Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
C783 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Force Contact Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)
C7A0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items) 0 to 2 --- 1 F144 0 (Disabled)
C800 Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F131 0 (Disabled)
Direct Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
C880 Direct Device ID 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
C881 Direct I/O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
C882 Platform Direct I/O Data Rate 64 to 128 kbps 64 F001 64
C883 Direct I/O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
C884 Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Direct Input/Output Commands (Read/Write Command)
C888 Direct Input/Output Clear Counters Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Direct Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
C890 Direct Input 1 Device Number 0 to 16 --- 1 F001 0
C891 Direct Input 1 Number 0 to 96 --- 1 F001 0
C892 Direct Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
C893 Direct Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C894 ...Repeated for Direct Input 2
C89C ...Repeated for Direct Input 4
C8A0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 5
C8AC ...Repeated for Direct Input 8
C8B0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 9
C8BC ...Repeated for Direct Input 12
C8C0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 13
C8CC ...Repeated for Direct Input 16
C8D0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 17
C8DC ...Repeated for Direct Input 20
C8E0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 21
C8EC ...Repeated for Direct Input 24
C8F0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 25


C8FC ...Repeated for Direct Input 28
C908 ...Repeated for Direct Input 31 B
C90C ...Repeated for Direct Input 32
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
CA10 Direct Output 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
CA11 Direct Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CA12 ...Repeated for Direct Output 2
CA1A ...Repeated for Direct Output 6
CA1C ...Repeated for Direct Output 7
CA1E ...Repeated for Direct Output 8
Direct Input/Output Alarms (Read/Write Setting)
CAD0 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAD1 Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Message Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
CAD2 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CAD3 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAD4 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CAD8 Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAD9 Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Message Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
CADA Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CADB Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CADC Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CAE0 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAE1 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600


CAE2 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CAE3 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAE4 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CAE8 Direct IO Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAE9 Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
B CAEA
CAEB
Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold
Direct I/O Channel 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events
1 to 1000
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F001
F102
10
0 (Disabled)
CAEC Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
CB00 Remote Device 1 GSSE/GOOSE Application ID --- --- --- F209 “Remote Device 1“
CB21 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Ethernet APPID 0 to 16383 --- 1 F001 0
CB22 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Dataset 0 to 8 --- 1 F184 0 (Fixed)
CB23 Remote Device 1 in PMU Scheme 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
CB24 ...Repeated for Device 2
CB6C ...Repeated for Device 4
CBB4 ...Repeated for Device 6
CBD8 ...Repeated for Device 7
CBFC ...Repeated for Device 8
CC20 ...Repeated for Device 9
CC8C ...Repeated for Device 12
CCB0 ...Repeated for Device 13
CCD4 ...Repeated for Device 14
CCF8 ...Repeated for Device 15
CD1C ...Repeated for Device 16
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
CFA0 Remote Input 1 Device 1 to 32 --- 1 F001 1
CFA1 Remote Input 1 Bit Pair 0 to 128 --- 1 F156 0 (None)
CFA2 Remote Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
CFA3 Remote Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CFA4 Remote Input 1 Name 1 to 64 --- 1 F205 “Rem Ip 1”
CFAA ...Repeated for Remote Input 2
CFB4 ...Repeated for Remote Input 3
CFBE ...Repeated for Remote Input 4
CFC8 ...Repeated for Remote Input 5
CFD2 ...Repeated for Remote Input 6
CFDC ...Repeated for Remote Input 7
CFE6 ...Repeated for Remote Input 8
CFF0 ...Repeated for Remote Input 9
CFFA ...Repeated for Remote Input 10
D004 ...Repeated for Remote Input 11
D00E ...Repeated for Remote Input 12
D02C ...Repeated for Remote Input 15
D04A ...Repeated for Remote Input 18
D05E ...Repeated for Remote Input 20


D07C ...Repeated for Remote Input 23
D09A ...Repeated for Remote Input 26
D0A4 ...Repeated for Remote Input 27 B
D0AE ...Repeated for Remote Input 28
D0B8 ...Repeated for Remote Input 29
D0C2 ...Repeated for Remote Input 30
D0CC ...Repeated for Remote Input 31
D0D6 ...Repeated for Remote Input 32
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
D220 Remote Output DNA 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D221 Remote Output DNA 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D222 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
D224 ...Repeated for Remote Output 2
D22C ...Repeated for Remote Output 4
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
D2A0 Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D2A1 Remote Output UserSt 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D2A2 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
D2A4 ...Repeated for Remote Output 2
D2A8 ...Repeated for Remote Output 3
D2AC ...Repeated for Remote Output 4
D2B0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 5


D2BC ...Repeated for Remote Output 8
D2C0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 9
D2C4 ...Repeated for Remote Output 10
B D2C8
D2CC
...Repeated for Remote Output 11
...Repeated for Remote Output 12
D2D0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 13
D2DC ...Repeated for Remote Output 16
D2E0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 17
D2EC ...Repeated for Remote Output 20
D2F0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 21
D2FC ...Repeated for Remote Output 24
IEC 61850 GGIO2 Control Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
D320 IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO1.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
D32A IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO11.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
D32B IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO12.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
D32C IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO13.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
D32D IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO14.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
D32E IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO15.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
D32F IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO16.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2


D33F IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO32.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2 B
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (32 modules)
D380 Remote Device 1 StNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
D382 Remote Device 1 SqNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
D384 ...Repeated for Remote Device 2
D38C ...Repeated for Remote Device 4
D39C ...Repeated for Remote Device 8
D3A0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 9
D3AC ...Repeated for Remote Device 12
D3B0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 13


D3BC ...Repeated for Remote Device 16
D3C0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 17
B D3CC
D3D0
...Repeated for Remote Device 20
...Repeated for Remote Device 21
D3D4 ...Repeated for Remote Device 22
D3D8 ...Repeated for Remote Device 23
D3DC ...Repeated for Remote Device 24
D3E0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 25
D3EC ...Repeated for Remote Device 28
D3F0 ...Repeated for Remote Device 29
D3FC ...Repeated for Remote Device 32
Settings File Template (Read/Write Setting)
ED00 FlexLogic™ Displays Active 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
ED01 Reserved (6 items) --- --- --- F205 (none)
ED07 Last Settings Change Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
ED09 Template Bitmask (750 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001 F040
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F050
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
B
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January
1, 1970.
F003
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register. F051
Low order word is stored in the second register. UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,
2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
F004
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register.
Low order word is stored in the second register. F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).
F005
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Seconds (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
F006 1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F060
F011 FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which
F070
are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio
and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup
ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the off-
F071
set into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time HEX4 4 BYTES - 8 ASCII DIGITS
value is stored.
F072
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the F073
number of decimal points to display. HEX8 8 BYTES - 16 ASCII DIGITS
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three
decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is
F074
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the dis-
played value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F083
F013
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES
POWER_FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)
0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values
indicate leading.
F084
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP
0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore

F086 F103
ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES
0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
bitmask curve shape bitmask curve shape
0 IEEE Mod Inv 9 IAC Inverse
F090 1 IEEE Very Inv 10 IAC Short Inv
ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE
B
2 IEEE Ext Inv 11 I2t
0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant 3 IEC Curve A 12 Definite Time

4 IEC Curve B 13 FlexCurve™ A
5 IEC Curve C 14 FlexCurve™ B
F095 6 IEC Short Inv 15 FlexCurve™ C
ENUMERATION: REDUCED VOLTAGE START TRANSITION
7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve™ D
MODE
8 IAC Very Inv
0 = Current Only, 1 = Current or Timer, 2 = Current and Timer
F104
F096 ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
ENUMERATION: THERMAL MODEL CURVE EFFECT
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed
0 = Cutoff, 1 = Shift
F105
F097 ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT
ENUMERATION: MOTOR ACCELERATION MODE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Adaptive
F106
F098 ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION
ENUMERATION: MOTOR STATUS
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
0 = Offline, 1 = Starting, 2 = Running, 3 = Overload
F108
F099 ENUMERATION: OFF/ON
ENUMERATION: MOTOR CURVES
0 = Off, 1 = On
0 = Motor, 1 = FlexCurve™ A, 2 = FlexCurve™ B,
3 = FlexCurve™ C, 4 = FlexCurve™ D, 5 = IEC
F109
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
F100
ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE 0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
0 = Wye, 1 = Delta
F110
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
F101
ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY 0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%

F111
ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES
F102
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED 0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled

F112 F119
ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE™ PICKUP RATIOS
bitmask value bitmask value bitmask value mask value mask value mask value mask value
0 300 4 9600 8 115200 0 0.00 30 0.88 60 2.90 90 5.90
1 1200 5 19200 9 14400 1 0.05 31 0.90 61 3.00 91 6.00
2 2400 6 38400 10 28800 2 0.10 32 0.91 62 3.10 92 6.50
3 4800 7 57600 11 33600 3 0.15 33 0.92 63 3.20 93 7.00 B
4 0.20 34 0.93 64 3.30 94 7.50
5 0.25 35 0.94 65 3.40 95 8.00
F113
6 0.30 36 0.95 66 3.50 96 8.50
ENUMERATION: PARITY
7 0.35 37 0.96 67 3.60 97 9.00
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
8 0.40 38 0.97 68 3.70 98 9.50
9 0.45 39 0.98 69 3.80 99 10.00
F114 10 0.48 40 1.03 70 3.90 100 10.50
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE 11 0.50 41 1.05 71 4.00 101 11.00
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated 12 0.52 42 1.10 72 4.10 102 11.50

13 0.54 43 1.20 73 4.20 103 12.00
14 0.56 44 1.30 74 4.30 104 12.50
F115 15 0.58 45 1.40 75 4.40 105 13.00
ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS
16 0.60 46 1.50 76 4.50 106 13.50
0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B 17 0.62 47 1.60 77 4.60 107 14.00
18 0.64 48 1.70 78 4.70 108 14.50
19 0.66 49 1.80 79 4.80 109 15.00
F116
ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE CURVES 20 0.68 50 1.90 80 4.90 110 15.50
21 0.70 51 2.00 81 5.00 111 16.00
0 = Definite Time, 1 = FlexCurve™ A, 2 = FlexCurve™ B,
3 = FlexCurve™ C 22 0.72 52 2.10 82 5.10 112 16.50
23 0.74 53 2.20 83 5.20 113 17.00
24 0.76 54 2.30 84 5.30 114 17.50
F117 25 0.78 55 2.40 85 5.40 115 18.00
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
26 0.80 56 2.50 86 5.50 116 18.50
0 = 1×72 cycles, 1 = 3×36 cycles, 2 = 7×18 cycles, 3 = 15×9 cycles 27 0.82 57 2.60 87 5.60 117 19.00
28 0.84 58 2.70 88 5.70 118 19.50
29 0.86 59 2.80 89 5.80 119 20.00
F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected F122
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
F123
ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
F124
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
bitmask element
0 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
16 Phase Time Overcurrent 1
17 Phase Time Overcurrent 2
32 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1

bitmask element bitmask element

33 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 407 FlexElement™ 8
48 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 408 FlexElement™ 9
49 Neutral Time Overcurrent 2 409 FlexElement™ 10
64 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 410 FlexElement™ 11
65 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 411 FlexElement™ 12
80 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 412 FlexElement™ 13
B 81 Ground Time Overcurrent 2 413 FlexElement™ 14
101 Opposite Phase Rotation 414 FlexElement™ 15
120 Negative Sequence Overvoltage 1 415 FlexElement™ 16
121 Negative Sequence Overvoltage 2 420 Non-volatile Latch 1
122 Negative Sequence Overvoltage 3 421 Non-volatile Latch 2
140 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 422 Non-volatile Latch 3
141 Auxiliary Undervoltage 2 423 Non-volatile Latch 4
144 Phase Undervoltage 1 424 Non-volatile Latch 5
148 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 427 Non-volatile Latch 8
149 Auxiliary Overvoltage 2 428 Non-volatile Latch 9
152 Phase Overvoltage 1 429 Non-volatile Latch 10
154 Compensated Overvoltage 1 430 Non-volatile Latch 11
156 Neutral Overvoltage 1 431 Non-volatile Latch 12
214 Sensitive Directional Power 1 432 Non-volatile Latch 13
215 Sensitive Directional Power 2 433 Non-volatile Latch 14
259 Reduced Voltage Start 434 Non-volatile Latch 15
260 Motor Thermal Model 435 Non-volatile Latch 16
261 Acceleration Time 544 Digital Counter 1
265 Stator Differential 545 Digital Counter 2
294 Breaker 1 Flashover 546 Digital Counter 3
295 Breaker 2 Flashover 547 Digital Counter 4
324 Current unbalance 1 548 Digital Counter 5
325 Current unbalance 2 549 Digital Counter 6
336 Setting Group 550 Digital Counter 7
337 Reset 551 Digital Counter 8
377 Starts-per-hour 692 Digital Element 1
378 Time between starts 693 Digital Element 2
379 Restart delay 694 Digital Element 3
380 Mechanical jam 695 Digital Element 4
388 Selector 1 696 Digital Element 5
389 Selector 2 697 Digital Element 6
390 Control pushbutton 1 698 Digital Element 7
400 FlexElement™ 1 705 Digital Element 14

bitmask element bitmask element

712 Digital Element 21 865 RTD Input 17
718 Digital Element 27 871 RTD Input 23 B
840 Underpower 1 893 RTD Input 45
841 Underpower 2 894 RTD Input 46
842 Trip Bus 1 895 RTD Input 47
843 Trip Bus 2 896 RTD Input 48
844 Trip Bus 3 900 User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
848 Undercurrent 904 User-Programmable Pushbutton 5
849 RTD Input 1 905 User-Programmable Pushbutton 6
860 RTD Input 12 920 Disconnect switch 1

bitmask element
F130
925 Disconnect switch 6
ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
927 Disconnect switch 8 0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
929 Disconnect switch 10 F131
930 Disconnect switch 11 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
B 931 Disconnect switch 12
0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
934 Disconnect switch 15 F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
968 Breaker 1 0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
969 Breaker 2
970 Breaker 3
F134
971 Breaker 4 ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL
991 Remote RTD Input 1
0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
994 Remote RTD Input 4 F137
995 Remote RTD Input 5 ENUMERATION: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON
FUNCTION
997 Remote RTD Input 7 0 = Disabled, 1 = Self-Reset, 2 = Latched
F138
1000 Remote RTD Input 10 ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
1004 Broken Rotor Bar
F140
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
F125 DISABLED
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V,
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service 3 = Current 4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A,
6 = Notched 2 A
F126
ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE F141
0 = No, 1 = Yes ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERRORS
Bitmask Error
F127 0 Any Self Tests
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING 1 IRIG-B Failure
0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset 2 Port 1 Offline

3 Port 2 Offline
4 Port 3 Offline
F128 5 Port 4 Offline
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
6 Port 5 Offline
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC 7 Port 6 Offline
8 RRTD Communications Failure
9 Voltage Monitor
F129
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE 10 FlexLogic Error Token
11 Equipment Mismatch
0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
12 Process Bus Failure
13 Unit Not Programmed

Bitmask Error
F145
14 System Exception
ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
15 Latching Output Discrepancy
16 Ethernet Switch Fail bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type
17 Maintenance Alert 01 0 null 7 G 14 N 21 U
18 SNTP Failure 1 A 8 H 15 O 22 V
19 --- 2 B 9 I 16 P 23 W
20 Primary Ethernet Fail 3 C 10 J 17 Q 24 X B
21 Secondary Ethernet Fail 4 D 11 K 18 R 25 Y
22 Temperature Monitor 5 E 12 L 19 S 26 Z
23 Process Bus Trouble 6 F 13 M 20 T
24 Brick Trouble
25 Field RTD Trouble
F146
26 Field TDR Trouble
ENUMERATION: MISCELLANEOUS EVENT CAUSES
27 Remote Device Offline
28 Direct Device Offline bitmask definition
29 Direct Input/Output Ring Break 0 Events Cleared
30 Any Minor Error 1 Oscillography Triggered
31 Any Major Error 2 Date/time Changed
32 --- 3 Default Settings Loaded
33 --- 4 Test Mode Forcing On
34 Unit Not Calibrated 5 Test Mode Forcing Off
35 --- 6 Power On
36 Watchdog Error 7 Power Off
37 Low On Memory 8 Relay In Service
38 --- 9 Relay Out Of Service
43 Module Failure 01 10 Watchdog Reset
44 Module Failure 02 11 Oscillography Clear
45 Module Failure 03 12 Reboot Command
46 Module Failure 04 13 LED Test Initiated
47 Module Failure 05 14 Flash Programming
48 Module Failure 06 15 Fault Report Trigger
49 Module Failure 07 16 User Programmable Fault Report Trigger
50 Module Failure 08 17 ---
51 Module Failure 09 18 Reload CT/VT module Settings
52 Incompatible Hardware 19 ---
53 Module Failure 10 20 Ethernet Port 1 Offline
23 Ethernet Port 4 Offline
24 Ethernet Port 5 Offline
F142
ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE 25 Ethernet Port 6 Offline
26 Test Mode Isolated
0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
27 Test Mode Forcible
28 Test Mode Disabled
F143 29 Temperature Warning On
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number) 30 Temperature Warning Off
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error 31 Unauthorized Access
32 System Integrity Recovery
33 System Integrity Recovery 06
F144
34 System Integrity Recovery 07
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed

F151 F156
ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
bitmask value bitmask value
0 NONE 17 RTD 17 33 RTD 33
0 NONE 35 UserSt-3
1 RTD 1 18 RTD 18 34 RTD 34
1 DNA-1 36 UserSt-4
2 RTD 2 19 RTD 19 35 RTD 35
B
2 DNA-2 37 UserSt-5
3 RTD 3 20 RTD 20 36 RTD 36
3 DNA-3 38 UserSt-6
4 RTD 4 21 RTD 21 37 RTD 37
4 DNA-4 39 UserSt-7
5 RTD 5 22 RTD 22 38 RTD 38
5 DNA-5 40 UserSt-8
6 RTD 6 23 RTD 23 39 RTD 39
6 DNA-6 41 UserSt-9
7 RTD 7 24 RTD 24 40 RTD 40
7 DNA-7 42 UserSt-10
8 RTD 8 25 RTD 25 41 RTD 41
9 RTD 9 26 RTD 26 42 RTD 42
10 RTD 10 27 RTD 27 43 RTD 43
11 RTD 11 28 RTD 28 44 RTD 44
12 RTD 12 29 RTD 29 45 RTD 45
13 RTD 13 30 RTD 30 46 RTD 46
14 RTD 14 31 RTD 31 47 RTD 47
15 RTD 15 32 RTD 32 48 RTD 48
16 RTD 16
F152
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP 19 DNA-19 54 UserSt-22
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6 21 DNA-21 56 UserSt-24
F155 24 DNA-24 59 UserSt-27
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
0 = Offline, 1 = Online 26 DNA-26 61 UserSt-29
30 DNA-30 65 Dataset Item 1
33 UserSt-1 ↓ ↓
34 UserSt-2 128 Dataset Item 64
F157
ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE
0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
F159
ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING
0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None
F166
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca

F167 F177
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4, 0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6 3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network - TCP, 5 = Network - UDP
F168 F178
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES B
0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd 0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min,
5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min, 8 = 15 ms, 9 = 30 ms,
10 = 100 ms, 11 = 500 ms
F170
ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET and GAIN
TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT SELECTION F180
ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE F181
ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE
0 = DCmA IN, 1 = Ohms IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = DCmA OUT,
4 = RRTD IN 0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
F172 F183
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask definition
0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U 0 Off
1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V 1 8 samples/cycle
2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W 2 16 samples/cycle
3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X 3 32 samples/cycle
4 64 samples/cycle
F173
ENUMERATION: DCMA INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE F184
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE GOOSE DATASET
bitmask DCmA input/output range
0 0 to –1 mA value GOOSE dataset
1 0 to 1 mA 0 Fixed
2 –1 to 1 mA 1 GooseIn 1
3 0 to 5 mA 2 GooseIn 2
6 GooseIn 6
7 GooseIn 7
F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE 8 GooseIn 8
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,

2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper F185
ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
F175 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C F186
ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase

F190 F201
ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE
4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
bitmsk keypress bitmsk keypress
0 --- 23 Reset
use between real keys
24 User 1 F202
TEXT20: 20-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
B
1 1 25 User 2
2 2 26 User 3 10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
3 3 27 User-programmable key 1
5 5 29 User-programmable key 3 F203
8 8 32 User-programmable key 6 F204
9 9 33 User-programmable key 7 TEXT80: 80-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
11 Decimal Point 35 User-programmable key 9
F205
12 Plus/Minus 36 User-programmable key 10 TEXT12: 12-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
13 Value Up 37 User-programmable key 11
14 Value Down 38 User-programmable key 12
15 Message Up 43 User-programmable key 13 F206
16 Message Down 44 User-programmable key 14
17 Message Left 45 User-programmable key 15
18 Message Right 46 User-programmable key 16 F207
19 Menu TEXT4: 4-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
20 Help
21 Escape
F208
22 --- TEXT2: 2-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F192 F211
ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE ENUMERATION: SOURCE SELECTION
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex 0 = None, 1 = SRC 1, 2 = SRC 2, 3 = SRC 3, 4 = SRC 4,
5 = SRC 5, 6 = SRC 6
F194
ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE F213
0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 6 = 10000, TEXT32: 32-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
F220
F196 ENUMERATION: PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY
ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
OPERATING CURRENT value priority
0 Disabled
0 = Calculated 3I0, 1 = Measured IG
1 Normal
2 High Priority
F199
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM
F222
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
F200
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB

value GOOSE dataset item

F226
278 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT/OUTPUT TRANSFER
279 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
METHOD
280 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
0 = None, 1 = GSSE, 2 = GOOSE
281 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f
282 MMXU1.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
F227 283 MMXU1.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
ENUMERATION: RELAY SERVICE STATUS 284 MMXU1.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f B
0 = Unknown, 1 = Relay In Service, 2 = Relay Out Of Service 285 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
286 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
287 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
F230
288 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f
ENUMERATION: DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING
289 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f
0 = Voltage, 1 = Current, 2 = Dual 290 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f
291 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f
F231 292 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f

ENUMERATION: POLARIZING VOLTAGE 293 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f
294 MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f
0 = Calculated V0, 1 = Measured VX
295 MMXU2.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
296 MMXU2.MX.TotVA.mag.f
F232 297 MMXU2.MX.TotPF.mag.f
ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
298 MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f
FOR TRANSMISSION
299 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
value GOOSE dataset item 300 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
0 None 301 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
1 GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q 302 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
2 GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal 303 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f
3 GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q 304 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f
4 GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal 305 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f
↓ ↓ 306 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f
255 GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q 307 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f
256 GGIO1.ST.Ind128.stVal 308 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f
257 MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f 309 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f
258 MMXU1.MX.TotVAr.mag.f 310 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f
259 MMXU1.MX.TotVA.mag.f 311 MMXU2.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f
260 MMXU1.MX.TotPF.mag.f 312 MMXU2.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
261 MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f 313 MMXU2.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
262 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f 314 MMXU2.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
263 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f 315 MMXU2.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
264 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f 316 MMXU2.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
265 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f 317 MMXU2.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
266 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f 318 MMXU2.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f
267 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f 319 MMXU2.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
268 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f 320 MMXU2.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
269 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f 321 MMXU2.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f
270 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f 322 MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
271 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f 323 MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
272 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f 324 MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
273 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f 325 MMXU2.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f
274 MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f 326 MMXU2.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f
275 MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f 327 MMXU2.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f
276 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f 328 MMXU2.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f
277 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f 329 MMXU2.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f

330 MMXU2.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f

value GOOSE dataset item value GOOSE dataset item

331 MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f 384 MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f
332 MMXU3.MX.TotVAr.mag.f 385 MMXU4.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f
333 MMXU3.MX.TotVA.mag.f 386 MMXU4.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
334 MMXU3.MX.TotPF.mag.f 387 MMXU4.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
335 MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f 388 MMXU4.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
336 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f 389 MMXU4.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
B 337 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f 390 MMXU4.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
338 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f 391 MMXU4.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
339 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f 392 MMXU4.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f
340 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f 393 MMXU4.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
341 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f 394 MMXU4.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
342 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f 395 MMXU4.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f
343 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f 396 MMXU4.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
344 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f 397 MMXU4.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
345 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f 398 MMXU4.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
346 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f 399 MMXU4.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f
347 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f 400 MMXU4.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f
348 MMXU3.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f 401 MMXU4.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f
349 MMXU3.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f 402 MMXU4.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f
350 MMXU3.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f 403 MMXU4.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f
351 MMXU3.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f 404 MMXU4.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f
352 MMXU3.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f 405 MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f
353 MMXU3.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f 406 MMXU5.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
354 MMXU3.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f 407 MMXU5.MX.TotVA.mag.f
355 MMXU3.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f 408 MMXU5.MX.TotPF.mag.f
356 MMXU3.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f 409 MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f
357 MMXU3.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f 410 MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
358 MMXU3.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f 411 MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
359 MMXU3.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f 412 MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
360 MMXU3.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f 413 MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
361 MMXU3.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f 414 MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f
362 MMXU3.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f 415 MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f
363 MMXU3.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f 416 MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f
364 MMXU3.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f 417 MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f
365 MMXU3.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f 418 MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f
366 MMXU3.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f 419 MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f
367 MMXU3.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f 420 MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f
368 MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f 421 MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f
369 MMXU4.MX.TotVAr.mag.f 422 MMXU5.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f
370 MMXU4.MX.TotVA.mag.f 423 MMXU5.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
371 MMXU4.MX.TotPF.mag.f 424 MMXU5.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
372 MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f 425 MMXU5.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
373 MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f 426 MMXU5.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
374 MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f 427 MMXU5.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
375 MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f 428 MMXU5.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
376 MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f 429 MMXU5.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f
377 MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f 430 MMXU5.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
378 MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f 431 MMXU5.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
379 MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f 432 MMXU5.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f
380 MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f 433 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
381 MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f 434 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
382 MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f 435 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
383 MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f 436 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f

value GOOSE dataset item value GOOSE dataset item

437 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f 490 GGIO4.MX.AnIn12.mag.f
438 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f 491 GGIO4.MX.AnIn13.mag.f
439 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f 492 GGIO4.MX.AnIn14.mag.f
440 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f 493 GGIO4.MX.AnIn15.mag.f
441 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f 494 GGIO4.MX.AnIn16.mag.f
442 MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f 495 GGIO4.MX.AnIn17.mag.f
443 MMXU6.MX.TotVAr.mag.f 496 GGIO4.MX.AnIn18.mag.f B
444 MMXU6.MX.TotVA.mag.f 497 GGIO4.MX.AnIn19.mag.f
445 MMXU6.MX.TotPF.mag.f 498 GGIO4.MX.AnIn20.mag.f
446 MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f 499 GGIO4.MX.AnIn21.mag.f
447 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f 500 GGIO4.MX.AnIn22.mag.f
448 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f 501 GGIO4.MX.AnIn23.mag.f
449 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f 502 GGIO4.MX.AnIn24.mag.f
450 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f 503 GGIO4.MX.AnIn25.mag.f
451 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f 504 GGIO4.MX.AnIn26.mag.f
452 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f 505 GGIO4.MX.AnIn27.mag.f
453 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f 506 GGIO4.MX.AnIn28.mag.f
454 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f 507 GGIO4.MX.AnIn29.mag.f
455 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f 508 GGIO4.MX.AnIn30.mag.f
456 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f 509 GGIO4.MX.AnIn31.mag.f
457 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f 510 GGIO4.MX.AnIn32.mag.f
458 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f 511 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q
459 MMXU6.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f 512 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal
460 MMXU6.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f 513 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.q
461 MMXU6.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f 514 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.stVal
462 MMXU6.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f 515 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.q
463 MMXU6.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f 516 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.stVal
464 MMXU6.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f 517 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.q
465 MMXU6.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f 518 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.stVal
466 MMXU6.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f 519 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.q
467 MMXU6.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f 520 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.stVal
468 MMXU6.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f 521 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.q
469 MMXU6.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f 522 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.stVal
470 MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f 523 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.q
471 MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f 524 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.stVal
472 MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f 525 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.q
473 MMXU6.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f 526 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.stVal
474 MMXU6.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f 527 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.q
475 MMXU6.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f 528 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.stVal
476 MMXU6.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f 529 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.q
477 MMXU6.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f 530 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.stVal
478 MMXU6.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f 531 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.q
479 GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.mag.f 532 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.stVal
480 GGIO4.MX.AnIn2.mag.f 533 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.q

value GOOSE dataset item

F233
170 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.q
ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
171 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.stVal
FOR RECEPTION
172 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.q
value GOOSE dataset item 173 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.stVal
0 None 174 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.q
1 GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q 175 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.stVal
B 2 GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal 176 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn6.q
3 GGIO3.ST.Ind2.q 177 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn6.stVal
4 GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal 178 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn7.q
↓ ↓ 179 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn7.stVal
127 GGIO1.ST.Ind64q 180 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn8.q
128 GGIO1.ST.Ind64.stVal 181 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn8.stVal
145 GGIO3.MX.AnIn17.mag.f
F237
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK MONTH
149 GGIO3.MX.AnIn21.mag.f value month
150 GGIO3.MX.AnIn22.mag.f 0 January
151 GGIO3.MX.AnIn23.mag.f 1 February
152 GGIO3.MX.AnIn24.mag.f 2 March
153 GGIO3.MX.AnIn25.mag.f 3 April
154 GGIO3.MX.AnIn26.mag.f 4 May
155 GGIO3.MX.AnIn27.mag.f 5 June
156 GGIO3.MX.AnIn28.mag.f 6 July
157 GGIO3.MX.AnIn29.mag.f 7 August
158 GGIO3.MX.AnIn30.mag.f 8 September
159 GGIO3.MX.AnIn31.mag.f 9 October
160 GGIO3.MX.AnIn32.mag.f 10 November
161 GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal 11 December
162 GGIO3.ST.IndPos2.stVal
F238
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAY
166 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.q value day
167 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.stVal 0 Sunday
168 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn2.q 1 Monday
169 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn2.stVal

value day
F247
2 Tuesday
ENUMERATION: BRICK AC BANK ORIGIN
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday Value Description
5 Friday 0 None
6 Saturday 1 U1/AC1..3
2 U1/AC5..7
F239 3 U2/AC1..3 B
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAYLIGHT SAVINGS 4 U2/AC5..7
TIME START DAY INSTANCE 5 U3/AC1..3
6 U3/AC5..7
value instance
7 U4/AC1..3
0 First
8 U4/AC5..7
1 Second
9 U5/AC1..3
2 Third
10 U5/AC5..7
3 Fourth
11 U6/AC1..3
4 Last
12 U6/AC5..7
13 U7/AC1..3
F243 14 U7/AC5..7
ENUMERATION: FIELD UNIT TYPE 15 U8/AC1..3
16 U8/AC5..7
0 = CC-05, 1 = CV-05, 2 = CC-01, 3 = CV-01
F244 F248
ENUMERATION: FIELD UNIT PROCESS CARD PORT ENUMERATION: BRICK AUX BANK ORIGIN
0 = H4a, 1 = H4b, 2 = H3a, 3 = H3b, 4 = H2a, 5 = H2b, 6 = H1a, Value Description

7 =H1b
0 None
1 U1/AC4
F245 2 U1/AC8
ENUMERATION: TEST MODE FUNCTION 3 U2/AC4
4 U2/AC8
Value Function
5 U3/AC4
0 Disabled
6 U3/AC8
1 Isolated
7 U4/AC4
2 Forcible
8 U4/AC8
9 U5/AC4
F246 10 U5/AC8
ENUMERATION: BRICK TRANSDUCER RANGE 11 U6/AC4
12 U6/AC8
Value Description 13 U7/AC5
0 -5...5V 14 U7/AC8
1 -1...1mA 15 U8/AC5
2 0...1mA 16 U8/AC8
3 0...-1mA
4 0...5mA
5 0...10mA F253
ENUMERATION: BRICK TRANSDUCER ORIGIN
6 0...20mA
7 4...20mA
Value Description
8 potentiometer
0 None
9 tap position
1 U1/DC1
2 U1/DC2
3 U1/DC3
4 U2/DC1

Value Description [6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1 to 64)

[8] CONTACT OUTPUTS
... ...
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1 to 64)
24 U8/DC3
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1 to 64)
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
F256
[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1 to 32)
ENUMERATION: BRICK ORIGIN/DESTINATION [16] DIRECT INPUTS (1 to 96)
B Value Description
[18] REMOTE OUTPUT DNA BIT PAIRS (1 to 32)
[20] REMOTE OUTPUT UserSt BIT PAIRS (1 to 32)
0 None [22] REMOTE DEVICE ONLINE (1 to 16)
1 U1 [24] MISCELLANEOUS EQUATION
2 U2 [26] TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
[28] INSERT (via keypad only)
3 U3
[30] DELETE (via keypad only)
4 U4
[32] END
5 U5 [34] NOT (1 INPUT)
6 U6 [36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
7 U7 [38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)
8 U8
[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)
[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)
F259
[48] TIMER (1 to 32)
ENUMERATION: BRICK RTD TYPE
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 64)
0 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel, 2 = 100 Ohm Platinum [52] ONE SHOT
[54] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] PLATFORM DIRECT INPUT (1 to 96)
F260 [58] PLATFORM DIRECT OUTPUT (1 to 96)
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER MODE [60] PLATFORM DIRECT DEVICE (1 to 8)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)
0 = Continuous, 1 = Trigger
[64] PDC NETWORK CONTROL
[66] PMU RECORDER OUT OF MEMORY
[68] PMU RECORDER STOPPED
F261
[128 to 255] ELEMENT STATES (see the Element States section
ENUMERATION: BANK REDUNDANCY TYPE
in the Modbus memory map)
0 = None, 1 = Dependability Biased, 2 = Security Biased
F400
F262 UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION
ENUMERATION: BRICK STATUS
bitmask bank selection
0 = Disabled, 1 = OK, 2 = Communications Trouble, 3 = Equip- 0 Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
ment Mismatch, 4 = Brick Trouble 1 Card 1 Contact 5 to 8
2 Card 2 Contact 1 to 4
F300 3 Card 2 Contact 5 to 8

UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC™ BASE TYPE (7-bit type) 4 Card 3 Contact 1 to 4
5 Card 3 Contact 5 to 8
The FlexLogic™ BASE type is 7 bits and is combined with an 8-bit
descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16-bit value.
The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTTDDDDDDDD,
where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic™ type is associated F491
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE ENUMERATION: ANALOG INPUT MODE
type, and D represents bits for the descriptor. 0 = Default Value, 1 = Last Known
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
[PTTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descrip-
tor range. The right-most T bit indicates whether the type is an ON
F500
or OFF type. There can be a total of 64 types (plus protection ele- UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD
ments). There can be a total of 256 descriptors of each type.
First register indicates input/output state with bits 0 (MSB) to 15
[0] Off(0) – this is boolean FALSE value
(LSB) corresponding to input/output state 1 to 16. The second reg-
[0] On (1) – this is boolean TRUE value
ister indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 to 96)
input/output state 17 to 32 (if required). The third register indicates
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1 to 96)
input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1 to 32)

state 33 to 48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/out-

put state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 49 to F523
64 (if required). ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT
The number of registers required is determined by the specific VARIATION
data item. A bit value of 0 = Off and 1 = On.
bitmask default variation
0 = Off, 1 = On 0 1
1 2
F501 2 5 B
UR_UINT16: LED STATUS 3 6
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing

the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates F524
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION
bitmask Default Variation

F502
0 1
BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
1 2
Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
2 9
format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
3 10
X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
F515 F525
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION
0 = Signed, 1 = Absolute bitmask default variation

0 1
1 2
F516
2 3
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
3 4
0 = Level, 1 = Delta
4 5
5 7
F517
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT DIRECTION OPERATION
F530
0 = Over, 1 = Under ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
value keypress value keypress value keypress
F518 0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3
ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT™ UNITS 1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes 2 Message Up 17 Message 35 User PB 5

Down
3 7 ~
18 0 ~
36 User PB 6
F519 4 8 19 Decimal 37 User PB 7
ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH 5 9 20 +/– 38 User PB 8
0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant 6 Help 21 Value Up 39 User PB 9

7 Message Left 22 Value Down 40 User PB 10
8 4 23 Reset 41 User PB 11
F522 9 5 24 User 1 42 User PB 12
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA OUTPUT RANGE
10 6 25 User 2 44 User 4
0 = –1 to 1 mA, 1 = 0 to 1 mA, 2 = 4 to 20 mA 11 Escape 26 User 3 45 User 5
12 Message 31 User PB 1 46 User 6
Right
13 1 32 User PB 2 47 User 7
14 2
F531
ENUMERATION: LANGUAGE
0 = English, 1 = French, 2 = Chinese, 3 = Russian

Enumeration COM2 port usage

F550
3 RRTD & GPM-F
ENUMERATION: RTD INPUT APPLICATION
Enumeration RTD input application

F602
0 None ENUMERATION: RRTD BAUD RATE
1 Stator
Enumeration RRTD baud rate
B
2 Bearing
3 Ambient 0 1200 bps
4 Group 1 1 2400 bps
5 Group 2 2 4800 bps

3 9600 bps
4 19200 bps
F551
ENUMERATION: RTD TRIP VOTING
F603
Enumeration RTD trip voting ENUMERATION: RRTD TRIP VOTING
0 None
1 Group Enumeration RRTD trip voting
2 RTD Input 1 0 None
3 RTD Input 2 1 Group
4 RTD Input 3 2 Remote RTD 1

12 Remote RTD 11
13 Remote RTD 12
F552
ENUMERATION: RTD INPUT OPEN
F605
Enumeration RTD open ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
0 None STATUS
1 Alarm
Enumeration Remote DPS input status
2 Block
0 Intermediate
1 Off
F600 2 On
UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER
3 Bad
Corresponds to the Modbus address of the value used when this
parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as Flex-
Analogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection). F606
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
F601 Enumeration Remote double-point status input

ENUMERATION: COM2 PORT USAGE 0 None
1 Remote input 1
Enumeration COM2 port usage
2 Remote input 2
0 RS485
3 Remote input 3
1 RRTD
↓ ↓
2 GPM-F
64 Remote input 64

F611 F612
ENUMERATION: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEME UR_UINT16: FLEXINTEGER PARAMETER
This 16-bit value corresponds to the Modbus address of the
Enumeration Configurable GOOSE retransmission scheme
selected FlexInteger parameter. Only certain values may be used
0 Heartbeat
as FlexIntegers.
1 Aggressive
2 Medium
3 Relaxed B


APPENDIX C C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW C.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of electric utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized com-
munications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, sub-
station design and configuration, testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
• IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
• IEC 61850-2: Glossary
• IEC 61850-3: General requirements
• IEC 61850-4: System and project management
• IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
•
•
IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Principles and models
C
• IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI)
• IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment – Common data classes
• IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment – Compatible logical node classes
and data classes
• IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2)
and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
• IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over serial unidirectional multi-
drop point to point link
• IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
• IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with
any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer
of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the
transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract ser-
vices in IEC 61850-8-1.
The M60 relay supports IEC 61850 server services over both TCP/IP and TP4/CLNP (OSI) communication protocol stacks.
The TP4/CLNP profile requires the M60 to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) to establish a
communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the M60 to have an IP address to establish communications. These
addresses are located in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK menu. Note that the M60
supports IEC 61850 over the TP4/CLNP or TCP/IP stacks, and also operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possi-
ble to have up to five simultaneous connections (in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-IEC 61850) connections).
• Client/server: This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and com-
munication activity is controlled by the client. IEC 61850 clients are often substation computers running HMI programs
or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such as protection relays, meters, RTUs, trans-
former tap changers, or bay controllers.
• Peer-to-peer: This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation equip-
ment such as protection relays. GSSE and GOOSE are methods of peer-to-peer communication.
• Substation configuration language (SCL): A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe
the configuration of substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation con-
figuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individ-
ual ICD files and the SSD file.
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System C-1

C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION APPENDIX C
C.2SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION C.2.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC 61850 physical device can contain one or
more logical device(s). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. Each logical node can contain many data
objects. Each data object is composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each
level for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each M60 IED represents one IEC 61850 physical device. The physical device contains one logical device, and the logical
device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD1 contains information about the M60 IED physical device. The
logical node LLN0 contains information about the M60 IED logical device.
C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES
C The GGIO1 logical node is available in the M60 to provide access to as many 128 digital status points and associated time-
stamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO1 provides digital status
points for access by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO1 in order to access digital status values from the M60. Configuration settings are pro-
vided to allow the selection of the number of digital status indications available in GGIO1 (8 to 128), and to allow the choice
of the M60 FlexLogic™ operands that drive the status of the GGIO1 status indications. Clients can utilize the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reporting features available from GGIO1 in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI
display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the
chances of missing data state changes. Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display.
C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES
The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the M60 virtual inputs. Virtual inputs are single-point control
(binary) values that can be written by clients. They are generally used as control inputs. GGIO2 provides access to the vir-
tual inputs through the IEC 61850 standard control model (ctlModel) services:
• Status only.
• Direct control with normal security.
• SBO control with normal security.
Configuration settings are available to select the control model for each point. Each virtual input used through GGIO2
should have its VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64) FUNCTION setting programmed as “Enabled” and its corresponding GGIO2 CF SPSCO1(64)
CTLMODEL setting programmed to the appropriate control configuration.
C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATA
The GGIO3 logical node is available to provide access for clients to values received via configurable GOOSE messages.
The values of the digital status indications and analog values in GGIO3 originate in GOOSE messages sent from other
devices.
C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
The GGIO4 logical node provides access to as many as 32 analog value points, as well as associated timestamps and
quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO4 provides analog values for access
by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO4 to access generic analog values from the M60. Configuration settings allow the selec-
tion of the number of analog values available in GGIO4 (4 to 32) and the choice of the FlexAnalog™ values that determine
the value of the GGIO4 analog inputs. Clients can utilize polling or the IEC 61850 unbuffered reporting feature available
from GGIO4 in order to obtain the analog values provided by GGIO4.
C-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
A limited number of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes.
Each MMXU logical node provides data from a M60 current and voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each
configurable source (programmed in the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES menu). MMXU1 provides data
from M60 source 1, and MMXU2 provides data from M60 source 2.
MMXU data is provided in two forms: instantaneous and deadband. The instantaneous values are updated every time a
read operation is performed by a client. The deadband values are calculated as described in IEC 61850 parts 7-1 and 7-3.
The selection of appropriate deadband settings for the M60 is described in chapter 5 of this manual.
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting capability is available in all MMXU logical nodes. MMXUx logical nodes pro-
vide the following data for each source:
•
•
MMXU1.MX.TotW: three-phase real power
MMXU1.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power
C
• MMXU1.MX.TotVA: three-phase apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor
• MMXU1.MX.Hz: frequency
• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.W.phsA: phase A real power
• MMXU1.MX.W.phsB: phase B real power
• MMXU1.MX.W.phsC: phase C real power
• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA: phase A reactive power
• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB: phase B reactive power
• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC: phase C reactive power
• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA: phase A apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB: phase B apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC: phase C apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA: phase A power factor
• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB: phase B power factor
• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC: phase C power factor
C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES
The following list describes the protection elements for all UR-series relays. The M60 relay will contain a subset of protec-
tion elements from this list.
• PDIF: bus differential, transformer instantaneous differential, transformer percent differential, current differential

C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION APPENDIX C
• PDIS: phase distance, ground distance

• PIOC: phase instantaneous overcurrent, neutral instantaneous overcurrent, ground instantaneous overcurrent, nega-
tive-sequence instantaneous overcurrent.
• PTOC: phase time overcurrent, neutral time overcurrent, ground time overcurrent, negative-sequence time overcur-
rent, neutral directional overcurrent, negative-sequence directional overcurrent
• PTUV: phase undervoltage, auxiliary undervoltage, third harmonic neutral undervoltage
• PTOV: phase overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, auxiliary overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage
• RBRF: breaker failure
• RREC: autoreclosure
• RPSB: power swing detection
C • RFLO: fault locator

• XCBR: breaker control
• XSWI: circuit switch
• CSWI: switch controller
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags. For example, the start flag for PIOC1 is
PIOC1.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PIOC1 is PIOC1.ST.Op.general. For the M60 protection elements, these flags
take their values from the pickup and operate FlexLogic™ operands for the corresponding element.
Some protection elements listed above contain directional start values. For example, the directional start value for PDIS1 is
PDIS1.ST.Str.dirGeneral. This value is built from the directional FlexLogic™ operands for the element.
The RFLO logical node contains the measurement of the distance to fault calculation in kilometers. This value originates in
the fault locator function.
The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature.
• XCBR1.ST.Loc: This is the state of the XCBR1 local/remote switch. A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic™ oper-
and to determine the state. When local mode is true, IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected.
• XCBR1.ST.Opcnt: This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850. Command settings are provided to allow the
counter to be cleared.
• XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. The breaker control FlexLogic™ operands are used to determine
this state. If the breaker control logic indicates that the breaker, or any single pole of the breaker, is closed, then the
breaker position state is “on”. If the breaker control logic indicates that the breaker is open, then the breaker position
state is “off”.
• XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true, breaker open commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
• XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true, breaker close commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
• XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue open or close commands to the breaker. SBO control with
normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
• XCBR1.CO.BlkOpn: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block open commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
• XCBR1.CO.BlkCls: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block close commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.

APPENDIX C C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
C.3SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting is provided in the GGIO1 logical nodes (for binary status values) and MMXU1
to MMXU6 (for analog measured values). Report settings can be configured using the EnerVista UR Setup software, sub-
station configurator software, or via an IEC 61850 client. The following items can be configured:
• TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the M60:
– Bit 1: data-change
– Bit 4: integrity
– Bit 5: general interrogation
• OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the M60:
–
–
Bit 1: sequence-number
Bit 2: report-time-stamp
C
– Bit 3: reason-for-inclusion
– Bit 4: data-set-name
– Bit 5: data-reference
– Bit 6: buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
– Bit 7: entryID (for buffered reports only)
– Bit 8: conf-revision
– Bit 9: segmentation
• IntgPd: Integrity period.
• BufTm: Buffer time.
C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record, or other files from a M60 relay.
C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING
The timestamp values associated with all IEC 61850 data items represent the time of the last change of either the value or
quality flags of the data item. To accomplish this functionality, all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data
changes, and the timestamp updated when a change is detected, regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli-
ents. For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use, the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro-
grammed as “Disabled”. If a client is in use, this setting should be programmed as “Enabled” to ensure the proper
generation of IEC 61850 timestamps.
C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME
The logical device name is used to identify the IEC 61850 logical device that exists within the M60. This name is composed
of two parts: the IED name setting and the logical device instance. The complete logical device name is the combination of
the two character strings programmed in the IEDNAME and LD INST settings. The default values for these strings are “IED-
Name” and “LDInst”. These values should be changed to reflect a logical naming convention for all IEC 61850 logical
devices in the system.
C.3.5 LOCATION
The LPHD1 logical node contains a data attribute called location (LPHD1.DC.PhyNam.location). This is a character string
meant to describe the physical location of the M60. This attribute is programmed through the LOCATION setting and its
default value is “Location”. This value should be changed to describe the actual physical location of the M60.

C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION APPENDIX C
C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters. The name is composed of:
• A five or six-character name prefix.
• A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
• A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPIOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable. Details regarding the
logical node naming rules are given in IEC 61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention
be used for an entire substation project.
C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING
C A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the M60 to detect ‘dead’ connections. If there is no data
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the M60. This frees up the con-
nection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using IEC 61850 reporting, clients should configure report control
block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the M60 will
not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this tim-
eout will not apply.
C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA
The M60 relay makes available a number of non-IEC 61850 data items. These data items can be accessed through the
“UR” MMS domain. IEC 61850 data can be accessed through the standard IEC 61850 logical device. To access the non-
IEC data items, the INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA setting must be “Enabled”.
C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES
The exact structure and values of the supported IEC 61850 logical nodes can be seen by connecting to a M60 relay with an
MMS browser, such as the “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS” DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc.

APPENDIX C C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
C.4GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE C.4.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 specifies two types of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Substation State Events (GSSE) and Generic
Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). GSSE services are compatible with UCA 2.0 GOOSE. IEC 61850 GOOSE
services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet priority tagging, and Ethertype Application ID configuration. The sup-
port for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given
a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Because of the additional
features of GOOSE services versus GSSE services, it is recommended that GOOSE be used wherever backwards com-
patibility with GSSE (or UCA 2.0 GOOSE) is not required.
Devices that transmit GSSE and/or GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GSSE publisher contains a “GSSE
control block” to configure and control the transmission. Each GOOSE publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to con-
figure and control the transmission. The transmission is also controlled via device settings. These settings can be seen in
the ICD and/or SCD files, or in the device configuration software or files.
IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a
C
default priority of 1. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1.
IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source. In the
M60, the transmitted GOOSE Application ID number must match the configured receive Application ID number in the
receiver. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC 61850
part 8-1.
C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION
IEC 61850 Generic Substation Status Event (GSSE) communication is compatible with UCA GOOSE communication.
GSSE messages contain a number of double point status data items. These items are transmitted in two pre-defined data
structures named DNA and UserSt. Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a ‘bit pair’. GSSE messages are transmit-
ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message. GSSE messages always contain the
same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs. Depending the on the configuration, only some of these bit pairs may have val-
ues that are of interest to receiving devices.
The GSSE FUNCTION, GSSE ID, and GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS settings are used to configure GSSE transmission.
GSSE FUNCTION is set to “Enabled” to enable the transmission. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is entered for the
GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS setting, this address will be used as the destination MAC address for GSSE messages. If
a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is not entered (for example, 00 00 00 00 00 00), the M60 will use the source Ether-
net MAC address as the destination, with the multicast bit set.
C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE
The M60 supports two types of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) communication: fixed
GOOSE and configurable GOOSE. All GOOSE messages contain IEC 61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this dataset
that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The dataset transferred using the M60 fixed GOOSE is the same data
that is transferred using the GSSE feature; that is, the DNA and UserSt bit pairs. The FlexLogic™ operands that determine
the state of the DNA and UserSt bit pairs are configurable via settings, but the fixed GOOSE dataset always contains the
same DNA/UserSt data structure. Upgrading from GSSE to GOOSE services is simply a matter of enabling fixed GOOSE
and disabling GSSE. The remote inputs and outputs are configured in the same manner for both GSSE and fixed GOOSE.
It is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-
series IEDs. Configurable GOOSE may be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers.
C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the M60.
The M60 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.

C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE APPENDIX C
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Dataset 1 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping,
blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in dataset 1 to enable transmis-
sion of all data configured for dataset 1. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes-
sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
C The M60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the M60 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a min-
imum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the M60 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The M60 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error mes-
sage on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup-
software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to
the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1. Configure the transmission dataset.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1. Configure the reception dataset.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1. Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION 
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception
dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGU-
RABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:

APPENDIX C C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to “Enabled”.

– Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is “GOOSEOut_1”).
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of “4” is OK for this example.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is “0”, but some switches may require this value to be “1”.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the Ethertype application ID and must match the
configuration on the receiver (the default value is “0”).
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
3. Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC 61850 PROTO-
COL  GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
–
settings menu:
Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic™ operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example,
C
a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
The M60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1. Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC
61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point ana-
log value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DEVICES
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter “GOOSEOut_1”.
– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the Ethertype application ID from the transmitting device. This is “0” in
the example above.
– Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as “GOOSEIn 1”.
3. Configure the data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE INPUTS  REMOTE INPUT 1
settings menu:
– Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to “GOOSEOut_1”.
– Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to “Dataset Item 2”. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic™ equations or other settings. The M60 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com-
plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE
Ethernet capable devices each contain a unique identifying address called a Media Access Control (MAC) address. This
address cannot be changed and is unique for each Ethernet device produced worldwide. The address is six bytes in length
and is usually represented as six hexadecimal values (for example, 00 A0 F4 01 02 03). It is used in all Ethernet frames as
the ‘source’ address of the frame. Each Ethernet frame also contains a destination address. The destination address can
be different for each Ethernet frame depending on the intended destination of the frame.

C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE APPENDIX C
A special type of destination address called a multicast address is used when the Ethernet frame can be received by more
than one device. An Ethernet MAC address is multicast when the least significant bit of the first byte is set (for example, 01
00 00 00 00 00 is a multicast address).
GSSE and GOOSE messages must have multicast destination MAC addresses.
By default, the M60 is configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme. If the M60 destination MAC address setting
is not a valid multicast address (that is, the least significant bit of the first byte is not set), the address used as the destina-
tion MAC will be the same as the local MAC address, but with the multicast bit set. Thus, if the local MAC address is 00 A0
F4 01 02 03, then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0 F4 01 02 03.
C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS
GSSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in IEC
C 61850 part 8-1 as GsID. This is a programmable 65-character string. This string should be chosen to provide a descriptive
name of the originator of the GSSE message.
GOOSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in
IEC 61850 part 8-1 as GoID. This programmable 65-character string should be a descriptive name of the originator of the
GOOSE message. GOOSE messages also contain two additional character strings used for identification of the message:
DatSet - the name of the associated dataset, and GoCBRef - the reference (name) of the associated GOOSE control block.
These strings are automatically populated and interpreted by the M60; no settings are required.

APPENDIX C C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
C.5IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP C.5.1 OVERVIEW
The M60 can be configured for IEC 61850 via the EnerVista UR Setup software as follows.
1. An ICD file is generated for the M60 by the EnerVista UR Setup software that describe the capabilities of the IED.
2. The ICD file is then imported into a system configurator along with other ICD files for other IEDs (from GE or other ven-
dors) for system configuration.
3. The result is saved to a SCD file, which is then imported back to EnerVista UR Setup to create one or more settings
file(s). The settings file(s) can then be used to update the relay(s) with the new configuration information.
The configuration process is illustrated below.
C
Creating ICD (GE Multilin)
IEC 61850 related Process of Process of Process of

configuration for the creating ICD creating ICD creating ICD
IED (UR-series) IED (GSSE/GOOSE, (vendor 2) (vendor 3) (vendor N)
OR server, logical node
prefixes, MMXU
Setting files EnerVista deadbands, GGIO2
(.URS) UR Setup control, etc.)
ICD file 2 ICD file 3 ICD file N

ICD file 1
Import
System
specification data SSD file
System specification tool
System configurator
System Configuration
(network, cross-
communications, IED setting
modification, etc.)
SCD file
Updating IED with new configuration (GE Multilin)
EnerVista UR Setup
Vendor specific tool Vendor specific tool Vendor specific tool

for updating new for updating new for updating new
configuration to IED configuration to IED configuration to IED
URS 1 URS 2 URS X (vendor 2) (vendor 3) (vendor N)
Write settings Write settings file

file to device to other devices
Vendor relay 2 Vendor relay 3 Vendor relay N

UR relay 1 UR relay 2 UR relay X
Ethernet
842790A1.CDR
Figure 0–1: IED CONFIGURATION PROCESS

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in the procedures describing the IED configuration process for IEC
61850:
• BDA: Basic Data Attribute, that is not structured
• DAI: Instantiated Data Attribute
• DO: Data Object type or instance, depending on the context

C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP APPENDIX C
• DOI: Instantiated Data Object

• IED: Intelligent Electronic Device
• LDInst: Instantiated Logical Device
• LNInst: Instantiated Logical Node
• SCL: Substation Configuration Description Language. The configuration language is an application of the Extensible
Markup Language (XML) version 1.0.
• SDI: Instantiated Sub DATA; middle name part of a structured DATA name
• UR: GE Multilin Universal Relay series
• URI: Universal Resource Identifier
• URS: UR-series relay setting file
C • XML: Extensible Markup Language
The following SCL variants are also used:
• ICD: IED Capability Description
• CID: Configured IED Description
• SSD: System Specification Description
• SCD: Substation Configuration Description
The following IEC related tools are referenced in the procedures that describe the IED configuration process for IEC 61850:
• System configurator or Substation configurator: This is an IED independent system level tool that can import or
export configuration files defined by IEC 61850-6. It can import configuration files (ICD) from several IEDs for system
level engineering and is used to add system information shared by different IEDs. The system configuration generates
a substation related configuration file (SCD) which is fed back to the IED configurator (for example, EnerVista UR
Setup) for system related IED configuration. The system configurator should also be able to read a system specifica-
tion file (SSD) to use as base for starting system engineering, or to compare it with an engineered system for the same
substation.
• IED configurator: This is a vendor specific tool that can directly or indirectly generate an ICD file from the IED (for
example, from a settings file). It can also import a system SCL file (SCD) to set communication configuration parame-
ters (that is, required addresses, reception GOOSE datasets, IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets, etc.) for the IED. The
IED configurator functionality is implemented in the EnerVista UR Setup software.
C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS
Before creating an ICD file, the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED. For example, the IED name
and logical device instance can be specified to uniquely identify the IED within the substation, or transmission GOOSE
datasets created so that the system configurator can configure the cross-communication links to send GOOSE messages
from the IED. Once the IEC 61850 settings are configured, the ICD creation process will recognize the changes and gener-
ate an ICD file that contains the updated settings.
Some of the IED settings will be modified during they system configuration process. For example, a new IP address may be
assigned, line items in a Transmission GOOSE dataset may be added or deleted, or prefixes of some logical nodes may be
changed. While all new configurations will be mapped to the M60 settings file when importing an SCD file, all unchanged
settings will preserve the same values in the new settings file.
These settings can be configured either directly through the relay panel or through the EnerVista UR Setup software (pre-
ferred method). The full list of IEC 61850 related settings for are as follows:
• Network configuration: IP address, IP subnet mask, and default gateway IP address (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > Network menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Server configuration: IED name and logical device instance (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Com-
munications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Logical node prefixes, which includes prefixes for all logical nodes except LLN0 (access through the Settings > Prod-
uct Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Logical Node Prefixes menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• MMXU deadbands, which includes deadbands for all available MMXUs. The number of MMXUs is related to the num-
ber of CT/VT modules in the relay. There are two MMXUs for each CT/VT module. For example, if a relay contains two
CT/VT modules, there will be four MMXUs available (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communica-
tions > IEC 61850 > MMXU Deadbands menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• GGIO1 status configuration, which includes the number of status points in GGIO1 as well as the potential internal map-
pings for each GGIO1 indication. However only the number of status points will be used in the ICD creation process
(access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO1 Status Configuration
menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• GGIO2 control configuration, which includes ctlModels for all SPCSOs within GGIO2 (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO2 Control Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR
Setup).
• Configurable transmission GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE transmis-
sion. The GOOSE ID can be specified for each dataset (it must be unique within the IED as well as across the whole
substation), as well as the destination MAC address, VLAN priority, VLAN ID, ETYPE APPID, and the dataset items.
C
The selection of the dataset item is restricted by firmware version; for version 5.8x, only GGIO1.ST.Indx.stVal and
GGIO1.ST.Indx.q are valid selection (where x is between 1 to N, and N is determined by number of GGIO1 status
points). Although configurable transmission GOOSE can also be created and altered by some third-party system con-
figurators, we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD, and strictly
within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Com-
munications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Transmission > Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Configurable reception GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE reception.
However, unlike datasets for transmission, datasets for reception only contains dataset items, and they are usually cre-
ated automatically by process of importing the SCD file (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communi-
cations > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Reception > Rx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in
EnerVista UR Setup).
• Remote devices configuration, which includes remote device ID (GOOSE ID or GoID of the incoming transmission
GOOSE dataset), ETYPE APPID (of the GSE communication block for the incoming transmission GOOSE), and
DATASET (which is the name of the associated reception GOOSE dataset). These settings are usually done automat-
ically by process of importing SCD file (access through the Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Devices menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Remote inputs configuration, which includes device (remote device ID) and item (which dataset item in the associated
reception GOOSE dataset to map) values. Only the items with cross-communication link created in SCD file should be
mapped. These configurations are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the
Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES
The SCL language is based on XML, and its syntax definition is described as a W3C XML Schema. ICD is one type of SCL
file (which also includes SSD, CID and SCD files). The ICD file describes the capabilities of an IED and consists of four
major sections:
• Header
• Communication
• IEDs
• DataTypeTemplates

The root file structure of an ICD file is illustrated below.
SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
Communication
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)
DataTypeTemplates
842795A1.CDR
Figure 0–2: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

The Header node identifies the ICD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals
C The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (iedName, apName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other GSE elements Other P elements

842796A1.CDR
Figure 0–3: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stat-
ing the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.
The IED node describes the (pre-)configuration of an IED: its access points, the logical devices, and logical nodes instanti-
ated on it. Furthermore, it defines the capabilities of an IED in terms of communication services offered and, together with
its LNType, instantiated data (DO) and its default or configuration values. There should be only one IED section in an ICD
since it only describes one IED.

IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)
Services
DynAssoication GetDataSetValue ReadWrite ConfLogControl (max)
GetDirectory SetDataSetValue TimerActivatedControl GSEDir
GetDateObjectDefinition DataSetDirectory ConfReportControl (max) GOOSE (max)
DataObjectDirectory ConfDataSet (max, maxAttributes) GetCBValues GSSE (max)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
Authentication (none) C
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (fc, doName, daName, IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg) OptFields (seqNum) RptEnabled
Other ReportControl elements
DOI (name)
SDI (name) DAI (name)

Val Text
Other DOI elements SDI (name)

DAI (name)
GSEControl (name, datSet, type, confRev, appID) Val Text
Other GSEControl elements
LN (InType, InClass, prefix, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst, doName, fc)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg) OptFields (seqNum) RptEnabled
Other ReportControl elements
DOI (name)
SDI (name) DAI (name)

Val Text
Other DOI elements SDI (name)

DAI (name)
Val Text
Other LN elements
Other LDevice elements

842797A1.CDR
Figure 0–4: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE

The DataTypeTemplates node defines instantiable logical node types. A logical node type is an instantiable template of the
data of a logical node. A LnodeType is referenced each time that this instantiable type is needed with an IED. A logical
node type template is built from DATA (DO) elements, which again have a DO type, which is derived from the DATA classes
(CDC). DOs consist of attributes (DA) or of elements of already defined DO types (SDO). The attribute (DA) has a func-
tional constraint, and can either have a basic type, be an enumeration, or a structure of a DAType. The DAType is built from
BDA elements, defining the structure elements, which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA.
DataTypeTemplates
LNodeType (id, InClass)
DO (name, type)
Other DO elements
C Other LNodeType elements
DOType (id, cdc)
SDO (name, type) DA (name, fc, bType, type) Val Text
Other SDO elements Other DA elements
Other DOType elements
DAType (id)
BDA (name, bType, type)
Other BDA elements
Other DAType elements
EnumType (id)
EnumVal (ord) Text
Other EnumVal elements
Other EnumType elements

842798A1.CDR
Figure 0–5: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE

C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
An ICD file can be created directly from a connected M60 IED or from an offline M60 settings file with the EnerVista UR
Setup software using the following procedure:
1. Right-click the connected UR-series relay or settings file and select Create ICD File.
2. The EnerVista UR Setup will prompt to save the file. Select the file path and enter the name for the ICD file, then click
OK to generate the file.
The time to create an ICD file from the offline M60 settings file is typically much quicker than create an ICD file directly from
the relay.
C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES
System configuration is performed in the system configurator. While many vendors (including GE Multilin) are working their
own system configuration tools, there are some system configurators available in the market (for example, Siemens DIGSI
version 4.6 or above and ASE Visual SCL Beta 0.12).
Although the configuration tools vary from one vendor to another, the procedure is pretty much the same. First, a substation
project must be created, either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification
file (SSD). Then, IEDs are added to the substation. Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD, the ICD files are
imported into the substation project, and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing process. If the
ICD files are successfully imported into the substation project, it may be necessary to perform some additional minor steps
to attach the IEDs to the substation (see the system configurator manual for details).
Once all IEDs are inserted into the substation, further configuration is possible, such as:
• Assigning network addresses to individual IEDs.
• Customizing the prefixes of logical nodes.
• Creating cross-communication links (configuring GOOSE messages to send from one IED to others).
When system configurations are complete, the results are saved to an SCD file, which contains not only the configuration
for each IED in the substation, but also the system configuration for the entire substation. Finally, the SCD file is passed
back to the IED configurator (vendor specific tool) to update the new configuration into the IED.
The SCD file consists of at least five major sections:

• Header.
• Substation.
• Communication.
• IED section (one or more).
• DataTypeTemplates.
The root file structure of an SCD file is illustrated below.
SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
C Substation
Communication
IED Section (IED 1)
IED Section (IED 2)
Other IED Sections
DataTypeTemplates
842791A1.CDR
Figure 0–6: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

Like ICD files, the Header node identifies the SCD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to
signals.
The Substation node describes the substation parameters:
Substation
PowerSystemResource
EquipmentContainer Power Transformer
GeneralEquipment
EquipmentContainer
VoltageLevel Bay
Voltage
PowerSystemResource
Function SubFunction
GeneralEquipment
842792A1.CDR
Figure 0–7: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SUBSTATION NODE

The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (IED 1)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName) C

Address
P (type)
Other GSE elements Text
Other P elements
ConnectedAP (IED 2)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
Other GSE elements
Other ConnectedAP elements

842793A1.CDR
Figure 0–8: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stat-
ing the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.

The IED Section node describes the configuration of an IED.
IED Section (IED 1)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
Authentication (none)
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet elements
C ReportControl elements
DOI elements
Inputs
ExtRef (iedName, ldInst, prefix, lnClass, lnInst, doName, daName, intAddr)
Other ExtRef elements
GSEControl elements
842794A1.CDR
Figure 0–9: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE
C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
The following procedure describes how to update the M60 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista
UR Setup software.
1. Right-click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item.
2. Select the saved SCD file and click Open.

3. The software will open the SCD file and then prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file. Select a location and
name for the URS (UR-series relay settings) file.
If there is more than one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file, the software prompt the user to save a UR-series set-
tings file for each IED.
4. After the URS file is created, modify any settings (if required).
5. To update the relay with the new settings, right-click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set-
tings File to Device item.
6. The software will prompt for the target device. Select the target device from the list provided and click Send. The new
settings will be updated to the selected device.

C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE APPENDIX C
C.6ACSI CONFORMANCE C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES SERVER/ UR-FAMILY

PUBLISHER
CLIENT-SERVER ROLES
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) c1 Yes
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) ---
SCSMS SUPPORTED
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Yes
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used
C B24 SCSM: other

GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE)
B31 Publisher side O Yes
B32 Subscriber side --- Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL (SVC)
B41 Publisher side O
B42 Subscriber side ---
c1: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
NOTE M: Mandatory
C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT

PUBLISHER
IF SERVER SIDE (B11) SUPPORTED
M1 Logical device c2 Yes
M2 Logical node c3 Yes
M3 Data c4 Yes
M4 Data set c5 Yes
M5 Substitution O
M6 Setting group control O
REPORTING
M7 Buffered report control O Yes
M7-1 sequence-number
M7-2 report-time-stamp
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion
M7-4 data-set-name
M7-5 data-reference
M7-6 buffer-overflow
M7-7 entryID
M7-8 BufTm
M7-9 IntgPd
M7-10 GI
M8 Unbuffered report control O Yes
M8-1 sequence-number
M8-2 report-time-stamp
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion

APPENDIX C C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

PUBLISHER
M8-4 data-set-name
M8-5 data-reference
M8-6 BufTm
M8-7 IntgPd
M8-8 GI
Logging O
M9 Log control O
M9-1 IntgPd
M10 Log O
M11 Control M Yes
IF GSE (B31/32) IS SUPPORTED C
GOOSE O Yes
M12-1 entryID
M12-2 DataReflnc
M13 GSSE O Yes
IF SVC (B41/B42) IS SUPPORTED
M14 Multicast SVC O
M15 Unicast SVC O
M16 Time M Yes
M17 File transfer O Yes
c2: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
c3: shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
NOTE c4: shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has been declared
c5: shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
In the table below, the acronym AA refers to Application Associations (TP: Two Party / MC: Multicast). The c6 to c10 entries
are defined in the notes following the table.
SERVICES AA: TP/MC SERVER/ UR FAMILY

PUBLISHER
SERVER (CLAUSE 6)
S1 ServerDirectory TP M Yes
APPLICATION ASSOCIATION (CLAUSE 7)
S2 Associate M Yes
S3 Abort M Yes
S4 Release M Yes
LOGICAL DEVICE (CLAUSE 8)
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory TP M Yes
LOGICAL NODE (CLAUSE 9)
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory TP M Yes
S7 GetAllDataValues TP M Yes
DATA (CLAUSE 10)
S8 GetDataValues TP M Yes
S9 SetDataValues TP O Yes
S10 GetDataDirectory TP M Yes
S11 GetDataDefinition TP M Yes

C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE APPENDIX C

PUBLISHER
DATA SET (CLAUSE 11)
S12 GetDataSetValues TP M Yes
S13 SetDataSetValues TP O
S14 CreateDataSet TP O
S15 DeleteDataSet TP O
S16 GetDataSetDirectory TP O Yes
SUBSTITUTION (CLAUSE 12)
S17 SetDataValues TP M
SETTING GROUP CONTROL (CLAUSE 13)
S18 SelectActiveSG TP O
C S19 SelectEditSG TP O
S20 SetSGValues TP O
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues TP O
S22 GetSGValues TP O
S23 GetSGCBValues TP O
REPORTING (CLAUSE 14)
BUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (BRCB)
S24 Report TP c6 Yes
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Yes
S24-2 qchg-change (qchg)
S24-3 data-update (dupd)
S25 GetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes
S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes
UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (URCB)
S27 Report TP c6 Yes
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Yes
S27-2 qchg-change (qchg)
S27-3 data-update (dupd)
S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes
S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes
LOGGING (CLAUSE 14)
LOG CONTROL BLOCK
S30 GetLCBValues TP M
S31 SetLCBValues TP M
LOG
S32 QueryLogByTime TP M
S33 QueryLogByEntry TP M
S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE) (CLAUSE 14.3.5.3.4)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage MC c8 Yes
S36 GetReference TP c9
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP c9
S38 GetGoCBValues TP O Yes
S39 SetGoCBValues TP O Yes
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage MC c8 Yes
S41 GetReference TP c9

APPENDIX C C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

PUBLISHER
S42 GetGSSEElementNumber TP c9
S43 GetGsCBValues TP O Yes
S44 SetGsCBValues TP O Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLE VALUE MODEL (SVC) (CLAUSE 16)
MULTICAST SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage MC c10
S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O
S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O
UNICAST SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10
S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O C
S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O
CONTROL (CLAUSE 16.4.8)
S51 Select O Yes
S52 SelectWithValue TP O
S53 Cancel TP O Yes
S54 Operate TP M Yes
S55 Command-Termination TP O
S56 TimeActivated-Operate TP O
FILE TRANSFER (CLAUSE 20)
S57 GetFile TP M Yes
S58 SetFile TP O
S59 DeleteFile TP O
S60 GetFileAttributeValues TP M Yes
TIME (CLAUSE 5.5)
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 20
(nearest negative power of 2 in
seconds)
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock
T3 supported TimeStamp resolution 20
(nearest value of 2–n in seconds,
accoridng to 5.5.3.7.3.3)
c6: shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)

c7: shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter)
NOTE c8: shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9: shall declare support if TP association is available
c10: shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage)

C.7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C
C.7LOGICAL NODES C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE
The UR-series of relays supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantia-
tion of each logical node is determined by the product order code. For example. the logical node “PDIS” (distance protec-
tion) is available only in the D60 Line Distance Relay.
Table C–1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 1 of 3)

NODES UR-FAMILY
L: SYSTEM LOGICAL NODES
LPHD: Physical device information Yes
LLN0: Logical node zero Yes
P: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
C PDIF: Differential Yes
PDIR: Direction comparison ---
PDIS: Distance Yes
PDOP: Directional overpower ---
PDUP: Directional underpower ---
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency ---
PHAR: Harmonic restraint ---
PHIZ: Ground detector ---
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent Yes
PMRI Motor restart inhibition ---
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision ---
POPF: Over power factor ---
PPAM: Phase angle measuring ---
PSCH: Protection scheme ---
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault ---
PTEF: Transient earth fault ---
PTOC: Time overcurrent Yes
PTOF: Overfrequency ---
PTOV: Overvoltage Yes
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning Yes
PTTR: Thermal overload Yes
PTUC: Undercurrent ---
PTUV: Undervoltage Yes
PUPF: Underpower factor ---
PTUF: Underfrequency ---
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent ---
PVPH: Volts per Hz ---
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed ---
R: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION RELATED FUNCTIONS
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function ---
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue ---
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary ---
RDRS: Disturbance record handling ---
RBRF: Breaker failure Yes
RDIR: Directional element ---
RFLO: Fault locator Yes
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking Yes
RREC: Autoreclosing Yes

APPENDIX C C.7 LOGICAL NODES

NODES UR-FAMILY
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing ---
C: LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL
CALH: Alarm handling ---
CCGR: Cooling group control ---
CILO: Interlocking ---
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching ---
CSWI: Switch controller Yes
G: LOGICAL NODES FOR GENERIC REFERENCES
GAPC: Generic automatic process control ---
GGIO: Generic process I/O
GSAL: Generic security application
Yes
---
C
I: LOGICAL NODES FOR INTERFACING AND ARCHIVING
IARC: Archiving ---
IHMI: Human machine interface ---
ITCI: Telecontrol interface ---
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface ---
A: LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL
ANCR: Neutral current regulator ---
ARCO: Reactive power control ---
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller ---
AVCO: Voltage control ---
M: LOGICAL NODES FOR METERING AND MEASUREMENT
MDIF: Differential measurements ---
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics ---
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic ---
MMTR: Metering ---
MMXN: Non phase related measurement Yes
MMXU: Measurement Yes
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance ---
MSTA: Metering statistics ---
S: LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs ---
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) ---
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) ---
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges ---
X: LOGICAL NODES FOR SWITCHGEAR
XCBR: Circuit breaker Yes
XSWI: Circuit switch Yes
T: LOGICAL NODES FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
TCTR: Current transformer ---
TVTR: Voltage transformer ---
Y: LOGICAL NODES FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) ---
YLTC: Tap changer ---
YPSH: Power shunt ---
YPTR: Power transformer ---

C.7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C

NODES UR-FAMILY
Z: LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
ZAXN: Auxiliary network ---
ZBAT: Battery ---
ZBSH: Bushing ---
ZCAB: Power cable ---
ZCAP: Capacitor bank ---
ZCON: Converter ---
ZGEN: Generator ---
ZGIL: Gas insulated line ---
C ZLIN: Power overhead line

ZMOT: Motor
---
---
ZREA: Reactor ---
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component ---
ZSAR: Surge arrestor ---
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter ---
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component ---

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMSD.1IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following:  – used in
standard direction;  – not used;  – cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
 System Definition
 Controlling Station Definition (Master)
 Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
 Point-to-Point  Multipoint
 Multiple Point-to-Point  Multipoint Star
3. PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s: D
 100 bits/sec.  2400 bits/sec.  2400 bits/sec.
 600 bits/sec.  19200 bits/sec.
 56000 bits/sec.
 64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s:
 56000 bits/sec.
 64000 bits/sec.
4. LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure: Address Field of the Link:
 Balanced Transmision  Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
 Unbalanced Transmission  One Octet
 Two Octets
 Structured
 Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System D-1

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following Application Service Data Unit (ASDU types are returned in class 2
messages (low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission:
 The standard assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
 A special assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5. APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ASDU:
 One Octet
 Two Octets
Information Object Address:
 One Octet  Structured
D  Two Octets  Unstructured

 Three Octets
Cause of Transmission:
 One Octet
 Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following:  – used in standard direction;  – not used;  – cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
 <1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
 <2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
 <3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
 <4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
 <5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
 <6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
 <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits M_BO_NA_1
 <8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag M_BO_TA_1
 <9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
 <10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_NE_TA_1
 <11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
 <12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_NE_TB_1
 <13> := Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
 <14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_NE_TC_1
 <15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
 <16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
 <17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
 <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
 <19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
 <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_SP_NA_1
D-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

 <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor M_ME_ND_1
 <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1

 <31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
 <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
 <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
 <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
 <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
 <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
 <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
 <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
 <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
 <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
 <45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
D
 <46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1
 <47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
 <48> := Set point command, normalized value C_SE_NA_1
 <49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
 <50> := Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
 <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits C_BO_NA_1
 <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1

 <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
 <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
 <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TA_1
 <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TB_1
 <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TC_1
 <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
 <70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

 <100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
 <101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
 <102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
 <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) C_CS_NA_1
 <104> := Test command C_TS_NA_1
 <105> := Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
 <106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
 <107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1

Parameter in control direction

 <110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value PE_ME_NA_1
 <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value PE_ME_NB_1
 <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value PE_ME_NC_1
 <113> := Parameter activation PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
 <120> := File Ready F_FR_NA_1
 <121> := Section Ready F_SR_NA_1
 <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
 <123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
 <124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
 <125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
 <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction) C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

D (station-specific parameters)
In the following table:
•Shaded boxes are not required.
•Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
•Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
•‘X’ if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR

UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION

UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1
<4> M_DP_TA_1
<5> M_ST_NA_1
<6> M_ST_TA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1
<9> M_ME_NA_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<10> M_ME_TA_1 D
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_SE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1
<50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1
<60> C_RC_TA_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
D <61>
<62>
C_SE_TA_1
C_SE_TB_1
<63> C_SE_TC_1
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1*) X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1*)
6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:
 Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
 Cyclic data transmission
Read Procedure:
 Read procedure

Spontaneous Transmission:
 Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a project-
specific list.
 Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
 Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1
 Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
 Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
 Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
 Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
 Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
 Global D
 Group 1  Group 5  Group 9  Group 13
Clock synchronization:
 Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Command transmission:
 Direct command transmission
 Direct setpoint command transmission
 Select and execute command
 Select and execute setpoint command
 C_SE ACTTERM used
 No additional definition
 Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
 Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
 Persistent output
 Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands

Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
Transmission of integrated totals:
 Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
 Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
 Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
 Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
 Counter read
 Counter freeze without reset

 Counter freeze with reset

 Counter reset
 General request counter

 Request counter group 1
Parameter loading:
 Threshold value
 Smoothing factor
 Low limit for transmission of measured values
 High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
D  Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure:
 Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
 Transparent file
 Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
 Transmission of sequences of events
 Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
 Transparent file
Background scan:
 Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
 Acquisition of transmission delay
Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
t0 30 s Timeout of connection establishment 120 s
t1 15 s Timeout of send or test APDUs 15 s
t2 10 s Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 10 s
t3 20 s Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state 20 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable 12 APDUs
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs 8 APDUs

Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (215 – 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
PARAMETER VALUE REMARKS
Portnumber 2404 In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter-
net. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
 Ethernet 802.3
 Serial X.21 interface
 Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
D.1.2 POINT LIST

D
The IEC 60870-5-104 data points are configured through the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP /
menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.
IEC104 POINT LISTS


APPENDIX E E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a ‘Device Profile Document’ in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2  Master
For Responses: Level 2  Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Control Relay Output Block (Object 12)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
E
Frozen Counters (Object 21)
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Time and Date (Object 50)
File Transfer (Object 70)
Internal Indications (Object 80)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: configurable up to 2048
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

 None  None
 Fixed at 3  Configurable
 Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:

 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System E-1

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT APPENDIX E
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

 Never
 Always
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
 Sometimes
 Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm:  None  Fixed at ____  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment:  None  Fixed at ____  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm:  None  Fixed at 10 s  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response:  None  Fixed at ____  Variable  Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Need Time Interval: Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary input change scanning period: 8 times per power system cycle
Analog input change scanning period: 500 ms
E Counter change scanning period:

Frozen counter event scanning period:
500 ms
500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 100 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both “Pulse On” and “Latch On” operations perform the same func-
tion in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the “On” state. If the Virtual Input is set to “Self-Reset”,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic™. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. “Pulse Off” and “Latch Off”
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the “Off” state. “Trip” and “Close” operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the “On” state.
E-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested: specific variation requested:
 Never  Never
 Only time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable  Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

 Never  Never
 Configurable  When Device Restarts
 Only certain objects  When Status Flags Change
 Sometimes (attach explanation)
 ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function No other options are permitted.
codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

 No Counters Reported  No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
 Default Object: 20  16 Bits (Counter 8)
Default Variation: 1  32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
 Point-by-point list attached  Other Value: _____
 Point-by-point list attached E
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
 Yes
 No

E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the M60 in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION FUNCTION QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER
NO. NO. CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
E 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all)
variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited quantity)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default varia-
tions for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5
for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respec-
tively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for change-
event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the M60 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.


20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index) E
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
22 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)


23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
cont’d 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
E 5 short floating point 1 (read)

22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
with Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)


34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07 (limited qty=1) (see Note 2)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
2
3
Class 1 Data
Class 2 Data
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity) E
4 Class 3 Data 21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
70 0 File event - any variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
2 File authentication 29 (authenticate) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format)
3 File command 25 (open) 5b (free format)
27 (delete)
4 File command status 26 (close) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format)
30 (abort) 130 (unsol. resp.)
5 File transfer 1 (read) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format)
2 (write) 130 (unsol. resp.)
6 File transfer status 129 (response) 5b (free format)
130 (unsol. resp.)
7 File descriptor 28 (get file info.) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format)
130 (unsol. resp.)
80 1 Internal Indications 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(index =7)
2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(see Note 3) (index =7)
--- No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
see Note 3
--- No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
--- No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX E
E.2DNP POINT LISTS E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The DNP binary input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT
LISTS  BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details. When a
freeze function is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter
point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time), Configurable
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 500
Default Class for All Points: 1

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E–3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS Table E–3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
0 Virtual Input 1 32 Virtual Input 33
6
7
Virtual Input 7
Virtual Input 8
38
39
Virtual Input 39
Virtual Input 40
E

E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
E Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
Table E–4: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0 Digital Counter 1
1 Digital Counter 2
2 Digital Counter 3
3 Digital Counter 4
4 Digital Counter 5
5 Digital Counter 6
6 Digital Counter 7
7 Digital Counter 8
8 Oscillography Trigger Count
9 Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. M60 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit
integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The DNP analog input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT
LISTS  ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.
Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit
values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul-
letin 9809-001: Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Default Class for all Points: 2
E


APPENDIX F F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N M60 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0108-B1 2.6x 09 March 2001 URM-001
1601-0108-B2 2.8x 12 October 2001 URM-002
1601-0108-B3 2.9x 03 December 2001 URM-003
1601-0108-B4 2.6x 27 February 2004 URX-120
1601-0108-C1 3.0x 02 July 2002 URM-004
1601-0108-C2 3.1x 30 August 2002 URM-005
1601-0108-C3 3.0x 18 November 2002 URM-006
1601-0108-C4 3.1x 18 November 2002 URM-007
1601-0108-C5 3.0x 11 February 2003 URM-008
1601-0108-C6 3.1x 11 February 2003 URM-009
1601-0108-D1 3.2x 11 February 2003 URM-010
1601-0108-D2 3.2x 02 June 2003 URX-084
1601-0108-E1 3.3x 01 May 2003 URX-080
1601-0108-E2 3.3x 29 May 2003 URX-083
1601-0108-F1 3.4x 10 December 2003 URX-111
1601-0108-F2 3.4x 09 February 2004 URX-115
1601-0108-G1 4.0x 23 March 2004 URX-123
1601-0108-G2 4.0x 17 May 2004 URX-136
1601-0108-H1 4.2x 30 June 2004 URX-145
1601-0108-H2 4.2x 23 July 2004 URX-151
1601-0108-J1 4.4x 15 September 2004 URX-156
1601-0108-K1 4.6x 15 February 2005 URX-176
1601-0108-L1 4.8x 05 August 2005 URX-202 F
1601-0108-M1 4.9x 15 December 2005 URX-208
1601-0108-M2 4.9x 27 February 2006 URX-214
1601-0108-N1 5.0x 31 March 2006 URX-217
1601-0108-N2 5.0x 26 May 2006 URX-220
1601-0108-P1 5.2x 23 October 2006 URX-230
1601-0108-P2 5.2x 24 January 2007 URX-232
1601-0108-R1 5.4x 01 July 2007 URX-242
1601-0108-R2 5.4x 31 August 2007 URX-246
1601-0108-R3 5.4x 17 October 2007 URX-251
1601-0108-S1 5.5x 7 December 2007 URX-253
1601-0108-S2 5.5x 22 February 2008 URX-258
1601-0108-S3 5.5x 12 March 2008 URX-260
1601-0108-T1 5.6x 27 June 2008 08-0390
1601-0109-U1 5.7x 29 May 2009 09-0938
1601-0109-U2 5.7x 30 September 2009 09-1165
1601-0109-V1 5.8x 29 May 2010 09-1457
1601-0109-V2 5.8x 30 September 2017 17-4032
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System F-1

F.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX F
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE M60 MANUAL
Table F–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL REVISION V2

PAGE PAGE CHANGE DESCRIPTION
(V1) (V2)
--- --- Update Updated document throughout, including branding to GE Grid Solutions
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-V2
2-3 2-3 Update Updated ORDERING section
3-18 3-18 Update Updated Figure 3-17 Contact Input and Output Module Wiring to include surge on module 67
3-24 3-24 Update Updated RS485 PORTS section
5-131 5-131 Update Updated Figure 5-63 Thermal Model Logic diagram as per specification
9- 9- Add Added THEORY OF OPERATION chapter in order to add SATURATION DETECTOR section
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section and data format codes
Table F–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL REVISION V1

(U2) (V1)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-V1

2-7 2-7 Update Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section
2-10 2-10 Update Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section
3-23 3-23 Update Updated CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS section

3-41 3-41 Update Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section
F 4-28 4-28 Update Updated INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY section
5-10 5-10 Update Updated ACCESS SUPERVISION section

5-15 5-15 Update Updated SERIAL PORTS section
5-22 5-22 Update Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL section
5-111 5-112 Update Updated THERMAL MODEL section
5-134 5-135 Update Updated TWO-SPEED MOTOR THERMAL MODEL section
5-166 5-167 Update Updated BREAKER FAILURE section
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
C-3 C-3 Update Updated PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES section
Table F–4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL REVISION U2 (Sheet 1 of 2)

(U1) (U2)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-U2
1-1 1-1 Update Updated INSPECTION CHECKLIST section
2-1 2-1 Update Updated OVERVIEW section

2-13 2-13 Update Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS specifications section
2-18 2-19 Update Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section
2-19 2-20 Update Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section
2-19 2-21 Update Updated APPROVALS specifications section
F-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin


(U1) (U2)
4-14 4-14 Update Updated LED INDICATORS section

5-77 5-77 Update Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
5-111 5-111 Update Updated THERMAL MODEL section
5-154 5-154 Update Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section
5-210 5-210 Update Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section
C-7 C-7 Update Updated CONFIGURABLE GOOSE section

(T1) (U1)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-U1
2-1 2-1 Update Updated OVERVIEW section

2-9 2-9 Update Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS section for changes to thermal model, underfrequency, and
overfrequency specifications
2-14 2-14 Update Updated INPUTS specifications section
2-18 2-18 Update Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section
2-19 2-19 Update Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section
3-2 3-2 Update Updated VERTICAL UNITS sub-section

3-13 3-14 Update Updated CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS section
4-1 4-1 Update Updated USING SETTINGS FILES section
5-8 5-8 Update Updated SECURITY section

F
5-22 5-22 Update Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section
5-38 5-39 Update Updated OSCILLOGRAPHY section
5-66 5-67 Update Updated POWER SYSTEM section
5-72 5-73 Update Updated BREAKERS section
5-76 5-77 Update Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
5-88 5-89 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table
5-147 5-148 Update Updated PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT section
5-152 5-154 Update Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section
5-176 5-178 Update Updated PHASE OVERVOLTAGE section
5-195 5-197 Update Updated RESTART DELAY sub-section
5-197 5-199 Update Updated DIGITAL ELEMENTS section
5-208 5-210 Update Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section
--- 5-211 Add Added BROKEN ROTOR BAR DETECTION section
5-212 5-217 Update Updated CONTACT OUTPUTS section
--- 5-229 Add Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS section
--- 5-230 Add Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section
5-239 --- Remove Removed RESET THERMAL MODEL section
--- 6-9 Add Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section

--- 6-20 Add Added BROKEN ROTOR BAR DETECTION section
6-22 6-24 Update Updated MOTOR LEARNED DATA section

F.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX F

(T1) (U1)
7-1 7-2 Update Updated CLEAR RECORDS section
7-2 7-3 Update Updated RELAY MAINTENANCE section
7-5 7-6 Update Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERRORS section
--- 8-1 Add Added SECURITY chapter
A-1 A-1 Update Updated FLEXANALOG ITEMS section

--- A-10 Add Added FLEXINTEGER ITEMS section

B-59 B-61 Update Updated DATA FORMATS section
Table F–6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL REVISION T1

(S3) (T1)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-T1
--- 3-13 Add Added PROCESS BUS MODULES section
--- 5-11 Add Added DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS section

5-14 5-15 Update Updated SERIAL PORTS section
--- 5-64 Add Added REMOTE RESOURCES section
5-84 5-88 Update Update FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table
--- 5-217 Add Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section
F ---
5-227
5-228
5-236
Add
Update
Added RRTD INPUTS section
Update TEST MODE section
--- 6-4 Add Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section
Table F–7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL REVISION S3

(S2) (S3)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-S3
2-14 2-14 Update Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section

2-15 2-15 Update Updated INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS specifications section
3-7 3-7 Update Updated REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT section

--- 3-46 Add Added ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS section
7-4 7-5 Update Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES section
B-8 B-8 Update Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section


(S1) (S2)
3-40 3-40 Update Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH OVERVIEW section

3-40 3-40 Update Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section
--- 3-43 Add Added UPLOADING M60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE sub-section
--- 3-43 Add Added SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION sub-section

(R3) (S1)

2-4 2-4 Update Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section
2-7 2-7 Update Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section
2-13 2-13 Update Updated OUTPUTS specifications section
2-14 2-14 Update Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section
3-35 3-36 Update Updated IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE section

--- 3-40 Add Added MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES section
--- 4-23 Add Added BREAKER CONTROL section
5-8 5-8 Update Updated PASSWORD SECURITY section (now titled SECURITY)
--- 5-32 Add Added ETHERNET SWITCH sub-section
5-42 5-43 Update Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS section
--- 5-68 Add Added BREAKERS section F
--- 5-72 Add Added DISCONNECT SWITCHES section
5-74 5-84 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table
--- 6-10 Add Added ETHERNET SWITCH section
B-8 B-8 Update Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section for revision 5.5x
Table F–10: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL REVISION R3

(R2) (R3)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-R3
--- 4-3 Remove Removed ONLINE TEMPLATE FEATURE section

--- 4-4 Add Added EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES section
6-24 6-24 Update Updated MODEL INFORMATION section
Table F–11: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL REVISION R2

(R1) (R2)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0108-R2
--- 4-3 Add Added ONLINE TEMPLATE FEATURE section

--- 4-3 Add Added AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATOR section

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX F
F.2ABBREVIATIONS F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere FREQ ............. Frequency

AC .................. Alternating Current FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying
A/D ................. Analog to Digital FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity FxE ................ FlexElement™
AMP ............... Ampere FWD............... Forward
ANG ............... Angle
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute G .................... Generator
AR .................. Automatic Reclosure GE.................. General Electric
ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit GND............... Ground
ASYM ............. Asymmetry GNTR............. Generator
AUTO ............. Automatic GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event
AUX................ Auxiliary GPS ............... Global Positioning System
AVG ................ Average
HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics
BER................ Bit Error Rate HCT ............... High Current Time
BF................... Breaker Fail HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
BKR................ Breaker HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface
BLK ................ Block HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
BLKG.............. Blocking HYB ............... Hybrid
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR ............. Breaker I...................... Instantaneous
I_0.................. Zero Sequence current
CAP................ Capacitor I_1.................. Positive Sequence current
CC .................. Coupling Capacitor I_2.................. Negative Sequence current
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer IA ................... Phase A current
CFG................ Configure / Configurable IAB ................. Phase A minus B current
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files IB ................... Phase B current
CHK................ Check IBC................. Phase B minus C current
CHNL ............. Channel IC ................... Phase C current
CLS ................ Close ICA................. Phase C minus A current
CLSD.............. Closed ID ................... Identification
CMND ............ Command IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device
CMPRSN........ Comparison IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission
CO.................. Contact Output IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
COM............... Communication IG ................... Ground (not residual) current
COMM............ Communications Igd.................. Differential Ground current
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
CONN............. Connection INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence
CONT ............. Continuous, Contact INIT ................ Initiate
INST............... Instantaneous
F
CO-ORD......... Coordination
CPU................ Central Processing Unit INV................. Inverse
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code I/O .................. Input/Output
CRT, CRNT .... Current IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage
CT .................. Current Transformer IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer ISO................. International Standards Organization
IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage
D/A ................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation
DD .................. Disturbance Detector kA................... kiloAmpere
DFLT .............. Default kV................... kiloVolt
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input LED................ Light Emitting Diode
DIFF ............... Differential LEO................ Line End Open
DIR ................. Directional LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder
DISCREP ....... Discrepancy LOOP............. Loopback
DIST ............... Distance LPU................ Line Pickup
DMD ............... Demand LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor M.................... Machine
dt .................... Rate of Change mA ................. MilliAmpere
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip MAG............... Magnitude
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip MAN............... Manual / Manually
MAX ............... Maximum
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files MMI................ Man Machine Interface
EXT ................ Extension, External MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT ............... Minimum Response Time
F ..................... Field MSG............... Message
FAIL................ Failure MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle
FD .................. Fault Detector MTR ............... Motor
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
FLA................. Full Load Current MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
FO .................. Fiber Optic MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)

APPENDIX F F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase) SBO ................Select Before Operate

MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A) SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B) SEC ................Secondary
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C) SEL .................Select / Selector / Selection
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour SENS ..............Sensitive
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase) SEQ ................Sequence
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A) SFTP...............Secure Shell (SSH) File Transfer Protocol, Secure
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B) File Transfer Protocol
MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C) SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio
MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour SNTP ..............Simple Network Time Protocol
SRC ................Source
N..................... Neutral SSB.................Single Side Band
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable SSEL...............Session Selector
NEG ............... Negative STATS.............Statistics
NMPLT ........... Nameplate SUPN..............Supervision
NOM............... Nominal SUPV ..............Supervise / Supervision
NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol SV ...................Supervision, Service
NTR................ Neutral SYNC..............Synchrocheck
SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck
O .................... Over
OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent T......................Time, transformer
O/P, Op........... Output TC ...................Thermal Capacity
OP .................. Operate TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol
OPER ............. Operate TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used
OPERATG...... Operating TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier
O/S ................. Operating System TEMP..............Temperature
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion
OUT................ Output TMR ................Timer
OV .................. Overvoltage TOC ................Time Overcurrent
OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency TOV ................Time Overvoltage
OVLD ............. Overload TRANS............Transient
TRANSF .........Transfer
P..................... Phase TSEL...............Transport Selector
PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer TUC ................Time Undercurrent
PCNT ............. Percent TUV.................Time Undervoltage
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase) TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter
PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A)
PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B) U .....................Under
PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C) UC...................Undercurrent
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture
PHS................ Phase UDP ................User Datagram Protocol
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories
Statement
PKP ................ Pickup
PLC ................ Power Line Carrier
UNBAL............Unbalance
UR...................Universal Relay
URC ................Universal Recloser Control
F
POS................ Positive .URS ...............Filename extension for settings files
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip UV...................Undervoltage
PRESS ........... Pressure
PRI ................. Primary V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz
PROT ............. Protection V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage
PSEL .............. Presentation Selector V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage
pu ................... Per Unit V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block VA ...................Phase A voltage
PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip VAB.................Phase A to B voltage
PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip VARH ..............Var-hour voltage
PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated VB ...................Phase B voltage
PWR............... Power VBA.................Phase B to A voltage
VBG ................Phase B to Ground voltage
QUAD............. Quadrilateral VC...................Phase C voltage
VCA ................Phase C to A voltage
R..................... Rate, Reverse VCG ................Phase C to Ground voltage
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle VF ...................Variable Frequency
REF ................ Reference VIBR ...............Vibration
REM ............... Remote VT ...................Voltage Transformer
REV................ Reverse VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
RI.................... Reclose Initiate VTLOS ............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
RIP ................. Reclose In Progress
RGT BLD........ Right Blinder WDG ...............Winding
ROD ............... Remote Open Detector WH..................Watt-hour
RST ................ Reset w/ opt ..............With Option
RSTR ............. Restrained WRT................With Respect To
RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit X .....................Reactance
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver XDUCER.........Transducer
XFMR..............Transformer
s ..................... second
S..................... Sensitive Z......................Impedance, Zone
SAT ................ CT Saturation

F.3 WARRANTY APPENDIX F
F.3WARRANTY F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Grid Solutions warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years.
For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see the GE Grid Solutions Terms and Conditions at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.

INDEX
Index
description ..................................................................... 4-23

Numerics dual breaker logic ................................................. 5-77, 5-78
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-92
10BASE-F Modbus registers .......................................................... B-25
communications options ................................................. 3-27 settings ......................................................................... 5-75
description .................................................................... 3-30 BREAKER FAILURE
interface ........................................................................ 3-41 description ................................................................... 5-169
redundant option ........................................................... 3-27 determination ............................................................... 5-170
settings ......................................................................... 5-17 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-91
logic ............................................ 5-173, 5-174, 5-175, 5-176
main path sequence ..................................................... 5-170
settings ............................................................ 5-168, 5-171
A specifications ................................................................. 2-12
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-6 BREAKER FLASHOVER
AC CURRENT INPUTS ................................... 2-15, 3-12, 5-68 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-91
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................2-15, 3-13 logic ............................................................................ 5-212
ACCELERATION TIME Modbus registers .......................................................... B-13
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-93 settings ....................................................................... 5-208
Modbus registers .................................................. B-33, B-37 BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-6
settings ....................................................................... 5-111 BRIGHTNESS .................................................................. 5-12
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-18, 4-27 BROKEN ROTOR BAR
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................. 5-110 actual values ................................................................. 6-20
ACTUAL VALUES FlexLogic™ operand ...................................................... 5-94
metering ........................................................................ 6-12 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-46
product information ........................................................ 6-27 settings ....................................................................... 5-214
status .............................................................................. 6-3
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-46
AMP UNBALANCE
C
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-91
logic ............................................................................ 5-133 C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-42, 3-44, 3-47
settings ....................................................................... 5-132 C37.94SM COMMUNICATIONS ........................................ 3-45
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-1 CAPACITOR CONTROL
APPARENT POWER ................................................2-14, 6-18 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-17
APPLICATION EXAMPLES CAUTIONS ......................................................................... 1-1
breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-204 CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-22
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-218 CHANGES TO L60 MANUAL ...............................................F-2
sensitive directional power ........................................... 5-145 CHANGES TO MANUAL ............................................. F-4, F-5
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-22 CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-34
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-89 CHANNEL TESTS ............................................................ 6-10
AUDIT LIST OF PORT NUMBERS .................................... 5-17 CHANNELS
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE banks ................................................................... 5-68, 5-69
FlexLogic operands ....................................................... 5-91 CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-202
logic ............................................................................ 5-184 CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-22
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-38 CLEAR RECORDS .................................................... 5-14, 7-2
settings ....................................................................... 5-184 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
specifications ................................................................ 2-12 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-60
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE settings ......................................................................... 5-14
FlexLogic operands ....................................................... 5-91 CLOCK
logic ............................................................................ 5-183 setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-39 settings ......................................................................... 5-39
settings ....................................................................... 5-183 COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1
specifications ................................................................ 2-12 COMMUNICATIONS
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ..................................... 3-13 10BASE-F ................................................... 3-27, 3-30, 5-17
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-18 channel ......................................................................... 3-34
connecting to the UR ............................................... 1-9, 1-16
CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2
dnp .........................................................................5-18, E-1
B EGD .............................................................................. 5-36
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-68, 5-69 G.703 ............................................................................ 3-37
BATTERY FAILURE ........................................................... 7-6 half duplex ...................................................................... B-1
BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8 HTTP ............................................................................. 5-34
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ................................................. E-9 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol............................................... 5-35
BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-4 IEC 61850 ................................................................... 5-223
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-5 inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-19
BREAKER CONTROL Modbus .................................................. 5-17, 5-39, B-1, B-3
control of 2 breakers ...................................................... 4-24 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-21
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System i

INDEX
network ......................................................................... 5-17

overview ........................................................................ 1-17 D
RS232 ........................................................................... 3-27
RS485 ..........................................................3-27, 3-29, 5-16 DATA FORMATS, MODBUS ............................................. B-67
settings ............................. 5-17, 5-18, 5-23, 5-35, 5-36, 5-39 DATA LOGGER
specifications ........................................................ 2-18, 2-19 clearing ........................................................................... 7-2
UCA/MMS ................................................................... 5-225 Modbus registers .................................................. B-11, B-23
web server..................................................................... 5-34 settings ..........................................................................5-43
COMTRADE ...................................................................... B-6 specifications .................................................................2-14
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-21 via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6
CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-2 DATE ................................................................................ 7-2
CONTACT INPUTS DCMA INPUTS .................................................................6-22
actual values ................................................................... 6-3 Modbus registers .................................................. B-15, B-35
dry connections ............................................................. 3-20 settings ........................................................................ 5-235
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-96 specifications .................................................................2-15
Modbus registers .........................................B-10, B-15, B-53 DCMA OUTPUTS
settings ....................................................................... 5-217 description .....................................................................3-26
specifications................................................................. 2-15 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-43
thresholds ................................................................... 5-217 settings ........................................................................ 5-242
wet connections ............................................................. 3-20 specifications .................................................................2-17
CONTACT OUTPUTS DEFINITE TIME CURVE ...................................... 5-165, 5-177
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-4
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-96 DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-223
Modbus registers .........................................B-10, B-15, B-58 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... E-1
settings ....................................................................... 5-220 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH .................................................3-11
CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-185 DIFFERENTIAL
CONTROL POWER stator ......................................................... 2-10, 5-140, 6-15
description..................................................................... 3-12 DIGITAL COUNTERS
specifications................................................................. 2-17 actual values ................................................................... 6-7
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-92
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-91 logic ............................................................................ 5-206
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-59 Modbus registers .................................................... B-9, B-47
settings ......................................................................... 5-48 settings ........................................................................ 5-205
specifications................................................................. 2-13 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
COOL TIME CONSTANT ......................................5-113, 5-119 application example ...................................................... 5-203
COOLING ...................................................................... 5-120 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-92
COUNTERS logic ............................................................................ 5-202
actual values ................................................................... 6-7 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-41
settings ....................................................................... 5-205 settings ........................................................................ 5-201
CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-63 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2 see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ..................................... 2-16, 3-11 DIMENSIONS ............................................................. 3-1, 3-2
CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-22 DIRECT DEVICES
CT BANKS actual values ................................................................... 6-9
settings ......................................................................... 5-68 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-17
CT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-13, 5-6, 5-68 settings ........................................................................ 5-227
CT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-13 DIRECT I/O
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-68 see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS
CURRENT METERING application example ........................................... 5-228, 5-229
actual values ................................................................. 6-16 configuration examples ........................ 5-57, 5-60, 5-63, 5-64
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-11 settings ..............................................5-57, 5-63, 5-64, 5-227
specifications................................................................. 2-14 DIRECT INPUTS
CURRENT UNBALANCE .................................................. 6-15 actual values ................................................................... 6-8
logic ............................................................................ 5-133 application example ........................................... 5-228, 5-229
Modbus registers ..................................................B-31, B-46 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
settings ....................................................................... 5-132 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-96
CURVES Modbus registers ....................... B-10, B-17, B-44, B-60, B-61
definite time.......................................................5-165, 5-177 settings ........................................................................ 5-227
FlexCurves™ ...................................................... 5-82, 5-165 specifications .................................................................2-15
I2T .............................................................................. 5-165 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
IAC ............................................................................. 5-164 error messages ............................................................... 7-6
IEC ............................................................................. 5-163 DIRECT OUTPUTS
IEEE ........................................................................... 5-162 application example ........................................... 5-228, 5-229
inverse time undervoltage ............................................ 5-177 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
types ........................................................................... 5-161 Modbus registers ................................ B-10, B-44, B-60, B-61
settings ........................................................................ 5-227
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL entries
ii M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

INDEX
DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION ...................................... 5-153 uploading setting files .................................................... 3-51

DIRECTIONAL POWER EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS .................................. 4-15, 4-16
see entry for SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER EVENT RECORDER
DISCONNECT SWITCH actual values ................................................................. 6-25
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-95 clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2
logic .............................................................................. 5-81 Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-35 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-15
settings ......................................................................... 5-79 specifications ................................................................. 2-14
DISPLAY ........................................................ 1-17, 4-23, 5-12 via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................ 5-225 EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-5
DNP COMMUNICATIONS EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................ B-5
binary counters ............................................................. E-10
binary input points ........................................................... E-8
binary output points ......................................................... E-9
control relay output blocks ............................................... E-9 F
device profile document ................................................... E-1 F485 ................................................................................ 1-17
frozen counters ............................................................. E-10 FACEPLATE ............................................................... 3-1, 3-2
implementation table ....................................................... E-4 FACEPLATE PANELS ............................................. 4-13, 4-23
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-21 FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-16
settings ......................................................................... 5-18 FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-21
DUPLEX, HALF .................................................................. B-1 FAX NUMBERS .................................................................. 1-2
FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1
FIRMWARE REVISION ..................................................... 6-27
E FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
FLA ................................................................................. 5-72
EGD PROTOCOL FLASH MESSAGES .......................................................... 5-12
actual values .......................................................... 6-9, 6-10 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-39 actual values ................................................................... 6-8
settings ......................................................................... 5-36 Modbus registers ................................................. B-15, B-41
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ....................................... 2-21 settings ......................................................................... 5-54
ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-4 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
ENERGY METERING FLEXCURVES™
actual values ................................................................. 6-19 equation ...................................................................... 5-165
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-13 Modbus registers ................................................. B-26, B-47
specifications ................................................................ 2-14 settings ......................................................................... 5-82
ENERGY METERING, CLEARING ............................. 5-14, 7-2 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
ENERVISTA UR SETUP table .............................................................................. 5-82
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 FLEXELEMENTS™
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 actual values ................................................................. 6-21
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2 direction ...................................................................... 5-107
installation ...................................................................... 1-6 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-92
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 hysteresis .................................................................... 5-107
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2 Modbus registers ................................................. B-43, B-45
overview ......................................................................... 4-1 pickup ......................................................................... 5-107
requirements ................................................................... 1-6 scheme logic ............................................................... 5-106
EQUATIONS settings .................................................. 5-105, 5-106, 5-108
definite time curve ............................................. 5-165, 5-177 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
FlexCurve™ ................................................................ 5-165 FLEXLOGIC
I²t curves ..................................................................... 5-165 locking to a serial number ....................................... 4-9, 8-11
IAC curves .................................................................. 5-164 FLEXLOGIC™
IEC curves .................................................................. 5-163 editing with EnerVista UR Setup ....................................... 4-2
IEEE curves ................................................................ 5-162 equation editor ............................................................. 5-104
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ERROR ...................................... 7-5 error messages ................................................................ 7-5
ETHERNET evaluation ...................................................................... 5-99
actual values ................................................................... 6-8 example ............................................................. 5-89, 5-100
configuration ................................................................... 1-9 example equation ......................................................... 5-187
error messages ............................................................... 7-7 gate characteristics ........................................................ 5-98
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-11 locking equation entries .......................................... 4-8, 8-10
quick connect ................................................................ 1-11 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-27
settings ......................................................................... 5-17 operands .............................................................. 5-90, 5-91
ETHERNET SWITCH operators ....................................................................... 5-99
actual values ................................................................. 6-11 rules .............................................................................. 5-99
configuration .........................................................3-49, 3-50 security .................................................................. 4-8, 8-10
hardware ....................................................................... 3-48 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-22 timers .......................................................................... 5-104
overview ....................................................................... 3-48 worksheet .................................................................... 5-101
saving setting files ......................................................... 3-50 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR ................................ 5-104
settings ......................................................................... 5-38 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System iii

INDEX
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-28 settings ........................................................................ 5-234

settings ....................................................................... 5-105 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-247 device ID ..................................................................... 5-224
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-248 DNA2 assignments ....................................................... 5-226
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-26 error messages ............................................................... 7-7
FORM-A RELAY Modbus registers .................................................. B-48, B-64
high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-15 remote device settings .................................................. 5-223
outputs .........................................................3-14, 3-15, 3-20 remote inputs ............................................................... 5-224
specifications................................................................. 2-16 settings ..........................................................................5-22
FORM-C RELAY UserSt-1 bit pair ........................................................... 5-226
outputs ................................................................. 3-14, 3-20 IEC CURVES .................................................................. 5-163
specifications................................................................. 2-16 IED ................................................................................... 1-3
FREQUENCY METERING IED SETUP ....................................................................... 1-6
actual values ................................................................. 6-19 IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ................... 3-42, 3-44, 3-47
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-13 IEEE CURVES ................................................................ 5-162
settings ......................................................................... 5-70 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS .................................................. 1-5
specifications................................................................. 2-14 IN SERVICE INDICATOR ...........................................1-18, 7-4
FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-70, 6-21 INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR ................................ 7-5
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-69 INPUTS
FULL LOAD AMPS ........................................................... 5-72 AC current ............................................................ 2-15, 5-68
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4 AC voltage ............................................................ 2-15, 5-69
FUSE ............................................................................... 2-16 contact inputs .......................................... 2-15, 5-217, 5-247
FUSE FAILURE dcmA inputs .......................................................... 2-15, 3-26
see VT FUSE FAILURE direct inputs ...................................................................2-15
IRIG-B .................................................................. 2-15, 3-31
remote inputs ................................. 2-15, 5-223, 5-224, 5-225
RTD inputs ............................................................ 2-15, 3-26
G virtual .......................................................................... 5-219
G.703 .................................................... 3-36, 3-37, 3-38, 3-41 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................. 1-2
GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-164 INSTALLATION
GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-17 communications .............................................................3-28
GROUND IOC CT inputs .............................................................. 3-12, 3-13
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-92 RS485 ...........................................................................3-29
logic ............................................................................ 5-167 settings ..........................................................................5-65
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-30 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
settings ....................................................................... 5-167 see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................ 1-3
see entry for GROUND TOC INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ..................................2-19
GROUND TOC INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-3
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-92 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................. 5-178
logic ............................................................................ 5-166 IOC
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-30 see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
settings ....................................................................... 5-166 IP ADDRESS ....................................................................5-17
specifications................................................................. 2-10 IRIG-B
GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................. 5-110 connection .....................................................................3-31
GSSE ................................................ 5-224, 5-225, 5-226, 6-7 error messages ............................................................... 7-6
GUARANTEE .....................................................................F-8 settings ..........................................................................5-39
specifications ........................................................ 2-15, 2-17
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ................................................2-22
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1 K
HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO ..................................... 5-120
HTTP PROTOCOL ........................................................... 5-34 KEYPAD .................................................................. 1-18, 4-23
I L
I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-165 LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-3
IAC CURVES ................................................................. 5-164 LANGUAGE ......................................................................5-12
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL LASER MODULE ..............................................................3-35
interoperability document ................................................ D-1 LATCHING OUTPUTS
point list ......................................................................... D-9 application example ........................................... 5-221, 5-222
settings ......................................................................... 5-35 error messages ............................................................... 7-7
IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS settings ........................................................................ 5-220
settings ....................................................................... 5-232 specifications .................................................................2-16
IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS LED INDICATORS ......................... 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-22, 5-46
iv M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

INDEX
LED TEST metering ........................................................................ 6-15

FlexLogic™ operand ...................................................... 5-97 settings .................................................... 5-72, 5-111, 5-160
settings ......................................................................... 5-44 MOTOR COOLING ......................................................... 5-120
specifications ................................................................ 2-13 MOTOR CURVES ...................................... 5-114, 5-117, 5-118
LINK POWER BUDGET .................................................... 2-19 MOTOR LEARNED DATA
LOGIC GATES ................................................................. 5-99 actual values ................................................................. 6-24
LOST PASSWORD ...................................... 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-34
MOTOR SETUP
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-32
MOTOR START SUPERVISION
M actual values ................................................................. 6-23
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-3 settings ....................................................................... 5-196
MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................. 6-27 specifications ................................................................. 2-12
MAXIMUM STARTING RATE MOTOR THERMAL MODEL
settings ....................................................................... 5-197 see index entry for THERMAL MODEL
MECHANIAL JAM MOUNTING ................................................................. 3-1, 3-2
MECHANICAL JAM
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34 N
settings ....................................................................... 5-133
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ...................................... B-67 NAMEPLATE ...................................................................... 1-2
MENU HEIRARCHY .................................................1-18, 4-25 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
MENU NAVIGATION ....................................... 1-18, 4-24, 4-25 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-93
METERING logic ............................................................................ 5-182
conventions ...........................................................6-12, 6-13 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-31
current .......................................................................... 2-14 settings ....................................................................... 5-182
frequency ...................................................................... 2-14 specifications ................................................................. 2-12
power ............................................................................ 2-14 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC
voltage .......................................................................... 2-14 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-35
METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................. 6-13 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
MODBUS FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-93
data logger ...................................................................... B-6 logic ............................................................................ 5-160
event recorder ................................................................. B-7 polarization .................................................................. 5-158
exception responses ........................................................ B-5 settings ....................................................................... 5-156
execute operation ............................................................ B-4 specifications ................................................................. 2-11
flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-55 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3 see entry for NEUTRAL IOC
function code 05h ............................................................ B-4 NEUTRAL IOC
function code 06h ............................................................ B-4 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-93
function code 10h ............................................................ B-5 logic ............................................................................ 5-156
introduction ..................................................................... B-1 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-29
memory map data formats .............................................. B-67 settings ....................................................................... 5-155
obtaining files .................................................................. B-6 specifications ................................................................. 2-10
oscillography ................................................................... B-6 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
passwords ....................................................................... B-7 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-93
read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3 logic ............................................................................ 5-181
settings .................................................................5-17, 5-39 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-38
store multiple settings ...................................................... B-5 settings ....................................................................... 5-181
store single setting .......................................................... B-4 specifications ................................................................. 2-12
supported function codes ................................................. B-3 NEUTRAL TOC
user map ..................................................... 5-39, B-10, B-26 specifications ................................................................. 2-10
MODEL INFORMATION ................................................... 6-27 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ........................................ 6-27 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-92
MODULE FAILURE ERROR ............................................... 7-5 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-47
MODULES settings ....................................................................... 5-109
communications ............................................................ 3-28 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
CT ................................................................................ 3-13 NSAP ADDRESS .............................................................. 5-17
CT/VT .................................................................... 3-12, 5-6
direct inputs/outputs ...................................................... 3-35
insertion ................................................................... 3-6, 3-7
order codes ..................................................................... 2-7 O
power supply ................................................................. 3-11 OBTAIN LIST OF PORT NUMBERS .................................. 5-17
transducer I/O ............................................................... 3-26 ONE SHOTS .................................................................... 5-99
VT ................................................................................ 3-13 OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-20
withdrawal ................................................................ 3-6, 3-7 OPERATING TIMES ......................................................... 2-10
MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................. 5-207 ORDER CODES .............................2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 6-27, 7-3
MOTOR ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-3
actual values .......................................................... 6-3, 6-15
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System v

INDEX
ORDERING ............................................ 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-21 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
OSCILLOGRAPHY FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-93
actual values ................................................................. 6-26 logic ............................................................................ 5-154
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2 phase A polarization ..................................................... 5-152
Modbus .......................................................................... B-6 settings ............................................................. 5-152, 5-153
Modbus registers ..................................................B-15, B-23 specifications .................................................................2-11
settings ......................................................................... 5-41 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
specifications................................................................. 2-14 see entry for PHASE IOC
via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6 PHASE IOC
via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-93
OSI NETWORK ADDRESS ............................................... 5-17 logic ............................................................................ 5-151
OUTPUTS Modbus registers ........................................................... B-29
contact outputs ............................................................ 5-220 specifications .................................................................2-10
control power ................................................................. 2-17 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
critical failure relay ........................................................ 2-16 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-93
Fast Form-C relay .......................................................... 2-16 logic ............................................................................ 5-180
Form-A relay ....................................... 2-16, 3-14, 3-15, 3-20 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34
Form-C relay ................................................2-16, 3-14, 3-20 settings ........................................................................ 5-180
IRIG-B ........................................................................... 2-17 specifications .................................................................2-12
latching outputs .................................................. 2-16, 5-220 PHASE ROTATION ...........................................................5-70
remote outputs ..................................................5-225, 5-226 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
virtual outputs .............................................................. 5-222 see entry for PHASE TOC
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................... 5-161 PHASE TOC
OVERCURRENT CURVES specifications .................................................................2-10
definite time................................................................. 5-165 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
FlexCurves™ ............................................................... 5-165 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-94
I2T .............................................................................. 5-165 logic ............................................................................ 5-179
IAC ............................................................................. 5-164 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34
IEC ............................................................................. 5-163 settings ........................................................................ 5-179
IEEE ........................................................................... 5-162 specifications .................................................................2-12
OVERFREQUENCY PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC ......................................2-11
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-93 PORT NUMBER LIST ........................................................5-17
logic ............................................................................ 5-195 POWER METERING
settings ....................................................................... 5-195 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12
specifications................................................................. 2-12 specifications .................................................................2-14
OVERFRQUENCY values ............................................................................6-18
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-31 Power off, save data first ..................................................3-12
OVERVOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
auxiliary ............................................................. 2-12, 5-184 description .....................................................................3-11
negative sequence ....................................................... 5-182 low range .......................................................................2-16
negative-sequence ......................................................... 2-12 specifications .................................................................2-16
neutral ................................................................ 2-12, 5-181 POWER SYSTEM
phase ................................................................. 2-12, 5-180 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-25
PREFERENCES
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-21
PROCESS BUS
P overview ........................................................................3-14
PANEL CUTOUT ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2 PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................ 6-27, B-8
PARITY ........................................................................... 5-16 PRODUCT SETUP ...................................................... 5-8, 8-2
PASSWORD SECURITY .............................. 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3 PRODUCTION TESTS ......................................................2-21
FlexLogic operands ........................................................ 5-97 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-4
PASSWORDS phase/neutral/ground IOC ...............................................2-11
changing ....................................................................... 4-28 PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4
for settings templates ................................................ 4-5, 8-7 PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
lost password ................................... 4-28, 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3 see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
Modbus registers ..................................................B-14, B-20
overview ........................................................................ 1-19 R
security .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1
settings .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1 REACTIVE POWER ................................................. 2-14, 6-18
PC SOFTWARE REAL POWER ......................................................... 2-14, 6-18
see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS ............................................. 5-177 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-23
PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4 settings ..........................................................................5-39
PHASE ANGLE METERING .............................................. 6-13 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ..................................... 3-8
PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-16 RECLOSER CURVES ............................................ 5-85, 5-165
PHASE DIRECTIONAL OC REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING
vi M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

INDEX
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-94 specifications ................................................................. 2-15

Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 RTD PROTECTION
settings ....................................................................... 5-199 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-94
REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-27 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
RELAY ACTIVATION ....................................................... 4-27
RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-89
RELAY MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 7-3
RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-66 S
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................... 1-18 SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-2
REMOTE DEVICES SATURATION DETECTOR ................................................. 9-1
actual values ................................................................... 6-6 SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-5
device ID ..................................................................... 5-224 SECURITY AUDIT LIST OF PORT NUMBER ..................... 5-17
error messages ............................................................... 7-7 SELECTOR SWITCH
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-97 actual values ................................................................... 6-7
Modbus registers ................................ B-10, B-15, B-62, B-65 application example ..................................................... 5-192
settings ....................................................................... 5-223 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-94
statistics ......................................................................... 6-7 logic ............................................................................ 5-193
REMOTE DPS INPUTS Modbus registers .......................................................... B-47
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 settings ....................................................................... 5-188
settings ....................................................................... 5-225 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
REMOTE INPUTS timing ............................................................... 5-191, 5-192
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 Self-test errors ................................................................... 7-8
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-97 SELF-TESTS
Modbus registers ......................................... B-10, B-15, B-62 description ....................................................................... 7-4
settings ....................................................................... 5-224 error messages ................................................................ 7-6
specifications ................................................................ 2-15 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-98
REMOTE OUTPUTS Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8
DNA-1 bit pair ............................................................. 5-225 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-63 actual values ................................................................. 6-19
UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-226 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-92
REMOTE RTD INPUTS logic ............................................................................ 5-146
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-40 Modbus registers ................................................. B-11, B-32
REMOTE RTD PROTECTION settings ............................................................ 5-144, 5-146
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-94 specifications ................................................................. 2-11
REPAIR ............................................................................. F-8 SENSTIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
REPLACEMENT MODULES ................................. 2-7, 2-8, 2-9 characteristic ............................................................... 5-145
RESETTING .......................................................... 5-97, 5-226 SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................. 6-27
RESTART DELAY SERIAL PORTS
FlexLogic™ operand ...................................................... 5-94 settings ......................................................................... 5-16
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 SETTING GROUPS ............................ 5-94, 5-110, 5-187, B-31
settings ....................................................................... 5-199 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
REVISION HISTORY .......................................................... F-1 description ................................................................ 4-4, 8-6
RF IMMUNITY ................................................................. 2-21 editing ...................................................................... 4-4, 8-6
RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-21 enabling ................................................................... 4-4, 8-6
RMS CURRENT ............................................................... 2-14 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-66
RMS VOLTAGE ............................................................... 2-14 password protection .................................................. 4-5, 8-7
RRTD INPUTS removing .................................................................. 4-7, 8-9
actual values ................................................................. 6-22 viewing ..................................................................... 4-6, 8-8
settings ....................................................................... 5-238 SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-26
RS232 SIGNAL SOURCES
configuration ................................................................. 1-10 description ....................................................................... 5-5
specifications ................................................................ 2-18 metering ........................................................................ 6-16
wiring ............................................................................ 3-27 SIGNAL TYPES .................................................................. 1-4
RS422 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-1, 2-2
configuration ................................................................. 3-39 SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1
timing ............................................................................ 3-40 SNTP PROTOCOL
two-channel application ................................................. 3-39 error messages ................................................................ 7-7
with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-41 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-23
RS485 settings ......................................................................... 5-36
communications ............................................................ 3-27 SOFTWARE
configuration ................................................................... 1-8 installation ....................................................................... 1-6
description .................................................................... 3-29 see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
specifications ................................................................ 2-18 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-5
RTD BIAS ............................................................ 5-113, 5-121 SOFTWARE, PC
RTD INPUTS see entry for EnerVista UR Setup
actual values ................................................................. 6-22 SOURCE FREQUENCY .................................................... 6-19
Modbus registers .................................................. B-16, B-27 SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES .................................... 5-177
settings ............................................................. 5-236, 5-239 SOURCES
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System vii

INDEX
description....................................................................... 5-5 TIME BETWEEN STARTS

example use of .............................................................. 5-71 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-96
metering ........................................................................ 6-16 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-25 settings ........................................................................ 5-198
settings ......................................................................... 5-70 TIME OVERCURRENT
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 2-10 see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
ST TYPE CONNECTORS ................................................. 3-30 TIMERS ......................................................................... 5-104
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ............................................F-6 TOC
START INHIBIT .............................................................. 5-122 ground ......................................................................... 5-166
STARTING RECORDS specifications .................................................................2-10
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2 Torque for screws .............................................................. 3-9
STARTS PER HOUR TRACEABILITY
FlexLogic™ operand ...................................................... 5-95 data .................................................... 4-11, 4-12, 8-13, 8-14
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-33 overview ............................................................... 4-10, 8-12
settings ....................................................................... 5-197 rules ..................................................................... 4-12, 8-14
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL TRACKING FREQUENCY ....................................... 6-21, B-39
actual values ................................................................. 6-15 TRANSDUCER I/O
characteristic ............................................................... 5-140 actual values ..................................................................6-22
description................................................................... 5-140 settings ........................................ 5-235, 5-236, 5-238, 5-239
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-95 specifications .................................................................2-15
logic ............................................................................ 5-141 wiring .............................................................................3-26
Modbus registers ..................................................B-11, B-31 TRIP BUS
settings ....................................................................... 5-140 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-96
specifications................................................................. 2-10 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-42
STATUS INDICATORS ............................................ 4-14, 4-16 settings ........................................................................ 5-185
STORAGE TEMPERATURE .............................................. 2-20 TRIP LEDs .......................................................................5-46
SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT TROUBLE INDICATOR ..............................................1-18, 7-4
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-95 TROUBLESHOOTING
SURGE IMMUNITY .......................................................... 2-21 breaker not working ...................................................... 5-202
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ..................... 6-13 setting not working ....................................................... 5-202
SYNCHROCHECK TWO-SPEED MOTOR
actual values .......................................................... 6-9, 6-22 acceleration time .......................................................... 5-137
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .................................................... 5-69 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-93
SYSTEM SETUP .............................................................. 5-68 settings ........................................................................ 5-136
thermal model .............................................................. 5-136
undercurrent ................................................................ 5-138
T
TARGET MESSAGES ......................................................... 7-4 U
TARGET SETTING ............................................................. 5-5
TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-4 UL APPROVAL .................................................................2-22
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................ 5-34 UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
TELEPROTECTION commands .....................................................................5-14
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 resetting ......................................................................... 7-2
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 UNBALANCE BIAS .............................................. 5-113, 5-119
FlexLogic™ operands ........................................... 5-95, 5-96 UNDERCURRENT
logic ............................................................................ 5-232 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-96
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-45 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-46
overview ...................................................................... 5-230 settings ........................................................................ 5-134
settings .................................................... 5-65, 5-230, 5-231 specifications .................................................................2-11
specifications................................................................. 2-16 UNDERFREQUENCY
TEMPERATURE MONITOR ....................................... 5-98, 7-8 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-96
TERMINALS ....................................................................... 3-8 logic ............................................................................ 5-194
TESTING Modbus registers ........................................................... B-38
force contact inputs ..................................................... 5-247 settings ........................................................................ 5-194
force contact outputs ................................................... 5-248 specifications .................................................................2-12
lamp test ......................................................................... 7-3 UNDERPOWER
self-test error messages ................................................... 7-4 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-96
THERMAL CAPACITY USED .......................................... 5-114 settings ........................................................................ 5-147
THERMAL MODEL specifications .................................................................2-11
cooling ........................................................................ 5-120 UNDERVOLTAGE
curves ...............................................................5-114, 5-117 auxiliary .........................................................................2-12
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-93 phase ................................................................. 2-12, 5-179
logic ............................................................................ 5-131 UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ........................... 5-177
Modbus registers ..................................................B-32, B-36 UNEXPECTED RESTART ERROR ..................................... 7-8
settings ....................................................................... 5-113 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................5-66, 7-5
specifications................................................................. 2-10 UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-2
TIME ................................................................................. 7-2 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM .................................5-64
viii M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

INDEX
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-3 logic ............................................................................ 5-219

URPC Modbus registers ................................................... B-8, B-55
see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP settings ....................................................................... 5-219
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
example ........................................................................ 5-57 actual values ................................................................... 6-6
invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-55 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-97
Modbus registers .................................................. B-21, B-26 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-56
settings .................................................................5-55, 5-57 settings ....................................................................... 5-222
specifications ................................................................ 2-13 VOLTAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT settings ....................................................................... 5-177
actual values ................................................................. 6-23 VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-69
clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-21
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-15 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-177
settings ......................................................................... 5-40 VOLTAGE METERING
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs Modbus registers .......................................................... B-12
custom labeling ............................................................. 4-22 specifications ................................................................. 2-14
defaults ......................................................................... 4-16 values ........................................................................... 6-17
description ............................................................4-15, 4-16 VT FUSE FAILURE
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-24 logic ............................................................................ 5-213
settings ......................................................................... 5-46 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-46
specifications ................................................................ 2-13 settings ....................................................................... 5-213
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS VT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-13, 5-6, 5-69
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-98 VT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-13
Modbus registers .................................................. B-26, B-37 VTFF
settings ......................................................................... 5-49 see VT FUSE FAILURE
specifications ................................................................ 2-13
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-25
settings ......................................................................... 5-47 W
USERST-1 BIT PAIR ...................................................... 5-226 WARNINGS ........................................................................ 1-1
WARRANTY .......................................................................F-8
WATT-HOURS ........................................................ 2-14, 6-19
V WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-34
WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-2
VAR-HOURS ...........................................................2-14, 6-19
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-21
VIRTUAL INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 Z
commands ...................................................................... 7-1 ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE ................................ 3-13
GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System ix

INDEX
x M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

M60 Motor Protection System: Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M60 Motor Protection System: Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title Page

M60 Motor Protection

Manual P/N: 1601-0108-V2 (GEK-113558A)

GE Grid Solutions ISO 9001

MODULE OLD NEW DESCRIPTION

1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System v

3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS.................................................................3-26

4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

vi M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-49

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System vii

5.9.2 RTD INPUTS ..................................................................................................5-236

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

viii M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

8. SECURITY 8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

9. THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1 SATURATION DETECTOR

10. COMMISSIONING 10.1 TESTING

A. FLEXANALOG AND A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System ix

C. IEC 61850 C.1 OVERVIEW

D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

x M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

F. MISCELLANEOUS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System xi

xii M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System 1-1

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

M60 Motor Management Relay RATINGS:

Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

1-2 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System 1-3

1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

Input Elements CPU Module Output Elements

Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

1-4 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

Figure 1–3: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION

1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System 1-5

1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

1-6 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System 1-7

1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE M60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS

b) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

1-8 M60 Motor Protection System GE Multilin

Figure 1–4: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

GE Multilin M60 Motor Protection System 1-9

1 entered for proper Ethernet functionality.

Figure 1–5: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE

a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT

3 3 %) 3 1 1 1%)